1957-1958 RCA Victor TV Manual $112. RADIO SERVICING COURSE. Here is your practical radio course of 22 easy -to -follow lessons.
BEITMAN MANUALS: Radio set diagrams and service data from 1930 to 1954
Most Often - Needed ill
1958
VOLUME TV -14
Television
Servicing Information
VOLUME TV -14
3 PRICE
TI4EORY
razziaeca iiimramm
Compiled by
M. N. BEITMAN
SUPREME PUBLICATIONS
Most - Often - Needed
1958
VOLUME TV -14
Television
Servicing Information
I PRACTICE
MZ
THEORY...,
?
t EXPERIENCE
Compiled by
M. N. BEITMAN
Supreme Publications
Highland Park, Illinois
C) by Supreme Publications, 1958. Material copyrighted, reproduction pr ohibited.
Supreme Publications
1760 Balsam Road, Highland Park, Illinois
(Warehouse and Branch ()nice in Chicago, Illinois)
RADIO DIAGRAM MANUALS SUPREME TELEVISION MANUALS
,f - Of I - Needed
1957
IZA1)10 1 )1 C. RAMS
0 New 1957
VOLUME 17 Price $2.50
Repair quickly all new 1957 sets as
well as older radios. This big volume
contains clearly printed, large sche-
matics, needed alignment data, re-
placement parts lists, voltage values,
and information on stage gain, loca-
tion of trimmers, and dial stringing,
for all important new 1957 sets. In-
cludes material on portables, clock
radios, record changers, FM, and
auto sets. A worthy companion to
sixteen previous volumes used by
over 143,000 shrewd radio service-
men. Large size: 8% x 11 inches.
Manual style binding. Postpaid, only
$250
RADIO DIAGRAMS FOR PREVIOUS YEARS
.Need up and simplify all radio repairs. Service radios faster, better, easier, save money and time, use these SUPREME Most -Often -Needed diagram manuals to get ahead. At the low cost (only S2 for most volumes) you are assured of having for every job needed diagrams and other essential repair data on 4 out of 5 sets you will ever service. Clearly printed circuits, parts lists, alignment data, and helpful service hints are the facts you need. Average volume has 192 pages, large size 8% x 11 inches. Manual style binding.
11 1956 [1] 1955 D 1954
Volume 16 Volume 15 Volume 14
$2.50
$2.00
$2.50
n 1953
Volume 13
52.50
0 1952 [11 1951
Volume 12 Volume 11
$2.50
$2.50
1950 Volume 10
$2.50
0 1942
Volume 5 $2.00
0 1949
Volume 9 $2.50
1941
Volume 4 $2.00
1948 Volume 8 $2.00
D 1940
Volume 3 $2.00
1947
Volume 7 $2.00
0 1946
Volume 6 $2.00
1939
Volume 2 $2.00
[I] 1926-1938
Volume 1 $2.50
INDEX for all Radio and TV Manuals
250
0 RADIO MATHEMATICS
Explains arithmetic and simple algebra in connection with
units, color code, meter scales, Ohm's law, alternating cur-
rents, ohmmeter testing, wattage rating, series and parallel
connoctions, capacity, inductance, mixed circuits, vacuum
rubes, curves, the decibel, etc., and has numerous
examples. Only
250
0 ADDITIONAL 1957 TV Manual, TV -13, $3
This new AuDiTiiiNai. volume of television factory data will give you everything you need to repair and adjust all present-day TV sets. The television series manuals are amazing bargains and defy competition. The 1957 volume contains circuit explanations, 192 pages of alignment facts, test patterns, response curves, waveforms, voltage charts, hints, and dozens of mammoth double -page work -bench diagrams. Large size 8%xl 1 inches. Sturdy covers. Book binding opens flat. Amazing value.
Price postpaid, only.... $3
1957 TV Manual, TV -I2
EARLIER TV MANUALS FOR 1956 TO 1948
Supreme TV manuals cover all needed service material on every popular TV set of every important manufacturer. Here is helpful, practical, factory -prepared data that will really make TV servicing and adjustment
easy for you. Supreme giant TV manuals have complete circuits, alii:,nment facts, test patterns, response curves, service hints, recommended changes, voltage charts, waveforms, and many double -page diagram blueprints.
Here is your TV service material to help you do more expert work quicker; and priced at only $3. The UHF Converters manual at only $1.50 has everything you need on UHF. Radio manuals described at left.
Ei 1956 TV
Volume Tv -11 $3.00
0 W53 TV
Volume TV -7 $3.00
1949 TV
Volume TV -3
$3.00
El 1955 TV
Additional, TV -10 $3.00
0 1952 TV
1955 TV
Early, Vol. TV -9 $3.00
0 1951 TV
El 1954 TV
Volume TV -8
$3.00
0 1950 TV
Volume TV -6
$3.00
Volume TV 5 $3.00
Volume TV -4 $3.00
0 1948 TV
[1] UHF Converters
Volume TV -2
$3.00
Volume 1111F1, $1.50
Ei TELEVISION SERVICING COURSE
Let this new course teach you TV servicing. Amazing bargain, complete only $3, full price for all lessons. Giant in size, mammoth in scope, topics just like a $200.00 correspondence course. Lessons on picture faults, circuits, adjustments, short-cuts, UHF, alignment hints, antenna problems, trouble -shooting, test equipment, picture analysis. Special, only
0 How to Modernize Radios
0 Practical Radio & Electronics Course
Here is your complete home study course of 35 lessons designed to
train any beginner to be an expert in radio and electronics. Covers every
topic of radio, electronics, with lessons on test equipment, FM, TV, radio,
etc. Giant 8% x 11 inches, 3 -in -1 volume, includes all lessons,
instructor's notes, test questions. New edition.
Only...
$395
0 ANSWER BOOK to the above course
250
1957-1958 RCA Victor TV Manual $112
RADIO SERVICING COURSE
Here is your practical radio course of 22 easy -to -follow
lessons. Review fundamentals, learn new servicing tricks.
Just like a $200.00 correspondence course. Everything in
radio servicing. With self -testing questions.
New edition. Price only
$250
Cash in by improving and modernizing all out of date
radio sets and cabinets. Practical job -sheets with sche-
matics and photographs make this work easy.
Size 8% x 11 inches. Your price only
$ 1
II] Simplified Radio Servicing by
---
Simplified
COMPARISON Method
Radio
Servicing
Revolutionary different COMPARISON technique per-
by
mits you to do expert work on all radio sets. Most repairs
Comparison
can be made without test equipment or with only a volt -
Method
ohmmeter. Many simple, point-to-point, cross-reference,
circuit suggestions locate the faults instantly. Plan copyrighted. Covers
every radio set - new and old models. This new servicing technique
presented in handy manual form, size 8% x 11 inches, 92 pages. Over
1,000 practical service hints. 26 large, trouble -shooting blueprints. Charts
for circuit analysis. 114 tests using a Sc resistor. Developed by M. N. Beitman. New edition. Price only
$1 50
2
VOLUME TV -14, MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1958 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
CONTENTS
Admiral Corp.
Chassis 16G1, 16AG1, 16L1, 16AL1 (For list of models see page 5)
Chassis 17J1 (and 4R2) used in Models LHR21F32, LHR21F33, and LHR21F34
Chassis 17L1, 17L1B, 17AL1, with Tuner 8H1A . (For complete list of models see page 14)
Chassis 17K1, 17AK1, 17K1B (models listed page 16)
5 to 7
8 to 11 12 to 15 16 to 18
Emerson Radio and Phonograph Corp.
Chassis 120369C, 120370G, 120377C, used in Models
1420, 1421, 1424, 1425, 1426, and 1428
.
.
.
Chassis 120380H, 120381M, 120388H, 120389M, used
in Models 1282, 1283, 1284, 1285, 1286, 1287 .
Chassis 120382H, -HC, 120383M, -MC, 120386H, -HC,
120387M, -MC, 120390H, -HC, 120391M, -MC,
Models 1276, 1277, 1288, 1289, 1290, 1291. .
19 to 22 23 to 28
29 to 32
General Electric Co.
"Q" Line, Models 14T016, 14T017, 14T018, 14T020 . 33 to 40 "U2" Line, Models 21C 1548, 21C 1549, 21C 1550, 21C 1551,
21C1552, 21C1553, 21C1554, 21C1555, 21C1556, 21T1540, 21T1541, 21T1542, 21T1543, 21T1544, 21C1562, 24C1660, 24C1661, 24C1670, 24C1671 41 to 44 "U" Line, Models 21C 137, 21C 138, 21C 143, 21C159
through 21C 162, 21C 172, 21T050, 21T054, through 21T057, 21T060, 21T061, 24C 182, -C 183 45 to 52
Hotpoint Co.
"Q" Line, Models 14S201, 14S202, 14S203, 145204. "U" Line, (list of models on page 45)
33 to 40 45 to 52
Motorola, Inc.
Chassis TS -423, TTS-423, WTS-423 (models listed) . 53 to 59
Chassis TS -425, -Y, WTS-425, -Y (models listed p. 60) 60 to 66
Chassis TS -426, -Y, TS -428, -Y (models listed p. 67) 67 to 76
Chassis TS -542, -Y (list of models on page 77)
77 to 82
Montgomery Ward & Co.
Models WG-4042A, WG-4052A, WG-5042A, WG-5047A,
and WG-5052A
83 to 86
(Continued on page 4)
3
VOLUME TV -14, MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1958 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
Table of Contents, Continued
Packard -Bell Co.
Chassis 88S3, Models 21SC6, 21SC7, 21SC8, 21SK3, 21ST3, 21VT2, 24SC2, and 24VT1
Chassis 98D3, Models 21DC5, 21DC6, 21DC7, 24DC4
87 to 90 91 to 94
Philco Corp.
Chassis 8E11, 8E11U, and 8E13
95 to 100
Chassis 8L41, -U, 8L42, -U, 8L43, -U, 8P51, -A, -U 101 to 104
(For a cross reference of models see page 101)
Chassis 8L71, -U, 8L72, -U, 8L73, -U
105 to 110
(Complete list of models given on page 105)
Chassis 8H25, 8H25U (list of models on page 111) 111 to 116
R. C. A. Victor
Models using Chassis KCS-107A through KCS-107D,
complete list of models on page 117
117 to 124
Models using Chassis KCS-108C through KCS-108F,
complete list of models given on page 125 . . . 125 to 130
Models using Chassis KCS-109A through KCS-109D,
for complete list of models see page 131 . . . 131 to 139 Models using Chassis KCS-111A through KCS-111F,
and KCS-111H; for list of models see page 140 140 to 142
Models using Chassis KCS- 113A, B, E, F, H, K, P, R;
for complete list of models see page 143 . . 143 to 152
Models 21D8281(U), 21D8282(U), 21D8305(U),
21D8306(U), 21D8307(U), 21D8628(U),
using Chassis KCS-116A through KCS-116D 153 to 160
Westinghouse Electric Corp.
Chassis V-2371, V-2381 (list of models onpage 161) 161 to 170 Chassis V-2372, V-2382 (list of models on page 171) 171 to 174 Chassis V-2373, V-2383 (list of models on page 175) 175 to 180
Zenith Radio Corp. Chassis 15A25, 17A20, -Q, 17A21Q, 19A20, 19A20Q 181 to 190 (Complete cross reference of models on page 181)
INDEX (by make and model or chassis number) . . . 191 and 192
This manual is made up of factory prepared service material. Editorial changes and
selections were made to conform with the objectives of this manual. Our sincere thanks and appreciation is extended to every manufacturer whose products are covered by the material in this manual and who aided us in the preparation of this book.
7/7 71. e
Chief Editor of the Engineering Staff, Supreme Publications.
4
VOLUME TV -14, MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1958 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
TAELdEmVISirIOalN
CHASSIS 16G1, 16AG1, 16L1, and 16AL1
(Models listed below; schematic for 16AG1, 16AL1 is on pages 6-7, schematic for 16G1, 16L1, is essentially the same without UHF.)
Chassis 16G1, used in Models T21E1, T21E2, T21E3, Chassis 16AG1, used in Models TA21E1, TA21E2, TA21E3, Chassis 16L1, used in Models C21E2, C21E3, C21E6, C21E7, Chassis 16AL1, used in Models CA21E2, CA21E3, CA21E6, CA21E7.
VHF ANTENNA
DEFLECTION YOKE YOKE RETAINING SPRING
To cc red picture tilt, loosen screw o yoke retaining spring. Rotate yob until picture is straight. Tightee screw.
SUPER RANGE FINDER
VERTICAL LINEARITY HEIGHT
To correct improper picture heig2rt or sertical linearity, alternate!' adjust HEIGHT and VERT. LIN.
Rear View of Chassis
rPICTURE CENTERING TABS Move tabs closer together or farther apart to center picture.
REMOVABLE COVER
IF BOARD A5775-1 MAIN BOARD A5780-1
FUSIBLE RESISTOR
BRIGHTNESS
HORIZONTAL LOCK HORIZONTAL DRIVE
TO JCT
TO PINS
OF L502a TO PIN 4 OF
C5048
OF
0304
8404
R428
TO JCT R422 8
04148
TO PINS C306 0402
TO JCT
OF CROI N
R329
TO PINT
OF V305 TO
0421
AC INTERLOCK
TO JCT TO CENTER
OF
TERM.
L502 & OF 8401
05040
RECTIFIERS
TO JCT OF :211:7,a
I L302 'lc
V321
TO u3o1 TO F...rs23.
I Ms* 1\,. ' stii-Aftm-0 ,yam.
18T4011101
TO JCT OF
C435 N 0468
C424
raZ. TO END
OTEFMAR__4_, 57 -".
.Z.---, TO JCT
c426/ -1.- Walk
R459
ler
OR483
I CRIDI
TO INN 7 ...,,,___,* OF 4406
.._.11,7.3L -
TOM...,
Ir`sae;
4 .
.'4el
-4:i V
(1:-"""R45I
---.EZT's OF
- OF 8403 V . VP:.°N 5' 'C40.744
- A
1-
TM -..--0-.4r1O408 "._ S606
OF C419
-84-,,,4.....
Op,
#121
TO 0409
TO CErizRTLR OF R420
\ * 16 41)1i
A . ,..:.4001c
cti i
S.M;rr 0 .3:
R449
.....-* . 04-4ri4c44e...lilf_.
1>'...
V40T
o2DB3
Wwfa
wit:Or' N0 5 csv
.3 8
TO L306
1309
TO JCT Of
csoie
el
40R402
/"!
TO END
TERM.
I
32TOOF R319 TO C320 TO 0119
Of 7:01
TOOFvivo2l 02.-.
."C_Tt:fh
V3Q41110.,,,a2.
007 C 3 2 t
0a5CT Of 032 a
i152T
1L111.2:2?'
:*1
socalS4
Ak6AVRI3A
COOT
S'itt r
RIM *I
Zit I
b4c tri.T:
" tiroic293i;
0
LMB
/641). Eso4 c201 ~;4,4
V.
0J'7 MO 382
nal\%,,<IIF
111
La,
Cs.f74.
osis
Ai cv
YR3o(1,0 "S
x312 e IP
Tests
R203
TO CENTER TO T201
TO END TO JCT OF TO END TO PIN 4
TERMOF R208
CLUE T201 TERM. C IS N LEAD RED OF R208 C2168
TERM. OF 8210
OF
8303
View of PRINTED WIRING SIDE of Main Board A5780-1. Gray area represents printed
wiring; black symbols and lines represent components and connections on opposite side.
View of PRINTED WIRING SIDE of IF Board A5775-1. Gray area represerts printed wiring; black symbols and lines represent components and connections on opposite side.
TO PIN 5 201
5
VOLUME TV -14, MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1958 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
Admiral Schematic for 16AG1C and 16AL1C Television Chassis Stamped Run 24
II
176AWBA
SOUND 17 AMP.
v 5 041
C 101
VHF TUNERS 94E144 -9,-20,-22,0R-21
1000
-LP
17COO WIEN
9 4106
11111 SET 01 Ounit 2
/1"11WI11ICA
.11110114.11S10 20111
000142
CCUECI 10 if (VW R 401101 1141/0/65
0104
63011-I
-1712 1
RIOT
13
1.20
311
1132
1107 1131 15
START
PRINTED WIRING BOARI
L302
42.3 NC
1 oco
_J
120
ror
1.0
-4i, 212
2-1 NEC j
01g
603'1'05
114
2103
MA
C101
38 "3 kg:
0
MI 0 1
3.0
CPS
Cl!,
2.2
0302
000
1100 11
3.90
ACC
L14,
MI COMPLEMENT
01401 --Dual 0.1.111en
Ni L ANTENNA
UHF TUNER 94D 112-5
-1- --.14Vir-t-
0 '
1
-1
151 off LINE
1- - - - 2NO UHF LINE
-
1802
01101 IMF 1011E1
0105
11091.
I
444----- -0.,--
21011
C10911
T,+--
1101-4110
11102-SCCS
not -31/Ta
V102 --12C111
V301-31116 V302-3116 1303-3136 01301-11140, 11117
or 1N295
V301--6111111 11305-210EPIA
Oled 9315.4
1401-3111/1 V402-7117 11101-1 OHS
V104-107
11401-1711000 11114-1111141TA V417 -1111T
000 00 00 3402
V401
0305
1.11r1
C101 100
T
TO PIN 1 OF 0305 TO PIN 5 Of V101
2402 1000
I COO
2AF4A
UHF V8O01SC 1102
4
L004
r
111-FiTA1' E111110
004
4003 1.24
L605 r
CABINET 010310 -
- 200551$ CROONS
/477
TUBE LOCATIONS
1807 - - -_11 -I-
/- - vH F TUNER - , i- UHF TUNER - 1
n CUINICA
cw,
cow!
II
I
I
0 0 0 0 T - 0 0 2124 0102
1000
v101
022 COO
1000
VI301
2c1o0o2
> 3111 03C. LINES
,
21071
l' 1
Ok,
J
1501
;10011 L
V301
V302
00 00 321
I' 20
"
lir
L404
_J L
1 310
00 00 0303
v201
0321
0323
ISM
*44 AILOr
57C:
0100 00 00 00 00 00 V406
0505
0405
0404 0403
0304 ....0202
N10E0141 MRS
124 0510 001 IS
5501
CAISSIS 111001401/1
4501 10502
53401 0209
ALI C 2501
111114
ANY R501 S.4 (35311E
-§2503
50 W
1304
co 502 014
0450,
.04740
0401 ICU
0,20
1110E 7110E1
454 7001.
0401 104
1402
.2111
JOU IF
1104
344
4502
L502
o-11711,--4
#1507
40012.
410
gC502 CS05 0140 01 NE
CA11121 610610
2300
9401100 II
go300
25041 ±.1100 IF
3000
-V'
4444 1444
MIS
FUSIBLE RESISTOR
NOISE CATE, S SEP
CAYED ACC 450
A plug-in type fusible resistor (Part No. 61A28-3) is used as a B+ and initial surge fuse.
For schematic notes and conditions for observing waveforms and measuring voltages see pages 10
and 11.
IN!
ONE 2.201
1/1 TAU
$24 .
V4020
1441
111 5.1
6
L20173
7 , VOLUME TV -14, MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1958 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
3DT6
SOUND Of1 V201
PRINTED WIRING BOARD A5780 -I
0210
12CU5
NM OUTPUT V202
1.441/01 NIPS CONIECI WAIFS &VW
vow aim .41/1..
1201
IL
/420t
N. 2 0 2
O
L.0O201 (1110
IMF
5
10201
.01117
1151
Cilt
L20113
or
7 -1.14
ur
300
"II 11213 myr
ISO
_120/
1
T"
C2V:-1.1201 t L203
.011/
1514
6215
oca
5T1
11;5-
3301
I
1
$1,20811. cm 351/1 !T.OIT NI
/11/640/C 116/010. 411016411C CHIS5IS.10/11 C0111.111/014110 401 4010111 camel' Pots HOT /Off NH
1011 4110101100114111.1114 ION Off 60411015 IV/CAW CLOCKl/Sf 101411011110 541114C
40 VF 200
0,2,1 A
V
A5775 -I -
113Z6 73:0
AS T301 43.3 IC
ail
3816
212 IF v302
4/
1701,
104
514
3086
310 IF
1303
1307 410
1301 221 1309 2101
C309
071
0311
14;103 "
120
1310
0 313
soo,
0201
121(74,
1314 150
0112
19 04,
_cE )
ONE
1010
Rat
01EC-0213 221
1.004/
L
NI
L304
15510 IN 01C
II
AT VIDEO 0E1
1303
Ca 301
VOLVO 1201
-VI 100
L306
4311 3.94
/.305
1504
(D-1
C201 T. III I)
II
47
41
0315 4.7
Yz 608A
530 310E0 AMP
Or
Nr
1015 220
't 4121 4.2
2371 6.1
11315 ITO
1110,1111 019195. emdcf
141111 5401 91011914110 1/510,
3.53
11041
r
4M
COV1AST 11319/
0311
.4102401
511 2004
a
1307
R323 101
NOY
10V 111111111111k II
C32I .20119
21 CEP 01 "°Y7
/504
R32513111/ 410 I
IRIGN NESS
itg
3 BU8 NE CITE, AC SEP
WED 16C 1401
lyr
NI
142
11415 0701
T. SI 6405
-0404
0111
1416 4.7 NEC
1414 5111
1410 tit
soy
SRO
-I(
All If
0%
C II
SIti %If
1453 4.1 NEC
Illa.
93B5-4
40112. SYNC DISCR
CRICH
11150
-,4 4-.. -.I..5
1001
5%
11451
1001
_s%
4452
4701 0421
-'
109F1
.0047 ir .022 NE
409 ,
VEIT
*TAUT 7171 30V
PEAT 032
MT.
V40231
lor
12D85
1ERT OUTPUT
V403
HOY
1100 1-11 6 IV
VENT
11422201
2
7401
CREEK
102
r
VERTICAL DEF. YOKE
. 7a y 5432
773
-
I = 3.1 a COO OW- 6
.0,
1E11
-1-
6401
.0022
1411 C407I
$401
15 ANTI
154
COO IF
4.10%
VIII NOLO
{14410408
1.54 1.0041111
1419 2001
1420
/\/\ Voliz. -F 6067 110002O1S0 MY 6 /Ur 0424 3/0
1456 1101 5%
0411
-HI
.1NF
11425 2.2NEC
1423
4701
0
HEIGHT 1424
1.51E1
VEIT.
L11E811111 1421
'4"
/5544121
0
I-
001"
230
04141
0413
- 102401
50 11F KO
-nNFr $R429
44111S 110.11 /4
1/
CHASSIS 01111917/1
IfTIES
8421
1:31,1r
220,11
551
z.
04
I
001 41 I I KY
--t- 12DQ6A
Hoy 40112. OUTPUT
V7117-1_4_N_M_. 1.105
2421 1-0
11160 -f1r
A S1/6 '11 a 11 /SEIElf #414g
100
CAICIAINCHISSI $ 4459
6425
T 610
14$1
11110015141/7 111110"1 '
$1 1FG
9r
IN It
0
0427
.0411/ 1441 21
34
4. 04130
4011/.
INI1E-111.115-1
104i6 L
.04711F
YELLOW
1131, 020
1433 220
11111TE-1136-
0417 C)
.000 113 44% 4434
3011
0457:
11111 120I
7403
183cT
X.Y. RECTIFIER
V407
COINCROHS 7 Y401 SOCtf 04/1040 014110
NOOMMS.
11445
2a
CIVIN01 10 POW I.1.01C INCHE111
400110ES AS1 1001/S.
0429
.03311 ,44, 0130
I NI 8442
19AU4cra
DAMPER
406
--4463
1501
470
-F-111 6431
S
FP
.1:01
5 14
04371
IMr -F-, ,40213
CM
0
.
HORIZONTAL DEE YOKE
150
2
NV
:
0433
JVre
43 ,
.
I
8143E:
15 NI 0111
150
II
MI1114111-111101 1 7
-t35008 4011/.
RUN CHANGES
0 Start of production.
0 To14.i0m10praodve,
b6C swan,
1.61(9
C428
was
changed
Nom
300mnd
711 reduce trZgot.Z. ...Nato; R503 was changed
® To prolent possrble breakdown of 0431 due to arc over
4305, 02470 was relocated from between lurch*, 41
R462 and R463 an, locus COM010,1 NO* of connection A.
OPRoNfe
0 To improve operohon II horizontal osalliolor, R456 was changed Iran /20K ro I/OK, 5%.
0 To preven, AGO armload due to tube ear/oboe, R329 was changocl from 7.5 lo /0 megohms.
0 To prevent pospoN frequency dr.11 ,rdh rendlog 5.50 0410rhart, 1207 was changed Iran 220 K to /00 K. R47/ was 54040 to prevent poss.44 breakdown of C43/ 17 due to arc over m 5503.
(310 center usotdo range of coNfrost amtrol, 02320 trot
clanged Noon 470 to 220 14.15.
® 0 No /flanges made.
@To prevent posuble damage to 1105 duo la arc-ovet in 4406, Motes a' V405 and V406 relocated s, heater circuit.
©Start of ptoduchan chasN4 suffix leder *C. New horizontal oulpu, oral, used
00501 changed from .00.5m1 to OW 1505 oddod in series with 1502 for wreath> breakdown satoly factor.
7
VOLUME TV -14, MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1958 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
TELEVISION
- TV - 17J1
HI-FI AMPLIFIER 4R2
CHASSIS STAMPED RUN 14 THROUGH RUN 20
Chassis 17J1, used in Models LHR21F32, LHR21F33, LHR21F34 (Service material on pages 8 and 9, schematic on pages 10-11)
CHECK SUPER RANGE FINDER
The Super Range Finder control is used to improve TV reception in fringe areas and in areas where there is inter-
ference. This control should be set fully counterclockwise (to the left), if satisfactory pictures can be obtained by using the main operating controls.
Where the TV signal strength is weak, the picture can often be improved by turning the Range Finder part way to
the right. White flashes across the picture, or "snow" in the pic-
ture, can sometimes be minimized by careful adjustment of
the Range Finder. CAUTION: If the Range Finder is turned too far to the right for a normal signal, the picture may have excessive contrast or may disappear completely.
If the signal strength changes, it may be desirable to change the setting of the Range Finder, however, it is gen-
erally possible to set it at a compromise position which gives
reasonable reception for different signal strengths.
Important: Keep the Super Range Finder setting as far to the left as possible consistent with satisfactory pictures.
ADJUSTING REMOTE CHANNEL TUNING MECHANISM TO STOP ONLY ON OPERATING CHANNELS
To adjust Son -R controlled Power Tuning mechanism to stop only on TV channels operating in the area and skip non -operating channels, proceed as follows:
1. Turn receiver off and remove cabinet back.
2. Turn Channel Selector knob to a non -operating channel.
3. Locate recessed hole above tuning motor mounting plate. Turn adjustment screw (visible through hole) fully to the left (counterclockwise) until tight. PerfOrm steps 2 and 3 for each non -operating channel.
4. Turn Channel Selector knob to an operating channel. Turn adjustment screw fully to the right (clockwise) until tight. Perform this step for each operating channel.
5. Install cabinet back. Turn receiver on; set Remote Manual switch at rear of set to Remote position.
6. Check channel tuning with "Son -R" remote tuner. Each time tuner push button is pressed for channel selection, the channel tuner should advance and stop on an operating channel only.
REMOTE MANUAL SWITCH
SI
8GI REMOTE AMPLIFIER
DEFLECTION YOKE YOKE RETAINING SPRING
To correct picture tilt, loosen screw on yoke retaining spring. Rotate yoke until picture is straight. Tighten screw
SUPER RANGE FINDER
See information under "(heck Super Range Finder".
VHF ANTENNA
VERTICAL LINEARITY HEIGHT
To correct improper picture height or vertical linearity, alternately adjust HEIGHT and VERT. LIN.
IF BOARD
A5775-2
rPICTURE CENTERING TABS Move tabs closer together or farther apart to center picture.
SPEAKER SOCKET 4R2 HI-FI AMP.
MAIN BOARD
A5780-3
HORIZONTAL LOCK HORIZONTAL DRIVE See information under "Horizontal Lock
and Horizontal Drive Adjustment".
1/2 AMP TYPE N SLOW BLOW FUSE
4R2
LAC INPUT PLUG
TREBLE PLUG AUDIO INPUT PLUG
Rear View of Chassis Showing Adjustments.
8
VOLUME TV -14, MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1958 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
ADMIRAL Chassis 17J1 Service Information, Continued
HORIZONTAL LOCK AND DRIVE ADJUSTMENT
A receiver which requires Horizontal Lock or Horizontal Drive adjustment can be corrected only by following in exact detail the procedure given here.
1. Allow receiver to warm up for a few minutes. Tune in a station, set the Brightness and Contrast controls for normal picture. Important: Before proceeding, be sure that the Super Range Finder control (AGC) is adjusted according to instructions given in this manual.
2. Turn Horizontal Drive control fully clockwise. At this point, picture compression and/or foldover will acpear near the center of .the picture.
3. Very slowly turn the Horizontal Drive adjustment counterclockwise, just to the point at which picture foldover and/or compression disappears. Note that maximum width and brightness is also produced at this setting. Caution: Turning the Horizontal Drive control too far counterclockwise will shorten life of the horizontal out-
put tube.
..;T38 6 3,'Ac. 6.3V9L
02.4?28 034'2.13
CHASSIS REMOVAL
The chassis, picture tube and front escutcheon are removable as a unit. Remove chassis as follows:
1. At the rear of the cabinet, disconnect leads from the
antenna terminals and remove cabinet back. Unplug the following cables for the 4R2 amplifier: (1) treble control plug, (2) AF input plug and, (3) AC input plug. Remove the screws which mount rear of chassis support channels to sides and bottom of cabinet.
2. Remove chassis, picture tube and front escutcheon as a unit through the front of the cabinet.
3. To reinstall chassis, insert chassis through front of cab-
inet.
1
I
I
3
TUBE MOUNTING STRAP-,
HOLE LOCATING PIN
SUPPORT WIRE
RETAINING SCREW 82A8-15
TUBE SUPPORT^..,,
WIRE 19E3103 - 4
4'
025.
)1 63031F 0244
0244
01.
'. 0 e---)1 ----4C.
kit°Ov0i41.01 1".:"' 0 v2.400 0-4,4--..
OM 0
ak6A05,,
w 0 1°1
i
,,,I;W_°, 0 i , Om -V:0
0 0 Ak 6 A AA Rio 0 12 A X7
1r 0 1"
,.....-146.
0
t-44-1
142.49
11.--4/0.1-48
11252
CHANNEL MOUNTING BOSSES
10-24 X 1/2 SCREW *IA206-29-71
RUBBER TIPS R12E179-25
Rear View of Escutcheon with Picture Tube Mounted, Chassis Removed.
-9J
To To 8 2T5v
TO
TO
To
O
REO LEAD AT 418 8 BRONX LE c2 98 BLUE LEAD
OF T241 or 3.243 oF T24.
OF 1.2.0
\View of PRINTED WIRING SIDE OF 4R2 Hi-Fi
Board A5975. Gray area represents printed
wiring; black symbols and lines represent
components and
'one on opposite side.
To 3068 TRO4J3c:i :O4F--.4-4060 ON hum 804610
L 302
_dui 1:niit
TO JCT
TO JCT
TO 400
TO R401
OF
TO
04355 TO
. 8.250V
11968
R499
11.1560124 1401
0306
OF
TO 04225 TO
TO
R420 TAO! 04149 6 3VAC
GREEN LEAD
OF
040 8
0401
TO JCT
SUPER
TO 04296 TO RANGE FINDER
0420 04148 82500 CONTROL
8403
R44009
Hos
To 4.3v AC
I (--
429
L . 0 I f:42,
R455
TO 0452 60012 DRIVE
CONTROL.4a,
0min
R41
0 HVO4R04IZ. 0
TO JCT. COOS RIF6F °459"-'
A 6C09GG. 7 0
0 0 jJ 9453
II
C0401
I
0 60D0B5
;0°66 .4.-41
*-~12P95-2-98
i=0305
9elc.
1 0421 18-34,34.4-44.4 R451
TO 8419 CONTROL '
G7
e6
1408
0406
0420
R410
9329
0 0 04-1*"4."."---.
00 V401 0 "" ar66,
i
R4.5
R412
49--ovor--4,
110
°Het: °Cf: '',,a."
TOL306 re,"'
L308
0 0 tx
C3113
....H.-fi 0402
C401, ... ...wo-R4i4
1114--41
Ii2 0 --j TO R319A
118-4-4-4. CONTRAST
CONTROL
9.4,464...... WW1
8202 l'illv-pre .____*... TO 0050 08.315800
"I
18-M i
.
ft
.G209
.--irt0 Oili
W. V304 I 9
0 IV` 0 48 sle'D'',,.144
-4. TO 6 3VAC TO C321
11 E
1), 4203
3,3
9,0 c
0 Ya5g 0 %t can
4-I1 0GCSE_
To coe
TO 14424
i 000ft R42,1 0 vV40. 2
"21
am. ....
06CG7 0 94%
CM 19449
0220
CONTROL
...,N,...OSte-A 4G44V041i_.
21
114 47
G16C202
i
) tJ
L201( 1:/4T /C4 7304
C20-1,
c--yfsos
81
1,203
igfi
net
LA
I
-,68A,4
L30.
6-111:44154"--o
R219
View of PRINTED WIRING SIDE of IF Board
TO 6 908
TO 0205
1.14(...19203
A5775-2. Gray area represents printed wir-
View of PRINTED WIRING SIDE of Main Board A5780-3. Gray area represents printed wiring; black symbols and lines represent components and connections on opposite side.
ing; block symbols and lines represent com-
ponents and
ions on opposite side.
9
VOLUME TV -14, MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1958 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
Admiral Corporation r Schematic for 17J1 Television, 4R2 Hi-Fi Amplifier Chassis Stamped Run 14 Through Run 20
OSCILLATOR CIRCUIT USED IN 94DI51-4 TUNER
6AW8A WOO If
CRig
My OON
/--F1 V110 1009
PRINTED
II
6DT(
SOWS II
43048
0348
0
0005
TIM
PICTURE TUBE HANDLING PRECAUTION
L9020
WARNING: The newly developed picture tube
used in these sets must be handled with much greater
care because of its short, thin neck and wafer type base. ALWAYS lift picture tube by grasping firmly around face plate; NEVER LIFT TUBE BY ITS
1/26C68
VHF OSC
v9028
1202
Ill
V
0201
II 001F
020181
C704 I
it- I
IP
I
Si I
I
10"
10111f
I
)I- 1%, 11203
0041110
L201A1 4.
NECK. Use care when inserting socket to prevent
C915
bending pins. WHEN TUBE IS REMOVED, AL-
30
WAYS PLACE IT FACE DOWN.
0100
L1 /_-54_1'_JI
L
F ISM
YA5On
1D14]
17 VOLTS 60 CYCLES IC ONLY
VHF TUNER 94DI51-12
WIRING BOARD
TUBE LOCATIONS
RECTIFIER ICI REMOTE CII1101 re
OR. CHASSIS -
e1INI1E1
e210 Ile I TAIPLEI
e1ST AR
w 0150.
MY RECI
I-
L9021
L9028
L902C
L
'-41"
5
4
0901
07,
HIN
I/2 6C68
VIII 051. V9028
M901 m301
GO 1st
L302
19,110
1301
01,"
u.11
102
±C301
MOM
TUBE Y305
NOISE GTE SYNC SEP CITED A0
VEIT OUTPUT NOM/.
ECTIFIER
RECTIFIER 4R2 HI FI LIP CHASSIS
30001 TNT
R0901
TL903V 190I ITT
0490 DEE!
liSNIAR CTI V.
SOUND SOUND OUTPUT OUTPUT
TREBLE CONTROL INPUT SOCKET
AFANPI
PHASE
INVERTER
-r
AF WAIT
SOCKET
VIII AATEMIA
8900
1
L904
C9
703
1000
900 (-;--) I :0
IICOT
° CD
MOO 900
0508
PIN vity OF PLUG
Cri
WOO
J
4501 vmr
1200.21
11503 2200
111/580
TUBE COMPLEMENT
M505
INCIEMM PLATE
V1 -6AU6 V2 -6AU8 V3 -6BN6 V4 -6AL5 V5 -6CM7 V6 -6BJ7 V7 -6CM7 V8 -6X4 V201-6DT6
ASSENSLY
OWE COATS
TO WWI.
\e.
5502
CHANNEL SELECTOR SNITCH
9506
:EAR 801 AND IVOR 155011811
V240-12AX7
V241-6AQ5 V242-6/45 V243-5T3GT V301-6BZ6
III DOLT AC
5503
NOTOR
MOTOR 015011101
511108
MINS 00100211 00M. NOSM 1T UMW MIN
V302 -613Z6
V303-6CB6 V304-6AW8A
64502 1.15 0E1
OF SOCKET
5501 MINIM 01
r- -AI/1-
52420
502
Te --
150
r
CREEN
I SE VIC
5V3
RR !VIER
4501
IRED
139
2501
.0001
H 2400 (TO III 4C20100
I 4-
113n
410
8501 2101
I
1
L _ _J III.
V305-210EP4A V401-6BU8 V402-6CG7 V403-6DB5 V404-6CG7
V405-6CD6GA V406-6AU4GTA V407-1B3GT V501 -5V3 V901-6BN4 V902-6CG8
CR301-1N87 (crystal diode),
CR401-93B5.4
Dual Selenium Diode
NOW NM 0100/I0 II 001041N 517
r81001110011118 45,0IPiXCI0
OWltNMWOM10M0AW
COINS INCITES IONISE 1011I0
I0 ra/118 MEW.
1 v.o.,
L
0920
921
012
r
901
00
V902
0 12-
10550
107
7108
T V020 01
L 3,0
ItC321
I
P.4 503 ./2 AMP
rIII
-.e7,M-0N
00 I
--J
00v 305
806
0 0
0405
00
0 88504 TuNINC otN. N.14
1505 1000
AAA ,
4 8502 30?0V0
1
-i36/0g41
0302 )009
L303
0301 1125500
T"%3-12 S
9301
c)
1005
se
"Vita-. MU
1402
AMP
VIC
2.11: -CSI
11007101 V4
1109
1441
CONDITIONS FOR OBSERVING WAVEFORMS
Warning: Pulsed high voltages are present at the caps of V405 and V407, and at pin 3 of V406. Do not attempt to observe waveforms at these points unless suitable test equipment is used. Set all controls for normal picture. Set Super Range Finder
control fully counterclockwise. After the receiver is set for a normal picture, turn the Contrast control fully clockwise. Oscilloscope sweep is set at 30 cycles for vertical waveforms and at 7,875 cycles for horizontal waveforms, to permit 2 complete cycles to be observed. Peak -to -Peak voltages will vary from those shown on the schematic
depending on the input signal strength, test equipment employed and chassis parts tolerance. Waveforms were taken with a comparatively strong transmitted signal input to the television chassis.
SCHEMATIC NOTES Numbers and letters inside hexagons indicate alignment points. Fixed resistor values shown in ohms ± 10% tolerance, 1/2 watt; capacitor values shown in micromicrofarads ± 20% unless otherwise
specified.
NOTE: K = x 1000, MEG = x 1,000,000, MF = microfarad.
10
VOLUME TV -14, MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1958 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
WIRING BOARD A5780-3..
671/
CVO
00
Ct011
300
01 111
cyoloyel
IC
,Lyos
L_1
;,. 0201
mu: T042114
M202
REINTE 401.24E
01251 Vol
-O4_
11241 730110511
'____PRINTED WIRING BOARD A5975
12AXT
Ih12AX1
MI 1ST SHOO SW
4240.
73050 Ill 42408
220I1
1.41
04711111 1251
Iv -73010
32406
711017 VIII
12.55 C0411104
32401
1241 1003
C241 101314
:1:2
0242 .0041 II
M2424
PIO 01E0
MIK
CONROL
542428 LOC 1110
12404 11111
_4,2..4.3.,/7
.7240
:IN.
WILE 30011104
5Y3cT
1 CT.
4243
4-4
F Ma
31a
2458
L
1.5"
100 111
1256 10K64.
1211 04/
4. pm,
C2403 Ka6
"
! 62411 CNN°.
SOWN. 5018.6 3002 - 1502 -
41253
Cot
C250 30 NI 251
VA!. 210 00
PRINTED WIRING BOARD A5780-3
10110114.516
4.5 6 107
7_062
L307
6500.5
OMIT 1 gam
4241
""1 T241 12244.
103
1. 6A05 tin
SOON
0,1117; 1 istut
000 101
5 245
1007E1
246
21241 801116E
A5775-2
6 016 IN II
v302
6C06
UP IF
6A1V8A
310 t0 111
lJI 43040.
21 C(141
142413 71111110
T30 41.513 or'
" 1300 1
MI
RA,
10
L304
AT
NON
r- 1303
0(1.
42.01C
VP
6311
K
.14610
14103
1114 150
13a
tiler
tat
nit
....."..14111 1101
11111855
Iar
-4- r
Yt BCCT
5!.311026C IOr
.122111
/1421 Visit 1411/
11117 NOLO
Snlfgt.,
11411 2001
1420
Oil
25- 1
6005
02111
Cet
ttI
all LIS/ 1-41
2412
,./n, 0407
ICI
1425 4/01
0
.110
I3E17 1111111 1424
!In1I4I21
I.511R
gpl. r_t_
LINIIITT
Na
5044.
20,10 T401
14021 KEIT= OET YOKE
Ia , 1432
la -
MAO
A143P1 ,
22o
/433 444.4444.41
025
81011-11123-4
1411
IBUT 11 KOMI
$407
C420
-111
001 IN 10%
\
/ \/ \ '4- kJ. 9505-4
VW. $810 ONO.
- C8401
-1.- 6CGT
110010. 053
..."
0404 _..,
1450
,
JJI
EIJI
1454
.7
WY
1:14
516
5.11
1.l,
C4I1
"HI
.0817
1431
rot 3% .1.50
3432
4103 4421
10041.
1401 40a
30112.
LOCI
6421 3100
1465
11456 401 5%
"n .0537 f
1453 fS
4.7 INC
der
6
5M5v .
/42, (-0
-CO
Ts"
RUN CHANGES as,., or Rrodoction ot
ig), Bleeder, 27507(27014 ohms /WI orkted roposer Po*
0711 evenee sound defector, R201 enoneed to /00R. (2)1:4,4C,Ctrisngr.o,/,g.,,,,zohnts to reduce focus
0 No changes mode on VHF cnossa.
175)4506 (See
15K I5W Ports List
deleted.
for rsot.
Near tronsformer added.
447,020.,w14,lOt ) odded
lo
reduce
focus
vollo9e
® H0 chows mode on WIT dross,'
V--tL /1 M X082. W6CDT6GIA'
3I0,07I(N37 7C0 P0~10V7 II
MAINS KS, !OM
1141
1 C435 1;20
OWE
3427
04.814
)1--
"1
rr 2.103111 I
.00117 1430
6AU4GTA
°,1g:
f442 2203
Ng 1411
311311 Toar
5Kr
Mr
-% 14020 Mg OEM
T0112
25 0 10111.
ValTELLM 1 r
0001 30117.
Y( 540041 100 141* *WNW
CONDITIONS FOR MEASURING VOLTAGES
Warning: Pulsed high voltages are present at the caps of V405
and V407, and at pin 3 of V406. at these points without suitable
Do test
not attempt to measure voltage equipment. A VTVM with a
high voltage probe should be used when measuring picture tube
2nd anode voltage. Set the Channel
Selector
on
an
unused
channel.
Contrast
control
fully clockwise. All other controls fully counterclockwise. Do not
disturb Horiz. Lock and Horiz. Drive adjustments.
Antenna disconnected and terminals shorted together.
Line voltage: 117 volts AC. DC voltages measured with a VTVM
between
tube
socket terminals
and chassis, unless otherwise indicated.
11
VOLUME TV -14, MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1958 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
TELEVISION
CHASSIS 17L1, 17L1B, 17AL1, with Tuner 8H1A See page 14 for list of models using these chassis. Service material is on pages 12 through 15.
DEFLECTION YOKE YOKE RETAINING SPRING
To correct picture tit, loosen screw on yoke retaining spring. Rotate yoke until picture is straight. Tighten Strew.
VHF ANTENNA SUPER RANGE FINDER
VERTICAL LINEARITY HEIGHT
To correct improper picture height or vertical linearity, alternately adjust HEIGHT and VERT. Lk
SPEAKER SOCKET
PHONO AC SOCKET
452 A HI -Fl AMP.
IF BOARD A5775-2
PICTURE CENTERING TABS Move tabs closer together or hider] apartto center picture.
,C INPUT SOCKET
MAIN BOARD A5780-3
/
HORIZONTAL LOCK HORIZONTAL DRIVE
Rear View of Chassis Showing Adjustments.
I/2 AMP. TYPE N SLOW BLOW FUSE
AUDIO INPUT
TV
AUDIO INPUT FM -AM TUNER
TO
6+2500
TO JCT
OF
c435 a
04613
TO
0306
TO JCT.
TO 04O2F29 TO
TO
0428 1401 C414063V AC
GREEN LEAD
TO JCT. CF
Geo' a 0401
TO C428
TO JCT.
04299
C41413
TO 0401
SUPER TO RANGE FINDER 2500 CONTROL
-,-
".........4.
.424
,jill"0"4"" Ie TO 0457
I°0425
0455
'
NORIZ DRIVE
Mr V404
CTOOJCNT TRC4O2L-j_.4A0e1cc172.d4ik0
Is R 4°6Fo e .."-"
'1'
diour
R459
W' 11r R453
51
1. O8455
13j1fAC
1
011E
U
0 0
1-0412
CAB
) R403
11--AAN,-
0410
R409
0324
-ww- 0415
0412
di
0 0V44r00.614110-41114.,.-1(41.6r's it53
T01_306
06 8 0 a
ROC R4113
L308
7 4 4RIO2
""--/1630
"one0-11404
0320
111---4.
CONTTORP3A19SAT
CONTROL
0327
r
. R202 119- 110-Vc-40 ......_.,. TO CT05E0+135900
1
TO 6.3VAC
04.W.... 1
.--160 0" 411-7...7-..:-c TO 0321
:::7A0407
TO 0419
VERT° .,_,Ier_Atic.eor
\/. 1
0406
0420
'f " CONTROL . 1.,
^r.
00 iik rr
111
TO 0409
0 yr War Vs
Cone
TO R424
HEIGHT -,-
CONTROL
0415 1/-.t_C44113
R445
7:7411.4-,11
0219 TO R243 VOLUME CONTROL
ova
1203 ti77
v0V304 lir R322
0 V IF &
L307
10205
41,
020T
L._ r_J e C205 .../(**
1)//(15 CaR'33' 0
L__
0204. 0101
*,45 14:1V.201 \ \ i , (.. ) It
°C-2tO
315
"D 01 '06 T60 / ,IF '6"'.".
,
1
1 11
,
!
,
.04- -1-_,3 .
1304
I
0 ,/. 4-
L---;--Zzol LILT -4----1
c"--16,305
TO R206
R203
View of PRINTED WIRING SIDE of Main Board A5780-3. Gray area represents printed
wiring; black symbols and lines represent components and
Lions on opposite side.
12
TOP SLUG
Schematic for 8H1A FM -AM Tuner
(10
ro
VHF OSC ADJ ACCESSIBLE THROUGH EITHER OF THREE HOLES IN TUNER WHEN TWO SLUGS ARE VISIBLE ADJUST TOP SLUG.
Front View of Cabinet. Escutcheon plate removed
TUBE COMPLETMENT
V601 -6807A V602-6AU6 V603-6AU6
V606-12AX7 V607-6AV6 V608-EM34
V604-6BA6
Tuning Eye
V605-6AL5
AM MIXER OSC_
0
FM -AM 1ST IF
1ST AF AMP.
1ST & 2ND AF PRE -AMP
n
FM 2ND IF
O AM 2ND DET.
O
FM RATIO DET.
HUM LEVEL CONTROL
fA
En
-4
ri
td
1/2 6B01A
r
FM RF AMP
FM TUNER 53C2
1/2 6601A
IA NIGER OSC
300 ONIS
I 1112010102
ow it
1.601
_41001_11F
FM 1116111/
63142
50602 104
5601
21
111,611411010
41E1E0 CRON 1101 Ell 11111 SITTCH M EN 10511101
TO 411 1 1603
TO T104
TO 1605
TO 1603
TO ACT 1103,0401.165 TO JCT. 1112.6423 10 0121
10 1 11601.6610. III 5 4603
TO 1302.1101
10 66013
6AU6
All MIXER-OSC.
T603
kW MITE1111
1.602
41.662
0602
0613 I 33
"Pt
It'
0 511551C
r
1601 22
WEC
6603
I
FM Y'S
AM
70PHON0 5 6016
1606 151
J
4'
L 6 0 3
C1120 08120
M 207
M2040 -
-342=
-
10 11605
,RIT-1201T 14203=
S201
REJ-ON-OFF
6206
PM VIEW
4:6,4
E 14 3 4 ull C EYE 0606
614 t MEC
5
0
00
0
0
8608
*6602
M601
V607
0606
Fm
2
00050 0 S601
6BA6
TM AM 1ST IT
V603
6AU6
46211011.85 260 001 V604
702_,
06161. 060 150{
10i
1617
COMA
-10214111 -4
001 IF
107 NC
606
155 AC 6109 100
ICI
C620
11
001 WI
1610 100
1619 2120
I
1/2 12AXT
1/ 2 12AX1
A
0,1
PHONOFM
0601C
1ST AF PREAMP
0606A
.6
0214
Y.
06(24--,
lin -,, 7
Imp
220
5.
240 Al PREAMP
0608e
'CI. -34
Nu
p1o00i1
3101 e
6632
.3000 5801
C435 01513
0
M 605 P4060 INPUT
1°0
THERE
CORI
1626 CC I
ASS .
CONTROL ,162T INFO
2321
1500
11150
001 IE 63,
1.03311
1652 1101
ANNE
6633 110
0033 .015
01331 03 91
1620 331
6622 1110
1623 to t 5%
1630
111
5%
1831 226
Ben
NUN
LEVEL <1PN
1.604
561
O0 O0
L605
L606
0 0 0 C8111
06204
0
0 00116
.001 611
0
1-7
i0 15
56028 __
0602
V601
V603
0604
0605
,
,LVI'011 _3_
6AL5
FM RATIO DET
V605
^111
5 12
__J
01321
210
00
5%
O01341"
5%
MTV 6111 5%
0823
1 IF
0624
1.51 5%
6611 5%
111311
2201
6AV6
1ST AF AMP
, V607
1113311
220
LOUDNESS
CONTROL
l O- Nese sco
0640
014
161131
5
11t6T10
_4131 11_6131 1105W
'14
61313 1000
, 0611
'.t5 WE 25
1.1603
10 25 SOCKET 1 TY NA5515
J
3 1603 TO Pill 1606
56026
2
.06615
2.2116,
$603
CONI C011101. 51011 II 01111 10 mop
1E61 YIEW
10 11611,6111 706412
TO 10 TO 1146.
11147.0145
010 TO 11641
03
10 1115 10 6815.CW
.001W.2
011111
COMP CONTROL
Swop
701111.0143 M 604
AUDIO OUTPUT
---0611
1806
ge,1
X643 220 0614
610
1016 1111 6413
61660S
6603 PLUG
PIN VIEW
TO HI 1103 10 CT 1139
56026 TO Pli MINS
1v -R4010 SWITCH REAR VIII MOWN II TY
20511101
10 P1116603
VOLUME TV -14, MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1958 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
ADMIRAL Chassis 17L1, used in Models HF21F32, HF21F33, HF21F34, Chassis 17AL1, used in Models HFA21F32, HFA21F33, HFA21F34, Chassis 17L1B, used in Models HF21F32B, HF21F33B, HF21F34B.
This schematic is exact for 17L1, Run 17. Chassis 17AL1 is practically identical
except that a UHF tuner is added. Chassis 17L1B is a later version with minor modifications and a different VHF tuner. All chassis use 4S2A HI-FI amplifier and tuner 8H1A. For schematic service notes see pages 10 and 11.
r 6AW8A
10040 1110
03040
C21/
.04/110 R205 4304
10 707 37 701110! #111
PRINTED WIRING
6DT6 MO UT
V201
401'
C2011
VHF TUNER 94E144-25
COIL VIII 7.----Ti71(11 SEI Ot C11111EL 2
10
.0
624
1202
-
411 IV
u01'
11.2114)0w
LC 2521,0,02116
1
4103
I L220021! .1_
ILT5105 I
00400
1101 1.21
5
WIRING BOARD A5775-i 6816
1ST If 0303
t101
L136
6BC8
VHF AMP.
COI 4101
VHF EIEA
6,910 G82 (Hr °sc.
01301
L302 12 19C
1303 IT
0311
120
IN
564
/4501
VOLTS
MU
AC 0141
44F 11 11141
tt
IS
10%
I 0 T4
C1OT 1.0
1100
TUBE COMPLEMENT
3.31
V101-6BC8 V102-6CG8 V201-6DT6 V243-511GT
V244-6SN7GTB V245-6V6GT
V246-6V6GT V301-6BZ6 V302 -68Z6
V303-606
V304-6AW8A V305-210EP4A V401-6BU8
V402-6CG7 V403-61)85 V404-6CG7 V405-6CD6GA V406-6AU4GTA V407-1B3GT V501 -5V3 CR241-9381.6 (Selenium Diode) CR301-1N87 (Crystal Diode) CR401-93135.4
44570
AC 504111 TO 4524 IMF LUC MI
8 O
O
8 O8 I, 8 8
C101 1011
4101 ACC
TUBE LOCATIONS
11111
tof
1033101F
1105f CCAITTEE
43
°.,R,D101 5310 SEP OFI SATED ACC .4-43 4401,
OSC
40111
NMI
0147E RECTIFIER
1110E0 41
""4111011rSTIC
01039
0001
' 1:-)050 ci-pj VERT Olt ;47`,2
OFT - ISYNC IIv
a0 01701
a MusD 091331
C 250 0 AIRS MA 1(1
lull01 1110
400
1141,
1504
2200
2200.21
107f .11104 THAVICN WW(! 4114 04 004!1005 10/017!1 11001515! 1110 1141/111111 511110.
r 77,
N.
111111
SECT
00
00
0000
GREEN
1.1VIC
'GREEN
543
AfCTIFIER v501
400
1 RED- TEL.
1 4-
I
RED
L_
r 1000 0101
0123
0102
C05
VHF TUNER
0n 04 +0
r C125 -1 Ei0
1.310 0121
"7)119
M 503
112 447 Tull
TYPE '11'
A5775-2
A5740-3
V305
V406
4 405
(4504 TUNIC
LICHT
*44
1505
000 20
1502 1000 TO
05054 300 3004
L501
----1112123-4
`4°&,
3000
43
0503
141.2511C
73-12.5
cm
1341.
®i .
1301 4-"2201"."
1401 10900
I2101
1100 1001
WEI
1111Cs 711015
150
IN
'1401
'n5
"137-4
1130 2.200C0
1402
66118
VOW COL sun S IND C17E0ERACC
0401
41E0
4521
3
Mt'
NOY 005
1/57
f 4/03
f 41f
SOY 1
.01114
/1021
1405
3400
4404 1.211
.0
50 1E12
sir
110 40112
=C0144100 /70
1/2 6CG7
51110 114
4t V4404260Ih
-
.00117
10%
144i I
11441
5.14
0414
2.2140
.1045
1441
'4.7 KC
3.34
.00141 10%
31
14! 100 35
11132 4704
042
4451 4.T NEC
.00471
I
14
VOLUME TV -14, MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1958 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
Admiral Schematic for 17L1 Television and 4S2A HI -Fl Amp. Chassis Stamped Run 17
BOARD
CVO 0111F
IT00 iR219
C211
3908
220
_39A
I I( CONTROL
2404
NEC
; uAoTintnha. L202 I 14.5 N6
;
R20, I C209
MI-1011NT
9
'Ass
CONTROL
1I
1
I
I
0052
.0017 ; wF
210
COOS
40100 CONTRO
M255 /711000 Ohl 2001 44-F11UNER
251
M256
43010 INPUT 2004
0253^100 0259
0254 TOO
1213. 3.91
8161
.77,777, 5305
0203
0256
C12-60712-210
6V6GT 2,22L,
420,5%
II 022 43
17512. 10%
4270 0245 5
4104
C259
105 00
I0Y
o 1/2
1/2
3 022 A1F
6SN7GT01
6SN7GT
Ai. AMP.
"4614:'
52444 52448 7121
5%
0259
1711'2
$I 12/1
6V6GT
solo 5
0
00246 1021'
LUC VIEW 14242E1
5Y3GT
RECTIFIER
J243
6.50'40 : 1.3 2 4 0 10741
261 3.312
201 c_R142.., 1264
pnsy A 265
+VW
100, 2W 100 .2111
22:754 221511 C255C 02550 C2584 62581 MK
7.1.7 80117 774041 74104061 7401IF 4009 004 - 4009 5004 -
10114 Le50117 LS.75011F
5009 7509 - 504
V245>72465244 ?::5;
174011111 4111 IS MIMI RED 001
SIVA117 If 1 10111X SII 01.
M259
LII6 9120
M245411 WOOF
"Sr 070 043
.811:
727
M246
AID RANCE
1111:111
M24-2 110 545CE
M248
11E1 TER
ENROL
T 301 45.5 NC
6 BZ6 VII IF 0302
NOY
2.25
1017
Jnv
R311 IA
C 310
130? 410
13011 225
1110 2204
6Ci6
311D If V303
1111
7502
11.511C 017.
0312 411
TOP AT
1305
12.0116
505(7
T7E2.
00501
0311 .00511? 4 ;700
C313 S120-4"
134
750 C312
560 577,
:
0322
C311
L305
6.6
102101
13.5 NC
1315 520
_7
I
MAW 00 111116. germ, rIll Saar NV ISM
412 7",77 152
07115 -LC405
T" 2400
0101 .T:011/
-4
404
PERT -77
-i-
1126GG7 Azi 25V
VERT OSC
040219
VERT,
-1-
101
6D85
VERT OUTPUT
V403
AUNT
.0111 4417 ISO
0101
/1121
220K
10%
R118 -I- 0406 155 IT.? OF
(IT 9101.0 4419 2000
--IC417
.7 of
1425 2.26E0
1423
4200
0
.1119 0421
-H VERT. 401001
110
4424
,7,K,
PEAT.
4420
LINEARITY
564
1426
500_
PRINTED WIRING BOARD A5780-3 27 10 10
004
9030114.590
4 511C TOP
4040.
VERT.
7304 /v/Iay
L507
1/26AVI8A 003044
VIDEO9
RI 521
A325 4008or
-3 3.54
_L_
-4-
3.54
9_3101_.
4 026
121
0516 77-7.1119
12009 / VERT
T404 04(11
0
I: 7:'54F.
5004
Q C) 504F
5049 3004
2104 2.50:
091710-1110E
1044 017 IF
YELLOW
4200
.321
4124
109
55.61
4W
=IN0
0326 1601
R 9B 70 A 800171155
00024 VERTICAL Off YOKE
70 , 5432 0 20
140010
_6-
154
T-PERT.
-74
8433
1433
220
220 _ J
11021 -MCI-.
(--- 0417
.02247
4111
90.4 4454
mot
391, 7-7.-m795
54258 5730tE, LUC Mil
PLUG 14 WEN
&
183ci
4 V RECTIFIER
v407
Or KORN.
9385-4
HORN SYNC DISCO.
0,401
-MY
*Ise-
MEL
\,\/\\ IT V
\--"11\- -T- 6CG7
55 v
...a/7 110012. 052 00404
Lao. 400
40012
NOY
!II 1.11
0423 5900
',7', _L C424
tir 3-- 90
4455
0456 1100 5%
0426
4-0
I0047W
C425
Ts" 5450
006
.20T.
C426 .00118
I. III
11241 225
10717
10002.0119E
-f-
5004 NOW
[1403
4504
42 1402
2200
10 010.2
00184111 10 1041 . 11 010 1M1060f211
PRONE:5 8131 FOCUS.
1f01-5--7 14028
11002011TAL 0E1 YOKE
35 0 0741
111611E-YEALOV 9
CAuT7027
500VSti MUM*
40073. 0414 11(1011 4
15
VOLUME TV -14, MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1958 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
ADMIRAL Chassis 17K1, used in Models HF21F22, HF21F23, Chassis 17AK1, used in Models HFA21F22, HFA21F23, Chassis 17K1B, used in Models HF21F22B, HF21F23B.
This schematic is exact for Chassis 17K1, Run 14. Chassis 17AK1 is identical
except for the addition of a UHF tuner. Chassis 17K1B is a later version with
minor modifications and a different VHF tuner. All chassis use 4R2 HI-FI amplifier. Additional material on page 18. Schematic notes are the same as given on pages 10 and 11.
1/2 6AW8A 50010 If 1111
03043
3217 IOU
PRINTED W
2205 3301
0
6DT6
SOUND HT 0201
ISO,
T 11
VHF TUNER 94E144-25
COIL VIII ","---1071ER SET ON CHANNEL
10
2002
IlVk
I
Ms
II
L201E21
0204 I
00111
12
1
5%
20101 0202
1215
31I1F
1203
40026
- II 004111 22 33
5
12
L
_ J L-75%45 I
/SOP
(PRINTED WIRING BOARD A5
6 BZI
1ST If v301
3
E6)
T o,
L136
6BC8
VHf AMP.
(-I C106
viol
1.2 -4-
till
41
5%
5%
YNr
IN 1141
C103
22 10%
C104
IX _C4017_
10.1,
1102
0101 1000
3.91
TUBE LOCATIONS
1101 C109 2.2
ACC
VHF DSC I HIKER
HORI/ OUTPUT
080.
C)2ND IF
@3RDIF
DAMPER
0 "V; CR301 VIDEO
NOISE CATE SYNC SEP
& CITED ACC
VIDEO 1141,674
SOUND If
® OSC VERT OUTPUT HON
CR4011THoRSiz DISCR
SOUND
DE I
VER OSC &SYNC INV
REC IFIER
RECTIFIER
L
j 4R2 HI
SPEAKER
FI PP
CHASSIS
SOCKET
SOUND SOUND Al AMP
OUTPUT OUTPUT
PHASE
INVERTER
I EKE CONTROL AF INPUT INPUT SOCKET SOCKET
C111
.5-3.0
1110
TUBE COMPLEMENT
V101-6BC8 V404-607
V102-6CG8
V405-6CD6GA
V201-6DT6 V406-6AU4GTA
V240-12AX7 V407-1B3GT
V241-6AQS V501 -5V3
V242-6AQ5
V243-5Y3GT
V301-6BZ6
V302-6BZ6
V303-6CB6
CR301-1N87 (Crystal Diode)
0 0
V304-6AW8A
V305-210EP4A
V401 -6E1118
CR401-93B5.4
(Dual Selenium Diode) V402-6CG7
I
0 0
V403-6DB5
55011-
11111 ON 1
024301,
M501
M502
T50 CR El
TY
12404
M240A LOG vlEv,
1501
VOA
1120.10 ICAHN
5V3
RECTIFIER 0501
I
RED
130
IRTDTEL.
I 4-
I13a
a B-' 60
1
TEL.
Hie
_ _J TEL.
0101
© 0
0102
O ©
L__ VIE TUNER
11502A
t6011
V 301
L 310
DO I Li22°_ _ _ _
M503 Full
TYPE 'Tr
y02103
-II
M101
_ ----
1--
L30242.3
IC
ICII9
A3
f.O.0120
02102
11
AP
10.5% FIRE
2a,
TOM
OA
CONTROL
L501
T.055;18%
-fAI
v130
L
Rsui 150
2200
Off' WM 11101/41 021110(1 41% 04 000100(5 100/04115
670010151 80111101
IV MCI 5117100.
0.00. 1
11.110
um 022 T
111
1140' 1001 SUPER RANCE 115E1
4- 1R13050.mol6s8rUC1A
1409
1306
152
2.211ECt 1110 CITED
2402
0101
4.711EC
SY
3.
SOP 6
1000
8
/04
4'150 th
/JOY 1
1403 474
0101 0102
00v402
v 202
©0
v201
00
ISO
111111111111111111111111111
Yt 6CG7
v40213 11147C IV
6 IAA
IF-
NT
7001
41
Ill/IC 11011
*44
1 505 1000
1-
-.. 211
YORE1A11
. 0C55034
1502 3000 T1
4fr1011f - 3007 ....Cs,
7-
312
--111L15011113---
C5031 3042
1504 51 151
II- 0419
.00111 10%
1453
16
VOLUME TV -14, MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1958 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATIO1
Admiral Corporation
DARD A5780-3
0219
1008 4219 1901
1220 391
82061 0209
;
HOS TOME
L ._J
e
7301
45.311C
411
6 BZ6
200 IF V302
1311 it
C310 120
1110 Armei 2201
IV- IMMO
32409
FRONT VIII
M
5
BASS CONTROL
1211
92409
6086
®
3RD IF
V303
Schematic for 17K1 Television and 4R2 HI -Fl Amp.
Chassis Stamped Run 14
M206 1207
r---- PRINTED WIRING BOARD A5975-
PA 2058 PIN VIEW
M242A
PIN VIEW
V212AX7
5030 614P
02404
I1211
220 0241
1/212AX7
8249
PHASE IAV
02408
2216
YF
1125i
4708I
5% C217
OINF
2457
e
6A05:
UMW -
OUTPUT 1 V241
ARM
R 0 DOT ST111 Of 1119111
412 3 900114
0243 35 1124 3
r:+Mu* - OMR
/1243A 11240/ I NEC _
I r I -T TREBLE CONTROL
'1'240
51'3u
R CT
V243
727
100 IA
R253 145210.9
1250 01
Is
7242 M244A
I 57I
1
NY 6A051''°
MRS
JOY Osii2P4t2
HSy
11131
M 254 251 MD 1810 If
M24013
3841
PRINTED WIRING BOARD A5780-3
o
L3061
CMI
II Cet
I
11
1116AW8A
r 1 47, 5% IOU 1
C315 4.1
VIDEO AMP
Mr
V304 A
L__J
5-1
109 VE RI
_ t_
41248 14E1138
2120141
/.
V305
VIDEO DEL
21 301
0122
0311
/9111, 111I7 01 IVO !E/[ICE JIM SINE MI Ara
CONTRAST - 5009
1000
10 111311 NESS
1412 151
MIS 10405
T'"
2101 0 NT
AIM
-.91171100-
581
Vz6CG7 7v 25V
04024 VERT CISC ,...----
Or
6DB5
VERT OUTPUT
0403
Mr
9
VEAL HOLD R419 2001
1421
VERT. MEW
110
1424
IV
1.5 Kt
"191....--.
111341111
115201 0,
7401
C4i1A
290 41 REO
2341
50 111
309
1430
1419 111
c410
11
204 MAIL
A
05B5 -4
PHIL STK. DISCI. CR401
-/St
\I\ /.%,
__I_
ingl 911.
(1_ (1.: 1---
55V
6CG7 7-- NOW. 05C
) \----) \''' -I--
0404 ........."."
1451
Mr,
5.11 I/
100 12424 -Mt 390
IEVEL
11.04,2
022115
228 0415 2V .0141
0121
IH
.04711F
Asso
a, C430
NMI I
17
7402A
VERTICAL REF YOKE
1433 220
R111
A
1008
1131T
N.V RECTIFIER
0407
COWL, 10 11211/1 I. BORG 11102WEIV P4097/08 8557 00105.
6AU4 CIA ti:OV
04321
150
`120
289
1461
wovvi
- 4.71
613E2133
21VT
IINITE-YELLOW
74028
3013/011111 001 TORE
35 1011/
6411 It
my 21 *MUM
10910.
IEFOff
IffISCRINC
14,
K1, etc.
ANTENNA
SUPER RANGE FINDER
IF BOARD A5775-2
' Y j ift
rPICTURE CENTERING TABS '
Move tabs closer together or her apart to center picture.
DEFLECTION YOKE YOKE RETAIN NG SPRING
To correct picture tilt, loosen screw on yoke retaining spring. Rotate yoke until picture is straight Tighten screw.
VERTICAL LINEARITY HEIGHT
To correct improper picture height or vertical linearity, alternately adjust HEIGHT and VERT. UN.
4R2 HI -Fl AMP.
MAIN BOARD A5780-3
la, HORIZONTAL LOCK HORIZONTAL DRIVE
9.34%. 6300.4 6.3TAC
m;.?aa m1:20
1/2 AMP. TYPE N
SLOW BLOW FUSE 4R2
AC INPUT PLUG
TREBLE PLUG
AUDIO INPUT PLUG
Rear View of Chassis Showing Adjustments.
PRINTED WIRING VIEWS
I
Rd T
TO 9 2TSV
T
to
TO
AT PIN 9 91110,914 LEAD Ca 99 DLO LE
Of V23 of 21
of E 2.1
0
0290
To B 250v
TO -CT
OF
CA356 9468
To C306
TO JOT
TO 940F229TO TO
R4213 T401 C414R 6.3v AC GREEN LEAD
View of PRINTED WIRING SIDE OF 4R2 Hi-Fi Board A5975. Gray area represents printed wiring; black symbols and lines represent components and connections on opposite side.
TO JCT.
MOIF 6
Roo'
TO Coos
TO RAO
T0O.2J9CT6 TO
SUPER RANGE FINDER
c14.3 0. 2500 CONTROL
Lc's, C3f16 a
:::AIN 804
- --
-
T7:: 20
R3o.es,,,,A0
0 °V 30ICt
1ST 1,,
6826
1-0
::
YO n© 'i'-' 0' 9C043):S:'-..
-9,0.41e3v
5416
6.561%
III. -41~-41I ,
LOS
OR24
=_. i,
0 0 TO ROOT 1.15 ak
""
NOR
. 0 coiiTRoLn
. n,i,iivg4ti0g4..
TOJET 04261
a97
RA60 6 ...- T 0 fil0
R59
,
1,6, ,45-
1 c....
6;°A,c*'-'4'
701.306
1305
T003190 CONTRAST CONTROL TO B.I50v 001000 TO C50.513
9308 V
1- 't;:;
i.,,0 Te:or-m----0
7 8N C 3,0 069Z10
\3
...-.. 5]02
i 6,1111
A 1141.,Ws,-- -910
, ce2r-, '9' R o-szrs..44
44, r-'1",'4''5''01p. .
.4.
TO RA*
VH0FL'D '''''-::114.4.°1.31°6
fi°
CONTROL TO 6409 '
l 00 0 , fr_' 0 / ,
IlLni,,,...4; \
twt V402 ov ,,,toot6.
^,441
T,V,i,2.T.,,- '
CONTROL
"
, im6CGT 0 Reote Al .
', V O4AN,.....11R14114"1,,,.-
4, 0 Ois
W..V304.
"IF
fluor
20:
.3
CI TAW° 811:442.'r4'
so4)8- A
apt'
0 '11\12,04
-svA\-. .
CET
D
L201147:1" I VZ04;
i201 1374 'T
TO 6 3VAC TO 0321
L307
316
1.3OG
5 0 0 1- ,, -E0 YA6R00380603_ 0
..-----
4.303
-9 -ItSoT 0T .
'7303
CS99
C
71-14.4.T.,..: .,,,..trici,:- _../:
crap.
0205
View of PRINTED WIRING SIDE of IF Board
TO S 09
--
To 11209
R203
A5775-2. Gray area represents printed wir-
View of PRINTED WIRING SIDE of Main Board A5780-3. Gray area represents printed wiring; black symbols and lines represent components and connections on opposite side.
ing; black symbols and lines represent components and connections on opposite side.
18
VOLUME TV -14, MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1958 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATIC
_Emerson Television
MODELS USING CHASSIS
120369 -C 120370 - G 120377 -C
TYPE
MODEL NUMBER
TV CHASSIS
KINESCOPE
TUNER
VHF
1420, 1424
120377 -C
21CBP4A
471039
1426, 1428
120369 -C
21CBP4A
471039
UHF -VHF
1421, 1425
120370 - G
21CBP4A
471040
UHF -VHF
TUNER
#471040
r==
CHASSIS 120370G
(Schematic diagram on pages 20-21, alignment on page 22)
TO MED
MIOC
I-ZO
TO* 000
TO P15,1110 VO8)MANO1100.110
6AT 8 osc a
MIXER
68137A
R.F. AMPL.
TO PIN 2
OF VII 6CU6 (6-3 V. A.G.)
TO4230.41-L
TO PIN 2 OF VII 6CU6
(6-3
TO .01
Of V-11,111301115
VHF TUNER # 471039
6800
-0 TO PM 2 OF 0-13 60601
---.... TOPPI 609 V-13 6.601
- TO PIN OF 0-13
6046T
-A. T011-61 VERT.
pooLo CCSOTROL
TO P163 Of 0.13 00651
- TO 114.110011
WAN - A...GTE0
TO 0-14 C WM
TroOw0c.0orr. -
;&!"-4,.
TO 404111.
-1,q, Mt, xx-
Figure 6 - AUDIO AND VIDEO PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD
PMR iTtER'PAD g'
tICA1.04
60136A OR 6DQ6 OR 6CU6
HORIZONTAL OUTPUT
HOR. & VERT. SWEEP PRINTEDCIRCUIT BOARD
1N VIDEO LF. AWL.
C)
6CB6
LF. PLATE
6CB6
3rd VIDEO LE AMPL.
a VIDEO
DETECTOR
CI (DI
26d ma) 6AS8
I.F. AMPL.
1 6AN8
1
I 4.5MC SATED
I AGC DETECT.
11213Y7A VIDEO
8 6DT6 AUDIO DETECT.
6A05
AUDIO OUTPUT
r-
6CG7
HORIZONTAL I OSCILLATOR C9I CONTROL
I C)
6BY6
SYNC.
SEP.
NOISE
CANCEL.
L AUDIO -VIDEO BOARD
J
6V6 GT
VERTICIOL
-13
OUTPUT
.5C07
VERTICAL
µ9 OSCILLATOR a YNC. AMPL.&
INVERTER
HORIZONTAL & VERTICAL SWEEP 'BOARD
0 5U4GB LOW VOLT. RECTIFIER
Figure 3 - TUBE LOCATION DIAGRAM
19
I, MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED ..11958 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
ARSON Chassis 120369C, 120370G, 120377C, Schematic Diagram
UHF ANTENNA
UHF -VHF 0 0 TUNER
PART NO 7(0 4 0 (CHAS 120370-6 ONLY)
ir-UMF SECTION 1 o1
I V -I8 6AF4A UHF OSC I 0-2 1N82A CRYSTAL I
0- VIII ANTENNA
300 OHM BALANCED)
v Hf
TUNER
PART NO 471039 (USED ON CHASSIS 120359-C B 120377-C
ONLY)
VHF SECTION
V -I6 68N4 R f. AMP.
V-17 6CG8 ztio
FV-I6 6807A R.E.AMP V-17 6A18 Zut11
5.3m6
IAA
SBA
- ri
I iir
F°
47E5 MC
L -I
1ST 010(0 f AMP
1
V-1 6C136
I.F.PLATE
260 VIDEO
F AMP
V-2 6C86
HID VIDEO F NAP
V-30)6ASe
42.66C
VIDEO
DETECTOR
V-3046AS8 -0Av
44 251C
T-3 1
V:t)
11°P`IFE
;-14.4.0 Al Lou pop 1
'TAW) - I.'"
1E100K
I
I
I -my.,CL I
F
HJ)
B. !
_J 1_®_()_
I
1;M:G.N
C-59
V-21 0
PILOT
+1500
LL. -p +150V1 47 I +230V
'NOTE
ON SOME SETS 5-3 HAS BEEN C- HANGED TO A 1501.11 4/2 VI RESISTOR FOR IMPROVED SIGNAL /NOISE RATIO
u«r:Vr..
0 HEATERS
HEATERS
V-20
A GC
PILOWNT
aCC
5 ME iT e 2250
R-33
±-0ILCITV-20
LOCAL -DISTANCE
7
Uvigf T -P
EIGHT
S DON
TURIN
CONTROL-
22 NEC
CONDITIONS FOR TAKING VOLTAGE AND
E
--7 2 -.SKIP
RESISTANCE READINGS
---[ 3t:3
The voltage and resistance measurements listed were token on Chassis 120377C A.
.- '--1 41
Due to component variations, voltage and resistance readings may vary slightly from those given here. Slight variations may also be noticed if chassis is not coded I as mentioned above.
' ---i_16P
Bp
The picture tube, deflection yoke and high voltage circuits were connected to take the following readings and I waveshapes:
1 91'
PP Inp
1. Antenna disconnected and antenna terminals shorted
on tuner and connected to chassis (use short leads).
II 21=
2. Line voltage 117 volts (Disconnect power for re-
sistance readings).
PR SELECTOR
3. 3 volt bias battery connected to A.G.C. circuit, posi- I PANEL
tive terminal to chassis, negative terminal to junction of R-2, R-3. BIAS BATTERY USED FOR VOLTAGE
L. -
READINGS ONLY. R-5 maximum ccw position - (local).
4. All controls in position for normal picture. (Varied
when it d irectly affects reading).
SLC
5. All measurements taken with a vacuum tube voltmeter
and ohmmeter.
211
6. All readings listed in tables were taken between
T-9
points shown and chassis.
7. Resistance readings are given in ohms unless other-
wise noted.
8. N.C. denotes no connection.
1'1,AG
LOW VOLT RECTIFIER
V -I5 5U4G8
WAVE SHAPE ANALYSIS CHART The waveshapes shown taken on 'chassis 120377C A.
Slight peak -to -peak voltage differences may be noticed on chassis of later triangle codes. The peak -to -peak voltage given may also vary slightly depending on signal strength and component variations! To accurately observe the wave shapes, the relatively high input capacity of an oscilloscope must be reduced so as not to change the operating characteristics of the television set. Failure to do this will result in wrong wave shape readings.
MATER CONNECTIONS 0
I
OSCILLATOR BOARD
0-19 I
v-10
6C67
C -
SW -I ON- fi SWITCH
+1500
+2600
MOTORIZED TUNING ASSEMBLY
I USED ON CHASSIS I20369 -C ONLY I
CRI EH
LC
SW -2
CHANNEL
SELECTOR SWITCH
NOTE
pRESELECTOR PANEL SET FOP CHANNEL SW -2 SHOWN IN CHANNEL 4 POSITION
SW -3
ON TOP OF CABINET
L MOTOR
+ 265 V
+2600 + 230V
-1
SOAPS
0 + 150 V
Em
Emy
p -p
ON UHF VHF SETST -177ON VHF SETS
7675 c r 5
6C06 6116
NEATER CONNECTIONS r HEATER CONNECTIONS OF UHF MEE TUNER 1
VHf (CHAS 120369-C 120377-C II
I USED ON CHAS I20570 - G ONLY
v- IS
V-17 5 ,-,. I
6E1101
, 1 6C08
SAF.
-
HEATER CONNECTION3 OF I F PL ATE
I MDDI v-2
SB
2
6CB6
6C Bb
77
HEATER cONNECTiCifES Of V1010 SOUND BOARD
C -64I
I WI
1. Connect antenna and tune receiver to channel where best reception has been obtained in the past.
1,j [
1X3.7
6606 1112 avtA
SASS
6076
2. Low end of the probe is connected to CHASSIS and
ISO CIS)
the contrast control is set for MAXIMUM UNDISTORTED:Vo CONTRAST. 3. The 30 and 7875 C.P.S. oscilloscope sweep settings
P-1 X-
SFET y INTERLOCK
are used so as to permit observation of two cycles of
the wave shape.
NOTE: A wove shape seen on your oscilloscope may CHASSIS NOS. 120369-C , 120370-G a 120377-C
be upside down from same wave shape shown here.
v- I
E
20
VOLUME TV -14, MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1958 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
EMERSON Chassis 120369C, 120370G, 120377C, Schematic Diagram
tam Iwo SPEAKERS CONNOTED IN
SERIES MAY BE USED ON SOME SETS. CORRECT PHASING WIPE/MRS MUST BE OBSERVED
VIDEO a SOUND BOARD
BP -2
4.5 MC AMPLIFIER V- 4(3%)6AN8
1 e4v
1-4
AUDIO DETECTOR V -S SOTS
00
AUDIO OUTPUT
V-6 6A05
6 2500
58RJ5 T' 5 iG
265 V
VOLUME CONTROL IMFG
TONE 4,ONSToR01.
MEGW-tI
." H. 230V
775 CPS
_3_
GATE 0 AGC DETECTOR
V-4(B)6AN8
112 6
S.SNIFIES CERAMIC OR MICA CAPACITORS
* SIGNIFIES TUBULAR CAPACITORS
RESISTORS ARE IN OHMSI K 1000 OHIAS ANDS( WATT UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED.
CAPACITORS LESS THAN UNITY ARE IN MED, CAPACITORS GREATER THAN UNITY ARE IN MMFDS UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED
ARROWS AT CONTROLS INDICATE CLOCKWISE ROTATION
15410 107 =
------s-WVF-o. R-20 82K 114
4-2300
1444.
II
11
BOOST
II-
30cP5 IMWMNNH 44 03
IMMINN
V-7 6B Y6
SYNC. SEPARATOR
NOISE CANCELLATION
-41
R-36
10
24V
IC--20 241i0
ll 0,4
470K
TC0f3
ANA
T9 ND
30C P5
+2300
-;-- -
VIDEO AMPLIFIER
V-8 121E1Y74
31C
L1-57A.
R-4BSI
150K
Ern STIOUH 1(
C-33
2 5A
R-46
I_ T-6
T 12110 22
-OS 3,
e
BRIGHTNESS CONTROL
R-5, 200K
150 V
v
2 2007 II D°11°
THOU -
I
-72,80
11,
CONTRAST
R-53 600
675,43 4,150V
OSCILLATOR BOARD 0-10 0 -lb
PLATER NcATHoot
1417).0%"
CATHODE DuAL SELENitml DIODE IIOPVICI
V-10 6CG7
HORIZONTAL OSCILLATOR
AND CONTROL
6B K9
76,5 c P5
-4-420v
PS 76755/c
230*
775 c ps -I- -
HORIZONTAL OUTPU
V- 1 6D06AoR6D06oR
6CU6
11
r11
II II I
30 C P5
soon. V -I 2 18301
HIGH VOLT RECTIFILR
V -I9 21 CBP4A ION TR..
NOT USED
CENTER UNIT
C-35 0
R-55 3300
71175 C P a.
at; C-2 R-66
7675 CPS
vWR- 69
200K HORIZ BALANCE
CONTROL
R 85
BOOST 0 45908 C -56^50K
HORIZONTAL HOLD CONTROL
ATRY AJUT FOR HORIZONTAL CENTERING
-J V -I4 6AX8.
GT OAMPER
BOOST * 5900
260V
O
Ov
C.00
VERTICAL OUTPUT
V -I3 6V6 GT
T -8
R-213 2 DREG
7;(
VERTICAL SIZE CONTROL
BOOST
331-3600 \
VERI LINEARITY CONTROL
R- (12 22MEG
Iby T.C- 59 ILOOMED
1
cA.N. R-79 OMITTED FOR IMPROVED VERTICAL STABILITY
02600
L-13
HOR
7 Fs"). 3
WIDTH
CONTROL
mn SHIM 4---7 54-2
I rt-so 560
VERT I COILS 3 ZEAL
R-91
IT
560
L-141
1
L.... ..j r° 44
DEFLECTION , YOKE ASS'LY
"r211-.
7tPAG7CVEZIE.: ON THEIt/11710"31A4; DEPENDING ON CONTRAST CONTROL SETTING AND SIGNAL STRENGTH
7vZilleLttCONTR
21
VOLUME TV -14, MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1958 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
VIDEO I.F. ALIGNMENT (See Fig. No. 4) for EMERSON Chassis 120369C, 120370G, 120377C
1. Connect 3 volt bias to A.G.C. line. Negative terminal to junction R-3, C-7, positive terminal to chassis. (R-33 maximum ccw position).
2. Connect I.P. marker generator to floating shield of tuner mixer tube (See Note Below) and V.T.V.M. to junction of L-8, R-41.
PERMISSIBLE TILT 30% EITHER WAY
3. Adjust output of signal generator so that peaking of coils does not produce more than -2v D.C. on V.T.V.M.
4. Peak the following for maximum response: T-3, 44.25MC; 7-2 42.6MC; T-1, 45.3MC; L-1 bottom 42.9MC and T-11 45.3MC.
5. Peak the following for minimum response increasing generator output if necessary: L-2, 41.25 MC and L-1 top, 47.25MC.
20%MAX 42,9 MC.
60% TO 70%
3.8 MC.
45.75 MC.
6. Re -adjust L-1 bottom (42.9MC) and T-11 (45.3MC) for maximum response.
7. Connect an oscilloscope through a 20,000 ohm isolation resistor in place of the V.T.V.M. and connect a sweep generator to floating shield of tuner mixer tube along with marker generator. Adjust output of sweep to produce about 2 volts peak to peak at oscilloscope and reduce marker signal so as not to upset the response curve.
41.25 MC
47.25MC ADJACENT
SOUND
Figure 1. OVERALL I.F. RESPONSE CURVE
8. The 45.75MC marker should appear between 60% and 70% down with respect to its related peak. If necessary, adjust T-3 slightly.
9. The 42.9MC marker (See Fig. No. 1) should not fall below 20% of its related peak. Limits of response curve are 30% tilt and 20% peak to valley ratio.
NOTE: Part of the procedure calls for use of a "floating" shield over the mixer tube of the tuner. The tube shields now used in the tuner cannot be removed from their mounts. Instead of a "floating" shield the following method is used.
Take a thin piece of copper or brass foil 1/2" by 2" and paste on to a thin piece of onion skin insulation. The insulation should extend about 1/8" beyond the two long sides and one short side while the foil should extend beyond the insulation on the other short
side. The shim assembly is then slipped lengthwise to fit between the mixer tube and its shield with the metal foil facing the tube. The short side with the extended insulation is placed towards chassis while the side with the foil extending beyond the insulation is connected to the sweep generator. The shim may now be rotated for maximum coupling as observed on the oscilloscope.
4.5 MC VIDEO TRAP ALIGNMENT, T-6 Top (See Fig. 4)
Using a good signal, set the fine tuning control to the point where you begin to see 4.5 mc beat in the picture. Then adjust T-6 top for minimum 4.5 mc beat in the picture.
SOUND IF ALIGNMENT (See Fig. 4) 1. Using a strong signal, adjust T-6 bottom and T-4 top and bottom, for loudest sound.
2. Adjust L-6 for clearest and loudest sound. If two peaks are encountered use position with slug closest to chassis.
3. With antenna loosely coupled to set, adjust receiver to a weak signal channel and repeat step 41, tuning for maximum volume and minimum distortion.
4. If a V. T. V.M. is available, the measured voltage across R-37, 560K0 should not vary more than 2 volts between strong and weak signals. Voltages should read between -4 and -9 volts.
5. Check sound on all channels and repeat entire procedure if necessary.
UHF TUNER
*471039
T -1I
95 3 ..%\,..XER TRIMMER
CHANNELS
2-12 OSC ADJ
O
CHANNEL SELECTOR
R F TRIMMER ANT INPUT
CHASSIS 120377 C, 120369C
9' FINE
TUFNI INEG.
CHANNEL I3/II
OSC. ADJ.
6 AT8
6BQ7A
O
H 0 T
1.7 PLATE
0L-2 S4cLD2N5M4 AP
L-1
ICJ TOP -472514C 80T-42 9 MC
T-3
44 25MC
T-1 45 3MC
7-2
42 6MC
O
0
TOP 445MC 4 1-16.1C
0
T-6
.ergl 4 5MC
CHANNELS 2-13 OSC. ADJ.
MIXER
VHF ANT. INPUT
UHF ANT INPUT
UHF CHANNEL
TRIMMERRE
TUNABLE
1NIBA
SELECTOR UHF 8+
TRIMMER I LF TRAP
UHF -VHF TUNER
OE 471040
UHF FINE
TUNING
0-14=7K
e
1 5
CHASSIS 120370 G
N
VHF CHANNEL SELECTOR
6CG8
I®
6 BN4
6AF4A
LLC) I. F. T ERMINAL
I
? (1
90..._
I
FILAMENT \ 13 +150 Jr NEUTRALIZING
T-10
IP
AGC
TRIMMER
45.3MC
UHF F NE TUNING
CENTERING UNIT
P
L -I1 NOR OSCIL. COIL
;
L AUDIO -VIDEO BOARDJ
R-5
LOCAL
DIST
CONTROL
R-69
HOF BAL CONTROL
R-81 R-78
VERT LIN. VERT SIZE CONTROL CONTROL
o I
A
AC INTERLOCK
F-1
HORIZONTAL & VERTICAL SWEEP BOARD
>3''T' , 0 6 AMPS. SLOW -BLOW FUSE
Figure 4 - ALIGNMENT POINT DIAGRAM
22
VOLUME TV -14, MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1958 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
Emerson Television
TYPE
VHF RECEIVERS
UHF -VHF RECEIVERS
MODEL NUMBER
1282, 1284 1286
1283, 1285 1287
TV CHASSIS 120380H 120388H 120381M 120389M
TUBE SIZE 21DAP4 21DAP4 21DAP4 21DAP4
TV TUNER
471055 471055 471056 471056
(Service information on pages 23 through 28)
MODELS USING CHASSIS:
120380H 381N1 120388H, 389M
GENERAL INFORMATION
These "Tru-Slim" 110° chassis are exceptionally easy to service due to: horizontally mounted chassis, two etched circuit boards, picture tube removable from the front of the set, easy access to all tubes, etc. Some additional features of these chassis are: Fringe Compensator Control, Phone input jack with Phono- T.V. switch, and personal listening attachment jack which allows for the use of an external speaker, hearing aid attachment, or under -pillow speaker.
Portable VHF models come equipped with a built-in 4 -section telescopic VHF antenna and a separate UHF loop antenna is provided on UHF -VHF portables.
Port -O -Rama models 1286 and 1287 include a radio which operates thru the audio system of the T.V. chassis.
NOTE: No ion trap is required with the 110° deflection picture tube used in these sets since they are straight gun tubes.
Antennas
Portable VHF Models 1284 and 1286 are equipped with a telescopic dipole antenna. To operate, extend rods to maximum length and rotate for clearest reception. If on external VHF antenna is required disconnect telescopic antenna leads from VHF antenna terminals and connect the leads from the external VHF antenna.
Portable UHF -VHF Models 1285 and 1287 are equipped with a telescopic dipole antenna for VHF reception and a separate oop antenna for UHF reception. To operate UHF antenna, adjust loop in upward position for best UHF reception. Since these antennas cre directional, positioning set also improves reception.
Should external antennas be required disconnect dipole and loop and connect external antennas to their respective terminals.
If a single all -channel (VHF -UHF) antenna is used a commercially available VHF -UHF crossover network is recommended.
On non -portable VHF Model 1282 o built-in VHF antenna is provided. UHF -VHF Table Model 1283 is provided with separate built-in VHF and UHF antennas.
The radio used in our Port -O -Rama Models 1286 and 1287 derives its signal from one side of whichever VHF antenna (Built-in or external) is connected to the set.
Video I.F. Alignmen
1. Connect 3 volt bias to A.G.C. line. Negative terminal to junction R-15, R-13 positive terminal to chassis. 2. Connect I.F. marker generator to floating shield of tuner mixer tube (see Note below) and V.T.V.M. to junction L-8, R-34. 3. Adjust C -T for maximum capacity. 4. Adjust marker to 45.5 MC and peak T-4 for maximum keep signal generator output as low as possible). 5. Adjust marker to 43.25 MC and peak T-3, L-2 and T-8 (Tuner I.F.) for maximum (keep signal generator output as low as possible). 6. Connect an oscilloscope through a 20,000 ohm isolation resistor in place of the V.T.V.M. and connect a sweep generator to floating
tube shield of mixer tube along with marker generator. Adjust output of sweep to produce about 2 volts peak to peak at oscilloscope and reduce marker signal so as not to upset the response curve. 7. Adjust marker to 45.75 MC. This marker should appear 60% down with respect to related peak of response curve. If not ct 60% adjust C -T. Limits of response curve are 30% tilt and 20% peak to valley ratio.
NOTE: Part of the procedure calls for use of a "floating" shield over the mixer tube of the tuner. The tube shields now used in the tuner cannot be removed from their mounts. Instead of a "floating" shield the following method is used.
Take a thin piece of copper or brass foil 1/4" by 2" and paste on to a thin piece of onion skin insulation. The nsulation should extend about 1/8" beyond the two long sides and one short side while the foil should extend beyond the insulation on the other short side.
The shim assembly is then slipped in lengthwise to fit between the mixer tube and its shield with the metal fail facing the tube. The short side with the extended insulation is placed towards chassis while the side with the foil extending beyond the insulation is connected to the sweep generator. The shim may now be rotated for maximum coupling as observed on the oscilloscope.
Sound I.F. Alignment
1. With antenna loosely coupled to set adjust receiver to a weak signal channel. 2. Place a V.T.V.M. (negative scale) to junction L-1, R-1 and adjust T-9 and L-4 for maximum limiter voltage on V.T.V.M. Amount of
input signal should be such that a sharp maximum reading con be obtained. 3. Connect V.T.V.M. to junction R-5, C-4 (negative scale) and detune discriminator (T-1) secondary to produce a maximum negative
reading. (Looking at top of chassis secondary slug is closest to you.) 4. Adjust primary of T-1 for maximum negative reading. 5. Pe -adjust secondary of discriminator T-1 towards original slug position for minimum reading on V.T.V.M. Check audio, if distorted.
Repeat steps No. 1-5.
23
VOLUME TV -14, MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1958 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION EMERSON Chassis 120380H, 120381M, 120388H, 120389M, Alignment, Continued
Alignment of Miracle Picture Lock (Horizontal Oscillator and A.F.C.)
This con be accomplished without removing chassis from cabinet as follows: 1. Turn picture stabilizer (R-31) fully clockwise (minimum resistance) and tune set to a known good channel. 2. Short phasing coil (L-9) by a jumper wire across C-32,.01 mfd capacitor. 3. Rotate horizontal hold control (R-57) fully clockwise (looking from front of set). 4. Starting with horizontal frequency slug (T-6) all the way "out" (towards you looking at back of chassis), rotate "in" until picture
just locks into sync. Then, turn slug in about 1/2 turn more. 5. Remove short from phase coil and starting with slug all the way "out", adjust phase coil "in" until picture almost locks into sync
(3-4 diagonal bars). 6. Turn horizontal hold (R-57) to counterclockwise position to lock picture "in", then turn horizontal hold back to full clockwise
position. If picture falls out of sync, adjust frequency coil slug (T-6) slightly. 7. Check for horizontal hold while switching channels. If this is not obtained at extreme clockwise position of horizontal hold control,
turn frequency slug T-6 "in" slightly until desired results are obtained. If excessive squedging (Christmas Tree effect) is experienced while switching channels, readjust phase coil slightly. Check to make sure no horizontal bending is introduced of top of picture. *NOTE: T-6 and L-9 must be adjusted with a hex head adjustment tool and not a screwdriver.
Adjustment of Picture Stabilizer (R.31)
For local signals, this control (R-31) should be set to its extreme clockwise position (minimum resistance).
If sync improvement is required in electrically noisy areas, the picture stabilizer control (R-31) is turned in a counterclockwise direction until the best sync stability is obtained. Be sure to check all channels for sync instability, since a compromise setting of R-31 might be necessary.
Horizontal Size Adjustments
These "Tru-Slim" 110° chassis have been designed to provide proper horizontal sweep under normally encountered line voltage variations.
Should you encounter insufficient horizontal sweep due to low line voltage, short out R-85 a 47005l, 1 watt resistor located on terminal strip near V-7 (vertical osc. tube). Should horizontal oversweep be present because of high line voltage, remove short from across R-85. The shorting or removal of short across R-85 can be made without removing chassis from cabinet. Simply remove mosonite back and R-85 becomes accessible.
Field Alignment of Tuners
Ordinarily the only adjustments required in the field ore those necessary to compensate for variations in oscillator tube replacements. This con usually be accomplished with the channel #13 oscillator adjustment. If individual channel adjustments are necessary, then proceed as follows: (Since this tuner is of the incremental inductance type, all oscillator adjustments should be made commencing with the higher channel and then proceeding to the lower channel.)
1. Set channel selector to channel #13. Set fine tuning control to electrical center of its range. 2. Adjust channel #13 oscillator adjustment, for best picture and sound. Use a non-metallic screwdriver. 3. Channels #2, #4 and #6 hove slug adjustments and should always be adjusted starting with the higher channel. It
is recommended that channels #13, #6, #4 and #2 slugs, only, be adjusted in the field in that order when necessary. 4. Channels #12 through #7 can be adjusted when required by bending the hairpin inductances through the hole provided 5. Channels #3 and #5 split -coil windings should not have to be compressed or separated ordinarily.
CHANNELS 2-12 OSC. ADJ.
VHF CHANNEL SELECTOR
IF OUTPUT 43.25111C
d(
FINE TUNING
C -T IF COUPLING
TRIMMER
TEST POINT
ED) AUDIO ,VIDEO B IF BOARD
T-1 PRIMARY (130T.1 4.514C.
[a I SECONDARY(TOP/ 4.5 MC
CHANNEL 13
OSC. ADJ. TUNER 471055, CHASSIS 120380 H
L-2
43.25 MC
,._., T-9
045. kv4.5111C
L-4 TOP
NOTE+ "TOP" MEANS FURTHEST FROM CHASSIS OR ETCHED BOARD.
UHF TUNING
CHANNELS 2-12 OSC ADJ.
VHF CHANNEL SELECTOR
CRYSTAL 1-11N82A
UHF FINE TUNING
C -T IF COUPLING
TRIMMER
IF OUTPUT/ 43.25MC
IF INPUT FROM U F
0 d1
CANT.
OT -3 43.25C
T-4 sor
45.5 MC
T-6
HORIZ.
O FRED.
L-9
H.O.T.
FINE
Vi
TUNING
CHANNEL 13 OSC. ADJ
GEAR AND FRICTION PLATE ASSEMBLY
(SEE PARTS LIST./
) UHF SHAFTS GEAR AND CLUICH 5"-ASSEMBLY (SEE PARTS LIST .I
TUNER 471056, CHASSIS 120381-M
NOTE, UHF SHAFT MOUNTING PLATE 19621551 IS RIVETED TO UHF TUNER AND IS NOT SEPERATE AS INDICATED IN PARTS LIST.
ADJUSTABLE WITH NYLON HEX HEAD TOOL
THRU BACK OF SET
T
HORIZ PHASE
FUSE
R-67 iiiTire R-64 VERT LIN
J-1
1.,) EXTERNAL
HORIZ. AND VERT SWEEP BOARD
TR-31
1,;_%VERT. SIZE
PICTURE
STABILIZER
AC INTERLOCK
LISTENING JACK
0 0 SW. -2
PHXO-2NO 1
TV-PHONO SWITCH
ALIGNMENT POINT DIAGRAM
24
VOLUME TV -14, MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1958 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION EMERSON Chassis 120380H, 120381M, 120388H, 120389M, Continued
UHF -VHF Tuner 471056. - This tuner incorporates a 13 -position, incremental inductance -type VHF tuner plus a 70 channel UHF tuner. Separate VHF and UHF antenna inputs are provided. A 2AF4 is used as the UHF oscillator and a 1N82A as the UHF mixer crystal. The 13th position on the VHF tuner corresponds to the UHF position and converts the VHF tuner to two additional stages of IF. Amplification.
DISASSEMBLY
To Remove Safety Glass
21" Metal Cabinet -Table Model - Pull off knobs at top front of cabinet. Remove screws from underside of cabinet front rail,Glass will slide down. Insert fingers into holes where shafts protrude through glass. Tilt glass forward to clear shafts and lift out. To replace glass reverse above procedure.
To Remove Mask
21" Metal Cabinet -Table Model - Remove safety gloss and remove two Phillips head screws holding mask to picture tube top corner brackets.
To Remove Picture Tube
1. Remove safety glass, mask and mosonite back. 2. Remove picture tube socket and high voltage lead (Be sure to discharge high voltage).
3. Loosen.yoke clamp.
4. Remove four screws holding picture tube support strap ears to bracket. 5. Remove picture tube through front of cabinet, being ccreful to guide and support deflection yoke as it slides off picture rube neck.
BLUE LEAD
AUDIO OUTPUT
TO TV- PHONO
TRANSFORMER
TO TV-PHONO 90/.
TO +2459
---,
SWITCH IOPP. SIDE OF THIS BOARD)
TO C-29 70..04Ams ON SWEEP BOARD
(MOUND,
TO R-31 PIG. STAB.
" ibM11I4N.':,, 1 c -4
e_, 2 SIM
2-0-0
R -,
..7.0.4-741 1004
L"--,..__!.....
--
41(1.2
53
TO R-29
el 14/ 278 wdb,,
BRIGHTNESS CONTROL
O
TO 4-7
I
VIEVIN-
R-2.22K
.x
--K. TO 4160V
0
Mint,
ts9,032.1.1
,;;-35
TO PIN 71 CC V -I3 IOWA
''Qill:`,-- TO PIN 7 CRT
TO +160V.-
TUNER
.
... 1
IF OUTPUT Wit/M-7-129
CABLE
S'------------
_______A 4-11
-A
.-----1\0".774-4
470
7-.:4,-.A.54.1.4. .14_,.:Xx/72 1, 19
jil. 1, ,j
f
P1-....44_.
i
27K
.,,. R -I
._,,,v._. 100
i .2., sHo
ET
R-33 CONTRAST CONTROL
--N. To Tv -PHONO SWITCH
TO R 52,27K ON SWEEP BOARD
-Th. WI \ 4-4,17.,-. ,/, ----9
:::-.1,19-
e...1.....s..z.,.,..O. A vie
vi
-w,. .0.-. .,,
TO R-31 PICTURE STABILIZER TO R-32, 5K
TO TUNER FiL
10 TUNER AGC
TO Tv-PHONO SWITCH
AUDIO- VIDEO AND I.F. PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD
2 18
O
1 a pp
0
-.C0.5C1507)=3.0C
_E cam - - -o
E ti
RE
e =2
8.1 o. Eg.g gN v
s
Ci3t'-Errit
O x
toE1a5.8cr)_0.5560t.-,F,
- acv a g
-4!
on
:
Vj
E e 0 0t ZZ i o
-ouo>EEclu"uo'.o.>!
t '..42 O
-a -s)
-c
e
°
0.D.c"oooc.o2-ocg°E0.uc=aocc°---0 o
:5 >
O
. e0
70 15
E o
.S.-78t2tat-,,EJe 4
E
5" Q Al
-x
O
Q0
5 g--=
c -c 7 0In
H-
O 0c
o
-c
> -
N0 oo
0 -C
u°
_o
N 0x
2.of
2CRaC. L0'V
0
on
oo c
- -2 C5 « .5
u -0
TO R-64
VERT. SIZE CONTROL
TO R-51 NOR. HOLD CONTROL
TO R-26 IF -VIDEO AND SOUND
BOARD
TO R-67 VERT. LIN.
CONTROL
TO PIN 3 12W6
TO R-62 VERT. HOLD -
CONTROL
ITOPINGS .1
TO PIN 2 12W6
TO PIN 6 12W6
TO JUNCTION R-24 R 25 IF- VIDEO AND SOUND BOARD
8.33,3
4.40.93.3
TO PIN 3
- gepK
tell11RIN
TO + 255V
0.4
LEG
TO +160V
TO PINS 1204
HORIZONTAL AND VERTICAL SWEEP PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD
25
VOLUME TV -14, MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1958 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
F-1
FuS
-_13 5
25 MP
SW
C53
120 NIFO
SE -2
SE-1
LOW VOLTAGE R ICT IF II RS
RESISTORS ARE IN OHMS) K 1000 OHMS) AND V2 WATT UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED. CAPACITORS LESS THAN UNITY ARE IN MFD CAPACITORS GREATER THAN UNITY ARE IN WEDS UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED.
IT,T. SIGNIFIES CERAMIC OR MICA CAPACITORS.
SIGNIFIES TUBULAR CAPACITORS
202s
C-54
1120 IFFD
260 V
0 I120C-55 WO
*255 V
245 V
,7,z 14
.0- 57 I 40 NED
4160V
EMERSON Chassis 120380H, 120381M Schematic Diagram
(See page following, over, for schematic details on Chassis 120388H, 120389M.)
UHF ANTENNA
VHF ANTENNA 300 OHMS BALLANCED
R -F2
120060 v -s
1204 2-12
2
77
aoAno. 1 !NEATER CONNECTIONS OF a ,SOUND AND VIDEO
I ACV SW
112666T I
SAAB
SAGS
5U11
U -S
V-7 I V-13
v-2
V-3
V-1
126770 V-6
50111
3CB6
v-5 1 -IS v -A
I 5 1111
,
I'
I
7
I
HEATER
CONNECTIONS OF I
OSCILLATOR SD
cis°
7
ToVI
TUUNFN-vHEFR
PART ND I 0 5 6 ([MA5113120311-11
ONLY)
rUHF SECTION
V-16 2AF4ALoo osc WYE I
.-VHF SECTION
VHF
TUNER
PART NO 4 7 1 0 5 5 (CHASSIS Izo3ao-m
ONLY)
SW -1
ON -OFF SWITCH ION VOLUME CONTROL)
6 SAFETY ATERLOCA
ccvo
I P-1
X
I
E AT
ER S 21 OAP4 v -i0
CONNECTIONS OF TUNER F(USED ON CNASSIS NO 12030C POSIT)
I
SACS
V-14
SATS V-15
5
II, VOLTS AC LINE ISO CPU,
)-HEATER CONNECTIONS OF TUNE
USED ON CHASSIS NO120561-10 ONLY)
2AFIA"I tIgn SACS
V -I6
V -I5
5-14
.
L
4
J
CHASSIS NOS. 120380-H , 120381-M
V-14 311105R F AMP
V-15 5AT8
YIYER
V -15(A) 5AT8
- TO C-9
C
50-160
V-14 38C5 6s AMP
V-15 5AT8 :NJ
I - V5-1058(A)
11C Lima
USED ON UHF -VHF CHASSIS) ONLY
TO HEATER
STRING
TO HEATER
STRING
To Remove Chassis from Col:amid
VT"
1. Remove all knobs and masonite back.
2. From the bock of cabinet remove 2 screws which hold the dual contrast volume and on -off control to cabinet bracket.
3. Remove antenna terminal strip and disconnect speaker leads.
4.
Remove two screws holding and 120389M chassis only.
tuner
support
bracket
to
side
of
cabinet.
The
same
two
screws
also
support
radio
section
on
120388H
3. Remove one screw holding rear tuner support brace to rear side of cabinet.
6. Remove two Phillips head screws that hold control escutcheon to side control ass'y.
7. Remove 5 screws which hold chassis to base of cabinet.
8. Remove picture tube socket, and high voltage lead. (Be sure to discharge high voltage.)
9.
Loosen yoke clamp picture tube neck.
and
pull
chassis
out
towards
rear
of
cabinet,
being
careful
to
guide
and
support
deflection
yoke
as
it
slides
off
CONDITIONS FOR TAKING VOLTAGE AND RESISTANCE READINGS
The voltage and resistance measurements listed were taken on Chassis 120380H (no triangle code).
Due to component variations, voltage and resistance readings noticed if chassis is not coded as mentioned above.
may vary slightly from those given here. Slight variations may also be
The picture, tube, deflection yoke and high tube is not connected to chassis insert test
voltage circuits picture tube or
swheorret
pcionnsn1ectote8d
itno
take the following readings and waveshapes. If picture picture tube socket to complete filament circuit.
1. 2.
Antenna disconnected and antenna terminals shorted on tuner and connected Line voltage 117 volts (Disconnect power for resistance readings).
to
chassis
(use
short
leads).
3.
3
-volt bias battery connected to BIAS BATTERY USED FOR
A.G.C. circuit, positive terminal VOLTAGE READINGS ONLY.
to
chassis,
negative
terminal
to
junction
of
R-13,
R-15.
4. All controls in position for normal picture. (Varied when it directly affects reading.)
5. All measurements taken with a vacuum tube voltmeter and ohmmeter.
6. All readings listed in tables were taken between points shown and chassis.
7. Resistance readings are given in ohms unless otherwise noted.
8. N.C. denotes no connection.
WAVE SHAPE ANALYSIS CHART To accurately observe the wave shapes, the relatively high input capacity of an oscilloscope must be reduced so as not to change the operating characteristics of the television set. Failure to do this will result in wrong wave shape readings. This is accomplished by using an Emerson low capacity probe as outlined previously in the service note for models 686L, 687L and 696L using chassis 120142-B which was issued at an earlier date.
1. Connect antenna and tune receiver to channel where best reception has been obtained in the past. 2. Low end of the probe is connected to CHASSIS and the contrast control is set for MAXIMUM UNDISTORTED CONTRAST. 3. The 30 and 7875 C.P.S. oscilloscope sweep settings are used so as to permit observation of two cycles of the wave shape.
NOTE: A wove shape seen on your oscilloscope may be upside down from same wave shape shown here. This will depend on the number of stages of amplification in the oscilloscope used.
26
VOLUME TV -14, MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1958 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
EMERSON Chassis 120380H and 120381M Schematic Diagram
SOUND LIMITER V -1(A)
SUB 1300
T-1
AUDIO AMPLIFIER
V-2 3AV6
AUDIO OUTPUT
V-3
5145
J -1
EXTERNAL L11=111116
LAM
SP -1
IA
-07v -
C-6
0047
T-2
240v
+2451/ I +1500
x4 260 V
&M' 1I
INPUT I MONO
r
NI MIA Or
611,1114111
NWOMoNNO
rONTROL BRACKLT
ROWS AT CONTROLS OTOL AT( CIOCKWISI
ROTATION
2200'
R-6
220 X
377I 7
SCHEMATIC
SHOWING CONNECTION OF CONTROL INIACEELT 1 PC TENTIOMETERS R-7.
INCL SW -1. i-29, R-33, R- 57 AND R-62 0 CHASSIS BASE
ALL POINTS PANNED
ARE TIED
TO CONTRO BRACH!
1ST VIDEO AMP
V-4 3CB6
232
E
2= JET i=-
2ND VIDEO I F.AMP.
N
SOUND AMP
1
V-5(A)SAMS
b
=
VIDEO 5 AG DETECTOR
V-5(13)5AMB
T-4
SYNC SEPARA TO R
V -1(B)
SUB
L-6
330
R-25 MP'
R-27
070 .k
*2A
'..
71-
M8
R-26 1;1°-
470
+160V
R-29 A
200 A BRIGHTNESS I L._ AONTROL I1
I6 7
I
4a-3, LOON
PICTURE
STABILIZER
I
5-32
L-6Ig 660 UM
'I
O
R-33 4* 100
R-54
11,._ CONTRASTc0.aoL
'')/,mm..4.44..- .. .,-.J 0 '
30 CPS
7675 CPS
Sr .11 MUM
141415041011 30 CPS
13SY P-11
7875 CPS
1600
PICTURE TUBE
3 CENTERING ;55E MOLY +255 V
141011 VOLTAGE
RECTIFIER
V -II
- 183 GT
'
SYNC PHASE INVERTER
V- 7(A) 6CG7
40V
MEG
4160
IC6613
7
C- 11.
HORIZONTAL HORIZONTAL
CONTROL TUBE OSCILLATOR
V -8(A) V-8(8)
e22' 6 C G 7
6CG7
7575 CPS
N-.15,
HORIZONTAL OUTPUT
V-9
121:1126A
:x 12 .8;
.50 TO 2100 -3.5v TO
6.0V C-30
C-26 BZ N-59 R-40 220K
330A $0 TO ay
047
R-42 62 IC
C-29 .0221
1.04,
N-43
R-44 1320H
C.-5;3
-s:..
30 CPS
DIV
*
N -OS
8200
T-6,
DV
C 31. 90A
It -5 330
R-47206
2
R-48
330 N
711T5 CPS
3.0r Fr
V R-31 30 CP 3300
3
I
-iII
I
C.32
".-c"
IC."4
5-95 106
2W
R-65-- 470R-085
MAY GE SHORTED
1 W
ON SOME SETS
eRA-83 10
C-36
I
RI
NETT-Sn
+255 V
I
rat, -255,,
0-18411
1140-p I s
-§00
HORIZONTAL HOLD
CONTROL
7675 CPS
..J
V-12 121:14
DAMPER
50v11-114........
i
........j
d I Czar
VERTICAL OUTPUT
V- 3
C-,38
30 CPS N......1 7 I2W6GT T-7
1"
255
V TO 2110
-14y 2I
VERT OSCILLATOR
V -7( B) 6CG7
R-61 4700
R-63 2206
COI .0033
R-65
2.2 MEG
CA?
2441ss.-----1/35 60A:L
I R10-0ga
HA
osTaxv
i 7 V,
160
RI
I
icT 31:41
IM" 'H
0087
L-10
HOB
I ,iCiOiI4LSA111
18A.
18.A.
,,ENT COILS
L-11
IAA
DEFLECTION - YOKE
R -6
1.0 MEG
79 2 MIRY g4CWTS.111
-.VERTICAL NOLO
CONTROL
CI
R-60
22
3.3
VERY LINEARITY CONTROL
V *2155 V
27
VOLUME TV -14, MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1958 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
RADIO CHASSIS
(12
4004,S, 4 C"
4144110 COW
V-11
3666
.
Xrel
T-9
010v r .
I
14AprO 444114eOf
V -Ill 39A6
1
EMERSON Chassis 120388H, 120389M, etc. Service material continued.
oak.uAm 4unt
.P..ript0 OuND Pule Adam swop
SAYS
me
°) rat,I.WIT v-14 WS. I 4141. o V-15 SATIlosc am.
° gAm
To c
TA
R4444/11A414
7.1441' WEIR.
T 4
I
4444
L
AOC 1.144
TO C if
0
:441.1:TIKLOC4O1S4
11raa0.2.....14.441701114141:700 PO -11141
.(1$ 'ScAro
iM6
SE -1 Lozz.curas
fx1 44444 4 .4460
we
TM/ SECTION 0 - 111821..tuoll L-16 2AF4Aux oat I
VHF SECTION TO 11
V -11.35C5 111.1.111 I V-15 SATE ?A: a
444.111V
irolro
I tz:
I-1414,0
I
-I
v -15(A) SATE
TUNER
PART MO 4T1OSA
'2147411
o P"
1111414
F H. 1AT.
Nix.
1,?:1
NT Vtinn is °A.
L
1--- 1 -- 1 n 1.1 . ,;..,
`4°Irt Cc.gi
=_1
FIATI t0=11411.4 Of WO T1A44111
n I
nI
1 ...MO. 4 . Lo. Ammo muses
R0m1414s11.4114.111
go ....1 AMID
to. coos 1.o tet WATT WOOS
;...vavan;::::ruza4=LIggra,--..
A 441111115 CIRARIC. OR RICA CAPACiT0411 t HAW. 411411.14A4 CAPACi TORS
rid -
i
i
LIM OA CRAMS 1204411- 11 04.1.11
--77,7trzz: ..--1
1
-15 *IA
,
I
LI
.
,
...I:7
a=........
1
__I
5.4
s::... %*
olquATOR ADANA
...
_J iluVizr"..
C
3 44,44..
YZ11,9
it1141 '-1111
,;,ntlxr
tAx.
tit
w.
:0.11
*. er
15
ICE
ExatLy
Ix tfr
7: *Aar
-0.41
L
TA' =5
TV SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM - CHASSIS 120388H, 120389M
TUNER 471055,CHASSIS 120380-H
AUDIO ,VIDEO AND I.F BOARD
3AV6
5AQ5
AUDIO OUTPUT
LIMITER & SYNC. SEP.
AUDIO AMPL.
12677A
VIDEO OUTPUT
3CB6 In VIDEO I.F AMP
L-13
lour
1.5 ANS
L
21 VIDEO AMR,
aAUDIOe AMP. VIDEO AGC DETECTOR
12W667
VERT.
OUTPUT
6C67
VERT. OSC. 8 SYNC. PHASE
INVERTER
6037
HORIZONTAL
OSCILLATOR AND CONTROL
R-72 41x.
12006A
HORIZ. OUTPUT
A.C. INTERLOCK PLUG 14
11330T N.V. RECTIFIER
H.O.T.
TO CRT
TUNER 471056, CHASSIS 120381-M
L
TUBE LOCATION DIAGRAM
HORIZ. AND VERT. SWEEP BOARD NOTE: - INDICATES GAP BETWEEN PINS 187 (OR 9) ON MINIATURE SOCKETS OR KEYING FOR OCTAL SOCKETS.
28
VOLUME TV -14, MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1958 TELEVISION SERVICING INFOR AATION
Emerson Television
MODELS USING CHPSSIS: 120382 HC, H, 383 MC, M 120386 HC, H, 387 MC, M 120390 HC, H, 391 MC, M
TYPE VHF RECEIVERS UHF -VHF RECEIVERS
MODEL NUMBER
1276 1290 1288 1277 1291
1289
TV CHASSIS
120382 HC, H 120386 HC, H 120390 HC, H 120383 MC, M 120387 MC, M
120391 MC, M
TUBE SIZE
17AVP4A 21CBP4A 17AVP4A
21CBP4A
TV TUNER
471041
471071 -VHF 471072 -UHF 471071 -VHF 471073 -UHF
Circuit diagram of combination chassis is on pages 30-31. The straight type TV sets are similar to the TV sections and omit switching wiring, radio section, and record changer. Alignment for all sets is on page 32.
Mechanically, these sets ore very convenient to service due to such features as: picture tube removable from the front, hor zontally mounted chassis, use of two separate printed circuit boards (which allow for the replacement of many parts without having to remove the chassis), tubes easily accessible, etc. Console combination models incorporate twin speakers, audio tone control, 4 speed automatic changer and a radio which operates through the audio section of the TV chassis. Those chassis which use an etched circuit board containing coyplates are identified by the letter C following the chassis #.
To Remove Safety Glass
17" table and console models - Remove screws from glass retainer bracket located at top front of cabinet. Use either end of bracket as a means to engage top edge of glass and tilt forward. Lift glass out.
21" console model - Pull off knobs at top front of cabinet. Remove screws from glass retainer bracket located top front of cabinet and remove retainer bracket. Insert fingers into holes where shafts protrude through glass; pull top of glass away from cabinet about 3" and lift out of bottom rail.
To replace glass, reverse above procedures.
To Remove Mask
17" table and console models - Remove safety gloss, top front knobs and remove two screws holding mask to top front of cabinet.
21" console model - Remove safety gloss and remove two Phillips head screws holding mask to picture tube top corner bracket.
TO R-44 VERT. SIZE CONTROL
TO TI ---ST N011.14DLO CONTROL
TO R -as VL VIOED MO SOW*
BOARD
TO 114.115V -41
TO AUCTION
C R -r r,
I
-
pa
TO PSI SUS V-1 aN NDEb BOARD
TO .1.125V
TO PINS MAE
FIGURE 8 - HORIZONTAL AND VERTICAL SWEEP PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD
TO VONT. SOSi.
Mir TOCONNOTRNCEILNOLO
S IN
P 2D
"
-'
-TO R-34
c-30
TO VER11.44 CONTRIS. Ay
10 KIM COITSOL Rwi TO MS V-13 WIN
TORN 7 V-ISOMS
ouw
TO NW ININIT41 ON VOW ROSRO
10 05RRrm
FIGURE 9 - HORIZONTAL AND VERTICAL SWEEP PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD (COUPLATE VERSION)
29
VOLUME TV -14, MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1958 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION 1..
EMERSON TELEVISION Chassis 120386HC, -H, 120387MC, -M, 120390HC, -H, 120391MC, -M, Diagram
V- SLOT CARTRIDGE ACTIVATOR
SELECTOR BAR
TONE ANN
STYLUS AND SELECTOR BAR EMERSON PT. MO.
1160627 SONOTONE PT. NO. 9967 -
SPRING CLIP
FIGURE 3 - STYLUS ASSEMBLY REMOVAL
O
4
.2Cg9reW
44
(V
RADIO CHASSIS
RADIO CONVERTER
V-17
38E6
PIAAFII AT 5944
1-9
RADIO I.F. AMPLIFIER
V-18 39A6
HEARER AT 055 AC
T -I0
rt t t ,f eCERA.
C
62 n.
L-13 - /
//
11,
R-86
Ci 22060
PI
I-47.'
/C-6513
cif?
_E-)1 AVG Li I
F
.4v50
1
11-410
4700
4
R-92
3.3 MEG
p4EY
UHF ANTENNA
IVNHPFUrTPU?VTTHIF.,TcU"N.E=R,_,d7
41/41(341.---7
012s-- 1
V -I4 313C5R., 22171 V-15 5AT80sc ems
3 FRONT REAR
V -15(A)
VHF
SATE
SYNC SEPARATOR
V -1(A) SUB
L-2
r
iig
5.28
MI
_J L
co
U
UU
2
22
M Si
N 0p)5
, * 0B. 0 - 2 0P-0P0I 85)
17- NI
CC CO WK
D f U2
TO PHONO SOCKET
X -2
FRONT
SW -2 USED ON UHf- VHF SETS
SHOWN IN EXTREME COUNTERCLOCKWISE
POSMON,VIEWED FROM KNOB END- ( TV /
- Tv POSITIONS: 1
- 2
PHONO
3 - RA010
11;
SE -1
SW-2
USED ON VHF SETS SHOWN IN [ETREMI COUNTERCLOCKWISE POSITION,VIEWED FROM KNOB 160110).
PCW10 I - Tv 2 - INIONO 3 - RADIO
NOTE 9 ON RADIO OR PlICNO POSITIONS. VHF ANTENNA INPUT
+135V 01+15501
I25ONFO
4115V
+125 V 61+130,11
+115 91+13001 C-56 It20111FD
SV
HEATER
C
STRING
UHFNTENNA INPUT
IC-
R-15 4706
_ __ UHF SECTION
17
''..L PART NO.471072
0 -3 1N82A etAl1412 --I
L-16 2AF4Auttt osc
el VHF SECTION -1
PART I40.471071 CF1.387-140,011391-WCOU
V -14 38C5 R F AMP I
V-15 5AT 8 'Via 1:1 ;
1/41LASSW 387ONLY PT. N0.47
I USED ON CH.38
HEATER STRING
C - T8
I "°
TUNER UMF - VPIF
0350 ON CHASMS 120387- MCO21 120391-MC1NI
V -I5 (A) 5AT8
5W
LOW VOLTAGE
RECTIFIER
10111 ON 04/15.120386,1001) N 390,41W
SOHN ON CHA3.1833117-111002 /EX
391-51C(90
F- 1
122,240TA
FUSE LOA 225501)8r10 12'0'4
I
A-724 V-9
V -I2
I
6C67 V-8
II
C-22
ATER STRING
Agi
6vC-G7T
1,G2T"
I V -I3
I- HEATER CONNECTIONS OF VIDEO AND SOUND L F BOARD
I2C5
I
12CSN2d113 SANS 0212o05 SUS
I v-2
V-3
V -I
129370 v - 6
SAMS
3C86
V-5 L -I6 V-4 I
1.5 UMN
5
3
TO PROMO SOCKET
HEATER
X -2
I CONNECTIONS Of 05C I BDARp
1
Ca? I IC.63'i
I
77
RECORD CHANGER
LIO:11 II PICK-UP
)
SW -3
30.46
v-te
313E6
I
V -IT
I -AF-Ad\r
IIL ATER CONNECTIONS I L211 RADIO CHASSISJ
MOTOR
RECORD CHANGER CaIR
P -3
I PIN SIN Of Pl.
X-3
NOTTOM VIEW
9
or SOCINT
ro-r--0--7d-00
P-1
X-1
[
67 VOLTS AC LINE (60 CPSI
0411 SAFETY NTERLOCK
21C8P4Acw 17AVPIA
V-10
FIE ATER CONNECTIONS OF VHF TUNER, PART NO.471078
38C5 V-14
SATE V -IS
r
ILSECI ONCHAZ415/105.38641C(H)6390:n 11EATE71 FNNECTIONS OF
UNE SECTION
VHF SECTION
2AFAA
V -I6
1-
ORION I
II
SATS V -I 5
3090,43
5
LI.SED ON CHASS4 1103.120387-MCIMI a 381- MO21 j
30
VOLUME TV -14, MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1958 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
CHASSIS NOs120386-HC,H,390-HC,H,387-MC,M,391-MC,M
COUPLASI PART N0 51303,
VIDEO I.F. 8 SOUND I.F. BOARD
SOUND LIMITER
V-1(8) 5U8
AUDIO A/OMER
V-2
co,onre PT NO 2 3052
3AV6
V-3
12C5, 12C5,42CU5 opl2CU5
o
TOO
T,-2
U-00,7
J-1
EFTERNAL LISTENING
JACK
THE LETTER C INDICATES USE OF COUPLATES. ON NON.COUPLATE BOARDS INDIVIDUALLY MOUNTED COMPONENTS OF THE SAME VAL-
UES ARE USED.UNLESS OTNIWWISI NOTED.
SP -1
5 V
VIDEO IF AMP
3C86
E
9-4
470
L.- e, 4.61.01.
0 CISO
ON NON-COUPLATE BOARDS R -I IS 47 K
L
290 VIDEO IF AMP S SOUND AMP
V-5(A)5AM8
R-03 IRO
VIDEOS AOC DETECTOR
V-5(B)5AM8
4
to 7 C-40
OSCILLATOR BOARD
F-9 2200 ria
0 0. --VW
O 9.+125
470
I ;:ifD
+135V
R-7
MEG
VOLUME CONTROL
-0 ;_i_TONkiCtL3NTROL
ARROWS AT CONTROLS INDICATE CLOCKWISE ROTATION
CONTROL BRACKET
C-59
001
POT
SCHEMATIC SHOWING CNINECTION
OF CONTROL EIRACKETIPOTENTIOMETERS 4-7 INCL SW- , R- 29, R -35.R-57 AND R-62 TO CHASSIS
BASE
R-71 220K
ALL POINTS
BID ARE
TIED TO CONTROL BRACKET.
2-22
2.2 MEG
1.4:01111'53I
0
Ci(-22
.01
-14 E-2-
EG
0
O ca;:-- 1
f
VIDEO OUTPUT
-6
33004
V-61213Y7A
I25V R-35
+1250
200K
4 1! OZW"
L -7 66000
k 4
1.4-31
100 K PICTURE STABILIZER
I +1zSV iR-33
600 CONTRAST CONTROL
_J 6 -
RESISTORS ARE IN OHMS I N 1000 OHMS I AND I/2 MATT UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. CAPACITORS LES] THAN UNITY ARE IN WEIS ,CAPAC1 -ORS GREATER THAN UNITY ARE IN MIAFUS UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED.
SIGNIFIES CERAMIC OR MICA CAPACITORS. * SIGNIFIES TUBULAR CAPACITORS.
PICTURE TUBE
17AVP4Ao 12SED ON 386 -NCI
\ 21GBP4A (USED ON CHASSIS 31301c00,9161C1
V-10
M-1[
M-4 C
3 CENTERING ASSEMBLY
3 ION TRAP
(USED WITH ITAVP4A ONLY)
6
M. +125
R-78 27 K
T - 5
NIBS VOLTAGE RECTIFIER
V-11 163 GT
SYNC PHASE INVERTER
V -7(A) 6CG7
I
R-36
I MEG
R-50 6 C-27 ARE HORIZONTAL
NTERcHANOED ON
V 8(A NDN-COUPLATE SOSI-.^ I 'PA TUBI
coumme PANT NO 923056
6 CG7)
HORIZONTAL
OSCILLATOR
V -8(B) 6CC7
PR
330
PC -27 82
I C-26
41250
h7,
+125 V
-4
8201
C -30
Ca3
R-60
100 IC
C.g
VERTICAL
OSCILLATOR
M-7(8)6CG7
0 COUPI,TE MAT NO 923054
44
R-63 R-65
17
2.210110 2.2ME
HORIZONTAL OUTPUT
V-9 25DN6o 25GD6GB
1114ANNAUSEN
gys FirA [1610Avon
M-3
R-77 33K
,,?';Vco's
ANOTE: ErSTISIOOMMF ON CHASSIS NOS3203114314C110 B 387.11CLIO
C-37 IS 82 MMF ON .:01ASSIS N05.120390HC(H) a 491-1/C131)
16
R-57
_SO K
HORIZONTAL HOLD
CONTROL R-58 f00 K
VERTICAL
12 W6 GT
,
C-,2 / SO Y 70
V-120
DAMPER
12AX4GTA
OR
12D4
rl L.-10 c_3.
C-38
VI 5V
.121644EDE I6 ORES I ON 38641C011AND
387M000 I2D4 IS USED ON 390-MCD06391.4.C64
COILS
111.1441.21
SH 1
WIDTH I CONTROL
M-2
-67600
VERT. COILS I
R-69 680
L-11 I
R-
DEFLECTION = YOKE
1
t
R-00
2.28116
-
CVERTICALL SIZE
W117 I CAL LINEARITY -67 kl._CONTROL 500
+1164
31
VOLUME TV -14, MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1958 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
EMERSON Alignment Information, Chassis 120382HC, -H, 120383MC, -M, 120386HC, -H, etc
Video I. F. Alignment
1. 2. 3.
ACCdoojnunnsnteeCcctt-I3T.Fvf.oomrltmabraikaxesimrtgouemAn.ecGraa.pCtao.crliittnyoe.f.loNaetignagtisvheieteldrmoifntaulnteorjumnixcetior ntuRbe13(s, eRe15N,oCte4,beploows)itiavnedtVer.Tm.Vin.aMl .totocjhuanscstiios.n
L8,
R-34.
4. Adjust marker to 45.5 MC and peak T-4 for maximum (keep signal generator output as low as possible.)
5. 6.
ACtaudnobjdnuensrsetehmdciuteacalrdekneomorfsatmocrkii4lxleo3ers.r2sct5iougpbMneeaCltashaloornondaugspgwehnaoitakht t2Tmo0-3au,0,rpk0Lse0-e2rtogathhenmenderTiersa-so8tplo.aor(tn.TiosAunenderjcuerussIrt.ivFsoet.ou). rtfpoinur tmpolaafxcismewuoemfetph(keteoVepp.Tros.Vidgu.nMcae.l gaaenbndoeurcatot2onrnvoeoucltttspauptesawaskeeltoopwpgaeesankpeoraasttsooibrslcteoi.l)lfolosactoinpge
7.
Adjust marker C-1. Limits of
to 45.75 MC. This marker response curve are 30%
should tilt and
appear 60% down with respect 20% peak to valley ratio.-
to
related
peak
of
response
curve.
If
not
at
60%
adjust
NOTE: Part of the procedure calls for use of a "floating" shield over the mixer tube of the tuner. The tube shields now used in the
tuner cannot be removed from their mounts. Instead of a "floating" shield the following method is used.
Take a thin piece of copper or brass foil Y2" by 2" and paste on to a thin piece of onion skin insulation. The insulation should ex-
tend about 1/8" beyond the two long sides and one short side while the foil should extend beyond the insulation on the other short side.
The shim assembly is then slipped in lengthwise to fit between the mixer tube and its shield with the metal foil facing the tube. The
short side with the extended insulation is placed towards chassis while the side with nected to the sweep generator. The shim may now be rotated for maximum coupling as
the foil extending beyond the observed on the oscilloscope.
insulation
is
con-
Sound I.F. Alignment
1. With antenna loosely coupled to set adjust receiver to a weak signal channel.
2.
Place a V.T.V.M. (negative input signal should be such
scale) to junction L-1, that a sharp maximum
R-1 and adjust T-9 and reading can be obtained.
L-4
for
maximum
limiter
voltage
on
V.T.V.M.
Amount
of
3. Connect V.T.V.M. to junction R-5, C-4 (negative scale) and detune ing. (Looking at top of chassis secondary slug is closest to you.)
discriminator
(T-1)
secondary
to
produce
a maximum
negative
read-
4. Adjust primary of T-5 for maximum negative reading.
5.
Re -adjust secondary Repeat steps No. 1-5.
of
discriminator
T-1
towards
original
slug
position
for
minimum
rending
on
R.V.V.M.
Check
audio,
if
distorted.
Alignment of Miracle Picture Lock (Horizontal Oscillator and A.F.C.)
This con be accomplished without removing chassis from cabinet as follows: 1. Turn picture stabilizer (R-31) fully clockwise (minimum resistance) and tune set to a known good channel. 2. Short phasing coil (L-9) by a jumper wire across C-32, .01 mfd capacitor.
3. Rotate horizontal hold control (R-57) fully clockwise (I poking from front of set.)
4.
Starting with horizontal frequency slug (T-6) all the way "out" just locks into sync. Then, turn slug in about 1/2 turn more.
(towards
you
looking
at
back
of
chassis),
rotate
"in"
until
picture
5. 6.
Remove short from phase coil and starting with slug all the way "out", adjust "in" until Turn horizontal hold (R-57) to counterclockwise position to lock picture "in", then tion. If picture falls out of sync, adjust frequency coil slug (T-6) slightly.
picture almost locks turn horizontal hold
into sync (3-4 diagonal bars). back to full clockwise posi-
7. Check for horizontal hold while switching channels. If this is not obtained at extreme clockwise position of horizontal hold control,
turn frequency slug T-6 "in" slightly until desired results are obtained. If excessive squedging
enced *NOTE:
while switching channels, readjust T-6 and L-9 must be adjusted with
phase coil slightly. Check to make a hex head adjustment tool and not
sure no horizontal a screwdriver.
(Christmas Tree effect) bending is introduced at
is experitop of picture.
Adjustment of Picture Stabilizer (R-31)
For local signals, this control (R-28) should be set to its extreme clockwise position (minimum resistance).
If sync improvement is required in electrically noisy areas, the picture stabilizer control (R-31) is turned in a counterclockwise direction until the best sync stability is obtained. Be sure to check all channels for sync instability, since a compromise setting of R-31 might be necessary.
Horizontal Size Adjustment
Width inside
is controlled by an the yoke and vice
aluminum shim inserted -versa to increase width.
between the picture tube neck Then recheck ion trap setting.
and
the
yoke.
To
reduce
width
the
shim
is
placed
further
To Eliminate Barkhausen and/or Snivets
We that
have found that servicemen will
under certain conditions some 25C06 -GA, GB not hove to hand pick 25CD6-GA, GB tubes,
tubes cause we are using
"snivets" in the picture. To eliminate this on ion type of trap around the top portion of
possibility so the 25CD6-GA,
tube. These are factory adjusted and should not usually require simply by turning around tube until snivets and/or Barkhausen Make sure you check all channels received in that area.
isaertlyimfuinrtahteerd.aIdfjunsetmceesnsta. rTyh, itsurtnrotphecatrnapbeovaedrjuasntdedrointattheeonfieceldaifgnaeine.d
be,
CH0A5NCNAEIL,S 242
vNE
WPM.
OUTPUT
43 258.
TES POINTT
FINE TuNING
CHANNEL 13 05C AN TUNER 471041 CHASSIS 120382 H,386H,390H
AU010 ,V10E0 B IF BOARD
T -I ,2jPRIMARY CBOT) 4.510
, SECONDRYITOIN 55C
GEAR AND FRICTION PLATE ASSEMBLY MEE PARTS LISTI
``UHF FINE TUNING
UNE TUNING
CHANNELS 2-12 OSC. AD!
TUNER -471072 CHASSIS-120383M ,387M UN, SNFTS, _GEAR NO' CLUTCH ASSEMBLY (SEE PARTS usn.
C -T IF COUPLWG
3 25. TFWiNAE. IF OUTPUT/
g.drua
0 of
NPUT
TUNER -471071 CHASSIS 120383M,
--1111824
387M,39131
TUNER -47i073 CHASSIS -11220391M
L-2
25mc
O
I
ei5-11c 0 4L5-4wTcOP
OT -3
T4-54.R5O. T
NOTE. -Tor MEANS F RTHEST FROM CHASSIS OR STEREO BOARD.
T-6 414-4
V22O
I=1
R-67
VERT LIN
ADJUlTABLE MITI
®
RORIE PHASE
FUSE
MORIZ ARO VERT SWEEP BOARD
11211gre R-64 VERT SIZE
AC INTERLOCK
LISTEMNG
JACK
X-2
0
TZT-1-.
SW.-2T
EVITT144
14 O.T
v -us
\pl
FIGURE 5 - ALIGNMENT POINT DIAGRAM
32
VOLUME TV -14, MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1958 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
GENERAL ELECTRIC
"Q" Line Receivers, Models 14T016, 14T017, 14T018, 14T020 (and UHF) Material on the next eight pages is exact for the above listed General Electric sets as well as the Hotpoint sets listed below.
"Q" Line Receivers, Models 14S201, 14S202, 14S203, 14S204 (and UHF)
PICTURE TUBE ADJUSTMENTS
YOKE POSITION-Loosen the yoke clamp wing nut. Seat the yoke firmly against the bell of the picture tube and rotate the assembly to correct for any tilt of the picture, squaring the picture within the mask. Tighten the wing nut after adjustment is made.
PICTURE CENTERING-The levers and ring assembly for picture centering are located on the neck of the tube mounted directly on the rear of the yoke. Rotate the levers towards and away from each other to center the picture on the face.
FOCUS-On the back of the picture tube is a focus jumper connector. This is so designed as to connect pins 2 and 6 or 10 and 6 together. Best focus is usually found with pins 2 and 6 connected together (focus potential near ground). A check of focus quality may be made by changing this jumper.
ION TRAP-Power should not be applied to the receiver for extended periods of time without proper adjustment of the ion trap. Rotate and slide the ion trap on the neck of the picture tube to obtain maximum picture brightness without neck shadow and consistent with good focus. Brightness should be kept moderate during the ion trap adjustment.
TO REMOVE THE CHASSIS FROM THE CABINET
Remove any antenna connected to the antenna terminal board. Remove the screws securing the back to the cabinet and the screw holding the back to the chassis. Remove the back assembly.
Since there are no plugs on the speaker, if desired remove the nuts securing the speaker and remove the speaker or unsolder the lead connections to the speaker terminals.
Remove the knobs from the shafts on the side of the cabinet. Remove the picture tube socket, the ion trap, the centering lever assembly and the yoke clamp, the latter secured by a yoke clamp screw wing nut, from the picture tube. Remove the top screw and two bottom chassis screws. Tilt the chassis out from the right side, as viewed from the rear, at the same time pull the yoke back over the neck of the tube. Slide the chassis out over the neck of the tube. The anode should be discharged with a jumper, connected first to the chassis, and then disconnect the anode lead by squeezing the anode clip.
To install the chassis reverse the above procedure remembering: the speaker leads go under the tuner shaft and the picture tube socket is dressed through the center hole so that all leads should be at the rear of the chassis.Tilt the left edge in and slide the chassis into the cabinet to where the control shafts line up with the respective holes. Connect the H.V. anode lead. Slide the yoke over the neck of the tube and then move both the yoke and the chassis forward to position.
Fig. 2. Chassis Removal
In order to remove the picture tube from the cabinet, it is necessary to first remove the chassis from the cabinet as out-
lined.
The picture tube is secured by the clamping action of the cabinet projectors against the rim of the picture tube. Remove the two clamping screws from the top cabinet projection clamps while supporting the rear of the picture tube with one handslide the tube out through the front of the cabinet.
HORIZONTAL AFC CONTROLS:
1. Tune receiver to a weak signal and adjust controls fcr normal operation.
2. Short test point IX to X. 3. Shunt L251 (horizontal stabilizer coil) with 1000 ohms. 4. Adjust horizontal hold potentiometer R267 so that the picture
"floats" back and forth across the screen. Leave R267 set like this. 5. Remove 1000 -ohm shunt across L251, and adjust L251 so that picture again "floats" back and forth across the screen. Leave L25I set like this. 6. Remove connection from test point IX and X.
A WORD OF CAUTION-
THE CAPTIVATION OF THE TUBE SHIELDS IS NECESSARY FOR THE CUSTOMER'S PROTECTION AGAINST SHOCK HAZARD. WHEN SERVICING THIS CHASSIS, BE SURE THAT THE TUBE SHIELDS ARE CAPTIVATED AND THAT THE CHASSIS IS NOT SHORTED TO THE METAL CABINET.
BE SURE THAT THE BLACK SPEAKER LEAD IS CONNECTED TO THE PROPER SPEAKER TERMINAL. DISTORTED AUDIO MAY RESULT WHEN THE LEADS ARE REVERSED.
THE BLACK LEAD BELONGS ON THE BOTTOM OR GROUNDED SPEAKER TERMINAL.
33
VOLUME TV -14, MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1958 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
GENERAL ELECTRIC "Q" Line, Models 14T016, 14T017, 14T018, 14T020
VIDEO I -F SYSTEM
GENERAL NOTES:
1. Allow receiver and alignment equipment at least 20 minutes of warm-up time before proceeding.
2. Turn the volume control to minimum sound output and contrast fully clockwise to maximum. Set channel selector to channel 11 or some other high band channel where oscillator influence is not noted as the fine tuning control is turned.
3. Connect sweep generator to converter stage using a test jig made up of an ungrounded tube shield terminated to ground as specified by the generator manufacturer. Users of General Electric test equipment need not terminate as the attenuator is terminated-see Fig. 10.
4. Connect a 3 -volt bias battery to Test Point II with positive battery lead to chassis.
5. Connect -45V bias on pin 5 of V110 with positive lead going to ground.
6. Connect the scope through a 10,000 -ohm resistor to Test Point III. Calibrate the vertical gain of the scope for 3 volts peak to peak to give 2 inches of deflection. When aligning, keep 2 inches as the 100% base line. Proceed as follows:
CONVERTER SOLDER HOT OUTPUT LEAD TO TUBE SHIELD
INSULATE FROM SHIELD WITH MASKING TAPE OR EQUIV.
`V ,...4.::.
rf 1iV, j ,,[111 111111111
aii.
-.4111
OUTPUT OF SWEEP GEN.
VHF TUNER
7511 RESISTOR, 1/2 WATT CARBON (NOT NEEDED WITH G E ST -4A)
SOLDER OR CLIP TO CHASSIS GROUND
Fig. 10. I -F Sweep Jig
VIDEO I -F ALIGNMENT CHART
STEP
ADJUST
DESIRED RESPONSE
1 L151 to set 42.5 mc marker at 35-40%. 2 T151 to set 45.75 mc marker at 50%. 3 1135 and 1150 for peak region sym-
metry.
41.25MC 7-9%
42.5MC 5-40 45.75MC 50%
K 0 6J316
45.0MC
100%
05%
125%
REMARKS
Adjust L135 simultaneously with L150. 4L25 mc marker is very critical and should be kept between limits of 7 to 9%. Peak of curve may fall between limits of 105 % and 125% using 45 mc as the 100% reference.
Aillifillliii..
i41411,1.1.1.11.1,1w' rLi
1.42 5 MC i
I or .p. -C.-- -
11/111112=
4575MCL
/
: 45.0 MC -
,--. .-1,,. 1*4-4
'11.1111111111P"
FIg. A
VIDEO I -F ALIGNMENT CURVES The two curves shown are obtained from stage -by -stage alignment. Connect scope and bias batteries as in steps 4, 5, and 6 above. The first, Fig. A, is obtained by removing the shielded i-f link from the r -f tuner solder terminal and inserting a signal from the sweep generator into the interconnecting cable. The second, Fig. B, is obtained by shorting pins 5 and 6 of V103 and inserting a sweep signal into pin 1 of V104. Maximum gain of the scope may be necessary to obtain the response of the second curve.
Ail i
1
1 I.
AlipinillNE Aisii iMeILL
iilnl -111mN1ua1rr14n5.7r5-MiC'-m1'1a
OM
iri. 45.0MC LO
1 .,_i
ill'Ir 42.5MC I . 1
NMUMi
IMis1,1'
imliAmpopeP
Fig. B
AUDIO I -F ALIGNMENT
NOTES:
1. Tune in a 'television signal. This will provide a 4.5 mc signal source for audio IF alignment. Keep the volume control turned down unless the speaker is connected.
2. Connect two 100,000 -ohm resistors (in series) between pin No. 2 of V113 (5T8) and chassis.
MIM:DE
.VII3A
AUDIO OE i 1/2
10
C506
330
ES4,
SO1
II. i II
1
L
i. 1 I .1 Ji
a il..
0-
I I
001(
100M
AUDIO ALIGNMENT CHART
Fig. 11. Ratio Detector
CONNECT VTVM OR 20,000
STEP
OHMS/VOLTMETER
ADJUST
METER INDICATION
REMARKS
1 Between Pin No. 2 of V113 L301
and
2 chassis.
T301 primary (rear)
3 Between Test Point V and T301 secondary the center of the two 100,- (front) 000 -ohm resistors.
Adjust for maximum deflection. Adjust for maximum deflection. Adjust for zero volts d -c output.
Repeat steps I, 2, and 3 to assure proper ad justments.
34
VOLUME TV -14, MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1958 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
GENERAL ELECTRIC "Q" Line, Trouble Shooting Chart, Continued
SYMPTOM
CHECK FOR
DEFECTS OF THE SYNC SECTION
A. Weak or no horizontal sync; vertical sync, picture and sound satisfactory
1. Defective phase detector, Y251-2 2. Open capacitors, C251, C258 3. Open resistor, R266 4. Defective sweep components, R255, C253, C254, C256 5. Defective coil, L251
B. Weak or no composite sync, otherwise picture and sound normal
1. Defective V105A 2. Open R170
3. Defective grid components, C159, C163, R165, R169
DEFECTS OF THE HORIZONTAL DEFLECTION CIRCUITS
A. Inadequate picture width
B. Single vertical line in center, sound normal C. Poor horizontal linearity, bright vertical bars, inade-
quate width D. Black "beady" vertical line or lines, receiver normal
otherwise
1. Defective or weak, V109, V110, V112 2. Correct waveshape of driving pulse on grid of V110 3. Low B+ from power supply 4. Defective output transformer, T251 5. Leaky capacitor, C259
1. Open horizontal deflection coils, L252
1. Defective yoke coils, L252 2. Defective damper, V112 3. Defective output transformer, T251
1. Defective output tube, V110 2. Defective yoke coils, L252 3. Defective output transformer, T251
DEFECTS OF THE VERTICAL DEFLECTION CIRCUIT
A. Poor vertical linearity, inadequate height, foldover at bottom
B. Inadequate picture height C. No vertical deflection D. Vertical keystoning
1. Low emission of vertical output tube, V107 2. Defective vertical output transformer, T201 3. Low B+ from power supply 1. Defective vertical tube, V107 2. Low plate voltage on output tube, B+ boost low 3. Change of value of R212 1. Defective vertical tube, V107 2. Open vertical deflection coils, L201 3. Open vertical output transformer, T201 1. Short in vertical deflection coils, L201
MISCELLANEOUS DEFECTS
A. No raster, sound satisfactory B. Brightness control partially or completely inoperative C. Intermittent streaks D. Herringbone or diagonal lines across picture E. Poor focus F. Low brilliance, sound satisfactory
G. Picture blooms
1. Defective picture tube, V106 2. No voltage on first anode of picture tube (B+ boost) pin 10 3. No high voltage -V111. Check horizontal section 4. High bias on cathode of picture tube 1. Defective brightness control, R167 or associated components 2. Leaky capacitor, C162 3. Cathode to grid leak in picture tube, V106 1. High voltage arcing or corona discharge 2. Interference in video signal 1. FM disturbance or other i-f interference -may be eliminated with
wave trap RLW-016 1. Focus potential on pin 6 -jumper may be changed from pin 1 to 6
(ground potential) or pin 6 to 10 (B + boost potential) 2. Ion trap adjustment 1. Low voltage at H.V. anode of picture tube, caused by defective recti-
fier, V111
2. Improper adjustment of ion trap 3. Defective brightness control circuit 4. Low voltage at 1st anode of picture tube (pin 10) 5. Defective picture tube 1. Defective H.V. rectifier, VIII 2. Defective picture tube, V106 3. Open or high value, R171
35
VOLUME TV -14, MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1958 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
GENERAL ELECTRIC "Q" Line, Models 14T016, 14T017, 14T018, 14T020, Continued
17
I
16
I
15
1
14
I
13
I
I0
COMPONENT BOARD "A"
C157 L153
5.6
YI51
L152
L15.7.uusCri
B
CCI54I*" L
22158
_I1_
_
_
_
_
_
_
13300RI60
--I
a 8C04007
,)\40-.800
C155
750
/155
56 C160
047 C
V104G
D
R I70
C15
CI59
R157
22M
C2511
220K RI61
C302
100
.---vvvv--.R21629M
inc146730
20
L301
0*
R253
5 6M
2*
C2N8
* C301 3
12 0
R252 CD
.--.R.t1v66w- *468OK
220K
7
V105©
L155
L156 120
C162
1
C25frr
1200
330
T151
E
S 4
F
CI53
680
In
10
8152 56
R151
3300
3300
2W
RI65
22K 1015A
R307 /11
470K®
*8
R308 tf312 -1-01
G
V103
R309 1 470K
C151
R3I0 120
L I 5 0
91)X.
C3I3 13
ICK
*14
UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED K =1000 M =1,000,000 CAPACITORS MORE THAN 1 = MMF CAPACITORS LESS THAN 1 =MF RESISTORS ARE I /2 WATT INDUCTANCES IN uh
ASTERISKED (*) NUMBERS REPRESENT WIRE WRAP TERMINALS MOUNTED ON COMPONENT BFROOAMRDOFTOHRECROBNONAECRTDINOGRWMIAREINS CHASSIS
Fig. 29. Component Boards Viewed from Conductor Side
TEST POINTS II E15 III B14
IV DIO V 55 VII D13 VIII C2 IX C9 X D8 XI D4
COMPONENT BOARD "A"
CIRCLED 0 LETTERS AB TTOO RR320023 C TO PIN 1 OF V108 D TO C265, R254 E TO R167 BRIGHTNESS F TO +135V G TO +120V H TO VHF TUNER -I -F OUT-
PUT
ASTERISKED (*) NUMBERS
FROM C265
s 32
FROM R266 FROM 167 BRIGHTNESS
** 45
FROM PIN 11 OF V106 FROM PIN 1 OF V106
* 6 FROM C262, R263, R264
* 7 FROM R163 CONTRAST
* 8 FROM PIN 9-V113 * 9 FROM PIN 9-V107 .10 FROM VHF TUNER AGC *11 FROM PIN 7 OF V112 *12 FROM PIN 5 OF V113 *13 FROM T302 *14 GND FOR I -F INPUT
CABLE SHIELD
A3-C207 A3-R205 A3-R212 A4 -C203 A4 -C204 A5-R204 A5-C307 A5-C309 A6-R303 A6-C306 A7 -R203 A7-R302 A8-R301 AA8ll--RR310730 A13-C158 A 1 4 -R160 A15-L153 A16-C156 AI 6-C157 Al 6-L152 A16-L157
COMPONENT LOCATION
A16-Y151 BI -C206 B522--RC221045 B3-R306 B4-C311 B5-C309 B6-T301 B7-C304 58-V108 B9-R 254 BIO -C251 51 1-L301 511-C302 512-R156 B12-R157 513-C159 513-C163 B13 -R I 59 B13 -R161 513-R169
B14 -L154 514-L402 515-C406 515-C407 516-L151 517-C154 B17-C155
517-R158
C2-V 1 I 7 C3 -R216
C3-R217 C5-V113 C5-R304 C5-C315 C5-C404 C7-C308 C8-C265 C10-R252 C 10-R253 C 10-C 258 C11-R 1 66
BY CO-ORDINATES
C 12-C301 C13-V105 C 14 -C160 C 14 -C405 C15 -RI55 C 1 6-V104
D2 -C2I 1 D2 -R263 D3 -C 259 D3-C 260 D3-R262
04-L251 DD57--R-C227516 D8-R251 D8 -C253 D8 -R255 D9-Y251 D9 -C252 DDIIII--CC116612
D12-L156 D13-L155 DI 4 -R162 El -C210 E1-R213 El -R215 E2-C 208 E3-C262 E3-R 264 E4 -R168 E4 -R260 E4 -V109 E5-R269 E6-C254 E6-C267 E6-R270 E7-C266 E13 -C152 E13-R165 E I 4-RI64 E16-T151
E17-R153 FF35--RR226712 F12-C312 F13-R307 F13 -R308 F15-R151 Fl 5-R I 52 F16-V103 F17-C153 GI3 -R310 G14-V114 G14-R309 G14 -C313 GI 5-C151 G16-L150
36
VOLUME TV -14, MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1958 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
GENERAL ELECTRIC "Q" Line, Models 14T016, 14T017, 14T018, 14T020, Continued
9
8
*4
\R254
100K
I
5
1
4
3
2
7
I
6COMPONENT BOARD "B"
I
R 203
*1
*2
R302 0.AiC.30006I 70 7
R224
C204
R205
..,_vys/....041.K
...:(21i12
.C03007\e
I C70-3-/ 800
0 --1-0W0KW-
0 ...._,RA2.A1? .
0 0 T r V1 1 3
0207
(A311 MI6 .)/4500
r-444.4
4R27II4 y C205
1216
3900
47K
V107
C2061
.022
L
A
B
.)1 *7 C265 2
Y251 Y252
CIRCLED LETTERS REPRESENT INTERCONNECTING WIRES TO OTHER CIRCUIT BOARDS OR MAIN CHASSIS ROMAN NUMERALS IN
VI DENOTE TEST
POINTSSQUARES
*-)
C315
800
R299 V109 IIK
C267'\
C254
5000
*6
C
Xc
59
.005
R260 75K R264
75K
R268 I.2M
*C0112-15
*10
-T15- C020602
C208
R26I 270K
D C2101K
R27135 1 M
R2 5 E
11,
jII F
CIRCLED LETTERS
AB-OTONDR2.-1A1-UVDERIOT.CLAINB. LCEONT.
SHIELD
C-FROM R305-VOL. CONT.
DE--TTOO CR235015,-VRO25L2. CONT.
F-TO PIN 3 V114
0HI---TTTOOO
R+216355V
R207
VERT.
HOLD
CONTROL
COMIPONENT BOARD "B"
ASTERISKED (*) NUMBERS
TEST POINTS
1-FROM C251, R170 and PIN 3 2-FRofOVM105R253 * 3-FROM C312, R307 4-FROM C302, L301 *786--FF-FRRROOOMMMRPP2IIN5N23,1R2O2OF5F3VV101306
*109--FFRROOMMRT126021-BLUE .11-FROM R209 HEIGHT CON-
TROL
111245---FFFRRROOOMMMRBR2+6-7FBHOTOUORNSITZE.RH-OFILLD.
TERM.
II
III
E15 B14
IV DIO
V B5
VII
VIII
CD213
IX C9
X D8
XI D4
CAPACITORS C151-015 C152-E13 C153-F17 C154-B17 C155-B17 C156-A16 C157-A16 C158-A13 C159-B13 C160-C14 C161-D11 C162-D11 C163-B13
C 203-A4 CC220045--AB24 C206-B1 C207-A3 C208-E2 CC221101--ED12
C251-B10 C252-D9 C253-D8 C254-E6 C256-D5 CC225589--CD130 C260-D3 C262-E3 C265-C8 C266-E7 C267-E6 C301-C12
C302-1:111
C303-A8 C304-B7 C306-A6 C307-A5 C308-C7 C309-B5 C311-B4 C312-F12 CC331I53--00154
COMPONENT LOCATION
BY SYMBOL
C404-05 CC440056--C81154 C407-B15
RESISTORS R151-F15 R152-F15 R153-E17 R155-C15 RR115567--B81122 R158-B17 R159-1313 R160-A14 R161-B13 R162-D14 R164-E14 R165-E13 R166-C11 R169-B13
R170-All R203-A7 R204-A5 R205-A3 R212-A3 R213-E1 R214-B2 R125-E1 R216-C3 R217-C3 R251-D8 R252-C10 R253-C10 R254-B9 R255-D8 R260-E4 R261-F3 RR226632--DD23 R264-E3 R268-E4 R269-E5 RR227701--ED67
37
R272-F5 R301-A8 RR330023--AA76 R304-05 R306-B3 RR330078--FF1133 R309-014 R310-013
TRANSFORMERS AND COILS T151-E16 TL310510--B0166 L151-B16 L152-A16 L153-A15 L154-B14 L155-D13
L156-D12 L157-A16 L251-D4 L301-B11 L402-B14
TUBES V103-F16 V104-C16 V105-C13 VVV11I001983---EB0548 V114-014 V117-C2
MISCELLANEOUS YI 51-A16 Y251-D9
VOLUME TV -14, MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1958 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
GENERAL ELECTRIC
"Q" Line
VIO8B
AMP -LIMITER
3AU6
T301 RATIO DET
0301 I( 3
1 C302
130V 5.5n
13
0V
$00,
1 47001
t--
V22230004
rcl?'
-- -
R302 470
3A
AUUDDIIO DU. 1/2 518
R303
TLST
PO3INET C309
0307 5000 10K
V113B AUDIO AMP +135V U2578
II
II
R307
11
470K
1315
II
111,
801.1 1
+54V
9
/
0312
10 R30/3
I jri -T456.5301.-10'I1I0I(-6-11-
R305
-.3V
500K
ZR306
VOL.
6.8M OV
4-1
CONTROL
C310
5000
S R309 470K
V II 4
AUDIO OUTPUT 126 45
105V
T302
16313 ....ION
117V
I
RIM11
4v +120V
6310 120
LS 301
CABINET 10314
'4700
+135V
*SCOPE SYNCED AT I/O VERT. FREQUENCY. ** SCOPE SYNCED AT V2 HORIZ. FREQUENCY.
WAVE SHAPES TAKEN WITH NORMAL CONTROL SETTINGS B NORMAL SIGNAL APPLIED.
VOLTAGE MEASUREMENTS ARE IN RESPECT TO CHASSIS WITH A 20,00011 VOLT METER, WITH CONTROLS SET FOR NORMAL OPERATION NO SIGNAL APPLIED,USING 5AXP4 CR TUBE FOR CONTINUITY.
MEASURED WITH VTVM ENCIRCLED LETTERS REFER TO TERMINAL BOARDS OF TEST POINT DIAGRAM
VARIES WITH CONTROL SETTINGS.
UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED
K 1000 1.1 1,000,000
CAPACITORS MORE THAN I. MMF CAPACITORS LESS THAN IMF RESISTORS ARE 1/2 WATT
T301 RATIO DET.
0 onTs3 0' ''. 0
IuI
.0 r0,1*
N'7,'01, (D. Z., To WA 1
CORE
TO TUNER OUTPUT
1-F TERMINAL
TO PIN I OF V103
LI 50 I -F GRID COIL
r
CORE
I 4,
L
VHF ANTENNA
1
61470 I
RI
-Ass%
I
IM
J
TO 8 4 R260
TO R269 256
L 251 HORIZ. STAB.
I-
R2
1
I
1
T
IL
Cl2m 470
III
Ji
r
G3
1
i
I
1
Rg
I
r--Kt--1 UHF L- --04- - -I TO UHF
AN'
TUNER INPUT
IM
I
I
IL- 46740 -Ji
GRO
.5 D5 ro 5 r° V/03
To,;,C,°4"4°Vj0,,c5cc:
7 151 1ST I -F TRANS.
CIRCUIT FOR GERMANIUM RECTIFIER
A
R405
Y402
7.5 1_1E4
IOW
1000
CIRCUIT FOR SELENIUM RECTIFIER
A
R402
Y401
.1:401
FIL. TO UHF
OR GND. I N VHF
ONLY
El+ TO UHF
1-90V
ION 13 POSIL
1"I VHF TUNEROI NTULNYERS RISO 2 200;1 2W L135
1.150
-
-) TEST
IPOINT W
,,,-...)INPUT
L - (UHF ONLY) -
V FIL.
+135V
0151
91
(EARLY RJX-078 AND ALL
RTOJNEXL-RY0I7S7
60 , 7.5V
403
El+ 120V
680
6402C
30MFD
150V
B+ I 35V
V103
I5T 1-F 3086
TEST POINT
II
LI51 DEL ASSEM.
L 301 AUDIO TAKE -OFF
r Lls2 1
3401
nal
TO MIS CY 810.4
858,055
TO
PM OF
4.
TO LiS3 ONO.
TO PIN I OF V108
L403
12.0.4-6-
F401 2A
101C409
D II7V
CO O./
<
JI P1 401 401
0410 10K
Fig. 30. Comp f Wiring
TpwT 3EE
R404
VII0 12 DO6 OR 12.064
VII2
V14
I2AX4G1A 12CA5
V07
12131-17A
V106 PICTURE TUBE
V105 6AU8
3VA 70VAC 58
47V 41 VA 35VAC
VI04 L402 3686 2.206
30W
27
UHF ONLY V100
2AF4
V102
I-5X-8
87
4
VIOI
- -1 3BC5
3
9 4,5
12
TEST POINT 3E11
V109 6067
V108 3AU6
54
I6BOOO
*TREWS.T/ T
211 VII3 5T8
zg37
V103 3686
8V
II V
I6VAC 20VAC 23 VAC
45
34
45
'stir
34
C840060 I
38
1151
ov
130V
RI53 220
t I35V
2.2M
VOLUME TV -14, MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1958 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
GENERAL ELECTRIC "Q" Line Schematic
4/
R204 ',ANN
686
R203 47K
C204 12000
800
R205 100K
ti35V
R211
VERT 3M LIN
70V
/
R 212 3.3M
68V
0205 3900
7
4IV
V107
VERT OSC.- VERTOUTPUT
1213878
BOOST
R214 47K
20007
C206
II
.022
R216 47K
R217 47K
-15V
elk
C24
.0i5
C7,5
8207 75M
VERT HOLD
R209 50K
HEIGHT
R 213
V.ANV IM
45V
.047
6;20V
015
BLUE
11270V
T201 175041
s DEL
2822)109
11511. R220
2200
RED
R218
3300
C2128
OK
-C2128
IOK
384 L201
YOKE
31311.
30V 45V
V104
2ND I -F
3C 86
r -0156-1752
L153\
L154
II
V1054
CLIPPER 1/2 64U8
V10513 VIDEO AMP 1/2 64U8
L151 6 L2,g,,351114
541j'g
.220, LiN64
1
.----1E- - - 10- - 057_-J1
\ \5°.(3r-1.
33V
- 6
2
iEST
11, POINT
IT A -2.6V,
0160
.95
- 135V
B
1.155
ri--1 8160
3300
041760311-r-
4.1 ,6q
8159
56
RISE
220K
I
' I kc*
Di
6
R162 12.7
220K
33085
V
R164 3300
+135V 2W
0550_-"2.2"06-0-84't 135V
750
CI 54- tR157
10K
22M
RI 70 476
863 600
CONTRAST
+135V
IC158
800
R161
2.2
C159
.50
11
I
TEST
0161
TZ POINT
V106 I40P4 OR
1401.44
8
156
C162
11
EITHER PIN 2 OR PIN
10 DEPENDING ON
BEST FOCUS R165 22K
8166 220K
R167 200K
+I35V BR1GH TRESS,
Rt8
47K
10
1:R171 100K
36V
R252 6806
e2651
£2.4V1
_/
10251
A 6.2V 100
HORZ. STAB
V109
HOR Z M V
6067
+135V
."1"
'ea)/ Y252
2.6V
/
L251
730."'
R26,
1M
R25I 560K
TEST POINT
C256
HORZ
78269 II K
.0047
R768 I.2M
HOLD R260 75K
FUISN'T 45V
85V
R261 2706
I07V Nt-71
BoosT
115 V
V110
HORZ. SWEEP OUTPUT
12006
1251 :38011 3
6
0259
ST
i3OKT IX-
1.6 V
R25 2.6V
C2671.44 680
IM
C254
5000 ^ R270 3
47K ---
48V
-0253
.1C266
A 71 -8.2V
R271
82K /
848V
R272 910
R254 .00K
1-0252
1200
/ _**.
5K R265 5
470- 2 V
R8220663
-620026
tOV
R262 106
826410262 75K 5000
1
4 25V
R273
1711
680
I W
+I35V 2
.an a i.3on
Si Tay
* C4026
63051g0
R253
+135V 4 -,566^M^4
0258
A
II 1200
R266 ovvrk 470K
IW
+ 285 V
82J0V
VIII
H V. RECT 1224.
5
135V
VII2
DAMPER
12 A )(43TA
-LC263
3K V
+135V
600
L252 YOKE
604
1600V
Fig. 39. Main Chassis Schematic with Voltages and Wave Shapes
39
VOLUME TV -14, MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1958 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
GENERAL ELECTRIC "Q" Line, Models 14T016, 14T017, 14T018, 14T020, Continued
PRODUCTION CHANGES
The following changes were made in the "Q" Chassis during production.
1. C155 was 680 mmfd. and was changed to 750 mmfd. 2. R264 was 82K and was changed to 75K. 3. C259 was .0047 paper and was changed to .005 ceramic. 4. C263 was 260 mmfd. and was changed to 500 mmfd. 5. C264 240 mmfd. which was connected in parallel with C263 was deleted. 6. C152 was .2 mfd. and was changed to .1 mfd. 7. R170 was 150K and was changed to 47K ohms. The following Resistors and Capacitors may be found as either single components or Resistor -Capacitor combinations: R169 and C163, R301 and C303, R311 and C314, RI and Cl, R2 and C2, R6 and C3, R7 and C4. The local -distant range switch and network was eliminated on late production sets. However, in extremely strong signal areas where an attenuator is needed, the switch and network is available, Part Number REM -010. On some receivers a 2 mmfd. capacitor catalog number RCW003 was placed across the antenna input terminals to increase gain on the high VHF channels. An alternate germanium power rectifier was used during production and is shown on the main schematic, pages 32 and 33. The dual selenium horizontal phase detector diode was replaced by two separate germanium diodes which are direct replacements. Those chassis which used Tuners RJX-095 or RJX-096, a capacitor C116 was included in these tuners which eliminated the need for capacitor C151 on the main chassis board. Capacitor C151 was, therefore, clipped in half but the leads were left in the board. Late production receivers using late production tuner RJX-078 had a capacitor C121 included in the tuner which eliminated the need for capacitor C151 on the main chassis board, therefore, C151 was clipped in half, but the leads were left in the board. A line radiation filter network was added to late production receivers to conform with F.C.C. requirements and consists of L403, C409, and C410. This filter network is shown on the main chassis schematic, pages 32 and 33. During production, one lead of the 2 -amp line fuse was removed from the dip soldered terminal board and connected to the "ON OFF" switch. The tube location chart found on the inside of the
cabinet back shows only the fuse connection on early production sets. To check the fuse in late production sets with the back removed, a continuity check can be made from the top terminal of the 51 -ohm resistor through the "ON -OFF" switch in the "ON" position to the high side of the interlock socket.
Those chassis stamped "21Q" on the upper right-hand corner have the later production vertical circuit. The early production vertical circuit is shown below and the following changes were made as may be seen by comparing the circuit with the latest circuit shown on the main schematic.
R203 was 15K and was changed to 47K. R213 was 470K and was changed to 1 megohm. C202 was .15 mfd. and has been deleted. R210 was 180K and has been deleted. R208 was 470K and has been deleted. R206 was 220K. It was changed to 100K and later deleted. R209 was a 2-megohm separate control. It was changed to a 650K -ohm control with a stop at 150K and is combined with the vertical linearity control. R170, the plate resistor of the clipper, V105A, was changed from 150K to 47K because of this vertical change.
Early Production Vertical Circuit
TO ® +135
TO TERM I BOARD "A"
TO GRND TO GRND
TO®
BOARD" TO F401
TO 8402 R404
RI6 3 CONTRAST
R207 VERT HOLD
R167 BRIGHTNESS
0310 R305 VOL ON -OFF
TO PLATE CAP
OF VIII
L 2 01
L252
TO C4026
TO PIN 3
8+ BOOST'
OF V112 AND 41111111111104
TAP 4 ON
it
v. R219
,$ 1 R220
TO R2 I8 AND 7201 RED LEAD
k
Niiiiiki71,::::j
1111110PP
HORIZONTAL B VERTICAL DEFLECTION COILS
qlb TO PLATE CAP OF VII0
TO PIN 3 OF V112
8.T;No
TO
C4028
TO PIN OF VIII
TO PIN 8 OF VIII
em41°A
it 2 11' 60
Era
TO CHASSIS
R266
TO TER. 7 BOARD A
HORZ. OUTPUT TRANS.
TO R207
TO TERM 16 BOARD "B
TO GRND. TO TERM I ON HORZ. TRANS TO TERM .5 BOARD "B"
TO B+ 13 5
Fig. 32. Component Wiring
V104 3C86 2ND I -F
CENTERING RINGS
V105
6AU8 CLIPPER VIDEO AMP
V114 I2CA5 AUDIO OUT
5103 3C86 1ST 1-F
ION TRAP
VERT LIN R2ii
N\s,
V108
3AU6 AUDIO I -F
V106 140P4 OR 140P4A PICTURE
V102 558 OSC-CONY
V101 3BC5
IF AMP
HEIGHT R209
VII3 5T8
RATIO DET 1ST AUDIOAMP
VI07
12BH7 VERT OSC VERT AMP
V109 6CG7 HOR MULTI
HOR,,,,4CM
AREA SWITCH
SI
VII0 12006 HOR OUT
VIII IX2A H V RECT
X4 DAMPER
L151 cypIep
®POINT
L301 OAUDIO
AUDIO
2ND I -F AMP TEST
POINT
O1151
TEST
CLIPPER VIDEOAMP
WgOTT
TEST POINT
1ST. AMP
PICTURE TUBE
VHF TUNER
L1350= @L101
TEST PoINT j I
05L. MISER
101
UHF
ATIO DET
Oh, 0AMI-2P51 Trg
Fig. 34. Tube and Trimmer Location
NPUT
DAMPER
TUBE B TRIMMER LOCATIONS WITH 13 P05. VHF TUNER 8 UHF TUNER
40
VOLUME TV -14, MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1958 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
GENERAL ELECTRIC
"U2" Line Receivers, used in Models 21C1548, 21C1549, 21C1550, 21C1551, 21C1552, 21C1553, 21C1554, 21C1555, 21C1556, 21T1540, 21T1541, 21T1542, 21T1543, 21T1544, 21C1562, 24C1660, 24C1661, 24C1670, 24C1671, and UHF.
This material includes the latest revised schematic used in U2 line, information on power tuning unit, and other service material. For additional service material and earlier schematic, see pages 85 through 92, in Volume TV -13, ADDITIONAL 1957 Television Servicing Information manual.
SERVICING THE PUSH BUTTON POWER SFINCTOR AND TUNING UNIT
Should there arise a necessity to disassemble the push button selector assembly, this step by step process should be followed. This procedure is set forth here with added notes pertaining to particular points to observe.
It is first necessary to remove the chassis and tube assembly from the cabinet as is required for normal service. The front escutcheon, Item Number 22 on the cutaway view, would be removed from the assembly in order to slide the chassis out of the cabinet either by pulling the ring from the front much the same as removing a large knob or by the
knob escutcheon against the ring when pulling the chassis from the cabinet.
The power selector is then fully exposed for service. The whole assemHly.is secured to the main chassis by three self -tapping screws located on the frame, Item 19. To remove the assembly, disengage the fine tuning plate, Item 13, from the tuner fine tuning cam. Remove the three screws from the frame, Item 19, and pull the assembly forward from the tuner. The selector unit is coupled to the tuner much the same as a knob, with a keyed slot and compression ring, Item 27. The tuner is not secured at the front to the main chassis when the power selector is used but is allowed tonfloaf in order to provide flexibility in the coupling.
Where service to components of the power selector assembly only is required, it is advised not to remove the assembly from the main chassis. One, the wiring need not be disconnected; two, power is available in case operation of the unit is desired; three, the chassis becomes a solid mounting for the assembly making it easier to work on.
The nylon shoe, 18, at the top center to which the contact spring is riveted, is secured with two 1/4 inch hex head screws, 26. This shoe acts as the contact release on the push button contact springs, 6. The position of this shoe determines the time at which the contact is released and the pressure exerted on the selector spring to release it. Correct alignment may be made by loosening the holding screws, 26, and moving the shoe assembly to the desired position. The frame is knurled to securely hold the shoe when locked in place by the
2 screws.
At the front of the center drive shaft, Item 16, is the retaining screw, Item 1, which is removed with a 1/4 inch open end hex wrench. The removal of this screw allows the number disk, 3, to be removed as well as the support ring, Item 2. The support ring is keyed to the center shaft.
The retainer cup, 5, secures the spring contacts to the collector ring assembly, 7, and the center shaft, 16. This cup is forced over the spring contacts and has small splines which grip the center shaft. Pry the cup from the shaft to free the 13 selector spring contacts, 6. The collector ring assembly, 7, will also be free to be removed from the center shaft, 16. Behind this collector ring assembly lies the fine tuning screw support disk,8.
Each of the 12 VHF channels has a fine tuning sc-
rew, 9. The UHF position is marked by the absence of a screw and has a fixed locator pin. To maintain tension on the fine tuning screws, a wire spring is woven around the outside of the screws and is held in place by legs on the support disk.
0 CIRCLED NUMBERS REFER TO ASSEMBLY CAT. NOS.
El POWER BFIRCTOR ASSEMBLY CUTAWAY
BOXED LETTERS REFER
TO GREASING LOCATIONS
41
VOLUME TV -14, MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1958 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION I
GENERAL ELECTRIC "U2" Line
VHF TUNER
r RJX-I09 OR RJX-110 oureTr To7n-r-
1
V103
6CF6 1ST I -F
41 2SMC TRAP
CI7111
68
IL.173
V104
6CF6
2ND I -F
47 25MC TRAP
C1580151
10 0
co
I+
co F.
.04) oG0.1+),
0
of
W
+ '+vas -r. 4 ir,HC21 boo
C E3 -I
c
H H(D
0
C0
(,)
htti,4,"821-40
-IO3SUf.H 0 8 -1 101
f-
B
.0
4. 0
4-, 0
.r1
4-,
0
0
4 I-1
+ 0 7C
C..)
;. 0
t-- J7
08100
...0, .
0 4-,
g
rd
g
-...-cu
HHH
Of
0 Z
f40
.()E 00OEI1.G1G0o0G+..;G4:+-q1 $O0ICf0)TG0G00G10140000-, 740H004, 00H0HP4-P01§114G.-0-4I,0.4-00Oa.i,l
O0 to4g0.44-., g4(C,-,4-H, g4,o4.+-0, ,H40-7, o>F.
al bo...4
4-,
Ho4c-a1H0
TS F. 2' co 0 -1 -1 4.1
CO 0
0 +GI 0 4-,
0 0CO
0
4-, 01
-0--4-F.,0.
+0, P.
t0 .
Gcr.4-c,o
+
mi
H
p HG 0.974 4-, 0 ,Fa. rril 0Ia0l .64-7, 0g o2
+' V
V102A
CONY TEST
POINT + V
RI94 500 (RJX-110 ONLY)
BRN
+90
TO UHF TUNER
FA 4275 +135
I4MA
6M I,
A
TO 7171 AUDIO TAKE -OFF
VII3A
1/2 68w8 AUDIO I -F AMP
R 1 67
2.2M
1C22168
R 50
T 33
Liip5v?
CI52
Ci5I
800
18
A 41_715215w TRAP
L152
a-.98
R 151
5600
2
.6ti
RI52 47
7151
200V
4$
A.92 205V
5
7 120Vci
6
Il 800
-0-1l5f4-
156 800
680 RI53 t R134 6800P 6900
I W
.(111155 10 K
71I5V
- AV
8196 47
CIS?
330
R157
6800
7152
1 59
RI
8151
22K
C153
E TEST
POINr
1-F AGC
VOLTAGE MEASUREMENTS ARE IN RESPECT TO CHASSIS WITH A 20.0000 / VOLT METER. WITH CONTROLS SET FOR NORMAL OPERATION. NO SIGNAL APPLIED.
AMEASURED WITH VTVM VARIES WITH CONTRAST CONTROL
UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED
K 1000
M I 000,000
CAPACITORS MORE THAN Ippf
CAPACITORS LESS THAN I. p I
RESISTORS ARE 1/2 WATT
WAVE SHAPES TAKEN WITH NORMAL CONTROL SETT'',
A NORMAL SIGNAL APPLIED.
C169 20K
VII4A 1 / 2 6T8 TEST,
RATIO GET. POINT.
VII4B
1/4 678
AUDIO AMP.
V115 6A55
CUT JUMPER IF SET
OVERLOADS
RIBS 2 2M
6
0
AUDIO OUTPUT
R175
20M
I
VII4C
1/4 6T13
H1 80 80
23
20 b0b tO 0
3:1,i
151 o
O
.o8
O
4
4-,
4-44-0
1/40
0
0 CV
5', E0 0V
4-, 4. al
..-1 ;4
f -I O
0 000 -1 4-,
JD 4,
7
4-, H 00
CO 04 1
00 0
19 0 0.1
40 HO)
> G00
. OP1>3) 4-, 4-,
EL, o to
41
E0 ,
.G0t5i..0.0600i40778-:
0 F0-1 In
H r--1 r-1
W
1'2)4' a'
F..
.0
k-1
,00-;
t 0 g0 0F.
.0P.. 4, 40-,
li al HH
"-i-i
> a
,0 0 11 c., a!
4-, KCi
03
a00:JP0.
.-I 4-,
gBPali
t00i
0
,a
40
g 4-,
0 V
$0S4 crt0.
0 0 4-,
0
5)
g 2 1,1
I go
1:4 G er4
HPa0alCG4F.e0.40),
f4
$4 ,-I
_p0q F0. 0044-1-.
'01401c1i
Xf t4 -1
C-- 7 -4- 04
G 0 .1-1 +)
t90t>n cj
0 +. 0
00H 4g-)00
C3 5000
El 0 -0
0 4-, 0F.4 Ii
H
E4
0)
0 40-, t--
0GfHc1 c 00G04014
r
T300
8502
%AA I I
- ;303 -iirC 3-6K3FII_
220 I I± 30327AK
;L_
C3g
1
11-
1
I
J
v0BuR04! 4I 1-
mia 2.3V
R3OTC t 68V9
33K 5.
1 C308 ep
-2.3V
I L4,1 8i
Cyr--T1.
4b6
LR 309 3 3 M
R 311
V470K
C3A K J.6R230I2K
.5
120V
R313 560K
8301 3300
R310 vV%
120
+135V
71
+275V
258V3LUE
4501\ 7301
1--
C81 0r,,411
r.
245V
6
R314 RED
12 K
-jr
1' 2...,i2
I "I"' 401
C3118
2018',;_l= C3IIA
600;1"
200V
1113154
330%
1W
L I
LI __K2
T
j
1
r -
1
1
3
1
55MA
V +275V
-1 NLOT-E-
FOR 2 SPEAKER MODEL USE WIRING 1 8 2, 3 SPEAKER MODELS - I.:
V00 t-o1 -P0I
g00 IH0n G07
0 al
,-1
f:14
0"-'
VI 4-,
1H:4.0040-,
V117 5U4GA/G8 T400 BROWN
YELLOW
BLK/RED
L4400
60 ut 350V
C4I000080
1350V
270MA
13+
+135V
B+ +275V
WATT'
C400C 60 pf 200V
C250 68
21138
1/2 5E1W9 PHASE DE T.
POINT
6.7V
C4031
JS 400 047^
F450 4A BLACK
IP POwE TUNING
vi08 5
7 6BL7 4
V106 5 V114 6CX8 4 618
TO VHF B UHF ii. TUNER FIL.
V115 6AS5
PWL4470ImAzoA
(USED ON POWER -.IA- TUNING SETS ONLY/
5
i
11401
e'M 1402
G/Y
VIIV5 19
P1X6
6c0G7
V110
8 VII2
6006
64%4
V107 6BY6
V103 3 V104
6CF6
6CF6
V105 6CB6
c:88
C253 1200
1
SAFETY GLASS REMOVAL
p60'1,,
4011
To remove the safety glass for cleaning without
removing the chassis, move the four bottom glass
channel screws from under the front cabinet rail
or under the front of the cabinet on table models.
Slide the bottom glass channel out. Pull the
safety window out at the bottom and drop away from
the upper channel. For safety reasons, the mask
SIDE VIEW OF CHASSIS ASSEMBLY is not removable from the front. Replace the glass in reverse order of disassembly.
42
VOLUME TV -14, MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1958 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
GENERAL ELECTRIC "112" Line
V105
YI50
V106A
6C96 3RD I -F
1587 OPT
TEST Di
POINT
6C X8 VIDEO AMP
AUDIO TAKE -OFF
VlI6
2IC2 P4
82L0i -8_0N0t . L153 T153 22 yh
L154 I LI55
6.60 15616
L157 1100
I40V
r4,0----7,-,----1----13.- I 223V
5
7 115V
.67 I
8212070.,...
047
7
9
C172 33
81
I
6
l_(tv...1.
C163 C164
LI56
2 18V e-IE*1-
330yh 8170
62 2V
B4 5 MC TRAP TI71
TO PIN 416
I0112nIC17r V"3APgST
PICTURE TUBE
T2°
ICI75
T47
C176
RV'V76.
1011
L172
.MAX.160V MIN. 120V
FOCUS JUMPER
7
+RI86 2
RI60
180
TI2CI0610
t>RII6(1
R163
4700 R162
R164
IM
3300
-
*I -135V
OOilr
dfC171
R6VI -16173 L170
K -y680,11
-
5K V '5"
+135V
I7K
15
CONTRAST
V +135V
611 RI7 7
IM
R181BM
360V
R179 820K
1 ;2j220
9100-800
14275V
8000
1801
R169 100K
RWI84
22M
R168 16M
10+135V
RI72 22K
9174
5100 7W
R183
3300
L171
680 1.1 1311
RI78
Y95MA
100K
V +275V
4.114A
07.1 2200
C202 R206
R3I8.939
5000 628k 'MA I 2M
4V V10613
V108
P.1605
,% 1/2 6CXB
6BL 7GT
RI88
21f
1 CANC CONTROL
VERT OSC 8 OUTPUT
3.9M
V107
A.86
11
6BY6
R203
CLIPPER, NOISE IN CANCELLER
R213
C 200
10+275V
3M N. HEIGHT
1!
1
,e 4701
R201 II
470K
TEST
R208
POINT
1W41K 8209
.WW.
RV2v10
5162V
33K
33K
30V
C2q12c20o04'w+311C(2A0-555
%14 C208
I( ,
5 i0V
...N
R+21v9
El+ BOOST
IM (COLD) 600K (HOT) GLOBAR
BLUE
2 560V
A -I3.5 6-.44
6
- 10K
015
334011
6
T200 : YEL. A 4V
033
b
R2I6
15M
3
,t R207
18K
IW
.17511
1ED
111&;.,
C207--
R212 300K VERT
HOLD
2000
8215 5600
92X
1W
R217 3K
VERT LIN
C4000 4011 75v
+135V
PERT BLANKING
LCO2A,
f-4. 000V
C 2 0 01
56K
,000v
T201 300011
Ilion
GREEN
4
VERTR220
VERT B
220012011 HOR YOKE
7
5
56.0
I
9
5611
R22I 2200 2011
RED
L
_J
WHITE
HEAVY WHITE
L250
HOR. STAB
V109
8868CGji
POINT
V1I0
6D06A HOR. OUTPUT
riaTrvai---ti1fi(-
R255f 0056
15K
IW
C257
R253 AN
IM
680
I85V
A.6 2(
IC254 5000
R254 8211
C255
1000
it
3 6,4,
'
C265 470 INV
330K
IW
R271 I M
R257
HOR. MOLD
R8225K8
.-9.8V
t R256 56K
7V
C 2 58 -111(1V
°-5100010
86.4V
' f:i8K
R1411
IC.225.9_
R260 820
R269
4706
1W
L252
0267
TAT_
150X1 4 ..264
R272
ZR65 I 82W200 111 10K
C260
.1
R266 7500
I5K 2W BRIGHT -
NESS
3W
R 267 12K 4W
T250 40011
6n
.1 2611
:6
:311
VIII
IB3GT H V RECT.
R268 3.911
C28681= 10 lh 711
C262
C263 "--10K
1000V
C264
.
VII2 opi,
61845T DAMPER b 10
IW ..-- .
.25
,t op it
Adid
lr
175 MA
F250 4/10 AMPS
+ 275V
Revised schematic of "U2" Line Receivers. Numbers in squares refer to
waveshapes shown on pages 87 and 88 in Volume TV -13, ADDITIONAL 1957 Television Servicing Information manual.
43
VOLUME TV -14, MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1958 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
GENERAL ELECTRIC "U2" Line Receivers, Continued
REAR*5
LIDS
la - 1.100
L105 cm*
REAR*4
REAR# 3
Cii3
1.123 LI22
Cli6 REAR 0/02
REAR #1
VHF ANT INPUT
T 102
0100 TS
MOS- 1.102
cR
FRONT *5
cm 1' CHI
\'1104
11
fRNT1M4 .75,4
mT
FRONT
FRONT 4.2
LION
XV/ BAND COUPLING
0115 LI164
LI188
1111317 I"2
1101
33
V101 68513 R F AMP
L109
V101
R108
..071,50K
22K *pg
POINTY
4T
V102 A
6 /MIXER
CI28
CI20
-o
R101 08
y2V
Ci06 800
R.02 7
I
1500
?04 ACC
3130 !30
NOTES. SOLID DOT ON WAFER INDICATES THROUGH CONNECTION 2 SWITCHES SHOWN IN POSITION 13 3 SWITCHES EWED FROM FRONT
* REPRESENTS COMMON REFERENCE POINT ON WAFERS 5 11488 OTHLRyelgo /80,0010
2111;ZgliS1:4410=7.A.
CAPACITORS LESS THAN I- wr FOR DC VOLTAGE USE V1,04 OR 200 OHMS -PER -VOLT METER WITH TUNER SET ON CH 13, NO SIGNAL
5
'1F02
SUB
A
+275V 6.3V AC
DC
FILAMENTS
+1350 DC
1.300V.-
150V
VOLTAGES AT HIGH LIRE 1125 VAC) HIGH SIGNAL LEVEL
00240
I- F OUTPUT
FRONT
R110 ICHE
LI2eLcDO L12T 7
'".
.
C117 FINE TUNING
LI36 "IT
01026
xi 6Ue
CIIS
OSC
62v
RJX -109 VHF TUNER SCHEMATIC
R.F TUNER
V101 61307,6858
F AMP
V102 606 R F OSC. a HIKER
VI 16
PICTURE TUBE
REMOTE CONTROL
V100
06)(S)
VHF UHF
BARI UHF
OSC
SuaGA/G13 L v RECT.
0TI53
3RD I -F PLATE
TRAP ROT.
VIOEO AMP CANC CONTROL
0106 60X13
CLIPPER -
NOISE CANCELLER
T171 (JAW:KJ TAK E -OFF -80T. A.S. MC TRAP -TOP
AUDIO I F AMP ICI< PHASE DET
VERT 05C a OUTPUT
T300
RATIO DET. TRANS.
PRI-SOT SECrTOP
r
T200 I
vuucT.
A ,,D,1,2
RATIO
TOR 12 OSC
L250
OHORI2 STAB.
YOKE CLAMP
LOOSEN SCREWS REVOLVE YOKE TO CORRECT FOR TILT
DEFECTION YOKE
YOKE SHOULD BE TIGHT TO BELL OF TUBE
CENTERING RINGS
ROTATE TO CENTER PICTURE
ION TRAP
ROTATE a ROVE FORWARD OR BACKWARD FOR MAXIMUM
BRIGHTNESS CONSISTENT WITH GOOD FOCUS WITH our NECK SHADOW
H.V. ANODE CONNECTION
PICTURE TUBE SOCKET
6 0064
HOR12 OUTPUT
6A 040T DAMPER
Rs, AC INTERLOCK
HORIZ HOLD
R2I3
0
HEIGHT
1401
®R217
VERT.
LIN.
LOCATION OF TUBES & TRIMMERS
44
VOLUME TV -14, MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1958 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
GENERAL ELECTRIC
"U" LINE
TELEVISION RECEIVERS
UHF MODEL NUMBERS BEAR SUFFIX "UHF"
General Electric "U" Line receivers are used in models listed at right. This service material is presented on pages 45 through 52. The Hotpoint Co. "U" Line receivers, used in models listed below, are identical to sets covered by this material.
ficytpsyint Co.
MODELS
With or without UHF
21C137 21C138 21C143 210159 21C160 210161
21 C162 21C172 21T050 217054 211055 21T056 211057 21 T060
21T061 24C182 24C183
"U" Line Receivers, Models 21S401, 21S402, 21S403, 21S451, 21S452, 21S501, 21S502, 21S552, 21S553, 21S554, 24S801, 24S802.
VHF TUNER PROGRAM WHEEL
0R2I0
HEIGHT
R271 HoRa.
HOLD
UHF TUNER
SI50
RANGE SWITCH (EARLY PRODUCTION
PICTURE TLB
SUPPORT ROD
YOKE CLAMP WING NUT (EARLY VERSIONS)
TO CORRECT FOR PICTURE TILT
ION TRAP
ROTATE.MOVE FORWARD B BACKWARD FOR MAX BRIGHTNESS WITHOUT NECK SHADOW MAINTAIN
GOOD FOCUS.
H.V. ANODE CONNECTOR
FOCUS JUMPER
POSITION BETWEEN PINS 6 B IO OR PINS 6 a 2 FOR
BEST FOCUS
DEFLECTION YOKE
YOKE SHOULD BE TIGHT TO BELL OF TUBE
CENTERING LEVERS
ROTATE TO CENTER PICTURE
PICTURE TUBE SOCKET
GROUNDING SPRING
SPADE
BOLT NUT
Rear View, Picture Tube and Chassis Assembly
ST- 5A MARKER GE N.
OUTPUT TO VERT. OF SCOPE
ST -4A SWEEP DEN.
00000
ST -2A SCOPE
SWEEP OUTPUT TO MARKER
IF
FILTER
HOR. SWEEP VOLTAGE TO SCOPE UNSHIELDED PAIR RESPONSE FROM RECEIVER
AT TENuATOR
Fig. 13. I -F Sweep Equipment Connection Diagram
6U8 CONVERTER
SOLDER HOT OUTPUT LEAD TO TUBE SHIELD
INSULATE FROM
SHIELD WITH MASKING TAPE OR EQUIV.
OUTPUT CF SWEEP GEN.
75f1 RESISTOR, 1/2 WATT CARBC N (NOT NEEDED WITH GE ST -4A)
SOLDER OR CLIP TO CHASSIS GROUND
Fig. 15. IF Sweep Jig
45
VOLUME TV -14, MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1958 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
G E "U" Line
/ V101 LI35 vio2
6U8
6B
OSC
CONY.
UHF IND
RECEIVER ALIGNMENT
TUNING
UHF OSC.
CHANNEL SELECTOR
SI50 C
RANGE SW (SOME SETS)
S256r
WIDTH SW1-(SOME SETS)
R214
VERT LIN
R210
HEIGHT
R27I
HOR HOLD
T 301
AUDIO
OUTPUT
AUDIO
©L157 47 25MC TRAP
0
T152
1ST I -F
2ND I -F
0 PLATE V104 PLATE O 60F6
OUTPUT
C307
O 3RD I -F 0PLATE
LI51
1ST 1-F
GRID
TI51
L150
TI 53
1ST VIDEO
2ND VIDEO
3RD VIDEO
I -F AMP
I -F AMP
I -F AMP.
CLIPPER NOISE CANC
VIDEO AMP
CANC CONT 4 5AIC TRAP
RI78 BRIGHTNESS
AUDIO DET ST AMP AGC CLAMP
R2081VERT HOLD
S400
ON -OFF C SWITCH
R305
OLUME
HOR.
DAMPER
OUTPUT
T200 VERT OSC.
VERT AMP
I
-'-' F250
60G7 1,,x, L250
VERT OSC
I
1.1-1.1§L j
HORLT
MU I
V&JHOR STAB.
LV RECT
5U4
GA/GB
L400
L V.CHOKE
/ 1- - - --/
T201
VERT OUTPUT
0209
ELECT
CAP
0311
ELECT CAP
T250
F450 FUSE
L
THRECTE H V
IB3GT
JI
I -F SYSTEM ALIGNMENT
The alignment of the I -F system involves the adjustment of 3 traps and S pass -band tank circuits. Allow at least 15 minutes warm-up for the receiver and test equipment before proceeding. Follow the usual precautions regarding equipment termination and cable dress. Some tuning cores will apparently go through two peaks. In all cases, the cores should be tuned to the first peak starting from the "out" position. Adjustment locations are indicated in Fig. 16.
NOTES,
1. Set channel selector and volume control to channel 11 or some other unused high channel. Turn fine tuning control fully counterclockwise. Set contrast control fully clockwise.
Fig. 16. Location of Tubas and Trimmers
2. Connect sweep generator to capacity type jig as shown in the alignment chart. If General Electric sweep equipment is used, the indicated resistor should be omitted.
3. Connect a 3 -volt bias battery between Test Point II and chassis ground (positive battery lead to chassis).
4. Place -45v bias voltage on pin 5 of V110 (positive side to ground).
5. Connect scope through 10,000 ohms to Test Point III. Calibrate vertical gain of scope for 5 volts peak to peak for 2 -inch deflection. When aligning, base -line to 45 mc marker should be kept at 2 inches. Refer to pre -peaking chart if alignment difficulty is experienced. Immediately below the alignment chart are shown stage by stage I -F response curves starting at the last I -F stage and working progressively toward the tuner. These curves may be used to an advantage when checking I -F system
difficulties.
VIDEO I -F ALIGNMENT CHART
STEP
CONNECT SWEEP GENERATOR
ADJUST
DESIRED RESPONSE
REMARKS
L150 & L157 for minimum at 47.25 mc.
"Blow-up" scope pattern to see trap. After setting
2
T151 to set 42.5 mc mark-
4 .251.1C
Using sweep input jig as er at 40-55%.
traps, set scope gain per 47. 25MC note #5 above.
3
shown in Fig. 15.
T152 to set 45.75 mc
Center sweep frequency to marker at 40%.
42.5 MC
ibr Adjust L135 simultaneously
4
approximately 44 mc. Sweep width approximately 10 mc.
L135 to set width of peak region of curve.
655, 00:/:
15,9MC
00%
5
L151 & T153 for peak
region symmetry.
with L151. 41.25 mc marker is very critical and should
be kept between limits of *5%. Peak of curve may fall between limits of 110% and 130% using 45 mc as
the 100% reference.
46
VOLUME TV -14, MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1958 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION GENERAL ELECTRIC "11" Line Receivers, Alignment Continued
PRE -PEAKING: Should difficulty be experienced in obtaining the proper video I -F response curve, the tuning and gain of the individual stages may be checked.
If each coil is peaked at the indicated frequency in the chart at the right using an AM signal, an over-all i-f response curve which closely approximates the proper curve will be achieved. After this is done, the over-all sweep method should be used to permit proper final shaping of the curve. This peaking may be done by using an AM signal or the sweep method may be used by adjusting the coils for maximum amplitude at the desired marker points.
Since it may be possible to obtain two peaks through the coil adjustment range, make certain the coil is aligned for the first peak (slug starting from "out" position), except for L150.
As a further aid to response trouble shooting, the i-f system curves obtained by progressively inserting the sweep signal
stage by stage starting from the last i-f grid are indicated. When observing these responses, use the same equipment and bias battery connections as for the sweep alignment procedure above, except for the sweep generator output cable. Remember to reduce the sweep signal amplitude while progressing toward the 1st i-f stage.
A -M PRE -PEAKING FREQUENCIES
L135 L150 TRAP
L151
T151 T152 T153
44.5 mc
47.25 mc To set 42.5 at maximum from base line
42.5 mc
45.75 mc
44.15 mc
AARmMMEiMlEmMmmMomMiMnOiMmOMmMmki.,
AAmMMmEmMMmOmMmMUmMmMmmOmMMmmmIImMmE M.
AMMENGQINMEMOIRMOGGSMAMMR AMMIIMUMMINIMMEMMIIIWOIMMOI EIMEGMMAIIMMEMMUMMIMMWOMER
MMOMMIIMMEMEMMOMMUMOMMER
iimmmumummvmueomiormm,r.
Ns
RGIENEMMEMMEMM
AUMM== AAMOMMMMUIMAMMEMIMNMIMMOOrW
mom vOMM VIIMOMMEMMERUMI. 420MC aEmV'
memmommomommumm ME'
wmiliMMOMMEMPAMMOMMOF
MMmImIoMmMmEuMmOmMiMmEiMlMlOoOrW
,GMMINIMMEMMEMEr"
-*MMEGMENEr"
1153, T152, 1151 Response (Sweep at grid of V103 through
.001 MF)
..aMMININENIMIN11%,
AAMNMNIMOINMISNMEMMEONOMEIMk. \
MOINIMMEMWOMMEM K I7J330 AMMEnMIIMEMEMEMEMMVWMOMI MOMMIMAIIMEMMOMEMMOMFASUMER
AMEMMMOSOMMOOMMMOrMOOMMS MWMMMOOMMOMMIIMMEM/MOMME MIAIIIMMEMMEEMMMMEOMMZMMOIlMmMmEiMllPmEmmumMm AMMEMmiammumiNVIG SOMMEINGEMOINIMMMFAI MENEM IMMEMMOMMEMERIMIEMMEMQV IuI1mI1mM1Mo1Em1MmMMeEOmMOOmMMuMMmOEmOI'M4M50ImIcIMW
1111111111M111111111111MMIEr
'mom mom r,
T153 L 1152 Response (Sweep at grid of V104 through
.001 MF) Fig. 17. Progressive Alignment Curves
K-117,1331
45 75
1153 Response (Sweep at grid of V105 through
.001 MF)
AUDIO I -F ALIGNMENT
Tune in a weak television signal. This will provide a 4.5 mc signal source for audio i-f alignment. Keep the volume control turned down unless the speaker is connected.
2. Connect two 100,000 -ohm resistors (in series) between pin #2 of V114 (6T8) and chassis. These resistors should be chosen as accurately as possible for equal resistance.
AUDIO ALIGNMENT CHART
STEPADJUST CONNECT VTVM OR 20,000 OHMS/VOLTMETER
METER INDICATION
REMARKS
1
T171 secondary (bottom) Adjust for maximum de -
Between Pin #2 of V114A
Section.
and chassis.
2
T300 primary (bottom)
Adjust for maximum de- Repeat steps 1, 2, and 3 to
flection.
assure proper alignment.
3
Between Test Point V and T300 secondary (top) the center of the two 100,-
Adjust for zero volts d -c output.
000 -ohm resistors.
4.5 MC TRAP ALIGNMENT
1. Turn contrast control fully clockwise. 2. Connect detector network (Fig. 18) to Test Point IV and set contrast to maximum. Connect oscilloscope to network. 3. Apply a 4.5 mc AM signal through .001 MF to Test Point III. 4. Tune the bottom core of T171 for minimum signal observed on oscilloscope.
TO TEST,
POINT TN
500 MMF
IN64
TO CHASSIS OF
RECEIVER
Fig. 18. Detector Network
TO VERTICAL INPUT OF SCOPE
47
VOLUME TV -14, MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1958 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION GENERAL ELECTRIC "U" LINE Late Production Main Chassis Schematic
VHF TUNER RJX-089 OR RJX-090
OUTPUT CIRCUIT
V102 B
CON V.
IB L135
V103
6CF6
ST
T
200V
TISI
V104
6CF6 2140 IF
210V
47.25 MC TRAP CIS2
TI52
V105 6006
3RD 1 F
245V
I
YI50
0168
475V
C154 .;- 80CI055
!
01601
OWR194 POINT I
L150
I
6h
BRN RED
V v 90
TO
UHF FIL +275 1135 TUNER
RI95
SI 50
-.3V
800
LIST
U57 47.25 MC
TRAP
10
5600
2T5V
C153 910
I ISN'T II
-C 50
-F AGC
800
a -40
$6103 68W00
1
6152 4700
8001
CH 5
LIDS 2.26h
186
+275V
igg
i_;so°C166
R1I.866., to. +I35V
;8001077
VHF
RI
ANT 4
330 LOCAL
V113 64U6 AUDIO -F AMP
68V
1.1v'7.40
(E PC
TO VHF TUNER INPUT
-I
SCOPE SYNCED AT 1/2 V RT FREQUENCY AR SCOPE SYNCED AT 1/2 HORIZ FREQUENCY
VOLTAGE MEASUREMENTS ARE IN RESPECT TO CHASSIS VIITM A 20,00011 /VOLT METER,
WITH CONTROLS SET FOR NORMAL OPERATION, NO SIGNAL APPLIED
RI 64
WAVE SHAPES TAKEN WITH NORMAL CONTROL SETTINGS A NORMAL SIGNAL APPLIED
MEASURED WITH VT VM
VARIES WITH CONTROL SETTING Vt.RIES WITH INPUT SIGNAL STRENGTH
100K
R201
3.9M
VIO6B
1/2 6AU8
DISTANT
TUNER AGC
VI I4A
RATIO OTT. OTPEo7Nr3E
- - -or - -ID inc K
T 9°5
7-1-1
'I
II
f -R 165 2 .2MM
CI64
.15
1-T1-C01K65
SR I6 22M
MR2A00/
II5C1K78
3.3M
475V
I
VII4 C
1/4 6T8
I
CANC. CONTROL
4120V
3
R216 470K
110 +27!
1.2M
.3V
t-wee- c52c02 5 RI 22018K
a -3V
2A -4.4V
II
R305 I
voL50u0MKE
R3
331111
VII4B
1/4 6T8 AUDIO AMP
5
4R0307
030(9--
0308 .01
9 10K
.
4-.6V
V I 15
SASS AUDIO OUTPUT
+ 275V
260V
T301
12° 7 Gcri- 450/141117T:
1000V
6
RED
8314
I I8V 1 45v i7313
V107 68Y6 CLIPPER NOIS
-An 4
0201
CANCELLOR
RA2M05
33 K
R202 I# 470
470K IF
TEST POINT
/
**
A.6'7 a -.3V
C203 1200
0300 5000
330° '--MO 2IR32,, t135V
3306.
3.3M 6313
$R 09 560K
-÷-
C3I1 HOOF 200V
R3,C,
330
1W
-1 .1 V
L 60V
_L
UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED
Kr -1000 M '1,000,000
CAPACITORS MORE THAN M CAPACITORS LESS THAN I M RESISTORS ARE1/2 WATT
MAI YOETA9F 20
16V
\ __I
VI 17
5u4GA /GB
1400 B60
Y EL LO
BLK/RED
F450 3A
RED 4
Ni
L400
I H
C4 001.5fl 60MF
6312 22
120 HUM voLTaot
I tt./
+275V
C400Ctt
60MF 200V
110+135V
04008
II
350V
;(Wrvila
+275V
C25 t 100
t, PHASE DETECTOR
TEST
S400
,I401
t C''''r 1402 6400 r 470K
[GL:'
GRANGE PTO POWER TUNING SWITCH
V108 6BL7
/V
Vi09 I
VIIO
7
4
B06 8
GRN
VII3 4 64U6
5
V106 5
64u8 4
V114 3 6T8
VI12 /334
v107 3
VIO
68Y6
VII5 SASS
vI04 6CF6 C4 800
TTOUVNHFEaRUFHFILRzSF 560 PL401 p 47 MAZDA
N POWER (TUNING TS
62011 60011
vI05 6C86
30V
Y250
1251 C250 82
R254
C12205103
R2I7
1511 1W
+135V
II
L250
48 HOR STAB
TES\LX PON
Ri2516
185
A.3V
C257
.0047 5 6270
910
A I2V
C5025040 3
R255 828
C256
R257 51 K
5V
1
I05 -125V 60 /1..
V116 RID.
20V IooK
C1225200 I
C255
470 IKV
R260
330KIW
Main Chassis Schematic (Late Production) with Wave Shapes and Voltages
48
VOLUME TV -14, MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1958 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION GENERAL ELECTRIC ''U" Line Schematic Diagram and Production Changes
PRODUCTION CHANGES
V106A
/
92 6AUE1 VIDEO AMP
AUDIO TAKE -OFF 84.5 Mc TRAP
T171
15V
120V 414
V116
PCINT
170V
L154 C17:047 71
r1 B. 2K RI70
14
CI
10
I.8V
+I35V LI72 3900
13511.
211
T c172
20
+1F
.73I'
47
R173 5K
CONTRAST
fiA 43V
a73. .1f5i-lrliTPRP7.--. I48V - wRI76
156
R174
2200
(E
2240"5PTP44/24TP4
2 Io
FOCUS JUMPER 8M R179
8206
8172 ./9vvve22K
5ov
L174 1500ph
RI75 RI86
5600 a 1800t
4W
+275V
5177 220K
R170
2001(;.7,
J_ BRIGHTNESS
4-I35V
(1 62V
VERT. SYNC PULSE
VERTICAL BLANKING PULSE
AU SE ER HOLD OUT OF SYNC ASuRE
V108A
1/2 65L750 VERT OSC
I VIO8B U2 ABLIGT VE9T OUTPUT
0213
10212
.033 10001
15801/ I 0221
4700
?-75V
/6210
/ 3m HEIGHT
R222
00K COLD 6OK HOT
BOOS -520V
6209
A 60V
X/
0205
EIL
.0068 34011
YEL. 175.11.
2.2
9JV
C29 .033
500V
BLUE T201
3,000n.
(T 11
R2I2 2.2M
3 33V
TEL
on
0213
GREEN r- 7t-
VERT I 61220
12200i 20ft
WHITE
5 5611.
RED
(320'
620K
SS
rC12!!034:9'
P214
- 4004w000 75V
16129 (2200
R208 600K VERT
3P( VERT
LIN
RED 1
3
HOLD
HEAVY WHITE
1
0200 VERT& HORI
TORE
1
5611
_ _
95V
09
/57 KMV
6271 POR HOID
VII0
650664
HOR. OUTPUT
A-4Iv
C259 R263\
5000
R2G2 i5K
00 R264 8206
260
-C261
165V
1R269
10K 2W
7250
400/1
amt.
6
r.
3,2
26/1
E 3 f1
VIII
183 GT RECT
R266
3.911
L251
100 7n
(26-20--.1C2=09 ---4
I4 KV 220
450V 404F
VII2
6AK4GT
DAMPER
C263 100
300V
R26I NNNA. 3306
IW
F250 3/B AMPS
+275V
1. ItF Tuners
a. During production, two types of VHF tuners were employed. These types bear the same catalog number except for the use of a suffix "A." The two tuners differ only in the mechanical selector shaft. Therefore, either may be used, R JX-039 or RJX-089A for VHF -UHF combination tuners and the R JX-090 or R JX090A for VHF only models.
b. The supply voltage to the R -F tuners was changed slightly during production. Early chassis employed a dropping resistor between the +275 volt supply and the high B + input to the tuner. This resistor dropped the voltage to approximately +265 volts. In later chassis this resistor (R401) was removed and the +275 volts was supplied directly to the tuner.
2. Audio Output-Low Voltage Section
The bleeder resistor R402 was removed very early in production as the voltage divider formed by the audio output tube was found to be of sufficient regulation.
3. Width Control
The Width Switch S250 was removed in early production and a nominal size horizontal raster was established making adjustment unnecessary.
4. ItF Attenuator
The Antenna Attenuator Circuit and Switch was removed during late production. If, in your area, the set has a tendency to overload or attenuation is necessary to prevert cross modulation, an attenuator accessory kit is available. TI -is kit bears the Catalog No. REM -010.
5. Phase Detector
A great improvement in phase detector stabiliTy was found in the use of germanium diodes in place of the dual selenium phase detector. These diodes should be used whenever phase detector diode replacement is necessary. The diodes are furnished individually and bear the Catalog No. RED -006. Receivers containing this change will be stamped #74 or higher- on the chassis.
6. Fusing
An AC line Fuse (F401, 3 amp Slo-Blo, Catalog No. REF -028) has been added to later production models in series with the AC switch and the power transformer. 7. Vertical Oscillator
In order to prevent changes in the vertical size during warm-up or variations in line voltage, a temperature compensating resistor (R222) was added between the B+ Boost supply and the height control. This change also necessitates a change in value of C211 from .036 mfd to .033 mfd. The bottom end of R210 (Height Control) is no longer connected to low B+ 135 volts. For differences see the main chassis schematics.
8. Picture Tubes
a. Three 21 -inch versions of picture tubes have been used in production. These are in order from early to late 21ALP4A, 2IATP4A and the 21BTP4. These tubes differ only in their aquadag coating and the latest version will always replace an earlier type. If it were necessary to replace a 21BTP4 with either of the other types, the filter capacitor and resistor C264 and R268 must be installed in the chassis. These components are incorporated with chassis having the early type tubes. b. Two versions of 24 -inch tubes were used. Ther are the 24YP4 and the 24DP4/24YP4. Here the latest version should be used for replacement. In any case, the replacement of a picture tube may always be made with the same type as found in the re-
ceiver.
9. Cabinet Bocks
On console models only, two types of cabinet backs were used during production. Early models employed a back with metal louvers at the top and only the lower fibre board section is available, Catalog No. HAB-005 for 21 in. and HAB-004 for 24 ir.. Late production models used a full fibre board back and is available as Catalog No. HAB-007 for 21 -in. models and HAB-
008 for 24 -in, sets.
49
VOLUME TV -14, MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1958 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION GENERAL ELECTRIC "U" Line Component Boards Service Data (Continued)
COMPONENT BOARD "A"
C150
.05
I
18p1(
16
4 C 1 7-0011),/
8
401
330 'WIN
14
R310
* ---VVVV-3300 I
""-'"-" .-- -1
100
L157
T C1661,
800
.I..0 169
ill
C168 BOO
*I *20
RI68 LI5833
1000 (E P)
CI 53
..Is+ C I 5 4
680 ---/
RI57 6800
RI60 1000
4R17063 8°°
I
I
cikti ,,E. ,Iso
v to 5 8 a.....80121 - i_15113L
RI50 5600
/ ..""
... 800
tE155
0* -1V8-00
1
I
1
01 I
L152 I
C
L71)R 151 47
i
I
TI51
LCCI62
/ 017 31x1631
C.
C a.
SHIELD CLIPS*
L
RI55
47 V
--
10 44.8CO2
LI50
RI59 1200
c60
c 3 L_
_J
a.
- 000 180 L 401
0 L153
C
- **173 *23
Re1v8w5s.-
3-9M RIB 8439m 19
R203
t® 47K
VIC/
C 1164 .15
RI67 *22 R2I7
IOM
R20419210
33K
RI65
I5K
I
2.2M
*24
-ARn101nM6e6 v*26
I65 .022
jw_.215
L155
1.2 M 2041.-2\--s' °U."
6-1175-00 120172R
*25 2 61I-.
L15
3600
C
C
s -
C
--eL.-HI3 M-9 s' -iv."'" -390K
to -
7 -1-C7.02)(01
4
5elAul° R202 27 2_12M 200j
470K
RI861800 --,AeRs1A75h-
5600
cg
LI 74
If
111111111111111J
V112
*4 2 6
C
C
I II III 1/
R263
100
*12
-)1- / C259
C261
( 5000
1
C'
C
U
( T
680K
T12001
R254 Y250
-WRy2s7A0 r-
1 2Mo
IM
Y251
R251c 250
R265(Ep 1V110
4
*2
18K C2
C262 220 4KV
10K © .-lic----82060R262
--AINNWR2A6N9 Wv-4
10K
F250
.-WANIK
R211.7wwsr_ii
51
R258
0-MAAA"-8 Kv
560-101
1255
.1258 --it25-540 0
910
R255
R253 470
IOOKT *1
R256
82K ."--/L C256
1 -No
*-WAAffr-11D(
*i
5
RI8
-dvvvi
33
L250 -T1S0205747 Ti
* * 9 10
820
COMPONENT BOARD"B" Component Location from Component Side of Solder Boards
50
VOLUME TV -14, MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1958 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION GENERAL ELECTRIC "Un Line Component Boards Service Data (Continued)
10
* R308
625=4'
C313
1
R 31 3 I2K 120
*
VII
22
30
3.3M
.0
.13A0A7Accik .
C309
R177 T171 22K
68K (E.P)
76
R176
15K
*1
L173
R213 1000
BOARD "A"
2* 1 From C174
* 3
From R305 -volume control From chassis & lug of T301
**67854
* 9
From *25 C.B. A From C400C, +135V From VHF tuner 6.3 VAC From pin 11-V116, Crt. socket From center arm R305 From bottom tab R305
*10
11
From +C311 & T301 red From R178 center (brightness)
*12 From *25 C.B. A
*13 From T301 blue
*14 From R173 tap
* 15 From *19 C.B. A, VHF tuner +275V
*1176
From VHF tuner +135V From pin 7 V110, C.B. B OD
*18 From *27 C.B. A
* 19 From +275V C.B. BOF
*20 From VHF tuner I -F cable shield
*2221
From VHF tuner I -F cable center From '16 C.B. A
. 23 From VHF tuner-AGC
' 24 From T400 orange-24VAC for power
tuning
* 25 From '12 C.B. A
*26 From *4 C.B. A
* 27 From *18 C.B. A
A to R178 -brightness B to pin 8-V108, C.B. B *21 C to C173 -contrast top D to T301 green E to C251 & R205, C.B. B *13 F to R210, +135V
ASTERISKED (*) NUMBERS Represents wirewrap terminals mounted on component board for connecting wires from other board or main chassis.
CIRCLED 0 LETTERS Circled letters represent interconnecting wires to other circuit board or main chassis.
MRepresents element of the tube that is attached to cap at top.
©Circled roman numerals indicate
test points.
Unless Otherwise Noted K =1000, M =1,000,00C
Capacitors more than 1= MMF Capacitors less than 1 = MF Resistors are 1/2 watt Inductances in lAh View shows components and wiring as mounted on component side of board.
BOARD "B"
1. From R210 -Height cont.
3.
R179-Crt. socket From yoke pin 4, .14
* 64..
From pin 6 of T250 From negative term. if C209 and fuse
F250
* 7. From fuse F250
* 8. From L400 -Choke, +275V
* 9.
10.
From T400 -Green wire From T400-Y/R wire
*1121..
From T400-G/Y wire From S250 -width switch
13. From R203 & R204, C.B. A OE
*14. From pin 4 of D200-Def. yoke
& yellow Id of T201
*15. From pin 2-Crt socket
*16. From R260-8 on T2I.0
*17. From pin 3 of D200-Def. yoke & red
Id. of T201
*18. From R208-vert. hold cont.
*19. From C400D-pos. terminal
*20. From T201 -blue Id.
* 21. From pin 3-V 113, C.B. A 0
* 22. From R210 -height cont. C.T.
To R214-vert. lin. corr. To C209-pos. terminal To R271-horiz. hold cont. To pin 3 of VI07, C.B. A17 To S250 -width switch To +275V, C.B. A*I9 To C400B-pos. terminal, +275V To R271-gd. side
SERVICE HINTS
There is little reason for removing the boards from the metal chassis. Occasionally, shorts occur between the component lead endings and the metal chassis. When checking a receive': suspected of intermittent shorts, it will save the technician trne if first he inserts a screw driver through the holes and bends over those long leads that remain to where they do not come in contact with the metal chassis. Care should be taken not to bend the leads to where they contact other component leads or connections.
In cases where soldering to the component board appears difficult, it will be found that access can be improved by using a bent tip lightweight soldering iron. The 1/2 -in. tip available for the General Electric low -wattage iron may be bent to 45" and will easily reach all points on the soldered boards throuei the holes. A number of solder irons appear on the market which may be equipped with a 45° tip (UNGAR is a good example). The edges of the holes can be used as a rest for the side cf the
iron which allows the technician to steady the tip while soldering.
Tbtoehteahpsempplaliaelltdeerdtosbizaoeacrtodipn. nCaenacdrteiloosnhwofeuorlrdwlboatentagogeberseporfevrteihodednisroowtntiotahlslocourwatpsedhasemoaltadgteoer
from the iron onto the side of come loose and fall between
the the
chassis chassis
hanoldesplfaotredthbisowaridrslaatnedr
develop shorts. Parts which require removal for checking should
have the lead connections heated alternately while applying
pressure to the component until the leads become loosened
from the solder boards. In most cases, loosening only one lead wspooillnldebenertinsmugoffuaicinditeintnogtotholoimlsearskeaecfotaemcromcmoempnopdnoeendne,tnmotrorecsmitrlcyouvitatolt.ecslte.aTnhtehuesecoomf a-
The case where some difficulty has been found in component
removal is the Audio Ratio Detector Transformer and with
tube sockets. Here tions that must be
lroemosoevnaeldi.sWhiintdhecraerdebfuylthheeantiunmg,bethreofpcaortnnceacn-
be removed for checking. In some cases, it is advisable to break-
away the transformer base or plastic socket and remove each
connection separately.
51
MAIN SCHEMATIC EARLY PRODUCTION
GENERAL ELECTRIC mU" Line Early Production Main Schematic Diagram
VHF TUNER RJA 089 OR RJX-090
OUTPUT CIRCUIT
VI028 L155 CONV.
94 EST T
Orr °POINT "-
Lbg- ooc
WFI
BRN RED Orr
t 90
R16.
V103 6C F6
15T 1-F
200V
CI68 V
BOO C151
411ILI5i
HIS
8150 5600
T151
R61563 .
V109
CF6
62N0
F
200V
C 52
MLI50 V105
THU F
T152
220V
1) 57
(8
BOO
RI 58 5157 6000S
4.5V
.22
BOOi
<163
- - - -
5
1P,1*
0106A
AUB
VIDEO Ampol
I95V
07
AUDIO TAKE -OFF 871 5MC TRAP
1,71
073
00 +I35V LITZ 369500B
CONTRAST
,2200
70V
V
1i76
/
111,4,1,12
0116
21 ALP4 A OR 2 I ATP4A 247P4
A43-1200
2
156 IJIWER 17119
UTHoF F T 765 73 5
TUNER
RIDS
-,3V
TfTEST110-1. n
A c* -.7 V
1 +275V 0169° z.cx
+135V 00
BOO
330
1.05
VOLTAGE MEASUREMENT ARE IN RESPECT TO CHASSIS WITH A 20 00011 / VOLT METER,
SCOPE SYNCED AT 1/2 VERT FREQUENCY
WITH CONTROLS SET FOR NORMAL
RR SCOPE SYNCED AT 1/2 HORIZ FREQUENCY
OPERATION. NO SI GNA APPLIED.
R172 22
WAVE SHAPES TAKEN WITH NORMAL CONTROL SETTINGS e NORMAL SIGNAL APPLIED
A MEASURED WITH VTVM
VARIES WITH CONTRAST CONTROL *VARIES WITH WIDTH SWITCH POSITION
520 3.94
DIS TA NT
TUNER AOC
vi 14A
8165
2.2M
064
011
.15
1 7B 8-.5V
R2o0 1.1M
VII3
6AU6 AUDIO -F AMP
68V
11/ -,
ir--.2y
I
II a
1=
I
4',,i,t,ITTOT,cnrs
-4-35s
O,- .5)7, cc.Kx0n1-11C.2,____7,i w, + I
1
_I
1
I
i
RIB4 3 964
HINT ICM
RS 171
96
. 3V
C23002a_
1 1
2
I
2A -44V
AI- V11413 H4 603 AUDIO AMP
8307
30K 0]09
55V
. , I I
0306
5000
'51ii
rrc
C307
*tg,
*1 / C308 .0
9
OK
1
._
2
, L. -1-.
A- 6V ts
V115
Q.1061A05O5UUTPUT
+275V
OR 240V BLUETZ0
62
L 3101
O.
6
RED
2.5
'124
fi1i8V t3 V - 73
V114 C
:707
**
C,CO s000
1-1. P300
C50 .2 52,
50
306
T
a-2.90
fT
h50",
OS
156
2.2
22,2 2
L.IV
V
11
1.135V
R5,3
120
V1068 I/2 6AUB
CANC. CONTROL
v W
&AV
216 470K
R215
+275V
4°0°.
202
50. 120K
ozol
4107
CLIPPER, NOISE_
CNCILLOR
OV
I
R205
Jr.
TES'
*MI 6 POINT C203
1200
\ 37V
, c,
.15.0 T
1752,17 \
IW
\ 4. V
\ 1135V
s- ov
;,ktr0
ET VERT. HOLD OUT OF SYNC 0050 MEASUREL
V 1084
+275V
-7 1650V
/ +135V4
+275V
HEIGHT
R206
5, 200
A -60V
05
I.
15M IL. El
5
1.40V
COOK
SOON
ErUJE_
3000a
0068 340
<211
.036
Srt
0
'R207
R208 600K
VERT
HOLD
7R2720Il0
C2(1711- R210 VERT LIN
28
R2 3
C4000 061F 75V
UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED
6'100 M 1,000000
CAPACITORS MORE THAN i CAPACITORS LESS THAN I RESISTORS ARE V2 WATT
+275V
0,0.1-0+135V
55V
IVERT.OSC. 75V NopuRartvE).
Vir
**
L250 HOR STAB
275V
250
23V
AMI
V109
007
TES'
NOR M V
4000
0251
0250
'00
/ PHASE DETECTOR
TrVa
P0.07 IS
.0007
I.R256 Ivo % C25 RZMo 910
R258 8271
47V
680644
HOR OUTPUT 3
I42V
.1,! 157V
I85V
w.2.o54- A3V
,..,.,9
I
i
-. 53 -1-=
12200
W IT
1 I L25
11-12V,
8257
,
A -37V
C259
R263
0 -15(.0 100
1262 =
5K
'
5222,e, 0200
026 69
611 2611
56V
0260 za
2
//
10256
8259 020
38177 2220k
200A. BRIGHTNESS
+155V
6292
CRTICAL 6LANK IRA L11.51
401 .01
1C0020v151-4 221
201
TEL
GREEN r ART
WHITS
5A.EL
020 SERB IS HOR
YOKE
9 5611
zoo
L RED I
5
HE., 'wn
VIII
IRS AT
8266 3.911 L29
262 220
C263 106
C209
0
400F V
64,640112 7 DAMPER
026 f 118
300t
F250 56511APS
1065-0125,V
20V 76N
0255
I
0
R260 330K
+275V
r
Schematic Diaaram Main Chaesie Early Preciactinn
VOLUME TV -14, MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1958 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
MOTOROLA
CHASSIS TS -423, TTS-423, WTS-423
This material is exact for TS -423, and this chassis schematic is on pages 58-59, with the Sound Section printed on page 57. Chassis WTS-423 differs only in the use of VTT-84Y Tuner with this schematic printed on page 57. Chassis TTS-423 is the same as TS -423 except for the use of a three stage I. F. and a tuner with a different shaft length. The circuit of this different Video I. F. Section is on page 56.
PICTURE TUBE
I u cxool5,7:" oWN
It R 3BC5 OR ICES
mom 4 5
3
TB TB 6 TITTEN
PLUG-IN ANTENNA MCC( ISM',
THE BOTTOM CARUSO SECT IONS CONTAIN A SIVITCH. THESE SECT IONS MUST BI 1X11NMO TO MAK THE ANTENNA CONNECTED.
ME ANT TERMINALS ON UNE 1100ELS
LEAN 11(SE LEADS DISCONNECTED EXCEPT VAIN PLUG-IN ANTENNA IS USED
PAPER RESISTOPS 050 OHMS TAM 001 ONE WIN SINGLE VI( -IAA ANTENNA.
IS USED
TO REMOVE THE CHASSIS 1. Remove the back cover. 2. Remove the carrying handle by removing two screws in
the handle. Remove the handle completely to eliminate scratching of the cabinet. 3. Remove all operating control knobs. 4. Using a protective pad, turn the receiver so the bottom screws are accessible. Remove the two screws holding the chassis to the cabinet (these screws are located midway between the front and rear of the cabinet).
5. Disconnect the yoke plug. 6. Disconnect the speaker leads. 7. Disconnect the picture tube socket.
RECEIVER MODEL BREAKDOWN CHART
Model
Description
TV
Chassis
I4P3-1 Y14P3-1
14P3 -2 Y14P3-2
14P4-1 Yl4P4-1
14P5-1 Yl4P5-1
14P5-2 Y14P5-2
14P5-3 Y14P5-3
14P6-1 Y14106-1
14P7-1 Y14P7-1
14P7-2 Yl4P7.-2
14P8-1 Yl4P8-1
I4P8-2
Yl4P8-2
Table, charcoal: steel
WTS -423
Table, charcoal: steel
WTS -423Y
Table, charcoal: steel
TS -423
Table, charcoal: steel
TS -423Y
Table, mocha & white: steel
TS -423
Table, mocha & white: steel
TS -423Y
Table, flame & white: aluminum 7S-423
Table, flame & white: aluminum TS -423Y
Table, yellow & white: aluminum TS -423
Table, yellow & white aluminum TS -423Y
Table, light blue & white: aluminum TS -423
Table, light blue & white: aluminum TS -423Y
Portable, mocha: steel
TTS-423
Portable, mocha: steel
TTS-423Y
Portable, antique white: steel
TTS-423
Portable, antique white: steel
TTS-423Y
Portable, flame & white: steel
TTS-423
Portable, flame & white: steel
TTS-423Y
Portable, saffron & white:alurninum TTS-423
Portable, saffron & white:aluminum TTS-423Y
Portable, cerulean blue & white:
aluminum
TTS-423
Portable, cerulean blue & white:
aluminum
TTS-423Y
8. Carefully slide the chassis toward the rear of the cabinet. When the chassis is near the end of the cabinet, it will be necessary to swing the right-hand side of the chassis (as viewed from the rear) outward and the left-hand side of the chassis inward to give sufficient room between the chassis and the cabinet for disconnection of the high voltage anode lead. After the high voltage lead is removed, the chassis may then be removed.
NOTE: It should not be necessary to remove the ion
tsriasp.,ceHnotewrienvgerd,ecvaicree
or deflection yoke must be exercised
to remove when the
!he chaschassis is
being removed from the neck of the tube so as riot to dam-
age the yoke by cutting into the windings with a sharp edge
of the chassis... also keep from bending the othe ponents,
neck corn-
TO REMOVE THE SAFETY GLASS FOR CLEANING
1. Remove two Phillips head screws (1 & 2) from handle (H) and remove the handle.
2. Position cabinet so the screws 3 and 4, underneath the cabinet front (CF) may be removed. NOTE: Special holt head screws were used on some chassis. A special tool, Motorola Part No. 66T742511 will be required to remove these screws in order to remove the safety glass. 3. Pull lower portion of cabinet front (CF) outward, away from cabinet. 4. Lift cabinet front (CF) upward until it is releaied from the upper edge of the cabinet.
5. Clean the safety glass with water, mild soap, and a clean soft cloth. Dry the surface with a clean, damp chamois. Never try to clean the safety glass by hard rubbing with a dry cloth. This will only tend to scratch the surface and produces an electrostatic charge on the plastic which will attract more dust from the air.
53
VOLUME TV -14, MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1958 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
MOTOROLA Chassis TS -423
2
DEFLECTION YOKE ADJUSTMENT
If the deflection yoke shifts, the picture will be tilted. To correct, loosen the clamp at the rear of the deflection yoke holding the rubber wedge against the yoke. Push the yoke as far forward as possible, then rotate until the picture is straight. Loosen rubber wedge clamp and push rubber wedge tight against rear of yoke. Release wedge clamp.
HORIZONTAL OSCILLATOR ADJUSTMENT
The HORIZONTAL HOLD control should have a sync range of approximately 30 degrees. If the control is too critical, adjust by the following procedure. It should be possible to adjust the horizontal oscillator coil with the receiver in the cabinet.
1. Set all controls for a normal picture.
2. Using a piece of wire, short the pin labeled "HORIZ AFC" to ground. Use the appropriate test receptacle and correct pin number as required by the particular chassis (for test receptacles and pin connections see Figure 5).
SAFETY GLASS REMOVAL
After the dust and grease film have been removed from the plastic, the safety screen may be waxed with a good grade of commercial wax (make certain the wax is not harmful to plastic surfaces). The wax will fill in minor scratches and help prevent further scratching. Apply the wax in a thin, even coat and bring to a high polish by rubbing lightly with a dry, soft cloth such as cotton or flannel.
TO REPLACE SAFETY GLASS 1. Carefully insert top edge of cabinet front (CF) into slots provided at top of cabinet. 2. Allow cabinet front to swing into place. Replace lower
screws 3 and 4: Place handle into position and replace screws 1 and 2.
3. Connect a .1 mfd 400 volt capacitor in parallel with the HORIZONTAL OSCILLATOR COIL (L-501). These cormeotions may be made externally to the chassis by using the pins labeled "HORIZ OSC COIL" and "GND". Use the appropriate test receptacle and correct pin numbers as required. 4. Adjust HORIZONTAL HOLD control, at rear of receiver, to the point where the picture almost remains stationary...as far as horizontal sync is concerned. Also, make sure that the picture is synced vertically. 5. Remove the .1 mfd capacitor shunting the HORIZ COIL and without turning the HORIZONTAL HOLD control, adjust the HORIZ COIL slug to the center of the range in which the picture almost remains in sync horizontally. Screw of the slug is located just behind the local -distance switch. 6. Remove the wire shorting the HORIZ AFC to ground and adjust the HORIZONTAL HOLD control (rear panel) so that no fold -over appears on either side of the raster.
ALIGNMENT
IF AND MIXER ALIGNMENT
1. REMOVE... the deflection yoke plug to eliminate RF interference and use a variac to maintain 117 volt line voltage.
2. APPLY...minus 3 volts to IF AGC, by connecting a 3 volt battery between the 1F AGC test point and chassis ground. Positive side of the battery goes to ground (see IF alignment detail and use the appropriate test receptacle).
3. DISABLE TUNER OSCILLATOR.., by grounding pin #9 of V-2 (5U8), and turn the channel selector to channel #13. 4. TUNE.,. the sweep generator center frequency to 44 Mc with a sweep width of 10 Mc, and do not change these settings, Adjust generator output below point of receiver limiting. 5, ADJUST...the receiver's contrast control to minimum (fully counterclockwise). 6. CONNECT...a .001 to .005 mf capacitor in series with the generator lead, and connect generator as given in the procedure. Terminate generator at end of cable with proper matching resistor.
7. REMOVE...the receiver's antenna and short out terminals, if required, to remove transmitted signals. 8, CONNECT THE OSCILLOSCOPE...with a 47K ohm resistor in series with the input lead to the VIDEO DETECTOR TEST JACK. This location will not change for the entire IF and mixer alignment.
PROCEDURE With the sweep generator connected to the 2nd IF TEST
JACK and the oscilloscope at the VIDEO DETECTOR TEST JACK:
1. ADJUST...the video detector transformer primary and secondary (T-102) to position the 45.75 and 42.25 Mc markers as shown in curve A. Markers must be between 5 and 15% down from the peak. Set the markers with the marker generator. The slugs should be tuned as far from each other as possible.. so the slugs are just entering the coils. By bringing them slightly closer to each other, the curve illustrated will be obtained. 2. MOVE...the sweep generator from the 2nd IF TEST JACK and connect it to the 1st IF TEST JACK (see IF & sound alignment detail -Figure 6). 3. ADJUST...the 1st IF transformer primary and secondary (T-101) so the 45.75 and 42.25 Mc markers are 25 to 40% down from peak of response curve and there is a 15% valley between peaks (see curve B). The slugs should be tuned as far from each other as possible... so the slugs are just entering the coils. 4. MOVE...the sweep generator from the 1st IF TEST JACK and connect it to the MIXER TEST RECEPTACLE (point F) located on the tuner, 5. ADJUST...the mixer plate coil on the tuner (L-11) and the 1st IF grid coil (L-102) to position the markers down 50% to 65% from the peak of the response curve (see curve C). The slugs should be tuned as far from each other as possible... so the slugs are just entering the coils. 6. EXAMINE THE RESPONSE CURVE...and note position of the 42.25 Mc marker. If it is less than 50% down from the peak of the curve, spread the turns of the mixer bandpass coil (L-101 located on the main chassis) so it is down
50% to 65%.
7. TOUCH-UP...the mixer plate coil (L -1I) and the 1st IF grid coil (L-102) until the proper bandpass curve is obtained as shown in curve C. Observe slug position as given in step #5.
54
VOLUME TV -14, MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1958 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION MOTOROLA Chassis TS -423, TTS-423, WTS-423, Alignment, Continued
SOUND ALIGNMENT (Station -signal method) The sound system used in the TS -423 receiver consists
of an audio IF amplifier stage, a quadrature grid detector and an output stage. Since this type of sound system is extremely sensitive, relatively small input signal voltage will cause grid current to flow in both the IF amplifier and the detector stages. Grid current through the tuned coils will load them down making the adjustment extremely broad and alignment impossible. For this reason, it is necessary to use a very weak signal when aligning the driver and the detector input coils. Actually, the signal should be well down into the noise level for proper tuning action. PROCEDURE (For strong signal areas) 1. CONNECT...the negative prod of the VTVM to pin #2 of the quadrature coil (L-302); this test point is the junction of R-306 (560K) and pin #2 of the quadrature coil. Connect the positive meter lead to chassis ground. 2. CONNECT... the antenna and tune in a station. 3. SET... the CONTRAST control to maximum (fully clock-
wise). 4. SET,. the VOLUME control for average usable sound amplification.
5. ADJUST .. the quadrature coil (L-302) for maximum negative reading on the VTVM (tune slug as close to chassis as possible).
NOTE: There are two points of tuning for the quadrature coil... one of which is incorrect.
The correct tuning point will produce approximately 2-1/2 volts. The incorrect tuning point will produce approximately 1-1/2 volts. Severe misalignment of the driver and detector grid coils will reduce the value of this tuned
TO IF AGC
voltage. If this occurs, tune for maximum negative reading on the VTVM...later adjustment of the input coils produce the 2-1/2 volts.
After the correct tuning point has been established, make the final adjustment of the quadrature coil based on minimum sound distortion. MAKE NO FURTHER ADJUSTMENTS OF THE QUADRATURE COIL DURING THE REMAINDER OF THE ALIGNMENT.
Proper adjustment of the quadrature coil is important to proper sound operation on all signal strength levers.
6. REDUCE...the ;ignal input at the antenna (disconnect one or both leads and separate from the receptacle... or insert resistors) until the picture has been considerably
weakened. 7. ADJUST... the primary and secondary of the audio in-
terstage transformer (T-301) for best signal-to-noise ratio as determined by listening to the sound. If signa. is too strong, exact tuning will be difficult. (Cores of transformer must be tuned as far from each other as possible... so that cores are just entering the coils.) 8. ADJUST...the audio take -off coil (L-301) for best signal-to-noise ratio as determined by listening to the sound output. If signal is too strong, exact tuning will be difficult. (Tune core as close to chassis metal as possible.) 9. READJUST... the interstage transformer (T -3 )1) for best possible signal-to-noise condition.
10. If considerable alignment was required to compl.!te the foregoing procedure, it wculd be advisable to recheck the tuning of the quadrature coil using a strong signal as :n step #5. However, if the quadrature coil is realigned, it will be necessary to repeat steps 6, 7 and 8 for tuning of the audio take -off coil and interstage transformer using a week signal.
5 - 15% 42.25 MC 3V PP
5 - 15% 45.75 MC
EQUAL PEAKS AND SYMMETRICAL MARKERS
FIG. A
BOTTOM ONLY
TO VIDEO DET TEST
POINT
3V =
VALLEY NOT MORE THAN 15%
2ND IF TEST JACK
4225 MC
45.75 MC
25 - 40% 3V PP
TSB_ 25 - 40% & TOP
nc1:1111.t1,1
U06 43 MC TRAP
TS 423#40
8AA 56
FIG. B
1ST TEST JACK
1ST CONFECTION
\\-"-- FOR FIG. A
SEE NOTE
3V PP 42.25 MC VALLEY NOT 45.75 MC
MORE THAN 20% __L_
50 - 65%
50 - 65%
2ND CONNECTION FOR FIG. B
.001 TO .005
SWEEP MARKER
GENERATOR
0
DCFOINGNE.CTION
FOR
ICHASSIS
GROUND
/, POINT "F"
FIGURE 6. IF & SOUND ALIGNMENT DETAIL
55
VOLUME TV -14, MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1958 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
MOTOROLA Chassis TS -423, TTS-423, WTS-423, Service Information, Continued
PROCEDURE (For weak signal areas) 1. CONNECT...the negative prod of the VTVM to pin #2 of the quadrature coil (L-302). Connect the positive meter lead to chassis ground. This test point is the junction of R-306 (560K) and pin #2 of the quadrature coil. 2. Using maximum available signal input, roughly align the primary and secondary of the interstage transformer (T-301), the take -off coil (L-301) and the quadrature coil (L-302) for maximum quadrature grid bias (meter reading) of 1-1/2 volts. (See note under Part 5 of the procedure for strong signal areas.) 3. Using maximum available signal, align the quadrature coil (L-302) for minimum sound distortion. (Tune slug as close to chassis metal as possible.) 4. Using the weakest signal possible, adjust the primary and secondary of the interstage transformer (T-301) for best signal-to-noise conditions. (Tune cores of transformer as far from each other as possible... so cores are just entering the coils.) 5. Using a weak signal, adjust the take -off coil (L -30I) for best signal-to-noise ratio. (Tune core as close to chassis metal as possible.) 6. Repeat the procedure several times, if required, until the optimum adjustment is obtained. Keep in mind that the IF amplifier and detector input coils must always be readjusted on a weak signal if the quadrature coil setting is changed.
4.5 MC TRAP ADJUSTMENT
t1r.asCt caorenfturlolyl.tunTeurrnec"eLivOeCr AtoLlo-cDaIlSsTtaAtiNonT"ansdwaitdcvhatnocdeicstoann-t
position. 2. Adjust local oscillator (fine tuning) to bring 4.5 Mc interference dots into picture by tuning video carrier down side of response (toward sound break-up).
3. Adjust sound trap (L-106) to find the two points of adjustment at which sound beat is just noticeable on the picture tube screen. Rotate the core toward center of the two points. Use minimum amount of inductance (core out of coil) that will result in no apparent beat interference.
00
CO.
tti
cn
El
in
td O
E
in
U
it
C.)
O a) U
O
td cd
U-
ce;
0 c`l
.44
w 0 fn
E-4 0)
io
)101 9910 uc
LIS 6511
ffee
)10.2 1910
5910
MY
NU 1919
40
01 1913
" 11012 0910
If
)1022 1910 -1W
1119 0910 ANN
I
6:2 r_120
IM
8123
r
WZ2 2910
.7:1£ 'WI
L _ _
.066
022 6519
095 1 17'I
-IHI'
51k
8510
021 11510
in
Cd
ICC SD 4
11 6910
1,
MS
O
-8§
T..
0891 9510
td
t)))
Cd
2
89 9510
8
.1;
O
O
g6x1ez 100' 6913
Ha
,1
U
.66
)11y0w00
a) ci)
1.011 1510
wn VI
<0..0
M
0
L) CC
0 CC CC
4
0 0 0<-)
0 -0
0 0-
4.1.J
Ca
2
I0
8.1
IWI
15111
56
' 'I --1:5-S -ttorrrii---rrr - -rr r -7 z. -c_.-rirrizr.zrzc.7-
300 OHM ANT INPUT
RI 390
,OCAL-DISTARCE Sy
S5I, Slinws
LA-.
POSITIOS
Rd 390 LAC
TUNER
L57
LIL
vol 38C5 or 3CE5
RE AMP
120
SSTS OR Jas
0
E
CO my IR
;
os® o
°
®
1M.
ü
0
Y1X.114ST
Tr" 5, © roC)D 0
TUNER CONN
Tr
11 VV2A
1/2 51{11
MIXER
.2
r::.
LW 1 OE 000
C62 001
00 00 151
4000'
000 -
06
05
r -0 re olLy6 r I L55
1.. rol
74.7'
0 LY
156
L54 i
44 MC TRAP
2:1 ®
21
Ulf
NPUT
C53 .001
Rr
VHF TUNERS VTT-84 AND
WT-Mtun6nyr, myumml
THESE TUNERS USED ONLY ON WTS-423 CHASSIS.
E53, ES., AND 655 ARE
SUM. IN OWN.. n0
Ct) ALe
04 03 02
L59
n-61 onyir
8
00,
R62 IK
C61 001
)
0C)
TUNER VTT-84Y USED IN WTS-423 CHASSIS
-
61 mw
C64 3.4 VV28 I/2 508
9
Cl
DINTUENING
O R67 .3K AAA,
g
o
gWggr.tm -0.O
<-- 1'T;,8 moz.,por
rs.
cr co
74Ags-s 40to g0;0..<
" g- O
&°.
&11 1.1
-01.--mgE pg
-
. (,) 3
O
E;
8'
Et 2
0 CL N'
0
0,
rx ryi
now cr
1
cr-
,
0"coo0o
0
o
00
m
-
6. 0 00 i3 CLO N.
32'N
r
167
D3
0 tm 0, IT 0
H..
Cr.
0I N6.0
Sound Section of Chassis TS -423. Wire extensions connect to correspondingly marked wires of the main schematic printed for convenience on pages 58 and 59.
SOUND
4
3
06A
6t,
2
1301 CONN fsOTTom VI y,
DI'MOR
roo3r0ro2mCOvNrNirf
AUD1g5UTPUT
1301
r
1
r6
I DOT
C315
a
14 I C336
L301
4.7I
To
0301
1--
56
0..005
7
1r
4Y L302
T302
C310e_____ VOLUME
7
7805" 7
11
; E- Vol°
.R 115
4-, ON &NNE IS re a epaw
JE30I
31
SOUND IF
NT
SOUND SECTION OF CHASSIS TS -423
Dy
Cf./At:GEE. To ,TOOCT000 OF
IT -539, er-520
->B4To x
VOLUME TV -14, MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1958 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION MOTOROLA Chassis TS -423
3
0® Cg
o
SU 618 p'7',
..63 AP11,1
03
0 911 Sll 911 TIT ST1
301 tla
123
,2 (41
Ino
022 973
0011161OOTOTOO
13
f -S 63
'(E2-1.
801 0[1
rooa it
§
Z2 03
9.51
090
OCI
M
WO gap
1 t.Vri2
s'9k112a'
5g g ape
SOUND fret
TUN
1102 CONN {gir.Z.
(DOM. VIM, 1
V3
ArkAp
1102
!4 2
1101
!.,
SYNC
V58
Ill
SYNSEM4PA,41TOR
R402 470K 0401 IM
-SV
C501i, 100
7717-
35V PP
35V PP
POWER SUPPLY
V2
L801
rue
54
0158
8W I
V9
V6
4007
3U15
45
45
0801
.005T
TLIIM
VI
7A
1802 rsa
1803
04
17110
1804 6::A
VI4 Or
45
C802
-PICOT
34 C803
--y-,
34 C.804
T..007-
5
1
1
.1_
w
0A1,4A
3034 (0. ...! ....,-, ©
VIT... TOM 002 VIII SOP .C3061 HZ, 1906 ®
34
3a
554 3
-.0011 2. c6oi cs .col
221,
1205 OW
E801
802 3 OR
; N RUMOR
NOTES CAPACITORS - Decimal values in Mr, all others In MRS unless otherwise specdied.
VOLTAGE MEASUREMENTS I. Made with a VIVM from point indicated to common ground. 2 Line soilage - 117 VAC (use Isolation Transformer'.
3. Antenna disconnected and input shorted across. 4. Channel selector switch on channel which develops lest noise at video detector lest receptacle. 5. All controls in normal operating position. 6. Voltages associated with variable -control circuitry will vary with control setting.
TO X 4
58
0,68, To decrease 4.5 Mc harmonic radiation, C -E .0-1(470 mud) added between pin #4 of V-7 (3DT6) a ground. This change affects only "Y" versa chassis.
r
VOLUME TV -14, MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1958 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION MOTOROLA TELEVISION CHASSIS TS -423A-00
VIDEO IF
VIDEO DETECTOR
1102
r
(101
J
C107
L103 I3 Of
C108
I
5.6
L104 111. g
L105
r"'" C110 .1
SO
V5A
R21V8A
VIDEO AMP
VIDSO DST
-
1106
1107
cur
ao
G113 27
4.5MC TRAP
CII4 10
Lg 1E1
;:t L108
c11
CONTRAST
TIO2 CCOONNNN
.01.11
SERVICE TEST RECEPTCLE VWA,
1250 PP
030
01:*:1
d .1
0: a. 12
10
61
200V
L
-.T-4 R202
BRIGHT/45S 1E0K
FOCUS STRAP
spalatunt of hunt tesp loomed on D.., use tubs base pro, Wes osthtoe.reer.nknlaybltacnso6n6nVaeWncdt s1,1r0s. Loct map isermannt1 besptooot1tio1n fporocdukso,..6
VI4 PICTURE TUBE
14RP4 I4RP4A
III CONN 91.11
41 173
DETECTOR
HOR II OSC TEST RECEPT
OOP 11,1
R507 KIM 4504 1500
a1-116
ChTT133
Lso
eqz.
HORIZ OSC
0510,..001
HORIZ SWEEP a H.V.
VI2
DO POT PEPS 111112
100V PP
VIO HOR I I OUTPUT
VII 19024
DAMPER
D. POT WAS1646
[T501
g:
MK
R52I 3.3
C512 2V
005
!WIT WPC
VII
VII 070
141\ 12C05 leall 176.
5V PP 7V PP
Ij 117 VAC 60'L
ON -OFF SW. ON V& CONTR.
HORIZ HOLD
90V PP
LICOWITIISP
R519 471:6
MY 8 -ro 2.2 -Ogg
n
R
ri.c50.1)M.13 -4-
25V PP 1
R603 68K ANY
7 E601
/dry
150V PP
1/1006m 22 PI STOP
VERT SWEEP
VERT S I A
13 le AC 19A INC AMAMI, w00% oc
6606 ICOK
VERT LIN
0
A
R610 100K ./N/I`
C607
01
R6Il 100K
R613 39K
R602 82K
9
24
8
V68 J/2 ,VB VERT OSC
C608 .02
013 VERT OUTPUT
:v
8
VERT
2 HOLD
600 PP
430V PP
820V PP
T601
DS
CD
YOKE'
L701 U
HORIZ
1
VERT
59
VOLUME TV -14, MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1958 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
1004r4000J
MOTOROLA
(uen 011 vrr -93y any)
.E54
E55
Id
L -
3000 VIP ANT INPUT
3000 UHF ANT INPUT
FIGURE I. HI -PASS FILTER ASSEMBLY (VTT -93 & VTT -93Y)
RECEIVER MODEL BREAKDOWN CHART
Model
Description
14P10- 1 Portable, carnation: steel Yl4P10-1 Portable, carnation: steel
14P10-2 Portable, citron: steel Yl4P10-2 Portable, citron: steel
14P11-1 Portable, antique white: aluminum Yl4P11-1 Portable, antique white: aluminum
14P11-2 Portable, cerulean blue: aluminum YI4P11-2 Portable, cerulean blue: aluminum 14P10 -1A Portable, carnation: steel Y14P10-1A Portable, carnation: steel 14P10 -2A Portable, citron: steel Yl4P10-ZA Portable, citron: steel 14P11 -1A Portable, antique white: aluminum Yl4P11-1A Portable, antique white: aluminum
14P11 -2A Portable, cerulean blue: aluminum
Yl4P11-2A Portable, cerulean blue: aluminum
TV
Chassis
TS -425 TS -425Y TS -425 TS -425Y TS -425 TS -425Y TS -425 TS -425Y WTS-425 WTS-425Y WTS-425 WTS-425Y WTS-425 WTS -425Y WTS-425 WTS -425Y
WTS-425 SERIES
Same as TS -425 except for addition of a hi -pass filter to VHF tuner. Tuners change to VTT-93 & VTT-93Y. See Fig. 1.
(Continued below and on the next six pages)
ALIGNMENT
VIDEO
MIXER ALIGNMENT
Pre -Alignment Information
4c.hasDsiiss.able tuner oscillator by shorting pin #9 of V-2 to
1. Remove the deflection yoke plug from its socket. 2. Maintain 120V line voltage with variac.
5. All coil slugs should be tuned away from the chassis (except 2nd IF slug and 3rd IF bottom slug tuned toward chassis).
3. Apply minus 4. 5V volt battery lead to pin #1, and remaining lead to pin #3 of the SERVICE TEST RECEPTACLE.
6. Refer to Video IF Alignment Detail (Figure 5) for coil and test point locations.
VIDEO IF & MIXER ALIGNMENT PROCEDURE
STEP
1.
SWEEP GENERATOR
To 3rd IF TP thru .001 mf capacitor at 44 Mc with 10 Mc sweep width
INDICATOR Scope thru 47K
resistor to video det TP
ADJUST T -I03
REMARKS
Maximum gain and marker positions (see curve A). Both slugs may be reached from bottom side of T -I03 "can",
2.
To 1st IF TP thru
.001 mf capacitor
at 44 Mc with 10 Mc
sweep width
T-IO2
Maximum gain and 45.75 Mc marker position (see curve B).
3.
4.
To mixer test recep-
tacle thru .001 mf
capacitor at 44 Mc
with 10 Mc sweep
width
T -I01 L-101
Maximum gain and 42.25 Mc marker position. If curve is tilted, readjust T-103 (see curve B). Maximum gain and 45.75 Mc marker position (see curve C).
5.
L-102
Minimum output at 41.25 Mc marker position (see
curve C).
NOTE: Temporary removal of bias may be necessary to make the trap dip more pronounced.
6.
To mixer test receptacle thru .001 mf
Scope thru 47K
L-16
resistor to video
capacitor at 44 Mc
det TP
with 10 Mc sweep
width
Adjust for flat response.
7.
Repek steps 4, 5 and 6 as necessary, to obtain the overall curve C.
60
VOLUME TV -14, MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1958 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION MOTOROLA Chassis TS -425, -Y, WTS-425, -Y, Alignment Information, Continued
SOUND ALIGNMENT (Station Signal Method)
The sound system used in the TS -425 receiver consists of an audio IF amplifier stage, a quadrature grid detector and an output stage. Since this type of sound system is extremely sensitive, relatively small input signal voltage will cause grid current to flow in both the IF amplifier and the detector stages. Grid current through the tuned coils will load them down making the adjustment extremely broad and alignment impossible. For this reason, it is necessary to use a very weak signal when aligning the driver and the de-
tector input coils. Actually, the signal should be well down into the noise level for proper tuning action. Pre -Alignment Instructions 1. Tune in a strong TV station. 2. Adjust all controls for normal operation. (Deflection yoke must be plugged into its socket.) 3. Refer to Video Alignment Detail for test point and coil locations (Figure 5).
SOUND ALIGIMENT PROCEDURE
STEP
1.
2.
SWEEP GENERATOR
Use station transmission (strong sig-
nal)
I I
INDICATOR VTVM negative lead to pin #2 of L-302 and
other lead to chassis. Listening test.
ADJUST L-302
REMARKS
Maximum negative deflection (coarse adjustment).
Maximum sound with minimum distortion (fine adjustment).
3.
Use station trans-
mission (weak sig-
nal*)
4.
I I
T-301 (double tuned)
L-301
Maximum sound (top slug) and minimum distortion (bottom slug). (Maintain hiss level.) Maximum sound signal with minimum distortion.. (Maintain hiss level.)
If sound is not clear at this point, repeat the above procedure as necessary. *NOTE: The signal must be weakened considerably by disconnecting one side of the antenna lead, or connecting low value
resistors across the antenna terminals until apronounced hiss appears in the sound. This hiss level must be maintained during alignment.
IF A
CURVE 'A' 3RD IF RESPONSE
3V 75 TO PP 95%
75 TO 95%
41.25 MC
',P. 45.75 MC
-
2 SLUGS: B01_
CURVE 'B' 1ST IF RESPONSE
3CB6 3RD V5
6:TO
IF TP 70%
3V 70%
PP
10?
42.25 MC
45.75 MC
10% DIP MAX
TOP
47K
VIDEO DET TP
GEN SYNC
B+
HORIZ AFC
L301
0L108
r
5U8
T301
3DT6
SERVICE TEST
RECEPT
MIXER
TEST
la
RECEPT
CURVE 'C' MIXER RESPONSE
41.25 MC
40 TO
3V 50% PP
42.25 MC
40 TO 50%
45.75 MC
TOP
10?
1ST 3BZ6 IF V3
TP -,-,
1102
CURVE 'B'
001 MF )1
HORIZ OSC COIL
GND
=4.5V
12CU5112C5 \1110
6
SWEEP & MARKER GENERATOR
44 MC AT 10 MC
°SWEEP WIDTH
0
CHASSIS GROUND
SCOPE
15% DIP MAX
TOP
TP r TEST POINT
FIGURE 5. VIDEO IF & SOUND ALIGNMENT
61
VOLUME TV -14, MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1958 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
E101 TUB VIDEO
VID DET
DET T.P.
V5 3CB6
3rd IF T.P.
1102
V2 5U8
V6
6AU8 OR 8CX8
L108 L301 V8 T301 CABINET V9 SERVICE L302 V15
E302
5U8
GND CLIP 3DT6 RETEcur
12CU5112C5 EARPHONE T601
SCKT V OUTPUT
L501
HORIZ COIL
V11 6CG7 HORIZ OSC
R610B VERT SIZE
R610A VERT LIN
AC LINE INTERLOCK
V4 3BZ6
R802 FUSE RES
L16
VI 4BCB
1st IF T. P
E802
V10
PWR RECT I2CU5/12C5
V13 19AU4
V12 12DQ6
R803
1501
V14 1X2B
SERVICE TEST RECEPT
L501
HORIZ-__
OSC COIL
VII
E501 HORIZ PHASE DET
L801 FILTER CHOKE
V15 L302 V9 T301 V8 L301 L108 V6 CHANNE 1 FINE TUN
SELECTOR
P. B. ON -OFF SW & VOL CONTR
CONTRAST
R121A
R121B
1103
-V5
T102
R603 VERT HOLD
-V4
R202 BRIGHT
--R508
HORIZ HOLD
L101
L102
1302
AUDIO
OUTPUT
CRT HV LEAD
V12
V13
V 0
62
CHASSIS TS -425A-00 PARTS LOCATIONS
V7
C801
FMTRAP
I L2
2i 44MC
.. TRAP ,15
coo,-
-- -- -
-
E2
-
I
I. I
I
.11
.71
I
LT,
_ I
1
0 300 OHM 0
ANT INPUT
...._
TO -93T OKA
\\____
L4
OH
--
C6 470
i 115
.-f---
um, InCirr
110 dbd.
VI
4BC8
RF AMP
-..2
iC12 5-3
-
VHF TUNERS 11 93 AND
2,
11-93Y tuddo win wr
TONZBI
LB :
--
--. 61, C2 63 ABB 64 APE 5110X
IN nuns On POBITIOB
u
1 L6
L9
na
-
-4, ONLY
' - ,1 L7
, X
TT..,-9,,3,,
re
--.
1r._. A. (C0I0O1
1-1.-93v um y 111
1
1
1 i
1
I
I
I.- - .1
.,,
TUNXII GC
TUNER
114
.1'
13
CI7
11MIXER 12
1 'S -3T
0
TEST RECUT x
,- Fe
Ig
1C21
J.
001
913 4.7K
MN
1.16:
117
..
i
i
I
n -ear ONLY
11 TO MY TOMEI
Cld
7./
LI2 4
I -.
I :-.4. Ce
C14
1 2(TT-B3) k (TT -93T)
V2
.5a
MIXER -05C C19
I ,.. :J
1
2 14
3Q
rE
150K
7
B3v C441.T
I
LIS
1
I
1
'--.
----
2.7 OV
135v
CI.5'221,- 3 271-r- 3v
( C01081 220
%RIO
A
re -
..,
Lis 1
t Tk, L19
i 120
28
±H (cco,
I 121
IIKI TIMM.
I L22
-41---.4-
I
). \
LB:
SOUND
3
1
I4
1301
own yrs")
OW la
a C.b., 0. 1-1
V8A 1/2-5U8 AUDIO IF
132
2 r::-11-I2L"
I
...'
2I
1
I
Doi
1301 CONN (BM Vtrirl
,1301
I, C.__.f
:_O;.I,L.1_----_L.3c._..:
-1-- 1 74
.d.7.
IF
3.?3'
_
_ _ _10
3
C303
(pair
_
V9
3D16
OM DU
3I
1
4
2I
I
I
DOT
302 CONN (BM VIC,
150V
r1302 I
§
-1
,
1
- 1 0 I ,-, L 2
VI0 12CU5/12C5 AUDIO OUT
C3101( 01 g.
R309 47K 2 5
R1216 500K
VOLUPIE
R. xv R
7 eo sum
U C313 01
T302
I d6
BLX
§ Mk
R311 3 3
E301
R312 33
E302
Z.F801.16 5,XICET
Z f
<
0r
4
til
'40 1-3
01-3
1
'P.
0r 40
W
c)
0I
P
In 1-' 1-3
C7)
txi
yy
'..3
En I
Ii&C S f
S'ouor,
14:BI
IV
C.31
g
til
t tIl
j12
U
CY --
0 C0
I-+9Ulm
r../)
0H
(1) tri
I0-..
.-..-..".t1. 1-4
W
t, Z I -I. 6,
ID
74
,-S c/)
P til
.
a
<
0
Z 1-
Z0
I-1
Z (1)
la,
01.11
Wires ending and marked connect to corresponding wires of main diagram on next page.
0
Z
VOLUME TV -14, MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1958 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION I
MOTOROLA F
CHASSIS TS -425A-00
V3 3BZ6
ISTRIMP
1ST VIDEO IF TEST POINT
T101 CONN (DOT VI.)
V4
2ND IF
1101
4 Is! 8*
L102 L.,
--
Fe'
135V
/CI03 3.001
3
1
1
4
2I
1
1
DOT
T102 CONN mar 01011
1102
31
1/5
SEA. 3RD IF AMP
3 RD VIDEO IF TEST POINT
r
5 136
13. YI
MI
2 8.
VIDEO IF
3i
5
2
1
I4
1
1
DOT
T 03 CONN
(BM 61n)
r 1103
ediisTp 4.
-C120 - C11,2)1
-4
R108 470
MN'
w
C109-1-
15001
AUDI( TEST P
TUNER CONN
A GC
vac
0+
SOUND
C104_ .0011
SYNC
V68 112-6AUe OR BCXB
1ST CLIPPER
WEI 112-7AU7 2ND CLIPPER
1402 470X
-24V C402 470
3 340 040310L
6.
6.4V
-/10/ R404 680 S =-
0/A
17V PP
17V PP V
PHASE DETECTOR
E(5P0a1 C0O1NnN)
(470
E501
4.1001112.J.L.
SERVICE TEST RECEPTACLE
1=1
GPO
4 SV PP
R504 4.7M
a
C5021(470
1Z IF J
C50411.0033
1
6VPP
6V PP
6VPP
A. C
%TIN
oT:9418C.T %MT BA
Le
NOTTS.
CAPACITORS - Decimal values in MF, all others in MMF unless otherwise specified.
VOLTAGE MEASUREMENTS 1. Male with a VTVM from point indicated to common ground. 2. Line Voltage - 122 VAC (Use Isolation Transformerl. 3. Voltages indicated by an asterisk 1.'1 will vary with associated control setting.
WAVEFORMS 1. Taken with wide -band oscilloscope. 2. Receiver in operating condition and showing a normal picture.
V VERTICAL H HORIZONTAL
IV PP
POWER SUPPLY
VII
6467
VI5
VIO
V2
12065/1206 12005/1205 5U4
VI
.1HCS
L802
V7
'497
V3 0999
L803
V4 2629
1804
4
5
34
45
EIV
-4.59
34
34
TT
C803 2 X 800
C804 2 X .031
C805 2 X .001
VI6
V6
V8
141184 6.* r sob
V9
ORLT
orb
2.4
1 12
54
4 C807
34
°°5 I
L801 eBr
14. 000
501004
R802 5
1-14-1 1A.
148
-
C8011347C801A
2WMF
25°W I
C808 0015
C80IC IOMF
12V PP V
R804 2.2M
CifiT2813 GROUND
V5 3016
V12
V13
121.6 16.4
72
37
T -±-1-
C806 2 X .001
120 -VAC
E801 ON -OFF SWITCH
ON VOLUME CONTROL
64
VOLUME TV -14, MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1958 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
V6A 112-6AU8 OR 8CX8
VIDEO AMP
3V PP V
1105
L107 5.5o
8 2
VIDEO DETECTOR
TEST POINT
L109 10K
R12IA 10K
CONTRAST
V7A 1/2-7AU7
AGC
6113 1
WV
59
ASV
R115 1.2M
C114i
.5
470V PF
1001/PP V
C201 ...0I
R204 3.3K
RI
70V PP
12 TO 14. II
11
06 SS5V
- L
FOCUS STRAP
13. WV
R202
1K
BRIGHTNESS
Adjustment of shunting strap located Oo PiCtUre tube base prov Ides optimum fcusing. Tem porarlly connect strap
eeeeee pins 6 and 10. they betimes 6 and 1. Locate strap permanently In positlon prucing
beat o eeeee 1 focodus.
V16
PICTURE TUBE INO ION TRAP)
MIER AOC 1.8
30V PP H
VII \
7.1.7
6CG7 HORIZ OSC
09
508 ,.001
105
6
a l'HORIZ SWEEP H.V. V14
ACT
100V PP C510 (,005
V12 12006
HaltinXIT
MEASURE
511110 PP H
V13 10AU4 DAMPER
T50 8516 3.3
6
1501 CONN L701
0508 100K HORIZ HOLD
110V PP H
'49
II '.001
BOOTSTRAP
12
C51211.001 10
R5I7 390K
MN
BLU ORG
to
6
ti
11 E.s
6t;
a
t6
o
:h0
01", 0 eV
VERT SWEEPS
75V PP V
V88 &18 VERT OSC
R604 47K AMA
R606 47K VVM
C6D9
.0947 -
.5808081
C605 01
C601 (.001
-210
R610A 2M
VERT LIN
8607 150K
R608 22K
R609 47K
C6071(.05
V15 I2CU5/12C5 VERT OUT
500 PP V
R603 M VERT HOLD
25V PP V
R610B A
VERT S5I1Z2EE
"'
7. STOP
1614 22M
R613 IBM
MM
750V PP V
/140V PP V mu.
_I_ C611
.002
LT601 N
211i
RID 1-.1"
EL
R701
560
R702 560
MOD TOTAL
65
VOLUME TV -14, MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1958 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
MOTOROLA Chassis TS -425, etc. Service Notes and Production Changes.
SERVICE NOTES
TO REMOVE THE CHASSIS
of the chassis to the cabinet bracket.
1. Remove receiver's back cover. NOTE: Lug that is secured to top retainer screw serves as a counterpoise for Monopole antenna. When replacing cover, make sure lead is again attached under screw.
5. Disconnect the yoke plug and chassis clip lead to cabinet. 6. Disconnect the speaker leads. If necessary, remove speaker.
2. Remove all operating control knobs.
7. Disconnect the picture tube socket.
3. Using a protective pad, position the cabinet so the bottom screws are accessible. Remove the two screws holding the chassis to the cabinet (these screws are located midway between the front and rear of the cabinet). 4. Remove the screw, inside the cabinet, securing the top
8. Carefully slide the chassis toward the rear of the cabinet. When the chassis is near the end of the cabinet, it will be necessary to swing the right-hand side of the chassis (as viewed from the rear) outward and the left-hand side of the chassis inward to give sufficient room between the chassis and the cabinet for disconnection of the high voltage anode
TI B AL UN
04...33
L2 C6, 1
C5 1.2-3.3
OSII INJ
LOOP
L5
C9.22
2AF4 OSC
L7
R2 180 LIO
CM i
.001MU,
T
C12 GIMMICK
B+ 90V
600 MA FIL STRING
L9 L6
RF NINE LINE
.4.1
' osc LINES
CT
L
33
7 -7
S
1
J
\S
\
CAPACITORS IN MMF UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED.
S I Ss
\ TEST POINTS
\ Ss
\_
1_
UHF TUNER SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
Chassis Coding
A-ll
A-02
A-03
A-04 A-05
PRODUCTION CHANGES TS -425A -0I thru A-10
Changes
Chassis Coding
Changes
TO IMPROVE TUNER OSCILLATOR STABILITY: New cement is used to prevent movement of coils. HIGH VOLTAGE RECTIFIER TUBE & CIRCUIT CHANGE: V-14 (1X2B) changed to 3A2; R-516 (3. 3) removed (filament leads now connected to pins 2 and9 of high voltage rectifier tube socket); R-519 (27K) added in series with second anode lead.
A-06 TO REDUCE NEED FOR QUADRATURE COIL ADJUSTMENT AFTER THE AUDIO IF (5U8) TUBE IS CHANGED: R-313 (220K) is added between pin #2 of Audio IF tube and ground; C-302 (.0015 mf) changed to .002 mf.
TO MINIMIZE CORONA DUE TO PROXIMITY OF FILTER CHOKE & SECOND ANODE LEAD: Vinyl plastic tape added to corner of choke nearest 2nd anode lead.
TO ELIMINATE HORIZONTAL RASTER DIS-
A-07
TO ELIMINATE A 60 CYCLE HORIZONTAL IN-
TORTION: Physical location of L-801 (filter
TERFERENCE LINE: C-810 (.001 mf) is added
choke) and T-601 (vert output trans) are inter-
across E-802 (silicon rectifier).
changed; connections on "tie points" (pins #1 and
#3 of V-12--12DQ6) are interchanged.
A-08
ELECTROLYTIC CHANGE: C-801 (three -section)
NOTE: There are no electrical circuit changes
and C-122 (one -section) replaced by C -811(4 -
involved in the A-03 changes.
section -Part No. 23B744100).
TO RAISE THE LINE VOLTAGE DESIGN CENTER TO 122V AC: R-803 (20) changed to 25 ohms. TO REDUCE CORONA SPRAY FROM THE SECOND ANODE CONNECTOR CLIP: New second anode clip & lead assembly (including rubber cup) is added to high voltage transformer.
A-09 TO IMPROVE VERTICAL STABILITY: C-618 (.0033 mf) added between ground and junction of C-601 (.001 mf) and R-601 (180K): R-616 (2.2 meg) added across Vertical Hold control (R-603).
A-10 VOLTAGE RATING INCREASE: C-611 (.002 mf) voltage rating increased from 1,000V to 2,000V.
66
VOLUME TV -14, MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1958 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
MOTOROLA
The material on the next ten pages is exact for Chassis TS -426, used in Models 17P1-1, 17P1-2, 17P2-1, and Chassis TS -426Y, used in Models Y17P1-1A, Y17P1-2A, Y17P2-1A. In addition, Chassis TS -428, used in Models 17T3OCH, 17T31GP, and Chassis TS -428Y, used in Models Y17T3OCHA, Y17T31GPA, is very similar to TS -426, -Y. The "H" panel used incorporates changes in high voltage and sweep systems to operate 17BJP4 (90° deflection) picture tube. The last page of this section has a partial circuit diagram showing these changes. Tuner TT -101, used in TS -428, is identical to TT -95 used on the TS -426, except for shaft length.
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
I. Do not service this chassis on a metal plate, due to the possibility of a short circuit through the exposed leads and terminal plating. 2. Use caution when handling the chassis with power applied, since all leads (high voltage, power line, etc.) are
exposed. Always use an isolation transformer when servicing this receiver. 3. The outer edge of the chassis and various plated areas are at power line potential.
1:ASCOOE TUNER
MIRER OSC
4BC8
CASCODE Pt AMP
PICTURE TUBE 17 BZ P4
(ION TRAP NOT REQUIRED,
OCUS ELECTRODE 4 BLUE LEAD)
FOCUS ADJUSTMENT
CONNECT TO POINT "A'',"B* OR '6"
WHICHEVER PRODUCES BEST OVERALL FOCUS.
3
2 AF4
ON UHF MODELS ONLY
00 0000
3828
.411. 3
3
TAUT
1ST MUD AMP (PHATE DOT
9 4 -
6 AW8 A
VIDEO AAP I SYNC STAR
411.
ON -OFF SWITCH
TAUT
IS t 2ND CLIPPER
9
Al 5
6CG7
NT I OSC LAIC
4 S- NNF N0
6CG7
HORIZ
OSC
4
5
ONLY-. -
I 9AU4
DAMPER
200n
COLD
20a
HOT
3A2
1 Al RECO
VID DET
P UC-IN DIAL (UNCER CUTER)
INTER -LOCH
2
8 o GROUND A 0 B0077 AAP
TUBE LOCATION AND FILAMENT WIRING
67
12D06
CHIT OUTPUT
VOLUME TV -14, MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1958 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
MOTOROLA Chassis TS -426, "I" Panel Parts Locations, Continued
L101 C102 R201 R12
R108 L803
C116
C201 L302 E302 C306 C807 L301 V9 R302 C806
51. 6L 7L 8L\ 9L 1OL 11L 12L 13L 14L 15L/16L 17L 18L
E101
C303
41 39L E102
R303 C113
R306
V3
22L T301
L109 L108 R101
C812
L107A & B T101 E103 R110 R102
V4
R109 L110 E104 T102 C119 E105
V6 V5
R103 C107
L801 IL
T103 & E106 C108 L104 R104
V10
C307 C304 R304
R305
V8
Vll
R307 28L
8301 29L
E301 C305 i8L lik\30L C114 31L 37L 32L
T302
C115 C815
C104
.36L
L106 E802 E107 C111 R802 L805 L806 C813 L807 C814
E803
" I " -PANEL PARTS LOCATIONS
The Model TS -426 plated circuit chassis is composed of two, separate, plated panel boards. The left-hand panel board (viewed from rear of receiver) contains the IF, video amplifier and sound systems and is identified as the "I" panel. The right-hand panel contains the high voltage, sweep and sync systems and is identified as the "H" panel.
The "H" and "I" panel boards are interconnected by 9 small clip -type connectors between the panels. These connectors are visible from the top of the chassis and, due to ease of accessibility-, provide excellent test points for trouble shooting,
The panel boards are secured to the metal chassis pan by means of self -tapping screws, chassis punch -out tabs arranged around the edges of the panels, and on the underside of the "I" panel, two grounding braids soldered between the panel and the chassis pan. These metal chassis tabs ground the plated -panels since the entire outer edges of the panels (checkerboard sections) are part of the ground system.
The panel boards are plated on both sides (top and bottom) and the circuitry is conventional in the respect that
68
VOLUME TV -14, MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1958 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
MOTOROLA Chassis TS -426, "H" Panel Parts Locations, Continued
E402
C401
R203 09:1,02 E501 0802 /1801
L504
V15
1411 15R
16R 17R
V12
E401
13R
1211'
L501
11R
1OR 911
8R C801
E601
VHF JUMPER
R502 C602
7R 6R - 5R
V7
C604 C117 H602 C603 C118 C605 V17
311
11604
C607
111
8603
R60213
C503
16(21 A508 C508 R503 11506
"H"-PANEL PARTS LOCATION
3211 26R 114
3511
C502 L502
V13
11401
361 1502 C501 C504
11504 C506 C507 11201 11503 181 191
201 211 223 231 243 251
there are no built-in resistors or capacitors in the plating:
The plating composes only the wire connections of the re ceiver. All component parts are mcunted to the top side of
the for
panels and with the exception of removal of componems replacement (by unsoldering), or the necessity of in-
specting the underside of the panels for cracked or broken
cfroonmnecthtieonsm, tehtearlecshhaosuslids.be no need for removing the panels
The left-hand chassis board ("I" panel) has all exposed test points and wiring connector points identified by a nun. -
ber followed by the letter "L". The numbering starts with "IL" in the lower left-hand corner and progresses numerically around the outer edge of the board in a clockwise manner. The right-hand chassis board ("H" panel) uses an ident"iRca"lsiudfefnixti.ficTathioisnssyysstteemmmexackeeps':.tthpaotssailbl lneutmo binesrstahnatlvyelaoncate any test point physicallyon either the left or right-hand ctohathsseisacwtuhaelnretrcaenivsfeerr.riag information from the schematic
69
VOLUME TV -14, MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1958 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
MOTOROLA Chassis TS -426, Alignment Information, Continued
CHASSIS POSITION FOR EASE OF SERVICING
The chassis can be partially removed for general service work by removing: the rear cover, the side panel operating knobs, four bottom screws (screws underneath cabinet) and the ground braid connecting the tuner, chassis and control bracket. Slide the chassis out of the cabinet as far as the lead lengths will allow.
NOTE: Sliding the chassis out of the cabinet allows the
aquadag coating of the picture cause arcing and interference
tpurboebltoemflso.at.T...hwerheifcohrem, iigthist
advisable to provide aground from the coating to chassis by
means of a wire taped to the coating and clipped to the re-
ceiver chassis.
To completely remove the chassis, add the following procedure to the foregoing information.
1. Unplug the tuner cable and volume control leads from the chassis.
2. Unplug the picture tube socket, high voltage anode lead, yoke leads, and tuner ground braid from the chassis. 3. Unplug the leads from the speaker terminal board. 4. Remove the chassis. 5. Loosen the two screws securing the tuner bracket assembly to the cabinet (located towards the front of the cabinet).
0. Remove the two screws (located at rear of cabinet) securing the tuner bracket assembly to the cabinet and remove tuner and volume control (front tuner screws may remain in cabinet). 7. Remove the two speaker retainer nuts and remove the speaker.
NOTE: To have the receiver operate a speaker during "bench" servicing (with the phone jack leads disconnected), connect a shorting wire between terminals 5S and 6S of the speaker terminal strip.
ALIG NMENT
SERVICING THE IF SECTION Before alignment of the video IF section is attempted, it
is advisable to thoroughly check the IF system. If alignment is started on an IF section in which a faulty component exists, successful alignment will probably be impossible and
the entire procedure will have to be repeated when the real cause of the trouble is corrected. Preliminary tests of the system should include voltage and resistance measurements, routine check for bad soldering connections, and visual inspection of the circuits for overheated components as well as for obvious wiring defects.
VIDEO IF & MIXER ALIGNMENT
Pre -Alignment Information
4. Disable tuner oscillator by shorting point (N), on top of tuner near 5U8, to chassis.
1. Remove the deflection yoke lead plugs from the chassis (remove the hex head screw first).
5. Maintain line voltage at 120 by use of variac.
2. Applynegative lead of a 6 volt bias supply to the IF AGC test point (12L): remaining lead to chassis ground.
6. Tune all coil slugs TOWARD the chassis except the following which are tuned away from the chassis... T-102 top, T-101 top and L-101.
3. Connect a 2200 ohm 50 watt resistor between the B++ line (26L) and chassis ground.
7. Refer to Figure 11, Video IF and Sound Alignment Detail, for coil and test point locations.
VIDEO IF & MIXER ALIGNMENT PROCEDURE
NOTE:
The sweep generator output cable should be properly terminated. If not terminated, connect a resistor across the cable's output terminals equal in value to that of the generator output impedance.
STEP
SIGNAL GENERATOR
INDICATOR
ADJUST
ADJUST FOR AND/OR REMARKS
I.
To 1st IF TP (3L) thru Scope thru 47K re-
T-101 (top slug)
a .01 mf capacitor.
sistor to video de-
Set at 44 Mc with 10 Mc tector test point(1L)
sweep width
Minimum response at 41.25 Mc. See step #6 in Pre -Alignment.
Z.
T-102 (top slug)
Minimum response at 47.25 Mc. See
step #6 in Pre -Alignment.
3.
..
T-101 (bot slug)
Maximum gain and 42.25 Mc marker position.
I.
T-lOZ (bot slug)
Maximum gain and 45.75 Mc marker
position.
5.
,,
,,
Repeat the above procedure until curve "A" is obtained.
S.
To tuner's mixer test
Scope thru 47K re-
receptacle (F). Set at sistor to video de-
44 Mc with 10 Mc
tector test point (IL)
sween width
T-103 (bot slug) U-101 & L-15 simultaneously
Best symmetry and flat response. Maximum gain and 45.75 Mc marker position. See curve "B" and step #6 in Pre -Alignment,
IF ALIGNMENT CHECKS
BANDWIDTH
Bandwidth may be determined by noting the marker frequencies at the 50% points on the curve. Mixer and IF bandwidth over 3.7 Mc may result in sound bars or burble in the picture; if less than 3 Mc, a loss of resolution will be noticed.
REGENERATION
Remove bias and decrease generator signal until there is a marked decrease in the oscilloscope waveform amplitude. Unwanted regeneration will be indicated by spikes on the overall response curve at about 43 Mc. Curve peaking up to 50% at approximately 45 Mc is normal. If regeneration is present, check IF circuit cathode resistors, bypass capacitors and lead dress.
70
VOLUME TV -14, MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1958 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION MOTOROLA Chassis TS -426, Alignment Information, Continued
4I.25MC
CURVE "B"
MIXER RESPONSE
47.2SMC
LIS ON TUNER
6V BATTERY
I
STEPS II THRU 3
STEP 13 21
.61
Ia
--o VTVM
DC
SOUND At I GWENT
1511 DIP MAX
TO MIXER TEST RECEPT IFI ON TUBER
SCOPE
SWEEP .6 MARKER
GENERATOR
.001
O.01M11
,VOILTAO.
wenn
CU11601 UMW,
N1.25 MC
ET 25 MC
z
IF INPUT RECEPT 141
IF TEST RECEPTOU
V4 313Z6
TOP
VS
3CB6
_BOL (11.1 CND --4..!,
V9 3AL5
RATIO TOP (SEC) TRANS ROT IPSII
LIDTA W. 5MC TRAPI TOP 1.107B (AUDIO IAKEOFF/ BOT
VS 3AU6
(26U 134-1- TP
VOLTAGE NORMALIZING
RESISTOR
3V P -P
47.25MC 30%
45.75 MC
/
3D11.
/
CURVE "A"
IF RESPONSE
GEN AGC TP = TEST POINT
FIGURE 11. IF & SOUND ALIGNMENT DETAIL
SOUND ALIGNMENT
This alignment may be made by injecting an accurate 4.5 Mc signal into the VIDEO DETECTOR test point. A second practical method is the use of a station transmission after a preliminary alignment is made with a fairly accurate generator. The latter method will produce an accurate 4.5 Mc signal at the output of the video detector.
The alignment procedure will be the same whether the test signal originates from a crystal controlled generator or from a station.
Pre -Alignment Information 1. Set contrast control to maximum. 2. Maintain approximately 3 to 5 volts on the VTVM. 3. Correct point of tuning is with slugs tuned away from each other.
4. Refer to Video IF andSound Alignment Detail (Figure 11) for coil and test point locations.
STEP
SIGNAL GENERATOR
SOUND ALIGNMENT PROCEDURE
INDICATOR
ADJUST
ADJUST FOR AND/OR REMARKS
1.
To video detector T. P. (IL) thru a .005 mf
VTVM to center tap of two 100K (5%) re -
L -107B (bot slug)
capacitor at 4.5 Mc
sistors in series from
T.P. (15L) to chassis
ground (Fig. 11).
Maximum deflection
2.
T-301 (bot slug)
.
3.
..
VTVM between center T-301 (top slug)
Zero voltage reading.
tap of 100K ohm re-
sistors and T. P. (16L).
4.5 MC TRAP ADJUSTMENT
1. Carefully tune receiver to local station and advance the contrast control. 2. Adjust tuner's local oscillator (with the fine tuning control) to bring the 4.5 Mc interference strongly into the picture.
3. ADJUST...4.5 Mc trap (L -107A) to find the two points of adjustment at which the sound beat is just noticeable on the picture tube screen. Rotate c3,4.core toward center of the two points. Use minimum amount of inductance (core out of coil) that will result in no apparent beat interference.
71
VOLUME TV -14, MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1958 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
MOTOROLA Chassis TS -426, Locations of Controls, Connections, Test Points
VHF CHANNEL !ELECTOR
VHF FINE TuNING (UHF TuNms MODELS ONLY I
PUSH NUT TON ON -OFF
CONTRAST
T L --R1003
GR
AC 5w LEAD
,10,514r4(
BRN RO
THE ANT TERMINALS
UNF ANT TERMNALS
GNO CUP SLR !ILO
RED 620
RN 8301
L50
Mt.
14v CAGE
UHF OE 5 ONLY
110E0 OCT TP
21e8'
CBIS
SOH
RR
"L CeHy
SPAR E304
'A=2
5111 Tr
iih_ *en Aft11 artre.glit05CC0010
DRS UHF
36R 346
0
7601
TEAT OUTPUT
0 G
SRN EL LR
66020 R602A T vERT
LIN SIZE
TO47414
E 303
Tp TEST POINT SUFFIX '1.' LEFT NAND CHASSIS
SUFFIX 'R' RIGHT HAND musts
PICTURE TUBE ACT
EL
CONTROLS, CONNECTIONS AND TEST POINT LOCATIONS
72
TUNER a L8 Cx
, - ,----0.-, , --' 000 o - Ed
Cv
co
TI - ,, r4 0 =
El jjj
L4
2 5
"S 0 8.2
L5
Ill
000
CH 13
114
'000'
CH 13
E5
4..,
E6 354.3
.3.
',.-7..,
_
L16 ..
E74.5,1
_
a
CH 13
105V.
o.
CHANNEL SELECTOR SHOWN
I
IN CHANNEL IWO POSITION
_ MIXER TP
R8 15K
t
a
$ L 15
1
tii
CD
En ,--I
LI
,
16
.. - -3- C3 5
/1 os
- 4 ',:-,
. 0 C4 8 2
L7
r- P P so
-- i -.. - 2;l -,
g --0 ;' ZTul. -i _ t. 0 ' z r
E3
..13 . .
t
e 1
,
I
win npt
SOUND 0 ° 250 ONLY- , , p ,
g
VI
41L3 8
RF AMP
L9
TV -H5 ONLY
->ai opi a,
".X..
ONLY
-E)
L10
1
6
Ti -95Y ONLY
J
St L.53
1
3
RI3 2.2M
.TC ...,
10L
1.5
- HE
V2
all
MI XER-OSC
1
L 2i
*
1 00
-..-r
gLI3
VT -95Y ONLY
1
r--
,
-4,-
a
C16 22
_ 22
IT -95 1T-95
6
R9 270K
zi :
: j -
fL3
^
1
92
lc
I
I
L17 a
LI8 -±
t LI9
L20 &
3
.
FINE
TUNING
L21 &
-.-
R6 470 AM,
26
C24 001-
F"
(C28
©
=... 0 M
RIO 8 2K
. L
R12 1 5K
L
on, o(411
CD 14
0L
IF
i--,
(-)
crct
U)
CO 1-3
CL (i)
i
cn
I.'13
G.C,
I
11) ,_
1-1
C1) trj
CD
4,1
Cad NI I
1.) cr)
0
'7)
ril M
0CD P t:1
C-1.- .eSl' l,aJl
0 ,.1
,--
(-)
V8 3A116
'0 P AUDIO IF
V9 3AL5 RATIO DET
I -1( :r8T1_1_g- 1i , 151,c. : c17='" IIy' - 00 r0 1
L1078 2
i-. p a
ill L107 CONN
MO I 0 c LUG Y611
2
5 45V
1301
r
i
A
I
i 15 I
r
NO
ov 4
1
1
21 ow
C302 id 2
4
1.
120
12K
2
1
I
13
1.- - _ _ _
I
-1
RATIO DET TP -Ty
)1-6-T-5--
I
005
005
_ID
15L
)?-
005
1302
3
220
33K
- 1
H -0- L - tg T P 0 Zn E301
3
t R.
3 4
T301 CONN Hilox V16V)
C113C lONIFD
-1-
L
E302
VITA 1/2 7AU7 1ST AUDIO AMP
.
-
- KL C308 005
I S.
-I I
'1
R10613
IM VOLUME
I
la
16L
2
.3'
AUDIO TP
(
g 9
c,
7..-
.-..
2 v C304
..
ce
_11 C815C T 30MFD
1-
VII 5A05 AUDIO OUT
SPKR -CHOKE
TERM STRIP -
is
os.., 34S 5
5S
6S
T302 3.L
2V
f CI1313 20MFD
31111:le
EARPHONE SOCKET E303
1.308 680
s 0
"3. _
. DO4
Aye0 li (0''D CO
tll CD
cp
P
1_3
0 F...
0-. 1-.
til
_,.4 -3--3
crcl P3
cm
1
(I) .
.....
Cl)
til
I...a
.<
S 0Z
$y
,--.
i.
(.--.)
CD
03 CL
'1J
1-3
74
1-4
.P1 ,....,
CD
Bt; ,..... X
13 + 4-
Part of schematic diagram. Wires ending and marked connect to corresponding
'-cs sil
.0.-b-.
wires of main schematic printed on the next two pages. This separation is made for printing convenience only.
crcz 1-3
r0- ct,
Z
VOLUME TV -14, MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1958 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION I
MOTOROLA
CHASSIS TS -426A-00
2am F:ms m 2
0,tr0.50g0a0,i044040.70404000
000
>4a8
41.
IF IN
P..
IF
OD 3L IF TEST
° PHASE .ID 23L0 1361 PLATTE.° 25LO
LICIT CRASSIS (top flee)
CONEECTIONS
. solder. le.
0
0
27L
L SONE IX . LEFT Ch.B..
01. 26L0
a)
4240 020
2910
OL 36L
0 2L GND OIL 0113 OPT TP
341
331.
11-11
SOOL
041.0- -0311
ORG
"I" PANEL
mm E
00 00
0130.
01. 43)11a
RIGHT CHASSIS (I. rte.)
0.
-.erect
1.
lead
0
0..3
R SUFFIX . RIGHT chase.
030 0 BR
0 TR 60,
00000 TP 3.0 HORIE AFC TP 3100 BOR. OSC COIL TP
60
Z3'.3 (vit
L0t.3F.1. L
0200
ORG
9:90
cad.
o (,)
o
LaAGC,
a, 0
0) S.
5+4
C.)
0 CD
AUDIO
0 C.)
CI)
0 ttCD
"0
$.4
Cr) CI,
IF IN
r-
IF AGC lEST
0
I2L
T101 1102 CONN
I
2
IF lEST
0
3826
1ST IF AMP
3
(ROT 010111
r - - B
T101
1101
33K
47%
41()
J
E101
2
199T 6
TEl
C../1
:a
14
LLD
I
2 -A I
2
°I --1(
;4_4 j 470
at
01.
I
3
4 102
VIDEO
V4 3826 2ND IF AMP
1102
R
050
3
105
VS 3CB 3RD -Tr.
°HE 005_
E103
3
E104
,
RF AGC TEST
ilLO
5 I C1C14 1
25
L_
E401 3
13
:rt=1:1
(.047
SYNC
470
IE W.
9V PP
VIOB 1/2 7AU7 PHASE DET
IOR 231
). I 6
2210
9L
9V PP
9R
9
R401 330K 140211301
10V PP HOR I Z AFC TP
-4:00
eNDO410.
020 Sole
an woe G. 0310
0' 3300 RED
"H" PANEL
C
1.0 RED
19R
2°00 oa 2150 RN
2200 EL 2300
Bu 040.0
U
-t (i) "0 ed
u) 0
a) En
MI NM I.
140V PP V
V12 21._17 1ST & 2ND CLIPPERS
10V PP
V
L
3
.031
150K
PZ,.
[402
VZIT LIM SIZE
ER RE
d 8+. .
TUNER CONN
9L 40
.11000T
roe 2
Irg
ATM.
(YET 001,1
POWER SUPPLY
6GT
erG3
.3/13
7
45
4-5 9
9 4-5
VII
4
3
341'16 4
6:414
0808 .001 L804
L801
3CB6
L802
RI IR
SC.
522. CS
V4 31306
5L 3000
gi a mT -
NOTES)
CAPACITORS - Decimal values in NiF, all others in MMF unless otherwise specified.
VOLTAGES 1. Made with a VTVM from point indicated to chassis. 420% 2. Tuner on CH 13 witnantenna terminals shorted. 3. line Voltage - 1211VAC. (Use Isolation Transformer). 4. Voltages indicated by an asterisk PI will vary with associated
control settIrm
WAVEFORMS 1. Taken with a wide -bind oscilloscope 2. Race)... in operating condition with contrast control at 01011MUM.
V VERTICAL H HORIZONTAL
1205 AC
1806
L807
F801 ON -OFT SWITCH
12802 7.5
C813
Erik
74
25Vv PP
L8,38 LB
I.5V PP
V
L8I5A I150 MFD
50
T C8158 100MFD
VOLUME TV -14, MOST-OFTEN-NEEDED 1958 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
T103
'IDS TO 180T
V6A
C109 ±
1/2 6AWBA
6.8
07A 10111
VIDEO AMP
1400 PP
L109
CI I
L106
Cl
5.6K
+C113A
IIOMFD
OL
10K
L110 ion
1103 CONN
(ROT VIEW
OE To -20T 2
I
C107 .01
8104 2M ACC
V6B
= NOISE INVERTER
1600 PP V
11013
T:CVIVrI 4.7K
I'C114
MN'
IM
0109 5K .We
I 0 00 0
50130H PP
1400 PP
WA V
_ 6\ lakCG7
GATED AGC
7
E107
lr
10=
42R 144444
7.4
cus (71-"9zBL
40VvPP
531 "L
-r "3- 0
C201
,
0202 100K BRIGHT
3
0204 33K SR CVT OCZIET
REID 33R
o GPO 89RISC
TOR OPTIMUM FOCUS
A
R
In
v0i1m8
17CAP4 PICTURE TUBE
C6177-.4
NMI
HORIZ OSC COIL TP
s'.3 0
L501
r
OD 3SO
E501
C502 .0033 _± C5036
2.2K
T IOMFD
.0015
3
4
4.7M
81
T T .5 I --I-
TO
2
56K
01,1At
330 PP
SR
fF80
v3
131 4
013 6007
HORIZ OSC
6502
KW PP
14
rrJ
6
1400 PP
.HORIZ SWEEP a H.V.
1501 VI6
VI5 19,21ca DAMPER
27R
5r,
3
HV RECT 4
R507 27K 4S11/ 03
30R F504
3 4
Vld
12DQ6 HORIZ OUT
LSIW
Zr
610 BODO. 0504
5K 32R
r§1
Be
r-
7.
150
160K 1.2
150 [5031
R506 lMl
_tow 12508.420
60V PP
6 5
1501 CONN
rYOKE"-
ER RED
1701
I :7011
91 BLU
341 TOTAL
ORD
O
BLK
HORIZ
VERT SWEEP
E6F2
R6020 2M
VERT LIN
1000 PP
601
6
-1
V
1
:5
r R602A 5M
IDOSTP
hc
22
VERT SIZE
--)1-
-=-
L
7
C102
1400V PP
47K
02
V
75V PP
C
TO 28t
0606 002
430
1
503 0 TO -1ST
-O
3R
PIM OM TRAMS
T601
IM 126111 OAT HOLD
185V PP V
078 112 6CG7
VT 0T OSC
30V PP
V17 I2W6GT
VERT OUT
C5030 ±-
10MFD
01e
R604 10K
75
VERT
R702 22.. 3.6 TOTAL
VOLUME TV -14, MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1958 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
MOTOROLA Chassis TS -426 and TS -428, Service Information, Continued
PICTURE CENTERING
1. Start with the magnetic centering device arms together (for minimum field strength) and positioned in the horizontal plane. 2. Separate the arms of the centering device to center the picture vertically. 3. Adjust horizontal centering by rotating the magnetic centering device, as a unit, one way or the other. Readjust vertical centering by slightly rotating the relative position of the arms.
AGC CONTROL (on cabinet back)
The AGC control allows adjustment for the signal strength in your location. Turning the control clockwise sets the receiver for weak stations: counterclockwise rotation adjusts for strong stations. An incorrect setting may give poor picture quality, instability or a buzzing sound in the speaker. Adjust for clearest and most stable picture on strongest available channel.
DEFLECTION YOKE COMPONENTS
Temperature compensating resistor for stabilization of vertical size
To maintain constant vertical size, regardless of resistance changes occurring in the vertical deflection yoke winding, a temperature compensating resistor (R-702) is incorporated in series with the vertical winding. This resistor is located on the yoke itself and, depending on the receiver model, will either be imbedded in the yoke fibre and in close contact with the yoke core... or mounted to the periphery of the yoke and in contact with the yoke core by means of a metal strip held inplace by the yoke core band. A defect in the temperature compensating resistor could result in loss of vertical sweep or reduction in vertical size of the raster and picture. Pincushion magnets
Pincushion magnets, in both the vertical and horizontal planes, are provided as part of the yoke. These magnets are glued into pockets provided in the yoke flare and,under normal operating circumstances, require no service or adjustment.
The magnet polarity is indicated by a paint dot on one end. If it should be necessary to replace a magnet, polarize magnet withpaint dot running in same direction as other three magnets.
PICTURE TUBE REPLACEMENT 1. Remove the back cover. 2. Remove the two screws underneath the cabinet, holding the front of the cabinet, and remove the front by swinging
the bottom outward and then lifting over the top retainer projections.
3. Remove the picture tube socket, neck components and the high voltage anode lead.
4. Remove the two upper corner screws securing the picture tube to the cabinet and take the picture tube out of the front of the cabinet.
5. Replace black tape around tube mounting area and replace tube in reverse order to that given above.
PRODUCTION CHANGES TS -426A-01 thru A-03
Chassis Coding
Changes
A-01
TO DECREASE SYNC BUZZ: R-502 (2200)
changed to 3900 thereby decreasing the voltages,
at the cathode of V -7A (AGC) and at the plates
of V-13 (Horiz Osc), by approximately 10 volts.
A-02 A-02-1
TO DECREASE RINGING: C-509 (470 mmf) and R-509 (820) were wired in series and then paralleled across R-504 (5K). SAME ASA-03 CHANGE. NOTE: The high voltage transformer (T-501) was erroneously stamped 24C744406 but has a red dot as the distinguishing code. Order 24K745702 as a replacement for the red coded 24C744406.
A -03
TO INCREASE HIGH VOLTAGE & HORIZ SIZE:
T-501 (high voltage transformer) changed: T-501
primarycoil changed: C-505 (120 mmf) changed
to 100 mmf: L-503 (Horiz Size Coil) changed:
R-504 (5K) removed: R-508 (8200) changed to
5600.
Chassis coded A-02-1, A-03 and later, should use the 24K745702 high voltage transformer and a 24K745704 Horiz Size Coil.
Chassis coded A-00, A-01 & A-02, should use 24C744406 high voltage transformer and a 24C745936 Horiz Size Coil.
The two parts should not be indiscriminately interchanged as "ringing" could appear if the parts are not properly matched and the other circuit changes are not made.
MORI/ OSC COIL TP
2110
E501
7
.0015
4
4.7M
T
56K
.c 2
0501 1000 HORIZ HOLD
5
_L
33V PP
511
1501 350
C502".0033
C503A
FWD
i51e-s°
.11041 2.2K
3
01 4
V13
ts§1
HORIZ OSC
tr502
10V PP
rJr 140V PP
.HORIZ SWEEP 81 H.V.
4011g
1501
e
VII
3A3
MV RECT
C5I_TA8
R5I0
19A5 TR5wI1e
DAMPER
2.70
2711.
R50? 22K
2011
52Li
C
V14 12006 HORIZ OUT
R512 6.8K
.,12
T -
as R506wjM
R508 12K
Nee
.1
506
05118
OKE
BB rL701
C701 -1-
191I
T
.11(1
TOTAL
HORIZ
0 In
Circuit of Horizontal Sweep and H. V. as used in Chassis TS -428. (Balance as in TS -426)
76
VOLUME TV -14, MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1958 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
MOTOROLA
CHASSIS TS -542
MODELS
21T37 & 21K70 Series
21T37
Model
2IK7OB Y21K7OB
21K7OM Y21K7OM
21T37B YZ1T37B
21T37M Y21T37M
RECEIVER MODEL BREAKDOWN CHART
Cabinet
TV
Chassis VHF Tuner UHF Tuner
Console, limed oak: masonite Console, limed oak: masonite Console, sienna mahogany: masonite Console, sienna mahogany: masonite Table, blonde oak: masonite Table, blonde oak: masonite Table, sienna mahogany: masonite Table, sienna mahogany: masonite
TS -542 TS -542 Y
TS -542 TS -542Y TS -542 TS -542 Y
TS -542 TS -542Y
TT -96 WTT-96
TT -96 WTT-96
TT -96 WTT-96Y
TT -96 WTT-96Y
77K744280 77K744280 77K744280 77K744280
5U8
MIX OSC
ON -OFF SW TUNER RECEPT
21CBP4/A
PICTURE TUBE
4BC8
RF AMP
2A F4/A
UHF OSC
UHF MODELS ONLY
BLK 611 HOT
F IL TEST
.--4 XTAL POINT
(BZ6N 4 -B -g1 (3CB61VID DET
1S3VIDEO IF 2ND VIDEO IF 3RD VIDEO IF/
3
4
(AN IF
4
20011 COLD
JJAX HI
.,--/SELEN UM RECT
MCTOROLA 48K125651 OR EQUIV(350 MAI
- LOCK
FIL TEST
POINT 1261'7
VIDEO AMP
6
1.6 AMP B+ FUSE SLO-BLO LC TYPE
4545
MOTOROL A
65K744238
ih--, VERT OUTPUT
--,.
6CG7
VERT OSC & 2hD CLIPPER
3BU8
ACC & EST CLIPPER
6CG7
3AL5 HORIZ OSC
PHASE DET \---/
5\
A 00A09
SPKR TERM
19AU4
DAMPER
12006
HORIZ OUTPUT
3A3
HV RECT
ALIGNMENT
FIGURE 1. TUBE LOCATIONS & FILAMENT WIRING
SERVICING THE IF SECTION Before alignment of the video IF section is attempted, it is advisable to thoroughly check the system. If alignment is started on an IF section in which a faulty component exists,
successful alignment will probably be impossible and the
entire procedure will have to be repeated when the real cause of the trouble is corrected. Preliminary tests of the system should include voltage and resistance measurements, routine checks for bad soldering connections, and visual inspection of the circuits for overheated components as well as for obvious wiring defects.
11 MIXER
51/8 j,RCRECS4ET)P,T
TUNER
CURVE A
42 /5M4
IDA MAX DIP
CURVE B 45 I5MC
CUR VI C
45 ISMC 204
(Material on Chassis TS -542 is on pages 77 through 82)
CURVES B E
SWEEP GENERATOR
CONTROL RECEPT SI
TUNER RECE PT
52
11028 ROT L1024 TOP
'6 OT
VIDEO DAT
S3 YOKE SOCKET
QUAD DET
TP c7.
N 4.5MC TRAP
IP TEST POINT
F IGURE 5. VIDEO IF & SOUND ALIGNMENT
54 SERVICE TEST RECEPT I
' ORTIZ OSC COIL
A0011 5044 VOLTAGE NORMALIZING RESISTOR
HIGH VOLTAGE
CAGE
77
VOLUME TV -14, MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1958 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
MOTOROLA Chassis TS -542, Alignment Information, Continued
VIDEO IF & MIXER ALIGNMENT
the Service Test Receptacle and the positive lead to pin 03.
Pre -Alignment Steps I. Maintain line voltage at 120 with variac.
5. All coil slugs should be tuned away from the chassis except 3rd IF, mixer secondary coil and 40 Mc trap coil which are tuned toward chassis.
2. Remove the deflection yoke plug to eliminate RF interference radiation.
6. Refer to Video IF & Mixer Alignment Detail for component and test point location (Figure 5).
3. Short pin #9 of oscillator tube (V-2) to chassis. 4. Apply...negative lead of a 6V bias supply to pin #1 of
7. Set channel selector on channel #13 and connect a 2000 ohm 50W voltage normalizing resistor from B++ to chassis. (Use pins #5 and #3 of the Service Test Receptacle.)
STEP
SWEEP GENERATOR
1. To IF TP thru .001 mf capacitor at 44 Mc. Set to 10 Mc sweep width
2.
3.
4.
To MIXER TEST RE-
CEPT thru .001 mf ca-
pacitor at 44 Mc. Set to
10 Mc sweep width
VIDEO IF & MIXER ALIGNMENT PROCEDURE
INDICATOR
Scope thru 47K resistor to video det TP
ADJUST T-102
T-103 T-104 T -1
ADJUST FOR AND/OR REMARKS Correct 42.25 Mc marker position as shown in curve C.
Correct 45.75 Mc marker position (curve C). Flat response with minimum curve tilt (curve C). Adjust until its effect is out of the IF bandpass.
5.
L-101
47.25 Mc trap dip. See curve B.
6.
L -102A
40 Mc trap dip. Temporary removal of bias
(top slug) may be necessary to make the trap dip more
pronounced (curve B).
7.
C -101,T-1^1 Alternately adjust for correct curve and marker
& L -102B positions as shown in curve B.
(bot slug)
8.
T -1
Flat response with 5% tilt as shown in curve A.
NOTE: Repeat any portion of the above procedure until the proper overall curve A is obtained.
SOUND ALIGNMENT (Station Signal Method)
The sound system used in the TS -542 receiver consists of an audio IF amplifier stage, a quadrature grid detector and an output stage. Since this type of sound system is extremely sensitive, relatively small input signal voltage will cause grid current to flow in both the IF amplifier and the detector stages. Grid current through the tuned coils will load them down making the adjustment extremely broad and alignment impossible. For this reason, it is necessary to use a very weak signal when aligning the driver and the de-
tector input coils. Actually, the signal should be well down into the noise level for proper tuning action. Preliminary Steps 1. Tune in a strong TV station. 2. Adjust all controls for normal picture and sound. 3. Refer to Video IF & Mixer Alignment Detail for coil and test point locations (Figure 5).
SOUND ALIGNMENT PROCEDURE
STEP STATION
1.
Strong signal
2.
3.
Weak signal*
4.
INDICATOR VTVM to quad det test
point (gra lead) Listening test
ADJUST L-303
T-301 L-302
REMARKS
Maximum deflection (coarse adj.)
Maximum sound with minimum distortion (fine adj.) Maximum sound with minimum distortion (maintain hiss level)
If sound is not clear at this point, repeat the above procedure as necessary.
*NOTE:
The signal must be weakened considerably either by disconnecting value resistors across the antenna terminals until a pronounced hiss maintained for proper alignment.
one side of the antenna lead, or connecting low appears in the sound. This hiss level must be
4. 5 MC TRAP ADJUSTMENT 1. Carefully tune receiver to local station and advance con-
trast control.
2. Adjust local oscillator (with fine tuning control) to bring the 4.5 Mc interference strongly into the picture.
3. ADJUST... sound trap (L-107) to find the two points of
adjustment at which the sound beat is just noticeable on the
picture tube two points.
screen. Rotate the core Use minimum amount of
toward center of inductance (core
the out
of coil) that will result in no apparent beat, interference.
78
E3
r-
CI .5-8 ld
02118.2
L5
L6 C3 5
ANTENNA INPUT TT -96 ONLY
io
C55 441611C TRAP
15
L51
FM TRAP
C56 47
T51
L58
444trb4
E53
L51
55
I.52
-
E51
-,-
I
L56
I
52,
000 I ATI'
ANTENNA INPUT WTT-96Y ONLY
TUNER CONN
NTT -96Y ONLY
C
LI1
VI ABU RF AMP
_=2ri
1/If TUPERS TT -96 AND WIT -96Y
3 14. 15. efi un, 17 SNOW
CRANNIL 2 POSITION
X
.aL 1-1
x-) (C12 001
NTT -96, ONLY
TUNER
LI4
44,
13
MIXER/
ItST RECEPT %11:
CI6 1.5
6Ar
.5
WL3
',TT -96Y ONLY 164
R5 470
I
-F 000
115
1-1 TI
RI, 15K 02
MIXER -05C "r11
6
R8 270K
--
--LI
C2IA 800
(L,
E7
116 a LI7
Lot
9
9V
-.16
11,)
FINE TUNING
\
L25
I
C251
CD
UHF 13-4-
.0.17FIPAVn J 112-5
02
_ C I5B
8 TT,
6 NIIIIITT-96.!
L ONLY I Rh1
2-f1"1"RIZ 1500
TO
n0 4
CD Im.1
0aO
c. -.)
Cl)A,
Cs cn ci)
rn O 0-3
o Cun az.
B++
120V 60 CYCLES AC ONLY
POWER SUPPLY
199114
IT1I0
5965 1801
7 8s 270 4
E 3 zL
Raol 35
j51201.1-9802 2 2
GRAY
BAN
E801
ON-OFF SW
1.A
SLO-BLO6
V3
507.
1802
V9 .1'46
4
4
3LIT
V5
1803
3C11
3 4
C806 2X800
TP I
804
;.',,,,,, :4'5 .vg,
4-56 4 3 4 5
TP 2
,W.
:-,
,,, 3 4 5 4
rm. -96 Y
UHF
VI
TAPS/ 9I1C8
ONLY
V2
7E 7
5U8
0-1)
®I 5
81 2 X 8410
4§
lTg
VI 913C8
4-
-
TT -98
V2 SUN
4 t,
ID
MO 7.5
140MFD
E804 2]0v
L805 45f
255V
O
[803
20V PP
V
V9 SOLO
34
8.
Ilc=
3.6 VI
V7 V18
311118 CAT
34
54
1 12
134,
R804 10K
1800
.
t
1-t,+
t70
2.5V PP
V
8 ÷+
I (3+
5pP.
15:
co
CD
p
LI CM
CD
CCO
TUNER
R\ECEPT,,,,s5
IPOWERI
SI52 ©IF TEST
FRONT OF CHASSIS
TEST POINTS AND RECEPTACLES LOCATIONS
now TP
CONTROLS RECEPT
0
FILTP I
VIDEO
DET TEST
0
FILTP 2
RECEPT
54 SERVICE TEST RECEPT
SI LUG VIEW
211
7
53 LUG VIEW
005 0
34
52 & S4 LUG VIEW
T501 CONN
VOLUME TV -14, MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1958 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION I
1
TIOl CONN
O
f-tr.,..4 L102 CONN
CAPACITORS - Decimal values in MF, all others in MMF unless otherwise specified.
V3 1ST IF AMP
LOCATING EAR
4
1
3' 2
V4 3BZ6
2ND P
VIDEO IF
LOCATING EAR
V5 3CB6 3RD IF AMP
LOCATING EAR
IF TEST
0
5
3
2
5 I I5V
1102 4= I
1103
T1011
11
- 18C105
3
TUNER AGC
VOLTAGE MEASUREMENTS 1. Made with a VTVM from point indicated to chassis. 2. Line voltage 120VAC (Use Isolation Transformer). 3. Voltages indicated by an asterisk 1'1 will vary with associated control setting.
4. Voltages taken with contrast control at minimum and all other controls in normal operating position with no signal input
IF TEST TO S4-1
B.
SYNC
Jfill*1110/
120V PP
(e.
V7B 1/2-3BU3 1ST CLIPPER
40V PP
V
V8A 1/2-6CG7
2ND CLIPPER
C4rEH.5 (1;047
CONTRAST)
A C4911r0
AW jjj
27K
260V
11-11
404
a)
.- W
IVRT
6402 470K
U
F
8
10I3V PP
V
O
03 cd
Cd
12V PP H
12V PP
H
.C5011(
V9 3AL5 PHASE DETECTOR
WAVEFORMS 1. Taken with a wide -band oscilloscope. 2. Receiver in operating condition and showing a normal picture.
-5V
C5021(220
OC
+5V
C1:22fr,
R504 4.7M
S4 SERVICE TEST RECEPT
50V PP
9V PP H
RORI2 AFC
10V PP IF AGC
4
3
1302 CONN
0231
a
'
4
1.5V PP V
SOUND
VI4 3CB6 AUDIO IF AMP
.751,4_MF
1150
6
DOT
t2
4I
I3
T301 CONN
V15 AUDIO DET
1301
2! 4 !a
5
(-) CL
C305 .005
2
2
12
I
R304 47K
C3111/.D1 WAY R3013 2.2K
BLU
V16
aq5.
AUDIO OUTPUT
L303161 CONN
I 4
00112
I2 I3
TAP AT
17.L., 3 .T,T"IV H(
C316 .0033
Toirx R1218 VOLUME
2M
g
2 10
2
C506C
20MFD
S1 -3p
QUAD DU TEST POINT
, /BEzEL
C81413
Lux T302 -6
E.301
)1
1. C506E110
30MFD
R311 220
500V 255V
80
VOLUME TV -14, MOST-OFTEN-NEEDED 1958 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
L104 L103
24id MD-
4V PP
V
L106 R120 68K
5.6K C121 .005
V6 12BY7A VIDEO AMP
3-9
100V
7
170V
L107
L108
-7
R121A CONTRAST
250
C126 27
12K
flJL
.4w
1605 PP
(xxx CVA4TRAOT )
VIDEO DET re TEST POINT
2
.11.1
41 *eh
160V PP MAX CONTRAST 1
230
P1 S1 -
C 1241,470
3
1 OV
640V PP
V7A 112-3B U8
AGC
R122 820K AAA"
CIDT r.1
11111111M
R125 56K MN \
0204 10K
C204 1.01
606 PP
._C101
S I -
-
B
R201
BRIGHT! 100K
ORR -Win P1-2
51-20
AVV - 115, 13 12
II
1 R206 33K 10 6
V18 21CBP41A
PICTURE TUBE
SONCCKRETT
53-7
O FOCUS STRAP - on pix tube base; connect from pin 6 to 1 or 10, whichever gives best overall focus.
4 VERTICAL I HON I LONTAt TP TEST POINT
10
ORIZ SWEEP & H.V.
010 6CG7 HORIZ OSC
VII
12DQ6
HORIZ OUT
V12 19AU4
DAMPER
C548
1
].0
145V
C510
1.15
0514 470
%.6
Lor,
8508 HORIZ
HOLD 100K
0710
1177 160V PP
4
I:102
ape
030
L503 5 w4.-25 -/ 0 0 0
11-1E-.54 0
C513
.1
T501
V13 3A3 HV RECT
0519 1.8
5
R52112
0520 27K
1 77,1
C511(.05
YOKE
L701
$3-4
at°
0 S3 3
150V PP C602 (X12
VERT SWEEP
C605 1.015
V8B 1/2-6CG7 VERT OSC
-Ae0A608e22K
C611 7.02 ( 02
R616 22K
VI7 5AQ5 VERT OUTPUT
300V PP
V
5 23, V BLUE ./T601
-20
6
R602 VERT HOLD
2M P 1 -1 RED
20
R613 VERT LIN
130V PP V
81
150V PP V
VOLUME TV -14, MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1958 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION MOTOROLA Chassis TS -542, Service Information, Continued
REMOVING THE BACK COVER
1. Remove the back cover screws and the single interlock screw. 2. Unplug the tuner lead from the back cover antenna receptacles. 3. Remove the cover.
RECEIVER REMOVAL AS A UNIT (less control bracket) 1. Remove the back cover. 2. Remove channel selector and fine tuning knobs. 3. Unplug speaker lead from speaker receptacle. 4. Remove the four (4) bottom chassis retaining screws. 5. Remove the two (2) tuner bracket screws securing the bracket to the cabinet. 6. Unplug the operating control cable. 7. Remove chassis from the rear.
CHASSIS REMOVAL (less picture tube, speaker & control bracket)
1. Remove the rear cover. 2. Unplug speaker lead from speaker receptacle. 3. Remove the four (4)bottom screws securing the chassis to the cabinet. 4. Remove the four (4) chassis screws securing the chassis to the picture tube mounting assembly. 5. Unplug the tuner, operating control cable, picture tube socket, yoke and high voltage anode connector. 6. Remove chassis to rear.
OPERATING -CONTROL -BRACKET REMOVAL 1. Remove the back cover.
2. Remove the complete receiver (see receiver removal).
3. Remove front panel knobs. 4. Remove the four (4) screws securing the control bracket to the cabinet. When replacing controls, be sure to replace grounding bracket between control panel and bezel.
PICTURE TUBE REPLACEMENT 1. Remove back cover.
2. Remove the receiver as a unit. 3. Unplug the picture tube socket and yoke. 4. Remove the yoke and picture tube high voltage anode connector. 5. Loosen the two (2) picture tube retainer strap bolts sufficiently to enable removal of the tube from the rear. 6. Replace black tape around mounting area of new tube and install in reverse order to that given above.
SAFETY GLASS REMOVAL 1. Turn power off. Z. Remove the five (5) screws holding metal trim at the top
of the safety glass and remove the metal trim. 3. Allow glass to move outward at the top: Grasp glass at left and right-hand sides and lift upward until glass is out of lower retaining channel. Place glass in a safe place.
When replacing glass, make sure rubber protective channel is on glass at top and bottom before installation.
FUSE REPLACEMENT
the
AB+s+pelciniael,"liTmiintsedfucsuerriesnat"1b.6ayaomnpet"tSylpoe-bfulose,
is used in LC" type
and is accessible upon removal of the receiver back cover.
To remove fuse, push down and rotate until fuse pops up.
Replace fuse with exact rating only.
SERVICING THE VHF TUNER The tuner has been provided with removable wafers for the tuning sections, to facilitate checking of the component
parts as well as provide a simple method of replacement should one of the tuned sections be damaged.
S2 L102A & B TUNER RECEPT
T101
L101
IF TP C101 V3 T102 V4 1103 FIL. V5 T104 & L302 V14 FIL. T301 V15 L303 V16
3BZ6
3BZ6
TP 1 3CB6 E101
3CB6 TP 2
3DT6
5AQ5
B02 ,AUDIO
OUTPUT
L107
C506
Si
CONTROL RECEPT
R802 R801
L805 FILTER CHOKE
E804
E803
C814 R803
V6 12BY7
T601
VERT
E802
OUTPUT LC FUSE
V17 5AQ5
VERT SIZE
7//
VERT V8
V9
LIN 6CG7 3AL5
V7 3BU8 S4
V10 6CG7
L501
HORIZ OSC COIL
HORIZ HOLD
S3 YOKE QUAD RECEPT TP
VII
12DQ6
V12 19AU4
V13 3A3
T501
82
VOLUME TV -14, MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1958 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
MODELS WG-4042A, WG-4052A, WG-5042A, WG-5047A, WG-5052A
(Circuit diagram on pages 84-85, Alignment information on page 86)
CHASSIS ASSEMBLY REMOVAL
1. Remove the knobs, the secondary control escutcheon and the secondary control knobs from the front of the cabinet.
2. Remove cabinet back.
3. Disconnect the antenna and speaker leads. 4. Remove screws holding chassis brackets to top
of cabinet.
5. Remove only 4 screws (2 at each side) from the bottom side of the shelf.
6. Gently pull the chassis assembly out from the
cabinet.
CAUTION - DO NOT LOOSEN OR REMOVE ANY
OTHER SHELF SCREWS INSIDE CHASSIS COMPARTMENT.
7. Place entire assembly face down on a cushioned surface which should be thick enough to allow for clearance of control shaft. Disconnect the yoke plug, picture tube socket, anode lead and remove the beam aligner magnet and deflection yoke.
L -20I
INPUT
COUPLING
L-200
INPUT
GRID
T-200
1ST P1X 1-F TOP OF COIL 42.8 MC
BOTTOM OF COIL 47.25 MC
MAGNET ADJUSTMENT-The beam aligner magnet should be positioned close to the base of the tube. From this position adjust the magnet by moving it back and forth and at the same time rotating it slightly around the neck of the picture tube until the brightest raster and best focus is obtained on the picture screen. MAXIMUM RASTER BRILLIANCE AND BEST FOCUS OCCUR AT THE SAME POINT. Do not sacrifice brilliance for best focus. The magnet adjustment is a very critical one, especially with the electrostatic type zero focus picture tube. Consequently, great care should be taken to make sure that the magnet is correctly adjusted.
DEFLECTION YOKE ADJUSTMENT-The deflection yoke
should be positioned as far forward on the neck of the tube as the bell will allow. Then, if the lines of the raster are not horizontal or squared with tie picture mask, rotate the deflection yoke until this condition is obtained. Upon completion of this adjustment, tighten the clamp at the rear of the deflection yoke.
CENTERING ADJUSTMENT - If horizontal or vertical centering is required, adjust each ring in tie center-
ing device until proper centeriog is obtained. If a
clamp type centering device is used, rotate the device to the left or right and turn the knob located at the top of the device until the picture is centered correctly.
T -20t
2 ND FIX I -F TOP OF COIL 45.3 MC
BOTTOM OF COIL 41.25 MC
R-IO2
BUZZ CONTROL
L-100
SOUND TAKE -OFF
4.5 MC
L -I01
QUADRATURE COIL 4.5 MC
111412,
__
2BN4Ujt
R.
IF UHF EQUIPPED
FSMP.
5CG8
R -F OSC.
I. MIXER
O0
SHIELD
V-4
3BZ6
1ST PI X I -F V-10
2ICBP4A
V-5
3BZ6
2ND Po( I -F
V-7
3C;161-- 128Y7 -A
3 RD
VIDEO AMP.
PIX I -F
T-202
L-203
V-2
3BN6
AUDIO DET.
PICTURE TUBE
3RD P1X I -F
4.5 MC
DANGER
FRAGILE GLASS PICTURE TUBE IS DANGEROUS TO SERVICE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICEMAN
44 MC BOTTOM OF COIL
TRAP
V -BA I V-88
7AU7
SYNC. SEP.
SYNC. AMP.
If
I IN82-A
UHF
2A F4 -A
CONVERTER UHF OSC.
V 9A L V-9Br..\ IODE7
VERT. OSC. VERT. OUTPUT
R-19
0
0R -3I4
VERT UN. HEIGHT
CONTROL CONTROL
YOKE CABLE
ISPLUG
1111
V-3
0 5AQ5 AUDIO OUTPUT
12vAa6TA0 DAMPER V-12
12DQ6 -A
HORIZ. OUTPUT
it stall II
LI:
00
Fig. 1-Chassis Tube Layout and Trimmers \-0
YOKE CABLE SOCKET
C-417
HORIZ.
HORIZ.WAVE FORM
TEST POINT ODCROINVTEROL
V-HAL V-IIB
6CG7
HORIZ. AFC
HOR1Z. OSC.
L-402"1,403
HOR. HOR.WAVE
FREQ.
FORM
V -I3
IB3-GT
H.V. RECT.
83
VOLUME TV -14, MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1958 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
MONTGOMERY WARD Models WG-4042A, WG-4052A, WG-5042A, WG-5047A, WG-5052A
SERVICE SUGGESTIONS
NO RASTER ON PICTURE TUBE -If raster cannot be obtained, check below for the possible causes:
1. Magnet adjustment is incorrect. 2. No +B voltage. Check thermal cut-out. Reset
if open. If thermal cut-out continually opens,
check:
A. For short in +B.
B. Selenium rectifiers. C. Check DC resistance of horizontal output
transformer. 3. No high voltage. Check V-11, V-12, V-13 and
V-14 tubes and circuits. If horizontal deflection circuits are operating as evidenced by the correct voltage (600V) measured on terminal num-
ber 1 of the horizontal output transformer, the trouble can be isolated to the high voltage rectifier circuit. Either the high voltage winding to the V-12 plate and the V-13 plate is open or pix tube elements shorted internally. 4. Defective picture tube Cathode return circuit
open.
SMALL RASTER -This condition can be caused by: 1. Low +B or line voltage. Check selenium rectifiers. 2. Insufficient output from V-12. Replace tube. 3. Insufficient output from V-8 and V-9. Replace tubes. 4. Incorrect setting of horizontal drive control.
5. V-14 defective.
NOTE-In UHF receivers the filament voltages in the tuner and above the tuner in the heater string will be slightly greater because of the filament vnhoges of the tuner tubes Console receivers use two five inch speakers connected in parallel. The voice coil impedance of these speakers is 6.4 ohms 400 cycles.
SCHEMATIC IS DIVIDED INTO FOUR SECTIONS WITH EACH SECTION HAVING ITS OWN SERIES OF REFERENCE NUMBERS.
-- 70 1-F ourRur
OTNERRMFINAruL sts
0-225 7.10 MEG. s1'
ORANGE
.1.-AMAN CONTROL
ro ACC TERMINAL ON R.F TONER
1211ME26G o v
L-200 .021 25 eV". I
T1-S20T0PIX47.V25"iCr
I -F COIL
C-204 56
300V
V-4
3 BZ6
1ST PIX I -F
42.8 MC
INPUT GRID C-201
COIL
so4o7v
L -20I
SOME
R-200 5.6
INPUT
COUPLING
COIL
I5C7-200 500 V
C -12K021 SOO
24,.5:V 2 0.55v
0-204 C-203.- 0-203
47
680
470
500v
R-204 t 686
TO 12ey TERMINAL ON R -F TUNER
R-205 IK
hAAti
T -20I
2ND PIX I -F COIL
/.23 MC
0-228 471(
130 v
3V8-S26
2ND PIX I -F ,30V
o
IS 3 MC
R.208 22 K
VAR.
2 0.55Y
R-206 47
IC -220
0 4700 V
C -205R-207 .470
Tx,
C-206
470 500V
R-202 470
C-2214.45 IK
C-207 68
500V
C-208.
680'
500 v
A ize v
T-301
Lt
R-300 15016
V -BA
7AU7
SYNC. SEP.
R.303
I----- 82016
1:-08604
V -8B
7AU7
SYNC. AMP. 6
R-307
VERT. BLOCKING OSC. TRANS.
43 il-R-308 A 8-30813 0-308C
221(
8.211
8.26
GREEN
RED
M'S
C-300
g),,
ALL RESISTANCE VALUES IN OHMS AND WATT
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED.
2
ALL CAPACITANCE VALUES LESS THAN 1.0 IN MF. AND ABOVE 1.0 IN MMF.
C5116
I 3001' R -30I
2.2 MEG.
1111111111.111111. I. 5 -NO V P P
fiwirligo
CYCLES
C-303 .047 400V
I
P0;0. 22g5V
17 5
3 7 V P -P 60 CYCLES
C-3804
1
500V
IC -305A C-3055
.002T .005
L_
C -30.005C
5T I
I
I
301' P -P 60 CYCLES
C-306
.01
400V
1501' PP 60 CYCLES
R-310 470 If
UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED.
COIL RESISTANCE VALUES LESS THAN 10 OHM ARE NOT SHOWN.
K.1000
55-110 V P -P
1750 cvcats
6
R-424 r.VIZI.L
I- INTERLocg Ot
M6.5k
-I/=-
C-401
C-426 0.22 400V
140 ME. /so V
. SELENIUM 'RECTIFIERS
J00 14
.y7 P -P 15,750 CYCLES
30v P -P
-/5,750 CYCLES HORIZ. HOLD ------ -
zsov asvA
2/V P -P /3t.750 CYCLE'S
L-401
FILTER CHOKE
,. .--1-0 010 0 ,---i--wo.,R-403
\Y\
en + 1.36
g
41C-402 A C-4034 vv. /0 W `+C -403B
- 125 MF. 125MF. -
60 1.4F.
300v
300V
300V
R-407 120 6
CONTROL R -40B
250 V
140V To
1951' V -I1 A
6CG7
I HORIZ. AFC
I.JV TO -205 v
I R-423
L -- 0.2-1.0 MEG. /SOL A TED !RACKET:
HORIZ. SWEEP AND POWER SUPPLY
C-84204
soov
R-405 820K
IC -405 I100 500V
R-404 220K
C-409
C-410.47 0
to. 0o.2,2T
3.9 200v
R-411
330K
II7VAC
R-402
V-944 V-98
V-84 6 V-18
v-7
52
IODE7 85.3 VAC
7AU7 75.3VAC
12557-A 68.3VAC
20W
4
415
4
V-.1
V-6
5A05
3CB6
62VAC
57.3VAC
j
C
-406A IK
T500v
V-5
3526 4.2VAC
C4 06B4
165001'06Bj
S/ VAC
3826
V-114 6C
44.6V AC 4
84
VOLUME TV -14, MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1958 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
OSCILLOSCOPE WAVEFORM PATTERNS
The waveforms shown on the schematic diagram are os observed on a Tektronix type 524D wide band television oscilloscope with the receiver tuned to a reasonably strong signal and a normal picture. The voltages shown on each waveform ore ihe approximate peak to peak amplitudes. The frequency accompanying each waveform indicates the repetition rate of the waveform not the sweep rate of the oscilloscope.
SOUND I -F AND AUDIO
V-2
90V 3BN6
AUDIO DET.
L-1001 1
SOUND TAKE -OFF I COIL
cdoi- I
47 T I
II
C-102.1. 5 K
500 V
86,
iv
VAR
( R-102
Oro 500 'BUZZ
CONTROL
C-1034 IK
500V
R -I03 4.7
O A Ize v
.MAA, R-104 680
C -I051
I
500 V 11
L -I01
e 4.5 MC OUADRATURE COIL
R-105 330K
C-106
56 5001
R-106 I MEG. VOLUME CONTROL
MONTGOMERY WARD
Models WG-4042A, WG-4052A, WG-5042A, WG-5047A, WG-5052A.
5AQ5
AUDIO OUTPUT
107
C -403C1
400 0:, 1 F.
T-IOI
AUDIO OUTPUT TRANS.
.I..4118 LOC Si
251V
C-108
.0047 ....
s°a" cI
600V
../
RIO _
e I V
2 /3.8V
+wwliC-402C
120 MF. 300v
14-107
2 330
t w
0 2501
T-202
3 RD PIX I -F COIL
VeC-210
5
I (".c TS oov
C -21I 500 V
I
1R-211 470
-71: C-209
1 300V68
oA v
L-207
30 Mu. N.
4
0068
APPROX.
11141k
6o CYCLES R-214 226
R-2121
I MEG.
70C.4-2713
200V
R-213
3.96
C 216
I5
L-203
50" 4.5 MC TRAP
84006
C-214 .047 200 V
V-7
I2BY7-A W,/4,1 30
VIDEO AMP.
1357
IT 0 A /28 V
R -2I9
6.86
4.C -2I9
16 ! 500V
R -2I6 1 47 Il
R-218 10 K
R-217 750 CONTRAST CONTROL
C 215, 47 +
500V
R-224 L-205
2.2 K 225 Mat,.
VIDEO
L-204
J50 ma".
I
,,!NI
C -2I8
6007 R -22I 3.6
4 W
%R-220 i8OK
5-222 570 6 BRIGHTNESS
CONTROL
O
250
Tt 128 V
307..
0.001T
P -Pt
CYCLES
VERTICAL SWEEP AND SYNC.
V-9 A
IODE7
VERT. OSC.
6 1/0 V To
2307
R-312 22
R-313 390 K
16015C7Y7C-L0ES
I00 C-310
II
C-311
10.1V
eoov
R-322 156
8-315
6.86*
0-312
200
V-9 B
IODE7
VERT. OUTPUT
243!
R -3I7
2.2 MEG.,
R-323
180
+
C-402 B 20 MF. 50V
8 uE - - -1
T-302 1.:b
VERT. OUTPUT 1,4..c% TRANS.
250V O
147
lie V
R-223
100 YELLOW 2587 ORANGE
R -3I9 1.5 K VERT. LIN. CONTROL
8-318 I K 1W
Id RED
0 250
50v P -P 00 CYCLES
ti
I
r In
2 10
460v
GREE[-N
RED
W
--2--2--,r10v P -P
tro crci.rs
80V P -P 60 CYCLES
VERTL.-D3EUFL.00i _S
L-404 HORIZ.
DEFL.
R -32I 560
COILS
DEFLECT/ON YOKE
GRN OR at.
R RED BLACK OR BRO
'1-17!) s 2
YOKE PLUS
21CBP4-A
2.5 MEG. HEIGHT CONTROL
AN.
R -3I6
10 MEG.
1C-309
P -P O CYCL ES I,
VIB
6CG7
so
HoRi2.05c.
8-413 828
R -4I4
es v
226
C-413 .01
407
-12V
"v L-402 HORIZ. F REQ. COIL 7, r
L-403
HORIZ. WAVE FORM
R-425 10 K
C -41I
220 too
HORIZ. WAVE FORM TEST POINT
135 V P -P
110 P -P
/5,750
15.750 CYCLES
CYCLES BOOST0
V -I2
I2DQ6-A
HORIZ. OUTPUT
T-400
HORIZ.
OUTPUT TRANS.
R-415 1 MEG.
8.416 56K
250 vo
R-417
68
"V
820T I) C -4151C -.,4n17
R -42I 470K
"" HORIZ.,RIZ.,
5 r DRIVE
C-4 9
CONTROL MF. 50V
1500 P -P DO NOT MEASURE
52
to.s 7 C-425 C-420
isg, i 40040 7,
R-418
100 2 W
. R-4194.
106
W
45
V.10
2ICBP4-A
.3 VAC
32 VAC
II 1
R -F TUNER
V.1?
V-11
17/1/1SER 6 0.51. 11-F AMP -1
I2DC16-4.
12AX4-GTA I 2BN4
5CG8
13.1 VAC
6.85VAC
72
78
____ 1.7 V AC
I
NEATER TERMINAL
YOKE SOCKET 80
1
BOOST
/61V PP
V -I3
163-GT
M.V. REck,
16 RV
V-14
12AX4-GTA
DAMPER
R-420 , 5.6 K
C-422 .047
1- C -42I
s5g6 v ..
L-405:
,C.pSulk 7,
.
100VII
85
VOLUME TV -14, MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1958 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION MONTGOMERY WARD Models WG-4042A, WG-4052A, WG-5042A, WG-5047A, WG-5052 A
ALIGNMENT PROCEDURE
40 Mc I -F ALIGNMENT -Connect sweeper with very
short leads through a 1 K mmf disc ceramic capacitor to mixer grid. (Lead of a 3.9 K resistor which is ac-
cessible through a hole located between the R -F Ampli-
fier & Mixer tubes on the tuner. With short leads connect crystal diode detector (Fig. 5) to plate of 1st I -F tube. Connect -1.5V to A.G.C. line (Junction of
C-220 & R-205). Connect oscilloscope to detector out-
put. Adjust sweep output to give adequate deflection.
A. FREQUENCY
ADJUST
1. 47.25 Mc 1st Pix I -F Coil (T-200 Bottom of Coil) to center notch over 47.25 Mc marker.
2.
Converter Plate Coil (Top of Tuner)
Input Grid Coil (L-200) and Input
Coupling Coil (L-201) to give the re
sponse shown in figure 6.
The converter plate and input grid coils control the
shape of the top. The input coupling coil controls the position of the 41.25 marker. This adjustment must be made accurately or the sound rejection will not be correct (41.25 Mc 31 to 36 db down from top of overall P.I.F. response). 45.75 Mc marker must be set
exactly on peak or the position of the 44.5 Mc marker in the overall response curve will not be correct.
rAL DIODE 1000 MMF.
330n
10 KA. OUTPUT
100 Kn.
Fig. 5 -Crystal Diode Detector
B. When the input circuit is aligned place -4.5V bias on the AGC line. (Junction of C-220 & R-205). Re-
move the crystal detector and connect oscilloscope and VTVM to the 2nd pix detector load resistor R-213. Adjust sweep output to give 2.0 VDC at
detector.
FREQUENCY
ADJUST
1. 42.8 Mc 1st Pix I -F Coil (T-200, Top of Coil) for maximum height of 42.8 Mc marker.
2. 41.25 Mc 2nd Pix I -F Coil (T-201, Bottom of Coil)
for minimum height of 41.25 Mc
marker.
3. 45.3 Mc 2nd Pix I -F Coil (T-201, Top of Coil) for maximum height of 45.3 Mc
marker.
4. 44.0 Mc 3rd Pix I -F Coil (T-202, Bottom of Coil) for maximum height of the 44.0 Mc
marker.
These adjustments may be made with a single frequency generator if it is more convenient to do so.
45.75 MC /00
40%--
%-- 4/.25 MC
47.25 MC
Fig. 6 -Input Circuit Response
C. After these adjustments have been made recheck
the peak to peak output on the oscilloscope. If the shape of the curve is not as shown in figure 7, it will be necessary to retouch the adjustments. A small fraction of a turn is all that is necessary if the strip is operating correctly. The position of the 44.5 Mc marker is critical (98%). The 44.0 Mc transformer (3rd I -F) controls the symmetry of the top. The 45.3 Mc transformer (2nd I -F) controls the height of the 45.75 Mc marker. The 42.8 Mc
transformer (1st I -F) controls the height of the 42.4 Mc marker. This adjustment will very seldom need retouching.
/00%
44.5 MC
--.98
44.0MC 45.3 MC
42.8 MC
50%
42.4 MC
45.75 MC
0 %-
--40X DOWN 2.5%
41.25 MC
47.25 MC
Fig. 7 -Overall Response Curve
DO NOT RETOUCH the converter plate coil or the input grid coil. These coils MUST be adjusted correctly with the diode detector. Recheck position of 41.25 Mc and 47.25 Mc markers. Reset if necessary.
VIDEO
With 4.5 Mc unmodulated signal into grid of the video amplifier tube and VTVM on picture tube cathode, tune 4.5 Mc trap for minimum response. VTVM on 0-10 V AC scale. This adjustment can also be made while observing a picture from a station. Tune trap for least 4.5 Mc beat (grainy appearance) in picture.
AUDIO
1. Tune in a TV station and reduce signal strength at antenna terminals by use of an attenuator or similar device until a "hiss" accompanies the
sound.
2. Adjust sound take -off coil (L-100), quadrature coil (L-101) and buzz control (R-102) for maximum undistorted sound and minimum buzz.
3. If "hiss" disappears during step 2, further reduce signal strength.
86
VOLUME TV -14, MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1958 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
Oardcw/ed aete
Chassis 88S3, Table Models 21ST3, 21VT2, 24VT1, Console Models 21SC6, 21SC7, 21SC8, and 24SC2. Combination Model 21SK3 is essentially similar to these models. (Service material on pages 87 through 90)
CHASSIS REMOVAL:
1. Pull out AC plug and disconnect antenna. 2. Remove back, lift antenna terminal board out of slot,
and pull speaker plug. 3. Removal of tuner and knobs requires more detailed
instructions. SIDE CONTROLS: Pull off knobs at side. Remove two hex nuts, one from the brightness control and one from
the vertical hold control. Then, at the rear of the set, loosen one screw in slot of tuner mounting bracket and slide tuner away from cabinet.
5-5
FINE V LIN TUNING
CH
SEL,,\
V-13 BR- V HOLD
.11
T-3
VOL,
CONTRAST
FOCUS
HT V-15
FUSE
FRONT CONTROLS: Pull off channel selector and fine tuning knobs at top and volume and contrast .nobs at bottom. Plate over other two knobs is a force fit and may be pulled out. Brightness and vertical hold knobs may then be removed. Then, at the rear of the set, remove one screw at center of the three controls and unhook tuner by lifting and moving to rear. (Tuner bracket may now be fastened to chassis.) 4. Unfasten the bracket located at top rear center of cabinet.
5. Remove four chassis mounting screws from underneath.
6. Pull out chassis and picture tube on mounting plate.
S-6
S-7
S-8
S-2
S-9
V-4
V-5
I V-6 V-7 i
V-1
S-3
, V-9 V-2
T-1
V-3
SPKR FiL DR
V-10
L-15 Chassis 813.53, Top View
C-16
AGC 87
111111111k
PIX LOCK
C-14
HZ HOLD
V-14
V-11
VOLUME TV -14, MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1958 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION I
ANT rert
5,6-ERt4- TUNER SECTION I
V/6
V/7
64W4 TUNER 6566 !
/05'9/
5/
40.80fee,
8.
/-F
I
Li
52
R7 3312
/0
NPO 5%
L9./Er
SOUND /
V /A 0v 72W
/72
53
(2).
54 L E .T
/00
53
/57(
G) 013) c
I
R5
/OK CC..31
54
I/5-00 3.300
39
CT /200
1 6 ,D,va 500/1/0 -7E7E0 -0R
1/2.-A
2
0 /0 R K
_5731A
coo
2
67
/OK
C6
I :ki/OL..
1.__ A., -..C6'
R6A,500 =6/0A'
C/7
1 ZOOV
/7/5
[3
42.5-r7C
5
A6C
C/8 S R/7 5 R/8
5/e 560
825
=.7
R/9 /OK /R2200
6.0E6
/200.sl
6 /201e
2
4a -00/4C.
56
/.2
R23 /2X
60E6 /250
5
/25
227W
R2/
R22 _ce/
022
232
/00
,025/0"0,
524C"-i- .22 Zoos, /20 kpiP2 2.2n
LertzA
4400/-7C 57 5
527
faL,99.4
/Zo
z
11:43 6/41112, DETECTOR
1%L
58 L.
6 I 4,3.25MC
R22 270
R29 =_- c27 /K /
S AP
543
.3.9K
/'/X. LOCK /3-0
R,S1
ic53-
SK
39K
0.99 II
68/vRO 5%
V78 j 6.51../8 A.F.C. 852
/11 30 P. C so
26
65/VRO 5%
A737 e>
560
L/3 510
RS 680.0/2
.95.3 I\ 7P s
7.
R54
73,-
1 42 c43-k-
To900s70,
.15 2001
I/C
V/0
55 /5a0t.,
6507
050.1.41.750. 70k.0
26014 /OW
_L CAS T470
57
I 330 /1/C,
045-
22N.,-,0
/0%
R3'6 2200
R57 558 /009 50K
y75
0244v
57/VC.A/fPL.
C3-5
860k.
5A- C7/
5K 554
.0/
Boor, .001053"33 600W
R66
R67
22K
98K
V/3A
C7Z 16 cP77 e! 05C.
CS6 .oaz
220 e 100V
V% 4000
21'4270K6.06!/0''' R82
F-A^/ 2-620/ /50/1 600v /0% R73
V/38 165i7 7
ourecir 440P."
C60
0.3K
,-
3-1/
565
KM<
471'.
Red 689'
vERT HOLD
969 .3r1
66V
C57 .04T 600W
iefr,?cce
II
6007
-20.5/2
i/1 -1/N
(76
57
/71 311
R79
/.6-27
1280 R8/5 /80 In
1 563
57
.e-er
R77
e7OK
.500407/0
HE161,1-
R70 /0.4
568 Teo° v
/2K 1701/ 475 -VT
CLEANING PICTURE TUBE FACE:
Safety glass is removed by first taking out the three screws that hold the top glass rail. Rail is now removed and glass slipped outward and up.
Use window cleaning fluid on a soft cloth to clean tube faceplate and safety glass.
OPERATION:
Most of the non -operating controls are self-explanatory. The picture tube has the customary centering magnet and ion trap. The HORIZONTAL DRIVE is adjusted by rotating clockwise until picture compression, then backing up just enough to restore picture proportion. The PIX LOCK control will normally be set completely counter -clockwise.
88
VOLUME TV -14, MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1958 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
L§95
V2-8
70 0
R9 4.711 9
R9/ 470 C/21 R//
600V 22
0/3
022
4000 RV
220/C
74702
6V 667 Av0/0 04/7-R(/T
V3
26.9R
c/s-
.1. .60000607
2,01(
R/4-
/7e
23-00
/0 A/
04{4
064
160
Z/TOvO'
20 350
6.41./a //0.E0 .419.04
___420
0-00 L9
Le tn)
0.40
, /25-
L 39K _J
0.7 L 20_9 J
K
2000
13.10
03/
/TOO
R3/ 1 629
MOO -.0L2 2000
74
033
Gre
400y
IF/
E)
SEE LLS OF 77/0.ES
L
R
Eiv
R93 4700
R37 220/e
Fh
436 /00N
/5...r//YE.3505K
/68R.
CONTRA $T
PACKARD BELL Chassis 88S3, Models 21ST3, 21VT2, 24VT1, 21SC6, 21SC7, 21SC8, 24SC2, Schematic Diagram.
c
R6.9
TK
/2K
6.596 -6T8
T.
620,r /03.
-L 049 1.
33
200v
Of 600/
W4t
64X1 -6T
0.4 rfRER
_C66
"7- 047 6000
6801!
47.25 MC
41.25 MC
ea,
.I/5-
.0474
V/5 5[/ 4 -08 Z9" RECT.
26 4-10:72 Y
r
.T30600/1i _
T¢
400
SA rcH
ON VOL .
//0-)201 AC 45.00 MC
00'r ONLY
43.00 MC
5.
45.00 mc
5-6
MAXIMUM
PICTURE I -F ALIGNMENT:
1. Connect VTVM between point "B" and ground.
2. Connect signal generator to R -F tuner test point using a .001 mfd isolating capacitor.*
In models using VHF -UHF tuner 10559, lift the 6AT8 tub* shield and connect generator between shield and ground.
STEP
SIG. GEN. FREQUENCY
ADJUST
FOR
3.
44.80 mc
5-1
MAXIMUM
(mixer I -F in tuner)
4.
42.50 mc
5-5
MAXIMUM
6.
44.00 mc
S-7
MAXIMUM
7.
43.25 mc
5-8
MAXIMUM
REPEAT STEPS 3 THROUGH 7
8. Connect scope to point "B" through a 22,000 ohm isolating resistor. Connect VTVM to point "A".
9. Connect sweep generator to antenna terminals through the impedance matching network. (Antenna terminals 300 ohms balanced.)
10. Rotate tuner to channel 3, and set sweep generator to center frequency of channel (63 mc). With a sweep width of 8 mc, adjust generator output to develop about 4 volts of AGC at point "A".
89
VOLUME TV -14, MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1958 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
PACKARD BELL Chassis 88S3, Alignment Information, Continued
11. Adjust AGC control at rear of set so that voltages at points "A" and "D" are the same. Then, if necessary, readjust sweep generator output so that AGC voltage is again four volts.
12. Disconnect signal generator from tuner test point and connect between bottom of tuner shield and ground connection of tuner I -F output cable. Generator ground lead goes to tuner shield.
13. Adjust signal generator output to provide the marke7s shown on the illustrated response carve. Check position of markers one at a time. Some slight touching -up of the I -F adjustments may be needed to make the curve correspond to the illustration.
14. The adjustments have the following effects: S-1 moves the 45.7.5 mc marker up or down the curve (should be 50%). 5-5 controls tilt, or flatness of response, and also affects the overall bandwidth.
S-6 controls the position of the 45.00 mc marker (should be at a maximum of 97% response).
S-7 affects tilt or flatness of response.
5-8 helps to establish band width on sound side of
curve. IMPORTANT: The 45.00 mc marker must not exceed 97% on channel three or picture may smear on higher channels.
POINT "B"
ALIGNMENT OF 4.5 MC TRAP:
1. Connect signal generator between point
and
ground.
2. Turn contrast control to maximum.
3. Connect RF probe of VTVM to point "C".
4. Set signal generator to 4.50 mc, with the output at one
volt or more.
5. Adjust trap, S-9 for minimum VTVM reading.
NOTE: If generator is not capable of one volt output, trap may be adjusted by visual means while receiving a TV
station signal. If no 4.5 mc beat is present, S-9 requires no
adjustment. If a beat appears, detune signal to exaggerate
the beat and then adjust S-9 for minimum beat.
SOUND I -F AND RATIO DETECTOR ALIGNMENT: 1. Connect signal generator between point "B" and
ground.
2. Connect VTVM between point "F" and ground.
3. With generator frequency at 4.50 inc, adjust 5-2 and S-3 for MAXIMUM VTVM reading.
4. Connect VTVM between points "E" and "G". 5. Adjust ratio detector secondary, 5-4, for zero between
positive and negative peaks
6. Repeat steps 2 thru 5.
POINT "A"
5-4
L-1
L-5 L-6 L-11 L-4
L-3
V LIN FOCUS
POINT "G" POINT "E" POINT "F'
V-16 V-17
LIST OF ADJUSTMENTS:
5-1 I -F on RF tuner
HZ DR
S-2 Sound I -F, 4.50 mc
5-3 Ratio detector primary
5-4 Ratio detector secondary
S-5 1st picture I -F S-6 2nd picture I -F
S-7 3rd picture I -F
S-8 4th picture I -F
5-9 Trap, 4.50 mc
5-10 Horizontal hold
Chassis 8853, Bottom View
L-13
POINT "C"
90
HEIGHT
POINT "D"
VOLUME TV -14, MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1958 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
MODELS 21DC5, 21DC6, 21DC7, & 24DC4 (CHASSIS 98D3)
(Alignment below and continued on page 94; circuit diagram on pages 92-93)
5-7 OSC SLUGS -
V
5-8 S-9
S-10 5-11 5-12 V.8 5-13
S-4
V-6`., V-7,10,..,
VI
A\ 4°
/v
5-14
V ,0
V1
VERTICAL LINEARITY
T 3-
HEIGHT -
T-5
INTERLOCK
4,/
- 4/1"////
FOCUS
.4
vas
V-3 V-12
T-1 V -I3
-V-4
HORIZ OR AGC
A NI
V-14
V-17
-
TONE
C-37
CONTRAST
KM 200
Chassis 981)3 Top View
VERTICAL HOLD
The ANI (automatic noise inverter) control must be adjusted at the location where the receiver is to be used. Moreover, it must be adjusted using the strongest signal that will be received. The steps are:
a. Rotate ANI control to extreme right.
b. Turn control to left till picture begins to distort.
c. Return to the right slightly beyond the point where the distortion disappears.
d. Check all channels for picture stability.
The HORIZONTAL DRIVE control is adjusted by rotating it clockwise until a bright vertical bar appears, causing picture compression. Then the control is rotated the other way until the compression just disappears.
The setting of the AGC control is covered in step 22 of the picture alignment.
PICTURE I -F ALIGNMENT
1. Remove ANI tube 12AX7 (V-1).
2. Connect a 41/2 volt battery between point "A" and ground, with the negative lead to point "A".
3. Connect a VTVM between point "B" and ground. 4. Connect signal generator to R -F tuner test point through
the .001 mfd capacitor. This is right next to the tuner B -plus terminal, so care should be taken to avoid a
short.
5. Set generator output at maximum.
STEP
SIG. GEN.
FREQUENCY
ADJUST
FOR
6.
47.25 mc
S-7 & S-12
Minimum
7.
39.75 mc
5-8
Minimum
(Adjust generator output for 21/2 to 3 volts VTVM reading for steps 8 through 13.)
8.
43.30 mc
S-13
MAXIMUM
9.
45.75 mc
S-11
MAXIMUM
10.
42.50 mc
S-10
MAXIMUM
11.
44.50 mc
S-9
MAXIMUM
12.
42.50 mc
5-2
MAXIMUM
13.
45.00 mc
S-1 (tuner) MAXIMUM
REPEAT STEPS 6 THROUGH 13
14. Disconnect VTVM and connect it between point "D" and ground.
15. Also connect a 1.0 mfd capacitor between point "D" and ground.
16. Connect scope betweeen point "B" and grourd through the 22,000 ohm resistor.
17. Connect sweep generator to antenna terminals through the impedance matching network.
18. Rotate selector to channel 3 and set sweep generator to center frequency of channel (63 mc). With a sweep width of 8 mc, adjust generator output to develop approximately minus 4 volts of AGC as indicated by the VTVM.
19. Disconnect signal generator from tuner test point and connect hot lead to ground lead of I -F input cable. If this gives insufficient marker signal on the response curve, try connecting to other ground points in the vicinity of the 1st I -F stage.
20. Adjust signal generator output to provide the markers shown on the illustrated response curve. Check positions of the markers one at a time. Some slight tcJching-up of the I -F adjustments may be needed to make the curve correspond to the illustration.
21. Remove battery, marker generator, and capacitor; reduce sweep width to zero, but do not charge sweep output.
22. Connect VTVM between point "A" and ground, and adjust AGC control for minus 51/2 volts on meter at point "D". This will be the normal AGC setting. In cases of fringe reception or high signal, performance may be improved by readjustment of the AGC control to produce a minimum of noise or interfere ice in the
picture.
23. Replace ANI tube, 12AX7.
91
VOLUME TV -14, MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1958 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
PACKARD BELL Chassis 98D3 Schematic Diagram
__
ezetsia4x7
r 7:976-7 7-16/VgAr I
737" 5ND 1 -4c -
I /o 5 -9 38 I Awe r,,,p soy,"
1/8.64U6 2ND SAC .7-1-
I V 20 1 4BA/4
A26.54:
_Eel dr.a.i5s2,
1
II
4.5-ankC- I1-
iroomci L 2 "A 7
//0 v
4
--- -r I
/8'8-g R6C
/A-
II 5
75- 8l 0.2 r.
4. 50/ 4C
L3 .5.4N- 7c4.1
QQ
107 -O.
L - -J
etc
/00 K
R2 68
C3 /06.
R3
CS
/00K
/OR
A
/56.<
C7 /OK
S2regL
moo
mic 2
C78I
/K
R4-
4250.VIC
mew /00,
Avon
srT
/20
C6 . /TOO
V3A,i 65/18
L4
..5N40
450)
:561; SK - I
2
L_ C/17
- 74j
-S3
--1CM
ssioey a
127
G9 - 81t
3300 /2C0e0eCW
./ tOOV
-0.7 8
R/0
47M RI/
V.5; 60E6
V6, 60E6
/ST L-/
2ND
I 3,C0,60 j_ clef
22 /VPO
51-
R/71
j_
5-1
lc -0.3K /9 2.2
io 58 /WV R/9 /0K
L7 4450/7C
`;591 P24
no v. //0 V.
5/0
/723
R.
/00
L5 i4zevyr L6 89 757 ff
Re0
68
022
7K
C'.7* I /04'
C/020It-
CZ/
/K
R
270K
/0%
/iZ/
,./N/Vs /ZO
R22
.A.At 3 '500
V7, 60E6
,/cg
1/8A I 6 ,c7/Y6',
4TI/ FF 6 /00 16
42. 5-0/1C
L8 -.3v.
4 5: 7571C
L9
9
28
/228
/
829
5 / t 1/4)
..:
A
R3/1cee 6
.3300 47.4
1.41"
5/2 A'"k'
026
029
II<
/K
V998 16AN8 LaE LAY
R50 I
2.21 to%
/ R5/
.190K
/0%
I///4 j 64/Y8
4 G. C.
lad, 3 6 EiMe? 5 YA/C 5EP
-
16
R.53
45/1
7
/0% C408
8 /06 e P52 /01(
47A'
53
/50K
C77
R54
R99
/00K
/20 2t
1///5,1 64Ne SYNC. 4/1R
W24 I take_
F7 C
5'6
.3300
P96
20 V.
RT 7 3300
2700
C/540/0
51 /
/0%
R6 /006' /0% 043 /5001
06
57'
R64 /
470/t
6
his.
oR.463
C4;
/0
631,
.097=
1013,
2R27K8
1//08 f 6C/17 2R78K.5
,0C00600./3.V/0. A
V/6 ,6 CZ.5"
VERT 05C.
VER7: Ol./7,cfir
265Y
C.59 .0033 6001/ /0%
C60 .0022 7.001c/ot
0
(se .0/
cook,
68IK R 79 331-1
R8/ 2.2/4
/0 %
R8*
68R
/283 /8
1/1
61
C62
047=
600V
.033 , 400V 22A -
R86 aa7
1/2
564
/ C65- -/7V 9
11E/61717- -1, box/
/7.98 36/
VER 7.-L /A!
R90 7
I511
VERT/VOLD
R52 3/1
Rd9 470K
257-/-
R9e
C.06061 /0%
/000 V.
C6 7
.055 /000V
92
VOLUME TV -14, MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1958 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
PACKARD BELL Chassis 98D3 Schematic Diagram
VA4Z./06/V06aGmT..
,1-i0t0a5 ye-,rA7D
C/
/00V
26re,. boor C/5
4.
.40f2k
R/5
Al
/4A ,
71
2R20*/3
970/r - - 252e5re
RI
220
1C/3 R16
/
600
56.,
MUTING SW ON MOTOR
5,43 CHANNEL ,ELECro, ON MOTOR
FRONT 8.4c1r
1/8,3i2 64/184
DETECTOR
.13.30/VC
c32
L 1/ 7
z/2 5'4" ,"I/.60",`0
in
200 Cif 0
C3/
.5 -
cfror
-i V9A,2 6AN8
V/DEO 47/1F:
rI---ML/4P- - I
6 ei-y.
R40
i . 9-9'n i-./31
I -"And 8
1._ Josta_ J
\ 2700
C.
AUK 560
5,T,,
5/4
R.36 2200
t.L /5
C34
.,..
5X --
537
C35
66 TN-
V/04/1 6 Cis/7
''' 44/
I--1 , ,) I 4V- /DE1O OUTPUT *?47 220ir ,0
no C36 I
,1
255. 1,5
/
4/- /9
I-I-4 ieg'17 5
/I
7e. I
6004. ,_
CONTRicIST P4/ 2205
9 Rv.44
3.,-
S47042
8
L i! r- - - --I C3911 . 6.21 I.
.39/C L . /---
1
1
V ey
ti 1
t
4/B'.O'_-r_,i,
V
R45" P4
3900
220
R4.9
POCL/5
PO
r
558
r // V 0374 2/d0o6,o
539 = 7c zo m".'42
26
/00K
225
4.34, 6 CG 7 40R/ Z. 0 SC.
B, 1 6C 67
47/sie
Vi4E-
In8,k1 /2 -.9X7 6CD6 647 v/5; 183-6
4.N I
HOL/TPCI H. v/ez-c T
2/0 V
3
0/
!IFO, C4e --L.-154%,0
R6.5 /500
5/5 T6p8 C50 R68
R67
.47(
/07. /1/u
/TOk /60V
C 53 0022.600v
G0#
.6 2004
6800 470 ,TYyM/C4
-Mg 7
560K /07.
A'69
R70
6'52
47K -51/
C5/ 330 "1/co
ea%
.047 200V
,R 4/v.1
R66 /00K
HO,e/ZDP/1/47
5.4
R7/ 255
572 33k
1 C55
,7 6 FIC/4
R/IPEI2
sac Y.
C69
.00/
600 v
MS' / 3
L.V. REG T/F/ER T4
/R0756
T2
1
c
/
600 V
7
P
2.2 /iv
516
.477 /49
C .3-7 .4.C68 1,600 IL
470 /KA!
V! 3 /re:
205 Y.
T5
=
E
c 72
04 7 zoo,"
ivv.x R94
£7
0
G 7/
6.3V
I /ate
v- 7
I
93
VOLUME TV -14, MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1958 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION PACKARD BELL Chassis 98D3 Alignment Information, Continued
45.00 MC
43.00 MC
ALIGNMENT OF 4.5 MC TRAP:
Remove picture detector tube 6AM8A (V-8).
2. Connect signal generator between point "B" and ground.
3. Turn contrast control to maximum.
4. Connect RF probe of VTVM to point "C".
5. Set signal generator to 4.50 mc, with the output at one volt or more.
POINT "B"
6. Adjust trap, S-14, for minimum VTVM reading.
7. Replace picture detector tube.
NOTE: If signal generator is not capable of one volt output, the trap may be adjusted by visual means. Observe the Picture and detune the signal to accentuate the 4.5 mc beat. Then adjust 5-14 for minimum beat in the picture.
SOUND I -F AND RATIO
DETECTOR ALIGNMENT:
1. Connect signal generator between point "B" and ground through a .001 mfd isolating capacitor.
2. Connect VTVM between point "F" and ground.
3. With a generator frequency of 4.50 mc, adjust S-3, S-4, and 5-5 for MAXIMUM.
4. Connect VTVM between points "E" and "G". 5. Adjust ratio detector secondary, S-6, for zero between
positive and negative peaks.
6. Repeat steps 2 thru 5.
POINT "A"
L-5
POINT "G"
POINT "E" POINT "F"
S -6 -
ADJUSTMENTS
S-1
S-2 S-3 S-4 S-5 5.6 5-7 S-8 S-9 S-10 S-11 5-12 S-13 S-14 S-15
I -F on RF tuner
1st picture I -F Sound I -F, 4.50 mc Sound I -F, 4.50 mc
Ratio detector primary Ratio detector secondary Trap, 47.25 mc Trap, 39.75 mc 2nd picture I -F 3rd picture I -F 4th picture I -F Trap, 47.25 mc 5th picture I -F Trap, 4.50 mc Horizontal hold
Chassis 98D3, Bottom View
94
VOLUME TV -14, MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1958 TELEVISION SERVICING INFOR NATION
TICII1C0
8E11, 8E11U and 8E13 CHASSIS
VIDEO I -F ALIGNMENT
AM ALIGNMENT
BIAS: -3.5V applied to LilY, the AGC line.
CHANNEL SELECTOR: Channel 4. CONTRAST: Fully clockwise. SCOPE: Connected through a 10,000 ohms resistor to L1U,
the video detector output lug. Calibrate scope for 2 volts peak to peak. AM GENERATOR: Connected to test lug #2 on tuner strip for T-70 and T-80-1; to tuner test lug on T-71. INPUT LEVEL: Adjust input level to maintain scope level below 2 volts peak to peak.
Input Frequency
44.4 MC 43.5 MC
45.75 MC 45.0 MC
40.4 MC
Adjust for Maximum
T1U T2U T3U
Ti (on tuner)
T4U
SWEEP ALIGNMENT
SWEEP GENERATOR: Channel 4 sweep signal (69mc with 6mc sweep width) to antenna terminals through a 70 52/300 S2 matching network.
MARKERS: 67.25 MC marker fed into antenna. 45.75 MC marker fed into test lug #2 of tuner. Adjust fine tuning until the 67.25 MC marker becomes coincident with the 45.75 MC marker. DO NOT disturb the fine tuning during balance of alignment. Remove the 45.75 MC signal.
ADJUST: T1 (tuner) to position carrier (67.25 MC marker at 50%). T1U to level curve if tilted. T2U to position 42.5 MC slope (70.0 MC marker at 50%). DO NOT adjust poles T3U or T4U from their original AM settings.
4.5 MC TRAP ADJUSTMENT (1) Connect a 4.5 MC detector to CRT cathode, video output
lug, L2Y. (see circuit below, fig. 3). Preliminary padding of 4.5 MC detector: -Connect detector to an accurate source of 4.5 MC signal and pad core of transformer for maximum D.C. voltage. (2) Connect a V.T.V.M. or 20,000 ohms/volt meter to the detector output. (3) Detune fine tuning control slightly, in a CW direction, from the point of best picture. (4) Adjust TC1Y (T4Y top core) of transformer (4.5 MC trap) for minimum output.
SOUND I -F ALIGNMENT USING STATION SIGNAL (1) Connect a V.T.V.M. or 20,000 ohms/volt meter to top
of volume control. (2) Detune TC4Y (top core of transformer T5Y) to give a
positive peak voltage. (3) Detune the fine tuning control CCW, or reduce signal
input to receiver, so as not to exceed .75 volts during alignment (this is to insure non -limiting action). In some areas it may be necessary to apply bias voltage to AGC, LilY of the video panel, to maintain meter reading below .75 volts. (4) Adjust TC2Y (bottom core of T4Y) and TC3Y (bottom core of T5Y) for maximum DC voltage. (5) Adjust fine tuning for best picture (remove bias voltage if used) and adjust TC4Y for zero voltage (crossover).
1.2 MMF
TI
CI INPUT
1N60 XTAL
4.7K
RI
C3 .001 MFD
OUTPUT TO
METER
PART WIRERS
C1
30-1221-2I
C2 C5 RI T1 XTAL
FORT OF T1 50-1258-3
N-2419540 52-4449 54-90221
Figure 3. 9.5 MC Detector Probe
(Continued on the next five pages)
95
Si
I 9AU4 DAMPER
H.T. 32-8746-2
S2
1X2B
H.V. REC
S3
I2DQ6A
HOR OUT._. 9
2
6BY8 S.I.F
I2CA5 AUDIO OUT.
PLATE 2nd.LE 324686-2
PlsLtA.I.TFE. \ 324686-1
Yoke And
Lead Assy. 76-11070-2 C.R TUBE
LI1W
S
L8W
GRID 1st. I.F. 32-4686
B2A
T5 I.F TRAP S4
3BC5
RF AMP. 1.0
11
oo0°oo2
0
VR1Y
Contrast Vol Or -00
33-5584-3
S 1U 5AM8
3rd.
DET.
8 ci2U
I3U
S U
3BZ6 2nd.VIF
S U
3BZ6 1st. V.I.F.
Top Wiring View of 8E11 Chassis
Tuner Input Impedance
300 ohms
Operating Voltage
105 to 120 volts, AC or DC
Power Consumption
125 watts at 117V line
Tuner 8E11 uses T-70, 12 position incremental, no UHF
Tuner 8E11U uses T-80-1 , 12 position incremental, plus UHF
Tuner 8E13 uses T-71, 12 position incremental, no UHF
I.F. OUTPUT CABLE
<t ---1G3/
FINE TUNING
-CHANNEL SELECTOR
T70 V.H.F.
- 76T-U11N0E4R6
NOTE * PINS ON SOCKETS ARE NUMBERED IN REVERSE TO
THE CONVENTIONAL TUBE BASE CONFIGURATION, i.e. PIN 1 ON THE FOIL VIEW IS PIN 9 (PIN 7 FOR Sty) ON THE TUBE.
OMITTED
LC
___ I R6W, C7W, El
I
0
0
r~
°
;)
REC.
O H
4=.
400
C) zn
O
34-8636-3
tHt
tt
WR2
It
Ctt7
4W
(7
2
5U8 MIX.OSC
I.F. OUTPUT CABLE
T71 V.H.F. TUNER 76-11449
VOLUME TV -14, MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1958 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
PHILCO 8E11, 8E11U, and 8E13 Chassis, Continued
LIU 2ND DET OUTPUT
C1U R3U C2U
L3U FIL OUT.
X1U
T2U C3U
C4U R4U R1U T3U C5U
S3U 1ST VIF 3BZ6
L 2U
FIL INPUT
R2U
C6U T4U
X3U
G4U
IF INPUT GROUND
X2 U TIU
C 7 U
4W
L4U IF INPUT
1W
C8U SW I R5U 3RD IF
MOD. DET 5AM8
L5U C9U R6L1 CIOU
C111.1
1480+V
S2U 2ND V IF
3BZ6
R7U R8U Cl2U ft C13U R9U L6U
A.G.C.
X 4U
Component Layout - I -F Panel
S 4Y 6BY8
135V
LIST
N4Y
RI4Y
I3Y
RI5YC
C7st C 9Y 5135 1-3Y
C8Y
/MN\
N3Y
LI4Y
BIAS
T5 I.F TRAP
619
B
RUT
RI2Y-
FIL OUT L121
Y
578
a DISC. tST AUDIO
1-
,-6Ln
G 2Y
...i
R7Y-------L3
CIAY
C 5Y
LI3Y VID. INPUT
1
S2Y
T2T
6AW8A V ID OUT. &
RIOT SYNC SE P.
VRIY
111111r785
g
Ll 1T AGC
3 y R6Y
TI Y
VHF SECTION
ONLY -4
76-11049-1
E1
30-2590-4
200 Mfd. 150W.V.
0J1
OT15
O
G5 T1
0
0
41307A
AR4 G6VC2
65
S5
5AT 8
MI X.OSC.
II II II II UHF TUNER
76-11050
2AF4A
U.H.F. OSC.
I u..FINE TUNING
HANNEL SELECTOR
80-1 VS.AssY. TUNER
Top View of T-80.1
112Y
L_.
L8Y L5 AUDIO 130, OUT PLATE AUDIO
SCREEN
R6AY I Rgy I IRSYIL9Y f L7Y R4T
SIT 12CA5
C2Y LAY VNO I N'Y I
AUD OUT FIL INP
135V B+
55V B+
DECOUP VID OUT
PLATE
L2Y LIT
I ARM OF BRIGHT
VID
OUT
Component Layout - Printed Video and Sound Panel
ARM
S2W
TO
HOR. OUT DOT VERT LIN GRID
LOW LIOW Nevi C"
TIW
/ / VERT
135V LIN
6C S 7 vERT. OSC.
/ BW+
VERT 01.4 a OuT
L7W R 8W COW PLATE
350V 8+
LBW R11W
R9W
R 10W
S`'W TAL 7 HOR OSCc
R4W
VERT 09C CON. L12w
N3w
R7W 85W VERT HOLD L2 W L5W FIL.INP
L4W C2W CIW
UW
FIL .OUT.
112w
81W R2
SYNC. INP
Component Layout - Printed Sweep Panel
pv,v
L5W
HEIGHT
97
VOLUME TV -14, MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1958 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
PHILCO Chassis 8E11, 8E11U, and 8E13, Schematic Diagram
VIDEO IF PANEL
TUNER POLE 45.0 NC I
S 3U
I255
1ST V.I. F.
3826
FROM TUNER
L7:4
2.55
0
T41
2,f1 40.4 MC -2.5V
T311
45.75 MC.
3
.231/4j? C_411
R9U
22K
=
.cou
715G0MV0
T -TO
I
NEN i KB
TUNER
T-
ACC4
RI
(VW/
MEG.a
1404 HA
lEIIU
TM DIU.
ACC4 ?
1:24"'
-3.9
MEG.
10K
JSoYNC.
LIW 52V
la
101( 2
I-
ir 1
8
3V AGC LOU
R7U
*CH 1.4 - - - - -,
.008!, 22K
8.2K
8.2K
31
1
RIVI
II .0027 .0051
33K
MIR
DO -6018
2--=
I
PHASE COMP.
002
2 M3W
3o-6015-2
100K
_
DIODES
9 V R P 15.750 CPS.
- - - --1 HOR. HOLD
.001
T1111
I 35 -TO 2
3
MU
80.0
100
4.7 MEG
RIOW 10K
C9W
2200 430
MICA MICA
680K
220K
L
30-
S 2U
2ND V.1.F
3826
130V
T2U
43.5 MC
it
SIU
3RD V.I.F.
1/8 5AM8
130V
I *CIIU 1500
=
330
ROU
R5U
220
330
ABU
5
VoEEsRRcTT.
.1
400V
1/2 6C 97
Co IVERT,
R7W
8.2K
OUTPUTs2vi 340
II
CVW
047 400V
R81 5 MEG
L3W 1
57? I -----/
I
L4I
.85 6
MEG I9V
=.0*0C8e1 L211 21 3.551
10K I2
_i_
601
I
_ _ 1141 39K
120-6025-1
D015
- I
5.6K L
RIIW
L11.1-2" _39°K
LT 1 -29V
- - 390 .003'('-1j
NOR.
osc.
OUT. I
5905 1
R9W
220K SIR
HOR OSC.
1/2 7AU 7
L811
VIDEO DET.
TIU 44.4 MC
Ii 5A148
+
S Ill
-I.5V
5V MAX CONTH4ST P/P 15 750
CA
R3U
1000
2211,X3U he'iu
in I
X21 LIU
3 p..h 1.30
R4AU
330
i*C8U T1500
20°`, -L- .85 MEG
6
VR-I 2.55 MEG
IIGHT
c i \ BLUE
140V
C9 -t-*
33M
VR-2 VERT.
L IN
2.55 MEG
0
95011
TOTAL
2
OSC PANEL
1.6110140V
=
83M1 A
V P/P
5,t50
C.RT.
CPS
390
FRAME
HASSIS AROUND
2W
-fir a
ON -OFF
FEN&
WR-2 4.711
REC
350 MA
IOOMF "1-1-2 1505
OR
1405
117V.° Te.--"-MISF-00-4P-ifir--/., LC_L_I
60q/
BOON'
18E11U
L".-
Fe. RED
THIS SECTION 240MF .Ta I.2"
re 100 MF +
E-2
IN 8E1IU THIS SECTION
IS 200 MF (c0.
IS El, 200 MF. 150V _ 2611
150V
---
31.0. I5W
S-1 19484
8 72
1--- S3LI - 528
I 3826 3826
7
3 43 4
SIU v 1 F PANED
54148 45
.
XIU
12CA5I40 1-
SI Y
S2Y
S4Y
S3Y
4A
s21 gii
I
6AW8A 6818 5T8 I CRPT I 6CS7 7487
4 34 54 54 5
5
11111-I
.01 CI
- - - - - 12°0E
A
I
121115*C0501'1-*-C' 13U500:1*C25S-300':
GMV = GMV- GMV
L4Y
LI Y
I L5W
- - - -- WEIN L I VIDEO S SOUND PANEL
L
=220 I ° CS. PANEL IN
I
CHECKING THE PHASE COMPARER SELENIUM DIODE (REC.-W) ONLY
When servicing these portable television receivers where the
forward resistances of the two diodes should be less than 2 to
dual selenium diode phase comparer is suspected, a fast and
1. On the 100k scale the back resistance (meter connected in
efficient method of checking them is this: -
reverse polarity to the diode) should be a minimum. of 2
A 20,000 ohm/volt meter is employed. On the 10k scale the
megohms.
forward resistance (meter connected in the same polarity as the
The center conductor of the phase comparer unit is the com-
diode) should be a maximum of 6000 ohms. The ratio of the
mon negative.
98
VOLUME TV -14, MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1958 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
PHILCO Chassis 8E11, 8E11U, and 8E13, Schematic Diagram
rVIDEO a SOUND PANEL
VIDEO AMP.
S2 1/2 6Aw8A
430
IL141
0151
VIDEO 2.7 MEG INP0UT
7 =7.=
LIR COY .033
H.,112000
I 4711220.1n.
0131
680K 6
2v
68 4.5MC TRAP
MY 2
TC2Y
ROY
3,9K
COY
T.0022
0141 120
10%
J L 11 CST 2000
I MEG
CONTRAST VR-11
TIY
200V 22011.0
COY
131 2701.1. h
8
R2Y 3.9X
R IT
120K
VIDEO OUT 121
POCU3 STROP ,YE ROTA
Roy
3 F - 30-60II1I9-I -1 68K
I -I-005
3
10K
2
I HE- I
680
I -64v
I
1/2 XL
SYNC SEP. 5ov
C31 150
RIO
4.7K '2 W
140V
230K
BRIGHTNESS
.005
N4Y
140V
LISY S3Y
V2 5T8 AUG. AMP
1
-.75V
66V
9 .0033 CLAY
I C21
7
I
BIAS 470K
1_93Y 4.'61451
60 V
SIGNALVARIES WI
SIGNAL
r2 151 4.5 N I
- C 1
470 _C41
80K T 1K811
47 200v
L
531 1/2 578
DISC
130- 6026
I
330
I
L
N21 I io MEG I
RTY
220K
"
[-VOLUME
I MEG
yi
LI
--I
6 1._CO,NRTARMOEL
41
1.0033 81.1111
SIT 12CA5
AUG, OUT.
2,S
-4.50
4V
I
ISO
35 V MAX
P
I5,-50 CPS
N3Y
1000 -1(-41L1
INOTE:
ALL CANDOR VALUES
GREATER THASITI 1 AREAN IN
MUMS L ES
1 IN
AMISS MIME NOTED.
NI CAROM ARE J:20 %
UNLESS OTHERVISE NOTED.
CAFNC1TORS WAKED 1E
ARE DE COW* DISC TYPE.
ALL RESISTORS ARE 1/2 WATT, %. CANON UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED.
PRECTION OF ARROWS TIN INTIM INDICATES CLOCKWISE ROTATION.
FOCUS STP.AP IE ?LAO KNEEN #1312 OR ##10110
FOR BEST FOCUS.
INDICATES A RESZTANCE OF LESS THAN I OHM.
120V
6
100
RIMY
LOTI im.u0.1.
°I *C11 08
130V 1 RED
IN 8E110 THIS SECTION IS 4011F 101.
E-2
[OMF350y
6
270K
550 n, TOTAL
HOR.- Out
5-3 120466 5
140V90 I H.T.WT.
4
R2
100
WINAL ON TUNER
4.-.a", /IC PANEL FruNEw 5..4
IFD \14 61.-70 338C5
ANT. SHIELD1 5AT8 5-51 4
- - K2
5
444
I
M-ao°
*C7
800
1
IN THE 8E13 S-5 OF
TUNER T-71 IS A 5U8.
IN 8E11 U S-6_, _THE 2AF4A UHF OSC., IS WIRED BETWEEN S -S AND GROUND. S-4 ISA 4807A.
RD ion
4
82
310/
le 2
itRFC
I X2 B H V RECT
5-2
WM. YOKE 11.n.
30 MH
NOR.
YOKE
C
(g) 711
5,8
7
1,4,6,9
033 400V
02
in
Ri TO CRT ANODE
DAMPER S -I
1941.14
RS
3300
5
I W
R7 470K
Schematic Diagram for Chassis 8E11, 8E11U and 8E13
99
CRITICAL LEAD DRESS INFORMATION
A. To Prevent Corona (1) The cap of S2, the 1X2B Hi -voltage rectifier (when connected to tube) must dress such that the open ends
(4) Lead to LI2Y (filament output) must dress between S3Y and T5Y and must lay down to chassis and away from ClAY (audio coupling).
of the cap are facing directly toward the horizontal
C. To Prevent Buzz
output transformer.
(5) Lead to LIOY (sync. output) must lay down close to
(2) All leads connected to S2 socket must be kept free of
panel and dress between B3. ancL E2 and under clamp
solder points and leads of R-1 (the filament resistor)
CL6.
must be kept as short as possible.
(6) CRT 2nd' anode lead must have excess slack taped to
B. To Prevent Hum
lower side of CRT Bell.
(3) AC leads to the switch of VRIY (lugs 7 and 8) must
D. To Prevent Lead Burning
dress down close to panel and leave panel in the vicinity of L7Y.
(7) All leads must be dressed clear of WR-1', R-9 and
R-10 by at least 1/2 inch.
B1
VR1
Vert. Hold a Height 33-5592-2
VR2
Bright a
Vert. Lin. 33-5592-1
0
zz.
2
B
CIA CL2
111111111.
G1
8E11U
T80-1 VHF/UHF TUNER
76-11049-I a
76-11050 8E11
T70 V.H.F. TUNER 76-11046
8E13
T71 V.H.F. TUNER 76-I1449
Yoke And Lead Assy.
76-11070-2 C.R. TUBE
I4QP4A
OMITTED
El,R3Y,W2Y
CL5
32 8745
12D06A HOR.
OUT.
VIDEO a SOUND P.W.
fIrClAY
$3L(41
L Y
L5Y
2
12CA5 AUDIO
OUT.
4o O *
5o 20,
B3
Fine Tuning Channel Selector
30-2590-18
CL 1 11 100Mfd.-I50W.V.
6
2A 100 Mfd.- I 50W.V. 3- 2 OMfd.-350W.V.
4 r) 240Mfd: I 50W.V.
GlY L1Y
NOTE
* PINS ON SOCKETS ARE NUMBERED IN REVERSE TO THE CONVENTIONAL TUBE BASE CONFIGURATION, i.e. PIN 1 ON THE FOIL VIEW IS PIN 9 (PIN 7 FOR SlY)ON THE TUBE.
Video Plate 220uh
32-4690-7
T 2Y
VR1.Y
Contrast, Vo I. On -Off
33-5584-.3
5T8 1st AUDIO a DISC. ,
Discriminator
32-4689 4.5MC
6BY8 S.I.F.
I6AW8A VIDEO OUT. a SYNC. SEP.
Sound Take Off and
4.5 MC .Trap
32-4688 Video Plate
270 uh 32-4690-8
L141
Video Grid 470 uh
32-4690-12
VOLUME TV -14, MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1958 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
PH ILCO TELEVISION
8L4 1, 841U, , 8L42U, 8L43, 8L43U,
8P51L, 8P51A8L4a2nd 8P51U CHASSIS
Model No. Chassis
F4210 .......
. .8L41
UF4210
8L41U
F4210L ....................8L41
UF4201L ............8L41U
F4210E .....................8141
UF4210E ... ..8L41U
F4212
8L41
UF4212
8141
F42121
8141
UF4212L ...........8L41U
F4214STN
8L42
UF4214STN ......8L42U
F4214STM
8142
UF4214STM ......8L42U
F4620SL ................8L41
UF4620SL
8L4 I U
F4620SM
8L41
UF4620SM 8L41U
F4622 ........................8L43
UF4622
8L43U
F4622L
8L43
UF4622L
8L43U
F4624
.8143
UF4624 F4632
8L43U 8L43
UF4632
.8L43U
F6206SM
8P51A
F6206SL
8P51A
UF6206SM
8P51
F6206SL
8P51
UF6206SL
8P51U
F6620SM...............8P51
UF6620SM
8P5 I U
F6620SL
8P51
UF6620SL
8P51U
F6620SL ..__..._.8P 51A
Tunor No.
(T-688) 76-11450-2 (T -69A) 76-11547-1 (7-6813) 76-11450-2 (T -69A) 76-11547-1
S6G 6CS7 VERT OSC.
VERT. OUT
S4G 6818 S. 1 F
L185 N36
T6G
C216
N56
C136
I \ IL256 L240 R326 L236 8330 L22G L216 I
R310
-
64W8ASSG VID.OUT
S SYNC. SEP.
C23G
R27C
-I-) 11215 0246 11290 C205 182, G T5G R30G k ...c.&
(T -68B) 76-11450-2
(T -69A) 76-11547-1 (T -68B) 76-11450-2 (7-69A) 76-11547-1 (T -68B) 76-11450-2 (T -69A) 76-11547-I (T -68B) 76-11450-2 (7-69A) 76-11547-1 (T -68B) 76-11450-2
NAG LI5G 8240
R23G
C196 R256 8166 LIOG C176 L9G LNG
n ;LLD,
Ge2
-4 -I-
COO"'
ITT
WR1G Tal:51____/51
----r-
R26G L146 LI3G
=<-7.1 LR1,72GG
-- --
I1R13GIT"
1696
RIIG
IT -69A) 76-11547-1 (T-686) 76-11450-2 (7-69A) 76-11547-1 (T-688) 76-11450-2
S3G 6 CU5 AUG OUT.
R6G
T IC6G
R7G
( T -69A) 76-11547-1 (T-688) 76-11450-2 (T 69A) 76-11547 1 (T-6813) 76-11450-2
L6AG PHONO INPUT
TIE LUG I
L6G
( T -69A) 76-11547-1
LY. GAG R1OG C5G G3G
S2G 618 1ST. AUD.
IL4G L3G I RISC C3D
Cl2G ClIG C6G C4G SIG
L2G NIG C2G LIG T10
124U74
HOP. OSC.
(T -68B) 76-11450-2
Video -Oscillator -Sound Printed Wiring Panel
(T -69A) 76-11547-1 (T-6813) 76-11450-2
TERMINAL LUG IDENTIFICATION-V.O.S. PRINTED PANEL
(T -69A) 76-11547-1 (1-63) 76-11190 (T-63) 76-11190 (T -69A) 76-11547-1 (7-688) 76-11450-2 (7-69A) 76-11547-1 (T -68B) 76-11450-2 (T -69A) 76-11547-1 (T-688) 76-11450-2 (7-69A) 76-11547-1 (T-63) 76-11190
LIG De -coupled B+. L2G To Aux. Hor. Hold control, VR5 (lug 4). L3G Hor. Osc. Output, to grid, pin 5, of 6DQ6A. L4G Filament input, 6.3 volts, A.C. L5G To arm of Volume Control, VR1. L6G To top of volume control, VR1. L6AG Phono Input, 8L43 and 8L43U only. L7G Audio Output plate, blue lead of audio output trans-
former and one side of C6. L8G Tuner AGC clamp, tied to LI3G. L9G 270V B+, red lead of audio output transformer and
one side of C6. L1OG To arm of Height control, VR2 (lug 5). LI1G Not used. L12G To top of contrast' control, VRI (lug 3). LI3G Tuner AGC delay, tied to L8G. L14G Tuner AGC, to -uner and fringe switch, SWI (3). 1.15G To vert. lin. control, VR2 (lug 3). 1.16G I.F. AGC, to I F. panel (L5S) and Fringe Switch,
SW1 (4).
LI7G Video input from 2nd det., XI choke. USG Vert. output plate, blue lead from vert. output trans-
former.
LI8AG Po SWI (5), Range Switch Panel Run #5 (green dot) -chassis Run 6
LI9G 150V B+, jumper to L200. On automatic chassis,
jumper is removed and .ead goes to remote control socket.
pin 7
of
L2OG Jumper to LI9G. On automatic chassis, jumper is removed and lead goes to pin 8 of remote control socket.
L21G L22G L23G L24G L25G L26G
To arm of contrast control VR1 (lug 2). Video output, yellow lead to CRT cathode.
r To vert. hold control, VR4 (lua 1).
To arm of brightness control, R3 (lug 2). Retrace suppression, green lead to grid of CRT. Red lead from vertical output transformer and lead
to yoke socket, pin 9.
VIDEO I -F ALIGNMENT
AM ALIGNMENT CHANNEL SELECTOR - Set tuner to channel 4 position. SIGNAL INJECTION -To mixer grid through T -L2.
BIAS - -5.0 volts to LI6G. Connect 2:1 voltage divider
from L16G to ground. Feed from divider -2.5 volts to L14G. SCOPE - Connect to video detector output, L17G on V.O.S.
panel.
OUTPUT LEVEL - Not greater than 2 volts peak to peak during pole and sweep alignment; not less than 0.2 volts peak to peak during trap alignment.
WARM UP - Allow equipment and chassis 15 minutes warm-up. 1. 45.75 mc Adjust T1A (tuner) for maximum. 2. 41.25 mc Adjust trap VC3S for minimum. Bias may be re-
duced as minimum is approached. 3. 47.40 mc Adjust traps VC2S and VC4S for minimum. Bias
may be reduced as minimum is approached. Repeat for
accuracy. 4. 42.7 mc Adjust VC1S and T2S for maximum. 5. 45.0 mc Adjust T3S for maximum. 6. 44.4 mc Adjust T1S for maximum.
(Service material continued on next 3 pages)
SOUND I -F ALIGNMENT
Connect 20,000 ohms/volt meter (10y range) to L6G. (2) Inject a 4.5 MC AM signal into L17G or use station signal.
(3) Adjust T2G (sound discriminator) top core for zero volt-
age. It may be possible to obtain zero crossover at two
positions of the tuning core. The correct one is the first
crossover from the maximum CCW position of the core.
Crossover point is that core setting where opposite polarity.
voltage is delivered for each direction of rotation from
center.
(4)
Connect the 20,000 ohms/volt meter (50V range) the limiter diode load resistor (R23G).
across
CAUTION: Care should be exercised when placing meter lead
connections as both ends of R23G are 50 ground potential.
volts or more above
(5) AmdujmusvtoTlt4aGgeb. oItttommacyorbeeapnodsTsi2bGlebtoottoombtaicnortewfoorpmeaaxkis-
while adjusting T2G. The correct one is the first peak
(6)
from the maximum CW position of the core. Connect the 20,000 ohms/volt meter OW range) to L6G
and readjust T2G top core for zero voltage.
NOTE: During alignment it is necessary to maintain the voltage across R23G below 30 volts, in order to prevent limiter
action. If using the station's signal, this may be accomplished
by connecting a 330 mmf condenser from L 15 put) on V.I.F. panel to ground and adjusting
(tvhiedefoindeettu. noinugt-
control toward the smear region.
101
VOLUME TV -14, MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1958 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
PHILCO Chassis 8L41, -U, 8L42, -U, 8L43, -U, 8P51, -A, -U, Schematic Diagram
TUNER
pm. inclicateS 0 resistance of Iess than I otvn 60E6 1ST VIF
60E6
6AM8
RED
2 D VIF Kov
RED 3RD VIF 2ND KT VIOLET
A o-1-2--$0-1
... Zris 414 X
8 o--C16S
TRAP VC2S
BRNWH
us RED
BRN- RED-
VT
K 1-5
53S
42185
SS
22Ke
= 1 3 3 7-1-5
---- N730=-
5-3 = 1-5 I=CI 1500
41:c.4
41.25
IIC
5
4$.0
7
IC
I= CT$ 6°0
ITS
114
4867 I C30%6470---
1
ASS
330
$25 5
015
TX 42.2
X
_r
CI"
6 SI S
71';'4
IIC
-I ;41
115 7
1500
125
68
680
CTS
I le10%
1ES13KN2$201ICmSSo=o
I X2S
145 I K
=5
12v
SA
60)
TRAP
TRAP
IF
VIDEO IF PANEL
330
CIS 1500
15$ AGC
RFC
311.H VT.
2231H BN.
+140V 13$
$
'C. Nov Re
IS USED IN CHASSIS 8P114 11-63 TUNER)
ONLY
CO
+ 140V 82
1000
8+
4°72T5-1.7--in--.260V
C2='
E 0--FIL(F)
AGC
52V 60 CPS
I VIDEO IF PANEL 413 4113 KIS 415
6DE6 6DE6 66AM8I
20K
VR2
60 CPS I
5;f,,J's
15K
I.22 VERT.
HOLD
2.5 MEG
III
HEIGHT
425V
114
VR 4
RC- NETWORK 30-6030-2
LIN RISC
1.8 MEG 3C
PI I
Y
. T.
33K .005
90(
'.004
150
- - --0.-
rJ I 79
=
i
I30 ---2
C- NETWORK
60 0', 30-6504 -I
I SC 3
1 MEG
RISC
(5K
.004
I
i 0% a.
--J1211 17'
9
- - --00-5 7 6057
I 1IR00K T.0C032
RI
100K
--.001-1
VERT.
OSC.OUTPUT
LINO BLUE
390
rs
003
RC -NETWORK
30-6507-2_
BLK II4
to
390
FI4C
6
RED
NOT
P9 V4
-J
R13 R14 1110Narrior
I
1°6#3
J .005
op1 Lc./.03CME
CS
5 RETRACE SUPPRESS ON'''.7ril
22
MEG
C2
.008 1 MEG
3
S6C
3
_l_ SYNC
"1(.001
/
6^5vLL
1-0SCILLATOR,SOUND AND VIDEO PANEL
5
5
5 I/5 4 3
F41-8
'1; - - - 141 6BY8 6 8 6C5,7 6AW8A 12AU7A 6CU5
545
SS6
Sli
535 I
4
6AX4GT 6006A
7 /13 2/T.
S4
Hs-- 7
r,S2 15,750 CPS
PILOT LIGHT
nsv-74 AUTO I CHANNEL
SELECTOR
52I5 AUX ON -OFF JUMPER PLUG
1
S v. 3
- AUTO
ON -OFF
7-H
PI 1
L REMOTE AUDIO CONTROL
REMOTE
CONTROL SOCKET
FUSE WIRE
115 V
60'1,
RE)
470K
MIER -
LOC K
I F -LINE CHASSIS
OSCILLATOR, SOUND AND
VIDEO PANEL
: ->c,
\ , SIG
\,.....,) ......." \ 1 1NA
ITC
(5K
SEL. DIODES
11.14
---....s._..snc....
RC -NETWORK 30-6506-2
1i
1700
6
R2
4.7MEG
3
2
Di
1
RISC
680K
-=
CSC -
C4 .001 .001
220K .001
.0015
3
CTC
.0047
8 7.5v
RIC
1200
120
10%
39K
8R200
PIC
1,9
L3C
LIC
3300 A q:uF
110 AT 350V
13+ 260v
= FM)
Cli
GC
C3C
390
390
SM
SM
68K 1135 -I1CS62M8C =
RSC1
1,0MEG;
I4C
8200
-.D
L2C
4
250K
-7. HOR.
HOLD
AUX.
vfis
4C72.30,( HOLD
ac
.15
LI5G
3 " VLEINNT
T-±1°611F 50v
Vu
E2OLIU
+140V +140V
STEPPER MOTOR
TOTAL
C3
.22
FH 7
I
I15v604..
5U4GB L V RECT. SI
.7A
Ft FUSE
PT
ON -OFF SW
NTERLOCK
--1417u.F
Prl F -LINE
4
CHASSISI
6006A
HOR. OUTPUT $2
5 40y
C41_
04TI.
11112
W
41OO
112 W0IDTH
IC. HY
4011
(3
sous
_L 350V
= E MI
IB3GT
HI -V RECT.
53
III
39K
2W
3 2011
7 Nov
(311
M.0CS47
2
12
V
RFC
, 75. N CP; i)
teov 5
i
3
PX
6000
6AXGT
-t-
DAMPER
SI
: s liilowo- eau IN YOKE LEADS
'7000
1 IR-1
OKE
88
Fig. 27. Schematic Diagram, Chassis 8L41, 81,41U,
B+ 260V
8L42, 8L42U, 8143, 8L43U, 8P51, 8P51A and 8P51U
102
0 0
,,... gip g,...4.
,z.,-.---enr
I
tlip o
6 ti
6
ig.,,, giz_,.,___ 'L.,
ti ili
rn
-, -s - EA VI .1,7,-diair gi __*--k302 0 r-; i..x.1
8.' ill '..lv - `" Ylt <
to .4
o
I
ti
11[---)1--
4 5 n.
O
O
mp
Iron Es:
1/1,1
r4z
2R it
lag
RUN CHANGE INFORMATION
8L41, 8L41U, 8L43 8 BL43U Chassis Run I -First Production of 8L41 and 8L41U. Run 2-R4, vertical hold return resistor, changed from 15,000 ohms, 10%
to 20,000 ohms, 5%, part number 66-3208240. To improve vert. hold stability and center control. Run 3-VR-1, volume -contrast control, changed value of volume section from 250,000 ohms to 500,000 ohms, part number 33-5592-14. V.O.S. panel with L6AG, phono tie lug added. Run 1 after 5000 units of V,O.S. panel. To add phono input for 81 .43 and 81431_I This is
first production of 8L43 and 8L43U but will be identified as Run 3 for these chassis. From here on 8L41 and 8L43 will have same run numbers. Run 4-V.O.S. panel changed,to run 2 or 3 (identical except for color dot -red or orange.) To improve retrace suppression. Run 5-V.O.S. panel changed to run 4 (yellow dot) to improve interlace. Run 5Z -Yellow dot V.O.S. panel (run 4) with R4 change of chassis run 7.
Run 6 -Range switch, SW1, changes to a DPDT, part number 42-2075-4. Added a black wire from SW1-5 to LI8AG (added tie lug) of new V.O.S. panel. Changed V.O.S. panel to run 5, green dot. Added a condenser (C3A) between B2-2 (ground) and 133-3 (junction of R6 and blue lead from SW1-1). C3A is thus across R6. C3A has the part number 30-4650-56. This circuit places R6 and C3A in the video cathode circuit in local (normal) position and adds filtering to AGC line in distant position.
Run 7-R4, vertical hold return resistor, changed to 27,000 ohms, 5%, part number 66-3278240. To center vertical hold control.
8L42 8 8L42U
Run 1 -First production, includes changes made in 81.41 up to and including run 4.
Run 2 -Same as run 5 of 8L41. Run 2Z -Same as run 5Z of 81.41. Run 3 -Same as Run 6 of 8L4I. Run 4 -Same as run 7 of 8L41.
8P51, BPS1A 8 8P51U Chassis
Run 1 -First production, starts with changes made in 8L41 up to and including Run 5.
Run 2 -Same as run 6 of 8L41. Run 2Z -Same as run 5Z of 8L41. Run 3 -Same as run 7 of 8L41.
V.O.S. Printed Wiring Panel Assy. Note: Identifying color dot appears on edge of V.O.S. panel. Run 1 -White dot. First production.
After 5000 assemblies, panel changes to 54-5278-1 with addition of wiring Lug L6AG. This new tie lug will be used as a phono connection in chassis 8L43 and 8L43U. In non-phono models a jumper is wired from L6G to L6AG. Run 2 -Red dot. N4G, retrace suppression R -C network, changed from 30.6507-2 to 30-6507-3. To improve retrace suppression. Run 3 -Orange Dot -same as run 2. Run 4 -Yellow dot
N3G, vertical feedback R -C network, changed from 30-6504-1 to 30-6504-2. RI6G, vertical osc. plate resistor, changed from 1.0 megohrn to 1.8 megohms part number 66-5188340.
R25G, vertical oscillator plate charging resistor, changed from 15,(0) ohms to 13,000 ohms, 5%, part number 66-3138240.
C17G, vertical oscillator plate charging condenser, changed from .033 mfd to .022 mfd, part number 30-4688-4. To improve interlace characteristics. Run 5 -Green Dot. Added L18AG tie lug to 6AW8A (SSG) video amp. cathode circuit. Modified foil in vicinity of C24G. Value of C24G changes to .001 mfd, part number 30-4650-52. Panel is 54-5278-1.
VOLUME TV -14, MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1958 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
PHILC 0
* 8L41, etc. Continued
vERT L. , V R
HEIGHT 33-559213
WIDTH CONT. 42.2075-1
(NOT USED IN 8P51
;map
8251 IS CERAMIC DISK ES WIRES 112(11.10 82 Is)
MIMI R7
IS OMITTED, JUMPER WIR 9211/10521422
< ic
6006A
T -L5 T -T1
TL3 T 2
T-VC1
NOTE_
PRE -FIX
IMOICATES
VHF TUNER PARTS
ell
" `T -T3
T 6806
T CI
4 -T -T2 AF AMP.
1.61
Y -J1 (.4...4tuu
TCL2
:I 27 TO.L:V°1' -TIA U.1._ tilLU-L2
NOTE 2
PREFIX U INDICATES UHF TUNER PARTS.
GlA
13L4IUMF.
UTo 21 7A-
.11eO
CL2 UCL3
32 881.-1
CL4 I.F. P.W. ASSY.
L.E6.6LL5G LAG L12..
LUG 4E/F.La16 L216 LE LI%
5.1.6 4)'3 6Ci) O
0C4344
04
a
T 3G
T5G
.171krno'
SG
8141 VHF. T68B
76- 11450-2
8L41 UHF. T69A
76-415417-1
S WI
0 8LUEC.,0ROW, N
ORANGE 3IkIt3..
WHITE
A GC CONT.
42 2075-2
VRI
ON -OFF, v02. CONTRAST 33-5592-4
CTROCE RAY Tuff SOCKET
CABLE ASSY.
-4147-12
BRIGHT,,
VERT 10.0 33-559312
MDR 01240, AUK
33-5592-5
S1S GAMS 3RDV1i.6DET. S2S 60E5 260 VIE S3S 6DE6 1ST.
94460. 3RD, I F PLATE POLE
T2S 42.78C. END. IF. PLATE POLE T3$ 45.011C. 1ST. I.F. PLATE POLE VC1S 42.780. 1ST. GRID POLE
VC2S At 2 5144C TRAP
VC3S 41.252/C. TRAP VC4S 47252IG TRAP
32'461343 32-46116-2
32.41114.2 316535-1 316535-1
31-6535-1 31-15535-2
SIG 12AU7A S2G 676 S3G GCU5 54G 6636 S5G &ANSA
61 GG 6CST
T2G T3G T4G T 5G
T6G NI G N2G N3G
N4G N5G
47001
660 .6 210.6
HOR OSC 1ST. ALM AUDIO OUT
SIF. SLIM.
VIDEO COT. 5 SYNC. SEP VERT. OSC vERT. OUT HOR STAB.
DISC. VID PLATE PEAK. COIL SOUND TAKE OFF STRAP DET. PEAKING COIL
VID. PLATE PEAK. COIL
608. CISC (RC NEYWORKI SOUND INC NET 00511 VERT. FEEDBACK (PC NI
VERT. RET. (RCN.) VERT. INT. Mt N I
32-45723 32-4735 32w690-12 324613B-3 32-4690-14 32-4690-6
30- 65C6- 2 30-650530-65)4.1
30'6507'3 30- 60303.2
ODD LTC LSG
v.0 S. P.W. ASSY.
N3G
c
N4G
N1G.17". N 2G
ABOVE NETWOR S APE SPOON IN THE SAME POSITION AS THEY ARE LOCATED IN VEXS. PR. ASS,
OMITTED SYMBOL NO R22G
PT 8L41 32-8807-2 8L42 32-8807-I
BPSI 32-8811-2
32111306,
S4 IN EIP51 IS 6AKKGT 6AU4 GT DAMPER
ow +A%
E2 30-2417-39
014eggruDg411:1':21
Fig. 26. Top Chaasit View Component layout -
VID.
OUT 44.4 MC
L1S
TIS
IIII
CIS r-
Nssc
els 3\S. X5S ----113
3 V .F a
VID. DET 6AM8 SI
42.7 MC T2S
2 VLF 6DE6 S2S
XIS
RIS
R2S
C2S
-
D-
45.0 MC T3S
R5S
C7S
I V LE 6DE6 S3S
474 MC 42.7 MC TRAP
VCIS VC2S
iktt C3S R 3S
1/
X 3S III C4S
4011 1
TTT=47,iritaiiidfr
V
b-41----866S / TUNER
LINK
GNO.
E-H
17_ .-J
X2S
CBS R4S C95 R 6S RIOS C5S
CIOS C6S R75 R8S
Cl1S R9S *X6S X4S
X 7S X 8S
L3S
14B0.V
L4S FIL.
Fig. 19. Video
L5S A.G.C.
Printed Wiring Panel
VC3S 41.25 MC
TRAP
VC4S 4Z 4 MC
TRAP
L2S
M
TUNER
104
VOLUME TV -14, MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1958 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
PHILCO TELEVISION
8171, 8L71U,
8172, 8L72U,
8173 AND 8L73U
CHASSIS
I
Model No. Chassis
F4216 ........................8L71
UF4216
F4216L ..................8L71
UF4216L
8L71U
Tuner No.
(T -67A) 76-10131-3 (T -65A) 76-10131-4 (T -67A) 76-10131-3 (7-65A) 76-10131-4
Picture Tube 21 BSP4
21 BSP4
21 BSP4
21 BSP4
F4626 ........................8L73
UF4626
8L73U
F4626L ..................8L73
(T -67A) 76-10131-3 (T -65A) 76-10131-4 (T -67A) 76-10131:3
21 BSP4 21 BSP4 21 BSP4
UF4626L ............8L73U
F66247
. 8L72
UF6624T
8L72U
F6624TL
8L72
UF6624TL
8L72U
(T -65A) 76-10131-4 (T -65B) 76-10131-2 (T -65B) 76-10131-2 (7-65B) 76-10131-2 (T -65B) 76-10131-2
21 BSP4 24ADP4 24ADP4 24ADP4 24ADP4
The i-f system comprises three stagger -tuned i-f amplifiers and the video detector. The first and second stages have individual pentode tubes while a diode -pentode tube serves as the third stage and video detector. AGC voltage is applied to the first and second i-f stages.
VIDEO I -F ALIGNMENT
AM ALIGNMENT
CHANNEL SELECTOR: On VHF models (T -67A) set to channel 4; on
UHF models (T -65A or B) set to UHF position.
SIGNAL INJECTION: VHF models (T -67A) to I -F output test point of
tuner, TP-l. UHF models (T -65A or B) to UHF input jack on tuner,
TP-1.
BIAS: -5.0 volts to I -F A.G.C.. L16L (on video panel) and -2.5 volts to
tuner A.G.C. L9L (on video panel).
SCOPE: Connect to LI IL on video panel, video second detector output.
OUTPUT LEVEL: Not to exceed 2 volts peak to peak during pole and
sweep alignment. Not less than .2 volts peak to peak as null, during
trap alignment, is approached.
(I) 45.75 MC adjust tuner pole TI for maximum.
(2) 41.25 MC adjust VC -3S trap for minimum. NOTE: Bias may be reduced as trap minimum is approached.
(3) 47.4 MC adjust VC -2S and VC -4S traps for minimum.
(4)
Repeat steps two and three.
(5) 42.7 MC adjust VC -IS and T2S for maximum.
(6) 45.0 MC adjust T3S for maximum.
(7) 44.4 MC adjust TIS for maximum.
o --I1.2MMF
CI
INPUT
1N60 .1
47K
RI C3 .00I MED
OUTPUT
ro
METER
PART NUMBERS
Cl
30-12:1-21
C2 C3 RI TI XTAL
PART OF TI 30-1238-3
66-2478340 32-4449 34-8022-2
Fig. I. 4.5 mc. Detector Tube
SWEEP ALIGNMENT
CHANNEL SELECTOR: Set to channel 4. SIGNAL INJECTION: To antenna terminals through an antenna match-
ing network (generator to 300 ohms). BIAS, SCOPE and OUTPUT LEVEL: Same as above under AM Align-
ment.
I) Inject 65.75 MC AM, 30% modulated, into antenna. Adjust fine tun.. ing control for minimum output. Do Not Disturb fine tuning during balance of adjustments.
1) Inject channel 4 sweep signal (69 MC with 6 MC sweep width) into antenna. If necessary, adjust the following cores to bring the curve within limits (see curve figure 2).
(a) Adjust 67.25 MC to fall at the 50% point with tuner core 'II. (b) Level curve with core TIS. (c) Position 70.5 MC at the 50% point with core T2S.
DO NOT DISTURB T3S AND VC -IS
4.5 MC TRAP ALIGNMENT
(1) Inject 4.5 MC AM signal into LI IL or use station signal. (2) Connect 4.5 MC detector (see circuit figure I) to LI3L (pin 2.of CRT).
NOTE: Preliminary padding of 4.5 MC test detector -Connect detector to an accurate source of 4.5 MC signal and pad core of transformer for maxium DC output voltage.
(3) Connect 20,000 ohms/volt meter, set to 2.5 volt range, to detector output.
(4) Turn contrast control fully clockwise (to maximum). (5) Adjust 4.5 MC trap (top core of T3L) for minimum indication.
SOUND I -F -ALIGNMENT
NOTE: The sound I -F alignment is based upon a properly aligned video I -F strip.
(I) Connect a 20,000 ohms/volt meter (set to 10 volt range). to L7F on sound panel.
(2) Inject a 4.5 mc AM signal into LI IL or use a station signal. (3) Adjust TIF top core for zero voltage.
NOTE: It may be posisble to obtain zero crossover at two positions of the tuning core. The correct one is the first crossover from the maximum CCW position of the core.
(4) Connect a 20,000 ohms/volt meter (set to 50 volt range). across the limiter diode load resistor, R4F. CAUTION: Care should be exercised as both leads of volt meter are approximately 50 %ohs above ground potential.
(5) Adjust T3L bottom core and TIF bottom core for maximum voltage. See note, step 3. Correct core position is first peak from maximum CW position.
(6) Re -connect meter to L7F and readjust TIF top core for zero voltage. NOTE: During alignment it is necessary to maintain the voltage across R4F below 30 volts, in order to prevent limiting action. If using the station's signal, this may be accomplished by connecting a 330 mmf condenser from LIS (2nd video detector output) to ground and adjusting the fine tuning control toward the smear region. If using a signal generator, decrease the generator output.
Cf
R.F. IN M.G.
to
100
80
60
-B
40
20
0
1
1
1
I
I.F. IN MC.
00
5.4
08 8
.ta
0
o to
SI, la
g)
0 Ln 0
-B
00
OVERALL R.F 9 LE CH.#4 RESPONSE CURVE
Fig. 2. Overall R -F I -F Response Curve.
105
TO El- I
TO GI
I 0 1003.0 - 350V 2 A 20.00 - 3500 3- 101100 - 3500 1 0 40m00 -4005
VERT MOLD tHOM MOLD) Et HEIGHT /1 a AU/I /
T3
c
RANGE
`5w TCH
(V -M)
42.1MC .1830M& GRIDNt TRAP
62.1.:,,,,,, L 10
04
`. A l' .6 ,VY''.4% '''%.
LI
II
Dpi
.,,,A 11. .#R.,
I'
L.L ykc.t,lb. Ta. k. 1,,,,,
LI' r;.,1 7"` " A
L 5L
v , g ..I.D_
"802,40'
T6,,,
1,,IL...
...2,
''
! :13 047 2.TO
6IC''1,9
ti.-. 4
,
.1
. .46*
.,
, VIDEOi Isl.!. .m.
UTti5t gt 6
L.ss
Md I F. RATS iii, 254 IF
444 ''''
IIONOPUuTT
c:"*A
Mel I F.
204 I
1X1 MIK CO,L)
90 0 'A :0.1 .4":.4...t i'./... dIA Aoi.T" , c2..../10 I 3 ...7. 1Ir
Llt..........\L
Li, C3
rii3 cw: 4, C2lc....:(.(
RA
?
6 CC).I!tW11i./' i fff)
,,,
;
HE 1.
L14L
60
L1 3L
135 FVvaC35 VC4S .RATE 450 MC 131. I.F.
TRAP TRAP 42.2,mc mow
SU.
Mr3
VIDEO Cu l'
1
261 VIDEO PLATE 250915
I
G3L(S
3 21t VIDEO
flig ulcT
E 2
I 0 ZOMFO - 3500 2 1031S0 - 25V
- 50M50.- 25V 40 108m0. -475v
U -S
6AF4A U.HF. OSC.
ANTENNA MATCHING
TRANS.
I
LEE
L1(
C> T -L2
6X. MI
aar
DAMPER
(31;rJ.4)''''"'sT) OR
83 63-6
B ar a SS.12 PHASE
V E RT OUT.
cN LAX
ff,,
A.L.
Top View Chassis Component Layout
S 3E
VERT. 05C.
vRA
MOR.
To vRsa 05C.
TO VRI5
VOLUME TV -14, MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1958 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
PHILCO Chassis 8L71, -U, 8L72, -U, 8L73, -U, Service Data, Continued
TIE HOR RINGING
COIL
L7E TO BYBASS CAPAC TOR
G2E
C3E
RIE
L8E
SYNC
LIIE TO HOR HOLD
S4E I2AUTA
OUTPUT
CONTROL
HOR OSC
C4E R6E R5E CIIE CIOE RI2E C9E Cl2E G4E
RI8E LI4E
B+270 */ DC
RITE
L6E B+270V DC
C8E
L5E SYNC INPUT
L4E FILMENT
R4E CIE
GTE
S2E 12BR7 S S B PHASE
COMP
L3E VERT OUTPUT
CATHODE
L2E TO VERT OUTPUT
TRANS
LIE TO VERT OUTPUT TRANS
11
C71j'4S7
WIE
RITE
CI5E N2E RI5E RIOE
CI4E NIE CI3E RI4E
CI6E
S3E I2AUTA VERT DSC RI6E
LI3E OTO VERT HOLD
CONTROL G3E
SIE 6CM6
VERT OUT
GIE R7E R2E
C5E
C6E
RI3E
L9E
L OE
TO VERT LIN TO VERT LIN
CONTROL
CONTROL
L 2E TO HEIGHT
CONTROL
Oscillator Printed Wiring Panel
OSCILLOSCOPE WAVEFORM PATTERNS
These waveforms were taken with the receiver tuned to a local station, range switch in normal position and contrast at maximum. The voltages given are approximate peak to peak values and are based on approximately a 5.0 V. signal at the output of the 2nd detector. The frequencies shown are those of the waveform-not the sweep
rate of the oscilloscope.
Sync separator grid, pin 2 of 12BR7 (52E), 40 volts. 60 cp.s.
Sync separator place, pin 1 of 1215R7 (S2E), 21 volts, 15,750 cp.s.
Vnnol oscillatorrot.. .p..p.. 6 of 12AU7A sip
Vertical oscillator plate. pin 1 of 12AU7A (53E), 120 volts, 60 cp.s.
Vertical oscillator cathode. pins 3 and 8 of 12AU7A (53E), 23 volts, 60 cp.s.
Vertical output grid, pm 3 of 6CM6 (51E), 32 volts, 60 cp.s.
Top of vertical hold control (VR-4), 68 volts, 60 cp.s.
107
Vertical output plate. pin 9 af 6CM6 (51E), 1250 volts, 60 cp.s.
VOLUME TV -14, MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1958 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
PHILCO Chassis 8L71, -U, 8L72, -U, 8L73, -U, Schematic Diagram
MIER IF, POLE
III) 4 535
NC
TUNER
PW IF PANEL
S3S 1ST VIF
60E6
L2S
A 0
up 0X04S IV
B
66St X3S
LYONS l3. DAN
- S'Ol°r'.410 SOUND SOUND
OR..") BRN.
BRN
X6S RED
JVZC-I3S
BLK. 4i-7:11
5/111
WH. " VI.
23
NC
AC2S -3
4
1-INrC73453S0
LRAP
-7.L-.i5V-C345
-IVC3S
1-5
474
41 25
= II( - MC
TRAP
- TRAP
CI1S
T.0015
30 5
RED T3S
XR5S 1 027K
130
15.0
Hv
5
S2S 2ND VIF
60E6
7 6
2--R- -2 nov FC REDT2S
140V K
1.eo v
5153RD
0 ORANGE-T±IS.= 2/118 BET
VIF
1/2 64M8
/2 64M13(P)
8
VI.
44.4
MC
7S
2 - 10680
R3S
47 T47o
?FIBS
>330
42.7
2
16C8IO0S NC
T680
IR2S - C2S
68 118
1.0C061S5 Zoy
60C PS.
C5S
10015
2R260S
-4--
v.RIOS
330
R45
e;11(
DOSSr
- I ISV Pip
co C PS
7
X5S 220H
IS
8+ 140V
O
L3S
ELI10 P/P
AGC60 C PS 5S
CDo0-
E 0 G 0
Bi- 270V FIFIU
8 21 121 +15T5OVJ
7 P 41--
7 6AX4GT
6D06GTA
CRT
81"
OSC PANEL
IF PANE1471
1 EIR7 12 AU7A 6CM61
4 54 5
I
6DE6
13
4
5
L5E S2E 0 SYNC SEP
1/2 12BR7
i
6
CIE 150
SYNC TUNER AGC
8+1 55V
VV 9SC PANEL
2 J P/
5.,51:.;;.P
R1 OE 22K
1.004
10K
R 1504KE
R8E 1 68001
10K 10 T
NIE
30 6008-2_
VER S 124U74
-1r57V-1777
60 C P.S.
10K
3
I
I
MEG
I
13E
7
C
.0033
RI7E 10%400V 220K5
I W
-WV
Wi
6 135V
L 13i 3 31.4n
II- IS
VERT HOLD
03 r,
22 -1-
= = 1 RFC
CIOA 33
L I 4S__ __4,,,J4
7 ---4- F
T SOUND PANEL
[-VIDEO PANE 17
16808 6AL5 6AV6 64051 616 1
6A05 I
ISV Pb",
15,7500
SU/
C8E
68
1/2 BR7
6
R9E
G
I -I( .001
20K .014
S1E
VERT OUTPUT
6CM6
220V
RI4E CI4E
13 560 1.018
C6E
_-,03C5E T
=
7.!7P/0
I1R3E 1.9E
.8MEG
OLI4E
60c.P s
RI3E
220.033 K
VR4 2.5 MEG HEIGHT4
5 6-1'-
680K
6
_L /5.14
4 3')
R6E
=
1
1
tI CK7M
r
J
1_=_r
15\14
1.30-6009-4-
UL1 J 1I7
C7E
120
78+
5E
OK
.C0091E
iE4HIP 15.750 CPS,
1(
C.040E 11
C2E .047
31, -7
7E 2 LIO
1
.C0112 5"
VR1
25K
CI
LIN
301 V/P 4
R 2A THERMISTOR
170 COLD
4.30 65C
P11 Cl22A.7"
AuTC
CHANNEL
1114 1
R2E
SELECTOR
7E0C.Pi LYE
100K
RII
IW
BLACK
10K
AUx ON- OFF
la
AUTO
0- ON -OFF
1 EI-3 A-
3CV5TF I
+1T4O0JV
TO
6:v Pi If.,750CP:
S4E
HOR OSC 124U74 P
R1U5E
5, Mh
1W
015E T82
IC3E
TIE ^2200
30
SM
88µH
6 C12E 390
700 R5E 6800
RI2E
39K
,//
60V
CHE
0047
SM
__CI
L6Et'i)
L2E
OL3E
I
R8 390 1001.1F
W 25V1_
VOT
C8
01
13.11a -20+80--
RED
450J1
BLUE
PIO R6
40 IL
0 VERT
p9 YOKE
6
SOUND PANEL
3
SM
8
SM270
Bt 270V
5
4
+140V
6.6
RIRIE
,,JV 1'1
,!,750:PS
R6E
82K LWpo
wR12
-13V
MEG
_LCII1
1200
HE
RI4
0
El
470K
U
PI°
I5
F.7
VR5
AUX NOR 5' 6
HOLD 4
1501( 50
VR5
HOR
HOla_ 30R-
P'''''--
14
8
- S3
VR6 12.5K 1
2t4.43 WRI
wRvI -
3300
STEPPER MOTOR
r---
.71,71U,73 a 731.1"F PT BLK I L I NE MANUAL
!CHASSIS ONLY
GRN-14111
RED BLUE
cooSt0u05H11O10R O60U06TGPTUA T
WIDTH. 5000
GI- 7W
.111.4 R16
R15
10 PLATE LEAD
15,150 C.P.S.
S4
I
7 --INF
I 8 --H
DAMPER 6AX4GT
HOT
350 IL
-7101.1F
±475V
52
100K
1W
56K 2W
RI3 3.3
FUSE WIRE
8 -0H
7 4F
BLUE YE L
60
1 SI 1 RECT I 5U4GB
2 3
X2 60MCC
RFC
HV RECT IB3GT
TO HV ANODE
MEG
C1752
1-11
GRN FT
2 3
--t4
I
1
'INTERLOCK
74 FUSE = I
SLO-BLO
2 8
Y L 16
46
0J 1
11.7V 60 CYCLES
72 AND 72U "F" LIP71 AUTOMATIC CHASSIS
ONLY
+155V
El -4 4, An 4011F
400V-1--
WR2 IOW 21.11,311
11.9EH48-...
15J1 x3 60MC RFC
1431
1100µF
CABLE
P
CAPACITY
R7 12K
H
YOKE NOR)
23 3
1 072
1
°Y7
20e 10011F -r
I I7V
350V I 350V j_
I0J1
PB :2341
470K
60 CYCLES I INTERLOCK
TO J FOR MANUAL MODELS. TO PIN
8+270V
CIO
.068
Y3
L
NO. 7 ON REMOTE
J
CONTROL SOCKET FOR AUTOMATIC MODELS
+155V SOUND PANEL +270V
108
VOLUME TV -14, MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1958 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
PHILCO Chassis 8L71, -U, 8L72, -U, 8L73, -U, Schematic
.. Pholito
N
OLI6L
T34" BOT ADJ
PANELI;AL PW VIDEO
IL !r - r ,11,1111
li 0
7 P5 /CP P.. :
1ST VIDEO
TOP ADJ 68
I
1/2 6U8
- {.S MC
6
XI
COL
I
-OW 10 131111
LIIL
RFC R3A 330
T6L st YELLOW
75-250 ' R24L
39001.
.022 I(
R161. MEG
RI3LI
:-=:: 3 R2L
' 4700 .1., 2L
7
TC33
,L-
1.0C0L47
611-0 GRN
150
-= -=
L5L 8+155
t5V SIL c5i. OUTPUT
a --6A05
--4vv-3300
CIIL 047
5
RIL
3300 R3L
MEG
L3L
Pt
oCIL 047
P/P* MIA COMAS ti,tt,PC PS
R2IL MEG
Lift
C2A
1.0015
PI
C6L .001 18K
951/-
C 4
S2L
INVERTER 1/2 6U1 9
235 P/Pmihy 15.150 C. PS L R4L
22K 2W22
MEG
L6L SYNC
RIIL
2 v MEG 5%
RI5L 4300 5%
,°-I F AGC -1_16L
TUNER AGC +270V
C9L 470
R17L
220K
R8L 1.5M EG
t41, P.
-5.7501.11
R231_
{470K
L5L
RSL
2.7
MEG
RII3L RI9L LIOL
10 MEG
820K R25L 220K
= RGL L8L
14.7 MEG C4L
R7L 1=.01
2.2 MEG L9L
SWI
5
6 FRINGE
wO NORMAL
I, °STRONG 87 5 6M EG
IZ;-^A'7
2
BR1 RIGHTNE S V
R9
RIO 100K
331(
BOK
CRTS YEL
GRN Floc
(12,1_ BRN
I R4 K T'")
12TC26
PW SOUK) PANEL
42V
Y"
MST SI F 1/2 6878
42V LIMITER
6
1/2 6878
0
2
8
IF O
5
,, I;160 100C84F7
3 52V
C3F R4F ±C2F
470 ???120K"".47
RIF L8F
2
0C0O2F27 L°_
0
S3F
DISCR
6AL5
7
--130
2
4
0 J
R7F
C5F 150
'OK 88F 27K
R3F 27K
150
-I PHON -JACln
0 I
1 1,SV'e
TV PHON0_1
-r
_J
.003
7F
31
IVR3 VOL
4 1.0 I MEG
9K
.022-013
-I (-41
-1ST AUD 6AVA
6FCIF
0I
.01
Rif)
MEG
L F
LI IF
110 7
6
.0047
RIIF 4470
K
7
SIF AUDIO
OUTPUT
RIOF 6A05 220K
2000 5
C4F
.01
1000V
2405
ISO X
R2F 680
I W
L2F0
LIOF
LIF 0
BLUE E2-3 30 LIF
25V,-
47011 PRL
.RED El 2
AA
PHONO- ADAPTER USED ON
8L72,72U,73 973U
SPEAKER
G2F
1E0 I294V
12W =350
Composite video, 2nd detector output (LIS on I.F panel), 5.0 volts, 15,750 c.p.s.; composite video, video output, pin 5 of 6AQ5 (Sa). 160 volts. 15,750 c.p.a.
Phase compare, cathode, pm 8 of 12BR7 (S2E), 8 volts, 15,750 c.p.s.
Horizontal oscillator place, pin 1 of I2AU7A (545). 60 volts, 15750 c.p.s.
Horizontal oscillator plate. pin 6 of
12AU7A (S4E), 165 volts, 15,750 cp.s.
Horizontal output plate, loosely coupled to lead, 15,750 c.p.s.
NOTES ALL CAPACITOR VALUES GREATEN THAN I ARE IN MMF UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED.' ALL CAPACITOR VALUES LESS THAN I ARE IN MFD UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. ALL RESISTORS ARE 1/2 WATT 10% CARSON UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. ARROW THROUGH CONTROL INRICATES CW ROTATION. INDICATES A RESISTANCE OF LESS THAN I OHM.
RUN CHANGE INFORMATION
CHASSIS RUN 2 To reduce overloading and to eliminate sync buzz. R17, tuner A.G.C. delay (fringe switch) resistor, changes in value to
7.5 megohms, part number 66-5758340.
CHASSIS RUN 3 To center Vertical Hold control and improve vertical hold circuit.
VR4, the vertical hold control was changed from 3 megohms to
2 megohms, part number 33-5573-42.
SWEEP OSCILLATOR PRINTED WIRING PANEL, RUN 2
To improve vertical oscillator hold circuit.
The following resistors were changed in value:
R4E Resistor, sync. sep. plate, 120,000 ohms R8E Resistor, vent. sync. divider, 8200 ohms
66-4128340 66-2828340
R16E Resistor, vert. os. grid. 2.2 megohms, 5%. _66-5228240
Schematic Diagram for Chassis 8L71, 8L71 U, 8L72, 8L72U, 8L73, and 8L73U
Ri
IMAM 15.01W
5101)11
si
Miff
55110
UMEL1OT M NAn GOITER
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM OF REMOTE CONTROL ASSY MODEL RC -50
Schematic Diagram of Remote Control Asembly Model RC -30
109
VOLUME TV -14, MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1958 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
PHILCO
Via
OUT 44.4 MC
LIS
TIS
3V.LF.a
VI6D.AD8ET. S1S
Chassis 8L71, -U, 8L72, -U, 8L73, -U, Continued
4 2.7 MC T2S
2 V.I.E 6DE6 S2S
45.0MC T3S
IV.I.F 6DE6 S3S
47.4 MC 42.7 MC TRAP
VCIS VC2S
XIS CIS
R2S C2 S R5S
C7S
C3S R 3S
I X 3S I C4S
X5S 4
CC4__AD .0C)
54-.-.G6S
< LINKR
GND.
X2S
C85 R4S C9S R 6S RIOS C5S
Ham' Layout Video I -F
Printed hiring Panel
L3S 140V.
L2L LI L TO CONTRAST FILAMENT CONTROL
L3L VIDEO OUTPUT
BIAS
R3L
CIL RIL
/ / Do
CIOS C 6 S R 7S
C11S R9S X6S I X4S I X7S XE/S
L4S FIL.
S2L 6U8 1ST VIDEO AND INV
T L
R2L
L5S A.G.C.
L5L B+140V DC
L6L
SYNC OUTPUT
C2L
R4L /C3L
VC3S 41.25 MC
TRAP
VC4S 47.4 MC
TRAP
L8L
L9L
TO RANGE TUNER
SWITCH BIAS
C4L/R5L R7L R8L
L2S FROM
TUNER
SIL 6AQ5
VIDEO
OUT
WRIL
RI2L S3L
T4 L
R2IL R9L CIIL
S 4F
6BY8
G4F aSILFIM
CIOF
R9F
C8F R4 F C3F
R6L LIOL
\
TO RANGE SWITCH
IlL
19L
R25L
LI IL IF INPUT
"i___
C9L L
C6L
RI3L
L RI5L R16L \CBL
LI3L
LI4L
LI5L
TO CRT B+270V DC SOUND
L 6L RIOL
6L
IF BIAS
GRID
TAKEOFF
R23L R24L RI7L
Video Printed Wiring Panel
G2F
S3 F
6AL5
TO AUDIO OUTPUT TRANS
LIIF IF BIAS
C7F TIF R7F SOUND DET C5F R6F
RIIF C9F RIOF
G3F
U
SIF
6A05
UDIO OUT
LIOF 13+270V DC
R2F
SOUND INPUT1NPUTIL-1
B+L81F 40V DCrj
GI F
/DOV491'
RIF C6F C2F R8F L7F
L6F R3F CIF R5F L5F
L4F
TO VOL TO VOL
FILAMENT TUNER
CONTROL CONTROL
Sound Printed Wiring Panel
TOP
ARM
BIAS
S2F 6AV6
1ST AUDIO
C4F
L2F SND OUTPUT
CATHODE
L IF TO AUDIO OUTPUT
TRANS
110
VOLUME TV - 14 , MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1958 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
PHILCO
8H25 and 8H25U CHASSIS
Model No.
F3042G UF3042G F3042F UF3042F F3044A UF3044A F3202C UF3202C F3204M UF3204M F3204L UF3204L F3204B UF3204B
Chassis
8H25 8H25U
8H25 8H25U
8H25 8H25U
8H25
81-125U
8H25 8H25U
8H25 8H25U
8H25 8H25U
(Material on pages 111 through 116)
Tuner No.
(T -66A) 76-11548-1 (T -69F) 76-11547-4 (T -66A) 76-11548-1 (T -69F) 76-11547-4 (T -66A) 76-11548-1 (T -69F) 76-11547-4 (T -66A) 76-11548-1 (T -69F) 76-11547-4 (7-66A) 76-11548-1 (T -69F) 76-11547-4 (7-66A) 76-11548-1 (T -69F) 76-11547-4 (7-66A) 76-11548-1 (T -69F) 76-11547-4
Picturo Tub* 17BWP4 17BW74 17BW.,4 17BW '4
1713W 34
17BW4 17BW,4 17E/.04 I7BW'4 I7BW'4
1713W,4 17BW'4 1713\4.04 17BW,4
RECEIVER SET-UP CONTROL LOCATIONS (Refer to Base View, figure 19)
1. Vertical Linearity - Adjust with a thin screwdriver through the hollow brightness shaft.
2. Height - Adjust with a thin screwdriver through the hollow vertical hold shaft.
3. Horizontal Hold Centering - Remove cabinet back (7 screws, 4 at top and 3 at bottom). Control is between vertical and horizontal hold controls.
4. Width - Remove back. Width switch is at lower right, just under the AC interlock.
5. Fusible B+ resistor - Remove back. Resistor is a pllug-in at lower left corner of chassis.
6. Tubes - All tubes (except CRT) are accessible after removing back. 1G3GT high voltage rectifier is in cage.
HORIZONTAL OSCILLATOR ADJUSTMENT
Allow set to warm up. Tune in a picture.
1. Short out the horizontal ringing coil, T5D, by placing a jumper across terminals 1 and 3.
2. Set the horizontal hold control, VR3, to the center of its
range.
3. Adjust the horizontal hold centering control, VR4, to set the oscillator to the correct horizontal line frequency (to stop the picture; it will not be stable).
4. Remove the shorting jumper from across TSD and adjust the ringing coil core for stable picture sync.
2ND DET. C2
OUTPUT LI X2 61
C1
SIC 5AM8 3RD V.I.F. a VID. DET.
NP
R4L2
S2C 3 BE6
S3C
38i`6
G2VCI VPOCLE2me. 2ND V.I.F.
C4 C5
1ST V. LE
1STG RID TRAP40
T3
FIL.OUT.C6 L3
R3
X4
CT X3
05
X5
C11 T1
C12 1 R6 L5
140V Bi-
L6
R11 C13 C14J AGC
C8
R7 G6
C9 R5
I R9 I CIO RIO VC3 X7 VC4 X8 R8 L7 C15 X6 TRAP TRAP
41.25 M.C. 47 40M.C.
NOTE. To all symbol Nos. add suffix "C" ( this panel only).
Figure 15. Base Layout of Video 1-F Printed Wiring Panel
G7 L4
IF INPUT
111
VOLUME TV -14, MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1958 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
PHILCO Chassis 8H25 and 8H25U Schematic Diagram
Figure 20. Schematic Diagram for Chassis 8H25 and 8H25U
.,111D
r
I VIDEO I.F. PANEL
125 0
T3 RD
45.75 M.C.
I I5V
RD125V T2 42.7M.C
TOiR 43 85MC.
LIC
3 4
3 4
NOTE TO ALL SYMBOL NOS. ON THIS PANEL, ADD THE SUFFIX "C7
S3
3BZ6 < rA
1ST VIF
5
R5
27K
S2
3BZ6 2ND VIF
5
Si
1/2 5AM8 3RD VIF
6
r,
1/2 5AM8
BN
22
VID DET
,UH X2
TRAP TRAP TRAP X4
47.40 47.40 41.25 013-(31-
130 V
2
I
120V
9
3 4
,
VT
B
L4C0
X3 I ". Cr O '.8.rt 4C
X7
>,"
X8 o
r0
411 VC1
1-5
RD-BK
G
# X6
.5-3
VC4
VC3 015
1000 GMV1-
C7
3.3
-vc2
L7C
6
IC
CV
N
2
680 -r -
RIO
010
.5V
-=
R9
330
47T140750
R3 C6
C9
T1-1000
GMV
R8
1000
R2
68
RI2A ( PART OF CHASSIS WIRING)
2.2K
L6C
6
6C184 07
5V C4
175.
C13
R1
=
15K
1
680
IK
C2
R4
R7
1.6 V
10 00
R6 I_1000
IS&
220
R11
330
T GMV
=
_I CGB P %IV = 8+ 140V
1000 GMV
IMM
3 X5
,IC11
ILo5C I I
_J
X2A
---- 140V
RFC
,000C.111
IF AGC
I TUNER AGC 104 3.3 22 MEG
R2A
=
WR1A
(8H25U) 5.6K 7W
(8H251 1E03-012M) FI+
12K 2W
200V = I 0
cD
ev I 820K
Neg R7
C6
0
22
00
_I
TUNER AGC
L 15 0
r--- - - - - - - -I VERT INTEGRATOR 30-6030-3
I
33K -00(5------~A9^0AKnne
S2
1/2 IODE7 VERT OSC
100V
1.8 MEG
vvs.
R9
275 V
.004
1
6
.068
1/2 IODE7
1 S2
----J II---I-1(5-0
-
33K
--
0
N4 I
7
4
= KisVoo
R
VERT OUT
C7 1(
2
8
9
--='-
-1SEL DIODE
21 V
RI -NAN
5K
R2
3 150K
N3
e's-2223030K
150CC1)
30-6509-2
I vERT FEED BACK
1.8 MEG R2
38V
0
0
2
L_Tli_j DI
= VR5 30K
VERTOLD
H
L.C.
INTERLOCK
117V AC607E
7
OFF -ON SW 0 ON REAR OF VOL CONTROL
3
82 200
S3
6CG7
,5,7
HOR OSC
I0015
00V
RIB
680K
1
220K 5
4.7 MEG
1.4C79 I _c1() 37V = SM
100K N5
30-6016-2
1
GMV R10
=
IK
PHASE COMP
1=111111111111
HOR RING COIL
T5
0 IRO
.0047
C11
L2OD 270V
0
I NI
10K 08
390
S M
R2
N2
44
K
C 291
.0015
_2
6
170V
C3
560
033
cr R3 3.9K
-14V 7 R3 47K
7V 8 S3
4 30-6512-1
HOR OSC
L8D
JAI)
L7D
= HOR. HOLD CENT.
L30D 0
I
WR3
+
1-120064 FUSIBLE
14OMF
I2AX4 8 7 2 7 WR2
5.6(1 RESISTOR E2 )(4150V AC
F.C.
IHY RD
E1(2)
= 20 MF 300V
xi
RFC
fL
C2
64 680
A.0
L2C SIC
5AM8 54
xic
41a
. - 20W
C12
RFC
.ImF
GREEN
C13 I
GRAY ,,I000
(UHF ONLY)
300 MA 1+
GERMANIUM I
14OMF
2 RECTIFIERS I
300V
-= 21(4)
8+280V +
_ a Fun 300VlOOMF
s317BWP4 r -1 52c
3BZ6 3826 CRT 4 34 3 3 4
12CA5 43
S4 D
3AU6 43
520
IODE7 54
LI1D
BN-51GR
1.
L3C
BRN. BLX .
o L24D 4 3
-7470 38N6
54 6AW8A
T15CI0C0
C3E000_-rL1c050c0
=-
-=
53A.CV. 47V A.C.I
S5D
SID
PARTOFCHASSSI WIRING
ACRROOSSSS L24D TO G62.1
5 4 (TO TUNER)
6CG7
7.2 VAC FOR
S3
8H25
9.6 VAC FOR 8H25U
VIF PANEL
!VIDEO, OSC SOUND PANEL
31 L._ 250K VR4
S2
120064 HOR OUT
30K VR3 3 V HOR
2 HOLD
5 49V
8
4
190V
RI1
2.2K
R12
68K
107
IW
4.7W Re
W
100K
RIO
68K
R9
WIDTH SWITCH
112
VOLUME TV -14, MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1958 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
PHILCO Chassis 8H25 and 8H25U Schematic Diagram
-1 7 )SC, SOUND PANEL
5
612;5 MEG
CONTROL FRAME
SYMBOL NOS. ON THIS PANEL,
L IE SUFFIX "W'
I VO4L
75V
4 INTERSTAGE
0L29
S6
L23
I = CONT
- S4
3A U6 SIF
5
t. 2
6
ev
L
3 T7
75V
S5
3BN6 SOUND DISC
7 6
2
5 TB
0
4 r
519
C
geo .008 GMV
C1108c01
12CA5 AUD OUT
R2 3
470K
7
>
0
6
t2
6
L I9D
C14
5 ---.008
eov
GMV
VR1
BLUE
In
T .0047
6
(C12, ) C17
6M V 002
C13
.001 GM V
VR I - 0 2 6n I0n I
BUZZ
600
Z i N6
2
I 0V
R22
<I MEG'
820K
I R17
RED
/ 68
(1_1
4710- 4-
180
R16
15K
R19
Tool I
3.9K
___I I W
30-6511-2
I
.2-I I
MEG 1
B+ 140V
AUDIO
I
1/2S6lAW8A
SYNC SYNC SEP
30-6510-3
75V 3
72- -1
2
10K
3
150K
12 4.5 MC
TRAP
4111.
1441) 2 .033
68
C5
Si
1/2 6AW8A VID OUT
9 168V
_- 8
.047
I(
C2
0 0
L 13DI
B+ 280V
_co !.
to
O VEL.
er
LID
2
6
\
I
i 17BWP41 I
I
R8 180K
5
-\ \
R3
80K
RI MEG
C2
5
180 I
CI
.008
I(
0
,C6
cr T4
Zo0.470gH 13.11 CD
680K
R5
I.75V 6
Ct
T R4
68
.0039
'0%
13
700 3n
BN RD
R7
6.8K
Iz
O L2D
RI5 3.9K
R20 100K
R13
1.0 MEG
R14
R3
I 8MEG
0 L9D
CONTRAST 2 MEG
RIA
2
15 MEG
L2ID
R3A 1.8 MEG
I MEG
UHF ONLY
Ii122
RT LIN
RETRACE
Ni 30-6024-I
liK
R6
5 1000
2W
OMF 30V
SUPPRESSION
I 11.0"05--110(K-
I
.002
3
I I
IMEG-4__-_°_-I 3=-
3
2
GT 1ECT
14 KV
R12
120K
RII
4.7K -=
.111=1=1. ,II11=1.0k
I680V
LI 6D
BL
V.O.T.
R5 g-,
39K o
RD 'GR
.033
C5
45_4 H2E.5IGMHEGT
4
R14 IK
815 I IK
1115;
VERT' YOKE!
HV
14KV
2
250K
BRIGHT
VR2
82
330K
5.6K
7W
WR I
0 of
C
C "C
2
3
SI
12AX4G-ra DAMPER
I + 280V 00V
E3 (I 1
IOMF
450V
8H25 Chassis Runs
Run 2-Changed Vert. Hold control ( VR5) from 20,000 ohms to 30,000 ohms, Part number 33-5592-22. To increase range of vert. hold control.
Run 3-Changed V -I -F panel to Run 2, (Red Dot) which see. Removed tuner B+ choke, X2A, from B6-1 to B6-3. Moved red wire from B6-3 to B6-1. Added C9A, V -I -F B+ de -coupling, .001 mfd, disk, part number 30-1238-3. C9A wires from L5C (B+ lug on V -I -F panel) to nearest panel mounting hold tab of chassis. Wiring panel B6 changed to a two lug panel. To reduce channel 8 beat.
Run 4-Added a heat shield around the 12DQ6A, horizontal
output tube, to improve heat convection away from V.O.S. panel. Part number of heat shield is 28-12227. To minimize sync and sweep oscillator drift.
113
NOTES: All capacitor values greater -hen I are in
MMF unless otherwise noted. All capacitor values less than I are in
MFD unless otherwise noted All resistors are 1/2 watt, 10%, carbon
unless otherwise noted. Arrow through control indicates clockwise rotation. Voltages are DC from point shown to
chassis unless otherwise noted. Voltages were read using a :0,000 ohms/
volt meter. Voltages were taken with no signal. The receiver was adEusted for a good quality picture; i.e., normal contrast, brightness, width, height, vertical lin. and sound, picture in sync, then
removed signal.
Indicates a voltage dependent upon sig-
nal.
VOLUME TV -14, MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1958 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION PHILCO Chassis 81125 and 8H25U Service Information (Continued)
VIDEO I -F ALIGNMENT
AM ALIGNMENT
CHANNEL SELECTOR: Set tuner to channel 4 position. SIGNAL INJECTION: To tuner feed-thru, L2, in mixer grid
circuit. BIAS: -4.5 volts to I -F A -G -C, L17D, on V.O.S. panel. SCOPE: Connect to L18D on V.O.S. panel, video second de-
tector output. OUTPUT LEVEL: Not to exceed 2.0 volts peak -to -peak during
pole and sweep alignment. Not less than .2 volts peak -to peak as null, during trap alignment, is approached. (1) Adjust tuner pole, Ti, for maximum at 47.4 MC. This is a temporary setting for trap alignment. (2) Adjust trap VC3C for minimum at 41.25 MC. * (3) Adjust traps VC2C and VC4C for minimum at 47.4 MC. * (4) Repeat steps 2 and 3. Bias may be reduced as trap minimum is approached. (5) Adjust tuner pole, T1, for maximum at 45.0 MC. (6) Adjust VC1C and T2C for maximum at 42.7 MC. (7) Adjust T3C for maximum at 45.75 MC. (8) Adjust TIS for maximum at 43.85 MC.
These traps are sharp. During adjustment, the generator output frequency may change with generator attenuator
setting. This must be compensated for at the generator.
SWEEP ALIGNMENT
SIGNAL INJECTION: To antenna terminals through an antenna matching network (generator to 300 ohms.)
CHANNEL SELECTOR, BIAS, SCOPE and OUTPUT LEVEL: Same as above under AM alignment.
(1)
Inject 65.75 MC, AM, 30% modulated signal, into antenna. Adjust fine tuning control for minimum output. Do Not
Disturb fine tuning during balance of I -F adjustments.
(2) Inject channel 4 sweep signal (69 MC with 6 MC sweep width) into antenna. If necessary, adjust the following poles to bring the curve within limits (See curve, figure 2).
a. Tuner I -F pole, T1, to set carrier level.
b. TIC, 3rd V -I -F pole, to adjust curve tilt.
c. T2C, 2nd V -I -F pole, and VC1C, 1st grid pole, to adjust 42.7 MC (sound side) slope.
d. T3C, 1st V -I -F pole, to adjust carrier level.
4.5 MC TRAP ALIGNMENT
Inject 4.5 MC AM signal into Ll8D or use station signal. Connect 4.5 MC detector (see circuit, figure 1) to LID (pin 2 of CRT). NOTE: Preliminary padding of 4.5 MC test detector Connect detector to an accurate source of 4.5 MC signal and pad core of transformer for maximum DC output voltage. NOTE: When using generator, calibrate by zero beating with sound I -F developed from station signal.
(3) Connect 20,000 ohms/volt meter, set to 2.5 volt range, to detector output.
(4) Turn contrast control fully clockwise (to maximum). (5) Adjust 4.5 MC trap. (T2D) for minimum indication.
L2MMF CI
INPUT
-TI
1N60
4.75
C3 .001
MFD
OUTPUT TO
METER
PART NUMBERS
Cl C2 C3 RI TI XTAL
30-1221-21
PART Of T1 30-1239-3 86-2418340
32-4449 34-8022-2
Figure I. 4.5 mc. Detector Tube
SOUND I -F ALIGNMENT NOTE: The sound I -F alignment is based upon a properly aligned video I -F strip.
1. With a weak station signal (antenna disconnected) tune receiver for best possible picture. Do not readjust fine tuning control during balance of procedure.
2. Set buzz control, VR1D, to the center of its range,
3. With a strong signal (antenna connected) adjust the quadrature coil, T8D, for maximum sound. See Note 1 below.
4. With a weak signal (antenna disconnected) adjust the sound take -off coil, T6D, and the sound interstage transformer, T7D (both pri. and sec. cores), for maximum sound.
5. With a weak signal, back off on the contrast control. Adjust the buzz control, VR1D, for minimum buzz and noise. See Note 2 below.
6. Reset the contrast control. With a weak signal, touch-up T6D (sound take -off) and T7D (sound interstage) for maximum. See Note 3 below.
7. With a strong signal (antenna connected) adjust the quadrature coil, T8D, for maximum sound. See Note 1 below.
NOTE 1:
The quadrature coil, T8D, will peak at two points. The correct peak is the first peak reached as the core is backed out from the full in position. If this coil is misadjusted weak and distorted output will result and the other coils will not tune properly.
NOTE 2: The buzz control, VR1D, sets the operating point of the 3BN6 midway between saturation and cut-off. This enables the tube to provide proper limiting action. If this control is misadjusted, excessive buzz or noise will result.
NOTE 3: Misadjustment of the sound take -off, T6D, and the sound interstage, T7D, will cause either weak sound or an excessively high noise level, or both.
TUNER OSCILLATOR ALIGNMENT
AM GENERATOR: Connect to receiver antenna -input terminals (no matching network is required). Use 30% modulated signal.
PRE-SET: Fine tuning control to middle of its range. OSCILLOSCOPE: Connect to L 18D, video detector output,
on V.O.S. panel. NOTE: This procedure uses the traps of the video I -F channel. Proper oscillator adjustment is therefore dependent upon an accurately aligned I -F strip.
STEP
AM. GEN. FREQ.
TUNER POSITION
ADJUST FOR MIN.
1
209.75 mc
Channel 13
T5
2
203.75 mc
Channel 12
TC6
3
197.75 mc
Channel 11
TC5
4
191.75 mc
Channel 10
TC4
5
185.75 mc
Channel 9
TC3
6
179.75 mc
Channel 8
TC2
7
173.75 mc
Channel. 7
TC1
8
81.75 mc
Channel 6
T10
9
75.75 mc
Channel 5
T9
10
65.75 mc
Channel 4
T8
11
59.75 mc
Channel 3
T7
12
53.75 mc
Channel 2
T6
CH.4 R.F.
IN M.G.
71
70
89
68
67
100
80
0
60
42 .7
M. C.
2 40
4
w - 20
CC
041
42
43
1.F. IN M.C.
43.85 N.C.
44
45.0
M.C.
45
45.7'5 M.C.
46
47
Figure 2. Overall R -F I -F Response Curve
114
SID 6AW8A
VIDEO AMP. 8 SYNC. SEP
S2D
IODE7 VERT OSC. a OUT.
62 L9
U4
LI6 LI L2 L3
L4
LIO LI2 L5 L6 L7 GI
L8
63
R6 C5 NI
T3 R7
R2
iC4
DI
R3 / N2
R4
R5 T2
RI I
LI3
LI5
00 [
II
S30
7 HOR. OSC.
-c9
CIO
tl
N5
LI8 RI4
T5
L20
T4
L2I
R20 1/1"
CI5
CIS T6 R 5 RI6
S4D 3AU6
S.I.F.
R2I T7 CI3
I CI9 CI8 T8
G4
S
38N6 SOUND DET.
N6
R23
L23 L22 G7
L24
S6D I2CA5
AUDIO OUTPUT
C14
R22
L19
NOTES: TO AU.. COMPONENT
SYMBOLIkoems ADO THE
SUFFIX -0; THIS PANEL ONLY
SYMBOL T1D OMITTED.
"Ge INDICATES A GROUND CONNECTION.
G6
SEE TABLE BELOW FOR TIE LUG IDENTIFICATION.
TERMINAL LUG IDENTIFICATION V.O.S. PANEL
LID Video output to CRT cathode, yellow lead. L2D Lead to arm of Brightness control, VR2-2. L3D Lead to arm of Height control, VR5-5. L4D Not used. LSD Lead to top of vert. hold control, VR5-3. L6D Lead to B4-5, vertical osc. cathode by-pass
(C6) and fixed bias (R7). L7D Shielded lead to top of Hor. hold centering
L8D WH1o1r1iz10o1n.tValR.1o-3s. cillator output to grid of
12DQ6A, pin 5 of S2. L9D Lead to bottom of contrast control, VR1-1,
from sync network. L1OD Vertical sweep output to blue lead of V.O.T. L1113 Filament output to tuner.
L12D Vertical output cathode to top of vert. lin. control, VR2-6, and cathode by-pass, E3(3).
113D 275V B+ L14D 140V 13+
L 15D Tuner A -G -C output.
Ll6D
1,17D
Ll8D L19D
L2OD L21D L22D
L23D L2413
To WRI, video amp. plate resistor, at B2-3. 1-F A -G -C and to R3 at B2-6. Video output from I -F panel. Audio output plate to blue lead of A.O.T. De -coupled B+ to hor. osc. Lead to top of contrast control, VR1-3. Lead from arm of volume control, VR1.5. Lead to top of volume control, VR1-6 Filament input and Cl 1, filament by-pass.
Figure 14. Bale Layout of Video -Oscillator -Sound Printed Wiring Panel
I
VR5
VERT. HOLD HEIGHT
VR4
NOR. HOLD CENT.
VR3
NOR. HOLD
1'
V.H.F. TUNER -1.1 T -66A /T -69F I
T-VCI T -L1
DAMPER
VR3 33-5593-14
33 -5593 -IS VR4
VR5 33559222
yC G5C WU/44
SAME
3rd I. F. 8 DET
m..4> GSC
CD ,7,rc
3AU6
roa?
YOKE & LEAD
ASS' Y. 76 -10282-1
178WP4
L2
FOCUS ANODE LEAD
SOUND DET.
PV R1 33-5592 -IS OFF -ON VOL. a
CONTRAST
SLAW/1/1
VIDEO
SYNC. SEP.
VR2
BRIGHT B VERT.
.1444,
A
T -S2
2CY5 R R AMR T -T2
T -B1
T -C12
T-CI3
I Till IA A 3 LUG PIAEL IN VAAL YODEL USING ONLY T -C10 T-CII )
OMITTED T1D
12CA* AUDIO
OUT.
UHF. TUNER T -27B
0
UT -C7
B8 (INSERT
INTO
87) 2
C13.34 II 119
IN LIM =EL
8? ONLY.
UT-VC1
9*
2 I038 REPLACES IN IN VOW MODE
Figue 19. 8H25U - Top Wiring View
L190 T5D
L120
7 D
N30 ID R1OD
soS3D
C9
LISD
100E7 VERT. OSC. VERT. OUT
H.O.T.
120064
FIOR. OUT.
SWI (WIDTH)
r
CHECKING THE HORIZONTAL PHASE COMPARER SELENIUM DIODE (DI D ON V.O.S. PANEL)
When servicing television receivers where the dual selenium diode phase comparer is suspected, a fast and efficient method of checking them is this:-
A 20,000 ohm/volt meter is employed. On the 10K scale the forward resistance (meter connected in the same polarity as the diode) should be
a maximum of 6000 ohms. The ratio of the forward resistances of the two diodes should be less than 2 to 1. On the 100K scale the back resistance (meter connected in reverse polarity to the diode) should be a minimum of
2 megohms.
The center conductor of the phase comparer unit is the common
negative.
VOLUME TV -14, MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1958 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
RCAVICTOR
CONTRAST ON -OFF VOLUME VHF FINE TUNING VHF CHANNEL SELECTOR 3 UHF SWITCH
UHF TUNING (UHF -VHF MODELS ON..Y) HORIZONTAL HOLC BRIGHTNESS VERTICAL HOLD
Figure I-Operating Controls Portable and Table Models
CENTERING ADJUSTMENT
The electrostatic focus kinescope is provided with special centering magnets. These magnets are in the form of two discs mounted on the back of the deflection yoke. When the magnets are rotated on the tube so that the levers are together, maximum centering effect is produced. To shift the picture, rotate one of the magnets with respect to the other. To shift the picture in the desired direction
on the neck of the kinescope. By alternately rotating one magnet with respect to the other, then rotating both simultaneously around the neck of the tube, proper centering of the picture can be obtained.
DEFLECTION YOKE ADJUSTMENT
If the lines of the raster are not horizontal or squared with the picture mask, rotate the deflection yoke until this condition is obtained. The yoke clamp must be loosened to allow the yoke to be rotated, see Figure 3. Make sure the yoke assembly is pushed forward against the kinescope
bell.
CENTERING LEVER
YOKE CLAMP (LOOSEN TO POSITION YOKE)
KINESCOPE
KINESCOPE SOCKET
CENTERING LEVER
YOKE ASSEMBLY
POSITION YOKE AS FAR FORWARD
AGAINST BELL AS POSSIBLE
Figure 5-Yoke and Centering Magnet Adjustments
MODELS 21 -PD -8115(U) 21 -T -8221(U), 21 -T -8222(U), 21 -T -8225(U),
21 -T -8226(U), 21-T-8227,
21 -T -8245(U), 21 -T -8246(U) 21 -T -8247(U), 21 -T -8475(U) 21 -T -8477(U), 21 -T -8478(U)
Chassis Nos. KCS107A, KCS107B, KCS107C or KCS107D
FOCUS
An electrostatic focus type kinescope is employed in these receivers. The receivers operate with fixed focus, having a fixed voltage applied to the focusing electrode.
VHF R -F OSCILLATOR ADJUSTMENTS
Tune in all available stations to insure the receiver r -f oscillator is properly adjusted on all channels. Correct adjustment will be indicated by the ability to tune the fine tuning control on each channel from a condition where sound bars appear at or near one extreme, through proper picture and sound to the other extreme where the picture will appear smeared with poor definition.
If adjustment is indicated on any channel, after the adjustment has been made all channels lower in frequency should be rechecked for proper oscillator range Always proceed with adjustment from the highest frequency channel to the lowest.
Adjustments for channels 2 through 12 are available through the holes on the front of the tuner and are accessible on portable and table models when the channel selector and fine tuning knobs are removed.
Oscillator adjustments on the corner console models are accessible from inside the cabinet. A short, thin screwdriver must be used to make adjustments on some channels.
CHANNEL SELECTOR
KNOB
FINE TUNING
KNOB
SAFETY GUARD
C3
RETAINING SCREW
NSUL AT ING DISC
L
REMOVE KNOBS BY PULLING OUTWARD OFF SHAFT -REMOVE SCREWS HOLDING PLASTIC GUARD -LIFT OUT SAFETY GUARD AND REMOVE INSULATING DISC.
OSCILLATOR CJUSTMENT CHANNEL NUMBER
Figure 7-VHF Oscillator Adjustments
117
VOLUME TV -14, MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1958 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
RCA VICTOR
WIDTH ADJUSTMENT
The width adjustment is located on the chassis rear.
The width of the picture should be adjusted to fill the mask with a line voltage of 105V. With normal voltage of 117V, the picture should overscan the tube at each side by approximately 1/4 inch. The adjustment should be made with the brightness control set at normal operating position.
KINESCOPE AND SAFETY WINDOW CLEANING
The front safety window may be removed to allow for cleaning of the kinescope faceplate and the safety window if required.
In portable and swivel table models, remove two screws from under the front edge of the cabinet. Pull out at the bottom and lift off the bezel. Refer to Figure 8. Take out six spring clips and remove safety window.
The kinescope faceplate and safety window should be cleaned with a soft cloth and water only.
Replace the window and bezel and replace the two
bottom screws.
Models 21 -T -8475(U), 21 -T -8477(U) and 21-T-8478(U)These models have a -11- shaped channel in front of the top edge of the safety glass and also at the bottom edge.
Pry off the top and bottom channels starting at the extreme ends.
Insert the blade of a small screwdriver in one of the vertical slots in the middle of a retainer at the top of the safety glass. Slide the bar to the right to release the re-
tainer. Refer to Figure 9.
The bottom retainers are removed in a similar manner except the slide bar is moved to the left.
pm 121.1!: AT
21 -PD -8115(U) 21 -T -8245(U) to 21 -T -8478(U) IncL
CHASSIS REMOVAL
CORNER CONSOLE MODELS-To remove the chassis from the cabinet, remove the cabinet back and the control knobs. Unplug the antenna cable, the tuner power plug, the kinescope socket and the speaker cable. Loosen the yoke clamp. To remove the volume control assembly, remove one screw accessible through the side of the cabinet and lift off the assembly. Remove two screws at the bottom of the chassis and two nuts at the top. Disconnect the H.V. anode lead and remove the chassis together with the deflection yoke.
-iiNIMMEmilimarj
(j) L._=.__01
I
0 PRY TOP CHANNEL DOW
F RETAINERS
0 LIFT CHANNEL OFF BOTTOM RETAINERS
0 SLIDE BAR TO THE RIGHT AND REMOVE TOP RETAINERS
0 REMOVE BOTTOM RETAINERS AND SAFETY GLASS
---
Figure 9-Safety Glass Removal Horizontal Drive Adjustment.- Turn the horizontal hold control until the picture falls out of sync with the diagonal lines sloping down to the left. Slowly turn the horizontal control counter -clockwise and note the number of diagonal bars obtained just before the picture pulls into sync. Pull -in should occur with one and one-half to three bars present. Set the width control fully counter -clockwise. With the horizontal control set at the pull -in point, adjust the horizontal drive trimmer C109 counter -clockwise for a bright vertical line in the center of the picture. Turn the trimmer clockwise until the line just disappears. If no line appears set the drive trimmer fully counter -clockwise. Set the brightness control to normal and adjust the width control so the picture overscans the mask 1/4- at each side with normal line voltage (I17V. AC). Readjust the horizontal drive trimmer as above.
Figure 8-Safety Window and Chassis Removal
CHASSIS REMOVAL
PORTABLE AND TABLE MODELS-To remove the chassis
from the cabinet, remove the cabinet back, the control knobs and the plastic guard. Unplug the antenna cable, the kinescope socket and the speaker cable. Loosen the yoke clamp. Remove two chassis screws on the bottom of the cabinet and the two screws at the rear edge of the cabinet. Refer to Figure 8. Disconnect the H.V. anode lead and remove the chassis together with the deflection yoke.
118
SOT TOW
Dial Cord Diagram
VOLUME TV -14, MOST-OFTEN-NEEDED 1958 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
RCA VICTOR
CHASSIS FRONT VIEW
21 -PD -8115(U) 21 -T -8245(U) to 21 -T -8478(U) Incl.
1303
T302
T301
L301
3RD PIK I -F TRANS
V303
2ND PIK 1ST PIK -F TRANS. I -F TRANS
1ST I -F GRID COIL
3CB6
3RD PIX F I
PW300 PRINTED WIRING
V302 5C86
2ND PIK I -F
V301 '3CF6 1ST PIK ,__,/
L302 4? 25MC
PICTURE 14- ASSEMBLY
TRAP
PW200 PRINTED WIRING SOUND B VIDEO ASSEMBLY
V204 6AWBA
VIDEO AMP a 1ST SYNC
(D.112504 TRAP
T201
SOUND TAKE -OFF
TRANS
T202 SOUND
DRIVER TRANS
7203
SOUND DET TRANS
V203
SASS
3076
AUDIO
SOU(N.D726D1\E\T
OUTPUT
13 1ST AUDIO
L104 FILTER CHOKE
T102 VERT OUTPUT
TRANS
RDI6 VERTICAL LINEARITY
VHF TUNER (ALL MODELS)
JI03
TUNER POWER PLUG
-rt
4CS 107C B D ONLY)
UHF TUNER (UHF/VHF MODELS ONLY)
VHF CHANNEL SELECTOR
314\
VHF FNE TUNING
UHF TUNING
PW500 PRINTED WIRING VERTICAL B SYNC OUTPUT ASSEMBLY
V502 SCUD VERT OUT
PW600 PRINTED WIRING HOR. OSC ASSEMBLY
1601 SINE WAVE
0COIL
V601 6CGT HORIZ OSC
1102 WIDTH COIL
V102 12006A MORIZ. OUTPUT
V104 I9AU4 DAMPER
VI03'
102E1 I H.V RECT.
Chassis Front View
SEQUENCE OF SERIES CONNECTED HEATERS
c=1.7 -y"
QO
k
/
119
VOLUME TV -14, MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1958 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
RCA VICTOR
ALIGNMENT PROCEDURE
21 -PD -8115(U)
21 -T -8245(U) to 21 -T -8478(U) Incl.
PICTURE I -F TRANSFORMER AND TRAP ADJUSTMENTS
TEST EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS:
BIAS SUPPLY
Apply -4 volts to I -F AGC bus at terminal 1- of PW300. Ground positive lead to chassis.
SIGNAL GENERATOR
Connect to mixer grid at strap on S1B, in series with 1500 mmf. capacitor. (See below.)
VACUUM TUBE VOLTMETER Connect to 2nd Detector output at terminal "Cel- of PW200 using direct probe. Ground lead connected to chassis.
STEP
SIGNAL GENERATOR
ADJUST
REMARKS
Peak 3rd pix. I -F
1
transformer
2
Peak 2nd pix. I -F transformer
3
Peak 1st pix. I -F transformer
44.5 mc. 45.5 mc. 43.0 mc.
T303
Peak T303, T302 and T301 on fre-
T302
fluency for maximum output on
meter. Adjust generator output for
3 volts on meter when finally peaked.
T301
4
Adjust 47.25 mc. trap
47.25 mc.
L302
Minimum output indication on meter
PW300 PICTURE I -F ASSEMBLY
4.1 R3I1 F El C312)
T303
R301
1307
L305
R'13
414:
4
`S.
R309 C310
\C706
C308
C302
11
9312
R309
.01305 /-
L301
-,R302
301
c3o4
-- 4V I -F
1306 AGC BIAS
R309
0302
6
5 4 5 C307
7
6jelLiE L302
OM"
C31
0304
3
3t, C303
Fl r
GROUND
0 44.5MC
(:) 45.5 MC
- - 7 8215 1.
21(
8217
LIM
1*
*1 KIM
-11 1.1 R220
8222
z1
8213
I
4217
4 5\
0225
C220
C22i
22 27 C22
U. C225
cos
R123_
32
ISM UZI
I1 1.204 el
8226
Vol
COM
8201
93
C209. MCI LEM
2
3
0 43.0 MC.
O
V TVM
SIGNAL GENERATOR
0 47. 25MC (T2 TOP CORE)
0 0 -I
czo C204
C2 C22
7
8205
(?, E.) 7203
C214
8206
Rill
C211
I
GROUND
TO CHAN 7-13 STRAP ON SIB
1500 MMF
PW 400 VIDEO ASSEMBLY
Figure 15-Picture I -F Transformer and Trap Adjustments
120
VOLUME TV -14, MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1958 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
RCA VICTOR
ALIGNMENT PROCEDURE
21 -PD -81151U) 21 -T -8245(U) to 21 -T -8478(U) Incl.
SOUND I -F, SOUND DETECTOR AND 4.5 MC TRAP ALIGNMENT
TEST EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS:
BIAS SUPPLY
Apply -10 volts to the I -F AGC bus at terminal '1- on PW300.
OSCILLOSCOPE
Connect across speaker voice coil.
SIGNAL GENERATOR
Connect to terminal "Q- on PW200.
VACUUM TUBE VOLTMETER.. Connect to output of diode detector shown below. Set meter for negative readings.
MISCELLANEOUS
Connect test diode detector, as shown below, to terminal "AC" on PW200.
I
1
2 3 4 5
STEP
SIGNAL GENERATOR
ADJUST
REMARKS
Set contrast control maximum clockwise
Adjust Driver Transformer
Primary & Secondary
4.5 mc.
T202 (top &
bottom)
Adjust T202 top & bottom for maximum negative DC on meter. Set generator for 1.0 to 1.5 volts on meter when finally peaked. Peak cores at open end of coils (maximum core separation).
Adjust Sound Take -Off Trans.
4.5 mc.
Adjust T201 for maximum negative DC on
T201
meter. Set generator for 1.0 to 1.5 volts
on meter.
Disconnect the diode test detector. Turn off signal generator and tune in strongest signal in area adjusting
volume control for normal volume (approx. 1/4 turn from c.c.w.). Turn T203 core flush with top of form,
Adjust Sound Detector Trans.
Observing oscilloscope and listening to audio output adjust T203 clockwise to a peak. Continue clockwise to a second louder peak and adjust T203 for maximum on this second peak.
Adjust 4.5 mc. Trap
4.5 mc.
A -M Mod. 400 Cycles
Adjust for minimum 400 cycle indication on
L202
oscilloscope.
Alternate Method Using Generators with F -M Modulation Provided
1
Same as step 1 above. Modulate 4.5 inc. signal with F -M 400 cycle signal with 71/2 kc. deviation.
2
Same as step 2 above. Modulate 4.5 mc. signal with F -M 400 cycle signal with 7'/2 kc. deviation.
3
Adjust Sound Detector Trans.
4.5 mc. 400 cycle
F -M Mod. 71/2 kc. Dev.
Adjust T203 for maximum 400 cycle output
T203
on scope using maximum amplitude peak. Adjust volume control for .70 v. p -p on
scope when peaked. See response below.
4andRetouch Driver Sound Take -Off Trans. for Breakout
4.5 mc. 400 cycle
F -M
71/2 kc. Dev.
T201 & T202
Decrease input signal to minimum usable signal and retouch T201 & T202 for syn.metrical breakout. Response below.
Move the oscilloscope to terminal "W" on PW200. Use the diode probe. Set the contrast control to maximum clock-
wise position.
5 1
Same as step 5 above. Adjust for minimum 400 cycle indication on oscilloscope.
PW300 PICTURE I -F BOARD
0 ,1 cmcm . -
1
°
Ft s
-.0
.
.
T,_,.332
:
.
"""-si-ii -Lisa
LED
1
go -TT'
:
T3 1
,41.3
C30
"
C3
I
J
...'
63' 3 4
4303
T
.c
boy I -F BIAS AGC
GND
0
OSCILLOSCOPE
DETECTOR RESPONSE
SIGNAL GENERATOR
4 , 6"
CONNECT ACROSS VOICE COIL
001
TA,
560 11
.11-
JI.
B. AT TERM .13-
560
ilr"0C;:;02
VTTC .
001
DIODE DETECTOR CIRCUIT
0
_SCOPE PW200 SOUND a VIDEO BOARD MI 7 -1.2. F. I. .2,
EL'
CONNECTCLO-
HERE
-c '.",'
csst
", '
--' I
i1p Ora
L202
as .-4-, W.
0FOR STEP i 4.5M: TRAP
In C2
-,
JL
.
1=1 ........
I. 001 61
11xz<
1%'91 T.
Sall ..1 620i iN e!mo
( - 0'-3- )-i..'''' }- "a" ,
.....--50 - e.,
TE01
,-:i - 41, -5. . `.
('
DT. 20 /1
si coil
%IMOD Ks\
....,
lit 111> !
t.) T203.
.is
..
.a
...A...
C-.-
KM
05
i 11204 \
A H "" E E
0
TOP &
BOTTOM
DIODE DETECTOR
/1 (07A)
NI
.'-.----GND
0 0
CORES
Figure 21-Sound I -F, Sound Detector and 4.5 mc. Trap Alignment
121
L.4
F-..6, I -F TUNER UNIT -VHF SECTION' TRAP TRAP
KRK 47-H
C2 5
L1 TRAP
r -T7205 -1 TO VHF
I
101
I ANT.
GD-y4.I RI28 I
L5.99PS_J I
OR
F** KRK 47-X ( KIM 63-B) 1
r -ATI§ CPRI 500K
J L C126 470
SI-D
S1-0
FRONT
REAR
14*
15 I4
L1A
P1050-14
KRK46H or KRK46J (KRK63A) TUNER CIRCUIT SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM (Used in KCS107A or KCS107C Chassis)
14* 3103-F
TUNER UNIT- KRK 4G-14
L5
FM
TRAP
L4 I -F TRAP
C2
5
Lt r19E
TRAP
OR
** KRK 46-J (KRK 63-A)
1CI
1a
1
MATCHING
TI-ANT11
C PR
iirlit47112.1°515K_
r CPR
102
500K
TO
Li
17
*
IS
LIG
117
L18
113 5. 112
LIT L10
0L,6 2!
PIN VIEW
r
I
REAR VIEW C 102
470
St-
FRONT
51-D REAR
C 31
0.5-3
4E50.7A R -F AMPL.
L caG J *P105044
470
PIN VIEW
Zr
l
.1
.DI
z
11413
*911E1051
C30
L7
1000
SI- C
REAR /.
-CII io.
270 9.
-.1C7
7'05-2
C2280
RS 1 MEG.
RE 100o 127
LZ8 L29
+4*
I
Riosp
'VI
RIZ!
I
/
270
IAAA
I
I
te*C I050 I CI21
I.01
TO C806
I" I
I
I
I
I
141605. TO VIOL -1
L15 I.16 Li7 116
113 1.12 111 110
C9
L7 I
C7
0.5-2
Ca *
220
R5 MEG.
RI 10 K
+1.1 V. CG
220
C23 1000
R126 I MEG.
I
01
r41
**C1051 C120
I 0.47
*1
gl
R -F AGC
Mt R1050
C21
R121
T
TPI RIO iooK
R9 , 08K
1
C33
R15
51-5
22
1000 REAR
L36 5 14
2
t153 L35
07 L38
L34 1.53
42
°
04
139 pi, L32,
714 L40
3900 131
L4I
C27
1000
-)
L9}
ci,dcf8
10 7-,anG
SI-A
/011620 NOM.
156?
-.C2011000
AN.
R17
15
R2i 100 C26 T 1000 1
t LEI
SC05423.4.--7i.sVT.o
I
2
CONV
0 sc. It MIXER
TRANS.
UHF I -F AMR_ +1225 1v0
R22 . 2485.1 tooK
R7 27K S
I
:1ticr.
1
i
**Rto5i
R126 MEG
TO RF A c -C
S I- C
126
FRONT las
L24
123
RI6 470
122
L21 7
120
CW714
0.662WV
TRI Ve RIO 100R 1R1090K
SI-8 ,7 =11 14 I
51-C is 14 REAR R,
R6 1000
-C11
-270 ,coo
L2/3 L29
1.30 C10
52
1000
270
svc2es
1.53
R23
1
V1
4667A
TTi.,C,c1.02,10150 1+260v.
I 5 4
1.
1
I
1
1.1C02020 1C03040
TO V101- i
R12 WO REAR
L36 L35
C20 100o
** STARRED 1050
Y6 SE RIES
O LS
A ppLy ON LY' To
KRKG3-A(KRK46-I)
REAR
2
1.8
R19
82K C17 0.82
mmF.
-11
17 15
4L46/
L451 1441
L43\ L42'
FRONT
1148 149
it LS0
*173, n2/50
1 2o * 1 on
It.
.1.
C7IS-_-
.5
>e -
S.
14
Rt6 R8+100
lo0o
1:5 100
C,4 0.5-3
C29 11000
_C13
NOTE
IN KCS 107 -C AND D ADO - P1050-14.
-3103- F AND C102. - LIIO N HEATER CIRCUIT. CHANGE -C314 VALUE TO 470.
L37 L34
to
L313
L33I
L39 SRI' 132
L40 1'3900
- L4I
1_31
1.54
1.5 MU -14
5C08
-2.5 To -5.5 V. T2
CONY. TRANS.
C28
-II
C244/
1152
r FRONT AND REAR SECTIONS
OF SIA-ES.C.D VIEWED FROM FRONT WITH CONTROL SHAFT
IN 1-F PoSitIoN
VHF UHF
110
PART oF 61-A ')
T3 I -F INTER_ STAGE TR.
1470
P802
_J
OMIT- R308 IN PW 300. USE - 1050 SERIES symeoLS
AS SHOWN IN PLACE OF 100 SERIES IN KRK 63-15(KRK 47-J) AND KRK 64-0)
L9
31-A
10
FRONT
147
146
/
SI-A REAR
CIS FINE
TtUmNoINiGs
+1231.4,12ES
osc,MIXER 41225
J1
L451
1148
UHF SECTION- KRK 64- B/D
C809 //-7-
C803 I 7C-807177
144 143 142
L49 LSO r. L51
R13
5600
Ra 1000
C8508 /c828
cep; ;:a Call -I
CR 801
k3D OR
I L806 IN82E-RI
C8043
C 24 47
452
CHANNEL SELECTOR SW. SI
FRONT AND REAR SECTIONS VIEWED
.FROM FRONT AND SHOWN IN CHANNEL
NO. 2 POSITION.
,c) (-Fdt
0810
v801
0.5-3.5 2AF4A
C807- 1.5 2 OSC.
C805 22
R801
Cep f --8200
1000
if go R1052 R132
1214
S'"G
C814 1000
%et°
T
Si 139 211
1.
1,604
CPR 103
rElf7
I 470 I
I I
L 1100K j°i 8131-1 I
500K
TO F ANT.
I C128 L 472 .__I
CPR 104
NOTE: The chassis listed above are identical to chassis shown in the large schematic, except for the tuner which is a KRK46H or 46J shown in smaller schematic above.
Figure 30 -Tuner Circuit Schematic Diagram for KCSIO7A or KCSIO7C Chassis for VHF Models
PW 200
tile
SOUND I -F AM PL
500790 DRIVER TR
4.5 MC.
.21/, V V
SOUND DET.
?ST.AUDIO
I tur,
SOUND BET. TR
T201
SOUND TAKE -
C216 OFF TR. 3 4.5 MC.
S
150K 12771 C207
r
R2461[20611'
1
C2(05 Li! .01
a
C120 101 R18200K7.11
C201
3j 9C203 -1 .01 I
R202 82
R204 1000
o2o3 0208
1000 .01 /
R526006
L_
C211 8208 470 It
477IC2P01 'C 2041 -620
.0027T168
IC 209 .0,
C
8205 .0471
1871 OD
0212
.01
C2I5 2.0022
R2o9 390 K
+150 V.
+ 260 V.
L. GRN W101
AUDIO OUTPUT
R211
470
AUDIO OUTPUT TR.
BLU 6RN
151.K
C I19 -C A
10 MF T
F
+ C119-0
R102 181)0
I20 MF.
E
+260 V.
TO RIME MASK AND METAL CABINET
CONTR. R112
CIII
I.°' BRACKET 470 K
8219 -I R226 CZ21
2715 .027 10 MEG.
PW 300
V30,
3C 6
I 57. FIX
imio3
**
C314 4700
L301 I -F AmPL
ST. 1-F
GRID COIL
S
?
2i
830 I
Cict 3 -/ L102
* io -leo r 47. 25 a TRAP o C3I0S1 I n
47I<
**
R308 ISO
2
R505 4'7
C3.02
J 1.0047
C304
4'70 I
.30 15T. 91
1-F TRAN
V302
3C B6
2ND. PIK.
I -F AMPL.
V 3o3
CR 301
7302 3C B6 T303
SECOND DET.
21F110T*-R.. TAA MNPS1,T1 RnA0NPISN .
L305
18 MU -11
5
R305 680
C308 .001
R.307 -C306
15 K 1.001
R683009
* - R306 _C305
N
150K T.001 ,Kc3j2,,
7
C3I0 .00471
2
R3I0 180
C3I2 1.001
R437101
C111 7
C35I T R3I5
13900
L307 300 AN -N
088.51.3515LK
C104
0.47
R -F A
TO TUNER
71125
1000
I -F AG C
+260 V.
+150V
LIDS
IS MU -14
R2 3 680 K.1
8214 1.2
MEG
C717 0. I R212 220 K R215 82K
1.203 v 704.4 ISO mu -K
6AW8A
VIDEO 71225 8224 A PAPL. 22K 1271
9 C225 R225
471, ' 5600
R218 680 K
e33z0z
L204
v 204- B
1 180
WPM
5R6027127Z133C02221S6TA. SwYN8CA.
C223
O
5218 9
_MO
530
"3° 2 L202'-0.22
4.5 TMRAP
R22z8
270K
3901( R2311
_ C230
1.0068
M:III, 2R2,6 K
R22 2
592
R C105 R I I I oU 1500 68
1-4/1P-0 SSOK 4 --p
4
RI01-4
t Rios
CONTRAAS5T7 .. 3300
02I9 L Cot 0.47 120 Null 71220
15K
R229 150K
0V
OW
2
32
1
+ 260V.
71104 200 K
+150V.
13RIGHTNE5S
To JI
+150V 28502700
C501
-0-.0)33 D
- " 1 - V501-4
C502 6C67_
PW 500-A
22 o SYNC1-- -- 8200FS0 rl
OUTPUT
0, 7
V 501-8
6CG7 VER_. 05CT.
. of
8505 1 C 504 82 K 1.0056
10505
R512 18K
5I-1, 1
zR 521k1
i C. 053099
1.0056 C504 C514 8513-0508 7
9
I
-.0047 0.1s T
7.072
J
PW 500
8507
6.8 MEG.
0
V 502
.5CZ5
C0S2173 It
E II R914
2271
VERT. OUTPUT
7:1
_ C052120
C51508
6
1.001 P
5 MEG.
0.1 _
"or oI
looK
05161, R520 L
71
3300
2
8509 R516 1.5 1.5 MEG MEG. VERT. LIN
R--11 C511
71517 0.1
680K
G
R519 6871
03 OH
0 R521 1. C5I7 K 22K .0047
Tool
VERTICAL OUTPUT
r -- TRANS. 1
1+7 T7E..aL
'W02
hM
71I35 .1-C131
820K 1.068
R IOG
220
Ia.FY C 118-B
1206F.
+260 V.
8127 100 K
3 4
V 101
210FP4
KINESCOPE
+260 V.
r PW 600 C601 82
v Go 1
6CG7 HOR12 05C
R601 220 K
3(. C6041 I C6OS
R607 0606 ggoo
i.20O2K2110.47
L to i )40R.FRECA
r CO L
RII8 R119
82071 1.5 MEG
2605
VERT. Hot.
RIDS 10 MEG
1.2122 10 MEG
U F O L601
C46"0668R67019
SINE WAVE
"--"'
C608
R107
1
0015 El
11
47 AK.
R6 2
4.~.4 C807
86 68 7K0
I
MEG.01
R611 1.5 MEG.
-C 609
AAP
C 4D .0012 I
23
All capacitance values less than 1 in
71724
MF and above 1 in MMF unless otherwise noted.
5 MEG.
NOR. HOLD +250V.
V102
1107175
OUuTPUuT
+260 V.
R I09 5600
+ 260V.
Tio3
N.V. TRANS.
2B 1 xv703
N.Y. RECT 12 110
0.39
L112
4.7
V104
M." 19AU4
DAMPER
LIII 4.7
MU N
10122 1.068
DEFLECTION YOKE
YELI-vERT NOR -I
COILS COILS EiLK- RED
L107 48L3.0.61/.v.,
7
90
C114 120
RIIS 4700
I
--C.013123
Wi55 '7.91116
-C113
1-0 I
L.708
RED
2 --I
.1390
+150V. +260V.
4R3I 0160
L104
SR 101 RECT.
0129 t50 MF
R133 5.6
viol r -i203 V202
21011.4 SAGS 3DT6
v201 34U6
6A1W,280A.1
I--303
3096
V302 3C86
V3CTF3611 76;6C06711 HT6C06T7. VS5C0R2S
v102 V104 1121)064 194u4
R134
42
_C119-15 C119 -A C118-4 220 MF 1100 MF 2150 ME.
5R 102 RECT
11.417t1)13 ,L,2121,2"*L" 3 4
5I s
PW 200
PRINTED
PRINTED F
C 307
- 11_1 C130 . I .0047 PW 300 PW 600
M
PW 500
C124 .0?
All resistance value in ohms. K= 1000
2172-1.
510
ON -OFF
SW
C123
.047I
S102 INTERLoCK
115V. GO, SUPPLY
-
.L4
BaO.
Co Cy
-5'
ts,
...-1 NO
6 ._,. a. NJ
-.' .....1 p-i
CO
tO
C./.1
VOLUME TV -14, MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1958 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
RCA VICTOR
21 -PD -8115(U) 21 -T -8245(U) to 21 -T -8478(U) Incl.
PRINTED WIRING ASSEMBLIES
Figure 26-PW300-Picture I -F Assembly Layout
Figure 25-PW000-Horizontal Oscillator Assembly Layout
-4 R5I31-
R506)-
II
8542'
C505
C503
C1304
III
Figure 2 7-PW500A-Subassembly for PW500
The printed wiring, on the reverse side of the boards, is presented in -phantom" views superimposed on the layouts. This will enable circuit tracing without removing the assemblies from the chassis to see the printed wiring on the reverse
side.
R217
V
64.201 91.1 8229
R220 0. I
2
LECI
R2I4
-T (5
MT
45
C221
C222
R2
27
F.O. . gra
2 .....
C225
8226
8225 ran 32
C220
3.4 8224}!
L2
to L204
I
72-
C216
EMI
( " czar.. )mi R210} &Mara
T201
E.,
F
ri
R202 I./
23 4
C2
41111111.11010.11.11.1.114
1
49
816
E) T203
C41 Il E
C
07
0214 2.4
8211
C204
C
8204
0211
Figure 28-PW200-Sound, Video & 1st Sync Assembly Layout
HORIZONTAL OSCILLATOR AND OUTPUT ALIGNMENTPlace a jumper across the terminals of the sine wave coil
L601 and adjust the horizontal hold control until the picture pulls into sync. Remove the short across the sine wave coil.
Connect the low capacity probe of an oscilloscope to terminal "F" of PW600. Turn the horizontal hold control clockwise until the picture falls out of sync, then counter -clockwise until the picture just pulls into sync. The pattern on the oscilloscope should be as shown in Figure 22c. Adjust the sine wave adjustment core L601 until the two peaks are at the same height. During this adjustment, the picture must be kept in sync by readjusting the horizontal (frequency) control if necessary.
INCORRECT
INCORRECT
CORRECT
Figure 22-Horizon al Oscillator Waveforms
SEE SEPARATE DRAWING ON VERTICAL SUB -ASSEMBLY
Figure 29-PW500-Ver ical & Sync Output Assembly Layout
124
VOLUME TV -14, MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1958 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
RCAVICTOR
VNr CHANNEL SELECTOR
ON toFF
SI T CH a VOL,.
CONTROL
RIOIA
CONTRAST CONTROL
SPE AMER LEADS
(ALL ODEL91
SCOR OSC /MINER
CIO LINN
R
302
"41r
P300
PRINTED ONING
PICTURE
ASSES.
L301
1ST PIN Fr
GRID COIL
V301 6DES 15 T PIA
Imo/
V3P2
60E 6
I`/ ISTSEIIM
250 PIT
I -F TUNS
2ND 121M
14 TRANS
1
1
P5200 PRINTED IR INS WEIRD I -F a AUDIO
ASSEMBLY
UHF N MG
- TELEVISION RECEIVERS MODELS
21 -D -8525(U), 21 -D -8526(U)
P WS00 P,INTED ITIRINE
NOS. OSC.
O AcVoEs
;109
NOR 1311iVE
6 suedAGE
ST
SYNC AMP
v$102
%VW
viza C.aNCELLAT AIOMPN
00
PR INTED WIRING ADC VI DEO a IST SYNC
ASSEMBLY
TS
RATIO DET a AUDIO AMP
RATIO
OCT
I
$
wANS
Lt.
SOUND
$F AMP
SOUND - I TAKE -OFF
TRAMS
21 -D -8527(U), 21 -D -8545(U), 21 -D -8547(U), 21 -D -8566(U), 21 -D -8588(U),
21 -D -8528(U) 21 -D -8546(U) 21 -D -8565(U) 21 -D -8567(U) 21 -D -8605(U)
4101 PROMO INPUT
1535,1030T
FrETi
(It
/I
L
T102
i
I
VERT OuTPUT
mmmmm DRYER,
rm
L
,fl$1, cO ,'
?-"'iI
.
c"'",ti
4112 k r RIOT''
VERT. LIN IHEIONTI,
CEMITROL CONTROL
:a 0
') ,R135 \
I AGO I CONTROL
P500
PRINTED WIRING VERTICAL a SYNC.
OUTPUT ASSEMBLY
I EPT ; .f.UT %.IT/
SCOT SYNC OUTPUT
(SAA )7.'/4
SA RECTIFIER
21 -D -8607(U), 21 -D -8608(U)
Chassis Nos. KCSIO8C, KCS108D, KC$108E, KCS1081,
The additional models listed below use 24" picture tube but are essentially the same as the corresponding sets covered in this material.
TELEVISION RECEIVERS -MODELS 24-D-8655, 24 -D -8655U 24-D-8657, 24 -D -8657U 24-D-8676, 24 -D -8676U 24-D-8678, 24 -D -8678U
Chassis Nos.-KCS1O8C, KCS1O8D, KCS1O8E, KCS1O8F
(Material continued on the next 5 pages)
CHASSIS REMOVAL
To remove the chassis from the cabinet for repair, remove the cabinet back, unplug the speaker cabe, the antenna cable, the pilot lamp, the kinescope socket, and the yoke. Remove the -on-off" volume and contrast control knobs and remove the two screws holding the -onor/volume/contrast control. The screws are located at the bottom of the control mounting bracket.
Remove the knobs from the controls in the control case and remove the two screws holding the control bracket to the control case. Unplug the I -F link cable and the tuner power plug.
Remove the two nuts at the top of the chassis and the two screws at the bottom. Move chassis out slightly to enable the H.V. lead to be disconnected from the kinescope. Clear all wires from lances and retaining springs. Remove chassis from cabinet.
If it is necessary to remove the tuner assembly, remove the three nuts holding the tuner mounting plate to tl-e side of the cabinet. Also remove a screw holding a brace to the cabinet top. The tuner and control brackets may be fastened to the chassis for transporting.
KINESCOPE REMOVAL
After removing the chassis, loosen the yoke clamp and slide the yoke off the neck of the kinescope. Remoie the four nuts holding the kinescope assembly to the cabinet and remove the assembly.
Loosen the screw clamp sufficiently to remove the kinescope.
125
VOLUME TV -14, MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1958 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
RCA VICTOR
ALIGNMENT PROCEDURE 21 -D -8525(U) to 21-D-8608 (U) Incl.
PICTURE I -F TRANSFORMER AND TRAP ADJUSTMENTS
TEST EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS:
BIAS SUPPLY
Apply -6 volts to I -F AGC bus at terminal "J" of PW300. Ground positive lead to chassis.
SIGNAL GENERATOR
Connect to mixer grid at strap on SIB, in series with 1500 minf. capacitor. (See below.)
VACUUM TUBE VOLTMETER Connect to 2nd Detector output at terminal "K" of PW400 using direct probe. Ground lead connected to chassis.
STEP
SIGNAL GENERATOR
ADJUST
REMARKS
Peak 3rd pix. I -F
1
transformer
2
Peak 2nd pix. I -F transformer
3
Peak 1st pix. I -F transformer
44.5 mc. 45.5 mc. 43.0 mc.
T303
Peak T303, T302 and T301 on ire -
T302
quency for maximum output on meter. Adjust" generator output for
3 volts on meter when finally peaked.
T301
4 Adjust 47.25 mc. traps
97.25 mc.
L302 &
T2 (top core)
Minimum output indication on meter
-
,
-
E
0 LEM
c3i 7.
CS1
.
A LIIII
D
R3,0 Apt my
6Cel,Q 7 5
-G HI
ap1.304
-ClE=1" Clio --....D
J
DM 141 3j
312
Y CSC;
0:
L306
CI . '
rE
5
: .1..1- -A
30
LIO3
LSO2
.1 ----
C30 ir
- 6 V. I- F AGC BIAS
PW300 PICTURE I-F ASSEMBLY
DIRECT 0 44.5 MC.
PROBE
6 45.5 MC.
0 43.0MC.
O47(.T225TOMPCC.ORE)
4> 1 _ filo, 7
MB
-.I caoe
Cian
7
5
COO
4 3
111:31:E11. 4.1 R4I4
.4R415 1.4
1
c
12420 9
.
'..1r;10-
2
1
-
GUM
G
H
404 R40
R413
0
11406
T
ILI
5
GROUND
- - ----,
VTVM
Mr
C 409 4,T
**
12{3
Ku
405
N ,
UM433
+1
14
0406
4402
402
12434
4421
M
R40
-r I
C411
R42
IV4640. 7,
7
4
40
65
IN
L.4
R426
0
(531
1,03
R427
_
RI
.. R429
C4I 3
ft;0) L C40) C402
12431
14.
L405
"30
7
1
UM.
PW400 VIDEO ASSEMBLY
-------.-
\GROUND
SIGNAL GENERATOR
\ '
'_________-/
VI
IN
TO CHAN 7-13
STRAP ON Ste
a_ Mk
.a
1500
IMF
MMF
Picture 1-F Transformer and Trap Adjustments
126
VOLUME TV -14, MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1958 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
RCA VICTOR
ALIGNMENT PROCEDURE 21 -D -8525(U) to 21-D-8608 (U) Incl.
SOUND I -F, RATIO DETECTOR AND 4.5 MC TRAP ALIGNMENT
TEST EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS:
BIAS SUPPLY OSCILLOSCOPE SIGNAL GENERATOR VACUUM TUBE VOLTMETER MISCELLANEOUS
Apply -10 volts bias to I -F AGC, terminal "J" of PW300. Connect to terminal "A" on PW400 at the kinescope grid, using the diode probe. Connect to Video Detector output at terminal "K" of PW400. Connect to terminal "N" of PW200. Connect a matched pair of 100,000 ohm resistors in series from terminal "N" of PW200 to ground.
STEP
SIGNAL GENERATOR
ADJUST
REMARKS
Adjust Ratio
1
Detector Trans.
& Sound Take -off
4.5 mc.
T202
(Top & bottom cores) & T201
Adjust T202 (top & bottom core) & T201 for maximum reading on VTVM. Set generator for 10 to 12 volts on VTVM.
Move VTVM to terminal "D" of PW200, with ground lead to junction of 100,000 ohm resistors. (See illustration below.;
Adjust Ratio
2
Detector Trans.
Secondary
4.5 mc.
T202
(Bottom core)
Adjust T202 (bottom core) for zero reading
on VTVM.
Repeat steps 1 and 2 until proper results are obtained.
.3
Adjust 4.5 mc.
Trap
4.5 mc. (Modulate 30% with 400 cycles)
Adjust L109 for minimum 400 cycle output
L109
indication on the oscilloscope. Set contrast
control full clockwise.
*Step 3 may be performed "on the air" using a transmitted signal if desired. Observe picture on kinescope for 4.5 mc beat, set fine tuning to exaggerate beat, then tune L109 for minimum beat pattern with contrast fully clockwise.
..--...,/ PW 200
SOUND
BOARD ASSEMBLY
.
SIGNAL GENERATOR
a
91
0
7202 (BOTTOM
CORE)
. a
.0
wo
.
Is
i GROUNDu.
+ 100,000 OHMS
I MATCHED PAIRS
- r IT -... . s
11
7
k. 7202 A
A\ ,4.4
_
1.i, ')-ija
`,
A GROUND
'
0
4 SMC T201 El 1202 (TOP B BOTTOM CORES)
1201
. -.
io40
°V -` °
RI40
0
COM
C M I
111.
GROUND
4:).C1--;-6. --,..)
0 .qa.'0". ,:r y.:.. ...
(,:) # -10 V -F
L-1 AGC BIAS
-1..0- w. o
4'
NN-.
PW 300 PICTURE I -F BOARD ASSEMBLY
I
,
, I'le, 7
arm
MEM
MU
Yt;13
g...f"---'
MU
.. c......... H ' .L
PW400 VIDEO
BOARD ,, ASSEMBLY
LUCE
olo. W
OMB
ag loif
631
.
IV4riwo
14
o
RI .2s
Y I CI
I
c.. rL.
c
I
1.-
._.----
L1094.5 MC TRAP
GROUND will
DIODE PROBE
OSCILLO-
0
Sound 1-F, Ratio Detector and 4.5 mc. Trap Alignment
127
TUNER UNIT
KRK 62- N/R
VHF SECTION-KRK47-E
51-0
FRONT
SI- D REAR
LS L4 I7F
TRAP TRAP c 2 TRAP
T1 -ANT. MATCHING ' TRANS
6307A
R -F AM PL.
Pt
1=' To VHF ANT.
115
LI
LIG
L12
1.17
LII
b000 A6.0
P1050 vre.4F
220
DL
..eC7
6
1000
V.I5N-
C21 1000
v2
vi
6C08
68;4 iRolgs
4r.
551C22
ANA R15 1000
S1-8 REAR
153 L35
L5T
L34
38
133 C4)
39 tRil L32
L40 )'3500 L3
1000C20
IR2 OC
C12
017
COST
IS
NOM.
itL8 10°°!CTOON,
V2
6C0.8
rITRA145.
C25 --T1
MIXERURF IF
.
CI
4
If! iNE TUNING
S1 -A REAR
022 S too N
* I
r,DI
R 19S
L47 146
eN
S1 -A FRONT
u
LAS
L48
11.
lot,
C7t5_-
E
87
L4-
-r
"2C17 L44 145,
mmF.
4-1 1
142
LAS L50
L5
RIO C29
.5
1 1C0I05
100 IWO
'000 C13
CI28
774
52
VHF UHF
T3 IF INTER.
STAGE TR
1470
72 P802
---11
r I] sMir il FRONT AND REAR SECTIONS
OF St.A.s.c.0 VIEWED FROM
-1
FRONT wirm CONTROL SHAFT I_
CCL9
IN I -F PO5r1,2N
Z PART oF SI-
VHF QO GUNNEL
LIGHT
UHF SECTION- KRK 64-A
5; 4oe
- " CliNe.4 ca13
-
0
I
CR 801 D OR
KIN382
06 MIXER
Ebo 2 V801 6AF4A
C807- 15 12 °SC
[0ROOD 680
R8 820010
CISIT1 i000
R1051 12K
/51050
UHF Oo PILOT
LIGHT
L801
I
I
TO UHF ANT.
CHASSIS CIRCUIT SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM KCS108D or KCS108F
KRK62M or KRK62P TUNER CIRCUIT SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
(Used in KCS108C or KCS108E Chassis)
O
LS F M
14
TRAP TRAP
TLIRACPHLa-d7--,-1I
TO
cs2
ANT.
TUNER UNIT- KRKG2-M/P 4-1 C
CI TI -ANT.
(KRK E )
33 2
6rn,
H
4-4
51-D FRONT
SI- D REAR
2C2S0 1J'C0.35I-3 4
VI
680.7A
R -F AMPL.
0-
LIS
113
ILIG
LI2
L
10036
e3
9
LIT
LII
11/3
LI
.4
r
RI 10 K
C23 000 600
P1050-14
IC 1D51 PIN
60,,
CO
1=0.47 VIEW
IA
40
0)
H
1220 EiLK
O
51-C
L2
FRONT 1.25
L24
L13
122
R18 470
Lit
rA'032
0.68 MFIF.
TR1 .IVY
010
00K iR1900K 51.8 it r
FRONT
0
C 7
0,5-2
mCt, t-12R2M5 E0G.
14
R6
L27 moo V2
6coL8
C2I 1000
RI OSO
820
1
""Ie c
VI 68604
T
, .0,,050 =
.3
54
z
L28 L29
gl sr,* LS3 1 4 5 I
LJ
''' f3f
I Wo
VHF
tT1
_ 17 ,g,
CHANNEL
LIGHT
i012
100
C20
=
1000
fic I2
7. 60 NOm,
it La
co
014 6800
D." MLU54.-0
T2 TrtAns.
cri
co
V2
rc-oNt
CI7
6C08
C 25 SI
OSC.B MIXER
15
31
H
tx]
CI9
L9
10 S1 -A
C 18
FINE
SI-A
INGr
R7 I 2710.1
t15
L47 146 145
FRONT 1
REAR o 1%,
HI
-4c;s
C14 LA_ _J = 0-s.
1g')
L44 143
R13
/28
O
142'
5600
1000 +-V.
C4244tl..S2
CHANNEL SELECTOR SW. SI FRONT AND REAR SECTIONS VIEWED FROM FRONT AND SHOWN IN CHANNEL N0.0 POSITION.
(-F00
Figure 27-Tuner Circuit Schematic Diagram
for KCS 108C or KCS108E Chassis
'(")
VHF Models
NOTE: The KCS108C and KCS108E chassis listed above are identical to chas-
sis KCS108D or KCS108F shown in the large schematic, except for the tuner which is a KRK62M or KRK62P, shown in smaller schematic above.
The schematic is shown in the latest condition at the time of printing.
All resistance value in ohms. K = 1000.
All capacitance values less than 1 in MF and above 1 in MMF unless other-
0
wise noted.
Direction of arrows at controls indi-
cates clockwise rotation.
O
3103.7 REAR
6201
V202-4
7201
SOUND
TAKE oF
PW200Cql TRANS
-If r__ f2
f -A- -I
01.
6AU6
SOUND I.FAMPL
C128
470
.45.0-1h,
T202
RATIO DEC TRANS 4.5 MC.
6T8
RATIO SET.
,
C62,.i I:11
2
.
i___67,
iiii,
7
15K I R472K01* -I-C202 R203
C204.00271
C203 R202
0, . EL'I
L207' is.
3
11_ _'_'_ _21
7
33 K
I
2
2061.I1+5C1;40F9 N
C215
01 1000 0208
R205
LT I56
39K
w
-Ir.,AO 0126
11200
102 ".3.3-1..
tt
C01103
R101-8 1 MEG
C)=VOL.
200K R 103
0.
3311
no I
C210 I
01 /1307
_14EG
sd a
3 44
C122 6104 R145
T.0082
1
2.5 mEG ToNE
CONTR
5103
6621028- 5
AUDIO AMPL
6203
640.5A
AUDIO OUTPUT
7101 AUDIO OUTPUT TR
9 g
P 7
V
C 27I 1-C 2131 470 I .0018
C0222141
L
O
185L1U.30.
I-7
R208
-C2I2
.0047
470 K
,
3RM320I0K9
R210
560
OF SO-
0203 C 4V42031
R
K
R102 ?. 3300
R129 C124 330 470
R130 1.2
Y
0125 .01
C120P.0A2F0
*2806
C135 6 MP
KP.
4
I
I 32 I
L11
P104
CD
y280V
G OCOBOMXER.
LIGHT
WIO5
2
012) 4700
If
c1;2
10_,40?"
1000
I -F
PW 300
r-isTIrx! 1-F GR Coil_
of
41ID11-114.
8301
L306
4t1i7302
47.25 MC
r
1(302-1-C301
100471 18
V301
6DE6 1ST. Po( I -F AMPL
T 301 1ST ptx i-F TRANS. 43.0 Mc -
7 5ANI EE
6302
V303
6DE6 2Zrp2., 6C66
2ND. FIX. 1-F TRANS 3RD. 01X.
1-F ARM_ 45.5 MC. I -F AMPL
T303
3RD. Pi% 1-F TRANS.
44.5 MC.
CR301 2ND DET
KI
C3Il
4 47004 I 6R83005
5R63o3
0302 1001( R307
pitro-k'
C303 1.0047
5306 C305 2
150K 1.001
Cog
4,
:°'4TfRao09
R3,2 S306
%sok .1.00
81133T PRINTED
1312
.001 I
C3I0 s R311
10047 470
-,0307
21330094D
1.0047
.00472 0H
0E
1305
18/40-11
L.0
080-9Au 15603*
TEL 600.51U
TEL r-
C313 8
0415 338
6402-A
6AW8A NotSE CANCELLATION
V402- 5
6AW8A VIDEO AMPL
2714 Mt
L401
250 1.111-1.1
OR -048w
Kari
1800 8416 4 5
2201(
.r 5,4619,
L402
150 148.0 605 81.1.1 BLU
0421
101(
V403
6AV0I5DE/1O/4 C1394
muH
OUTPUT
YEL20-YEL-QED
N O_'1
L109 TRAP
R 434
27 K
24 11 7V,I121° 0.1
s
C408
'1000
R422 R425
471( 3000
5,426 470K
4
r21 32K3
-4.
68840208
c413
0.1
R432
R429
470K
1800
R430 6800
LAOS 120 MU -N 061.-YEL-RED
7
C0.42029
stri 0427 884Z2It 680
LA03
30014.1-11
YELYELOL
R 1500431
P
PW400-
A.G.C.
R1.42 47
I C12
-
I WV n I 12143 270 230 MF.
+2800.
V 401-A
6U84
PW 400.A
A.G C
V4ol.B
6U8A
1ST. SYNC
8405 1201(
12406 47K
00 ON
_C406
0.1
5410 I MEG
L
8402 R408 2403
56K 33K
R403
10033 1301(
C.40011 I
w
R401 .8 MEG
8459 220K
5412 5411 270K 1MEG.
R404< 56K A,
C405 330
C404 330
R413 1.2 04E6
e R407 r fr. 391(
OF
+280 V.
R144
Y
R126 4200
+280V.
AA.. 3.NY.V '
R139 560 K
R 40 2 MEG
NOISE LIMITER
..0053031
RS02 3900 0501 560K
gn4
PW500
C502 220
v501-4
6CG7 SYNC OUTPUT
R505 22 K
0504 .0047
R503 10K
0506 18K
2
C 506
.0039T
v501-5
6CG7
VERT. 050. 4 DISC
8507 6.8 MEG-
S 8509 MEG.
6CV50Z2 5
VERT. SWEEP OUTPUT
R506 C507 1512 8515 8200 .01 .027 22K
C.052120 T*,C00511-8475-1
R512 18K
3-6
R510
22K -11
4S
9 -1-cs°9 ;. .012
10.15 SR511
5,510
3900
.1
A
OK
3 12101-
1500 PI CONTRAST
11
12 105 1000-C 560 130 MA
7102 VERT. OUTPUT
TRANS.
sLur- -1 R128 cus 3300 .047
6RN
2136 O I
I
RED
R2123I(7/ 4.C116
1.0047
0141 2201(
R106 2006
BRIGHT. CoNTR.
R150 1001i + 2 80 V
.1.2806.
3
3 C141 .068
R136 270K 4280 V.
2
3
5,135 500 K A.G.C. CONTR
3
0109 820K +280 V.
I
0170 1.5 MEG VERT HOLD coNTR
R 107
R108 :
5 MEG. 4701(
HEIGHT CONTR.
z
3
0112 1.5 MEG VERT. LH-I CONTROL
R113 6801(
210E P4
KINESCOPE
Figure 28 -Chassis Diagram KSCIO8D
or KCSIO8F
PW 606
FT.3
c601 82
0602 68
I 0601
OTT,
R602 330K
0603 1520X
R604100 K
V 601
6C67
HOR. SWEEP 050. $ CONTR.
+2806
L 101 OP NOR. OSC.
COIL
4280 v.
V101
61)064
moR SWEEP OUTPUT
ir RIIS 78 El 47
0612 1c1.9
0.1
MEG.
1
1
=
c
R
Ca °1
0148 5 mEG.
ICR. HOLD
*2806
I 0.27
+280v
Fvol
0.34
R118
68K
94- L Ica
(>00 nom- to Tr"
S
5
114
2701
z,Do[
L5 "u'l
7,
+703
6AU46TA
DAMPER
V102
1636T/1E536T N.V. R ECT.
01301 .033
DEFLECTION YOKE
io? -PIN
BRED VIEW
II '132
Yu ICED VERT. COILS
1
141g.
10 C119 91
Ito
,1114
0124 5135 R12516" ISO 3.5 150 I
IL-1C21
VOL J{11/1[ -RED
1118
470
2411107 -
C137 220
0123 4700
5A54A SECT
TI 4
5101 00.0FF SW
ROTEL ea BLK-R 0 (" 0101)
4 GRN. RED * 1
11127
wok
GRN TEL TEL
51K
DRK
.1 ISO
REM VIEW
L 108 FILTER CHOKE
5 102
INTERLoCK4
TSto2t-t ISTMO2806
1150.53. SUPPLY
VOLUME TV -14, MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1958 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
RCA VICTOR
PRINTED WIRING ASSEMBLIES 21 -D -8525(U) to 21 -D -8608(U) Incl.
PW300 Picture I -F Assembly Layout
C604
K
C603 OMIT IN
KCS 107
CHASSIS
* .4
V601 In
760 2, 1* irS9 4° B
-r
TBC6 m
12606
- -I-r-
_a-
12610
2611
REKSI
C
CGO7
H
CGOS C609 C608
R604 G
R60
F
4R417 0408
.412419 11..
+418
=I R4141..
R422
.4s433
L402
M
8434
R42
S
IN
0
8407 4
7
5
%
6
7
T
0405
R4, 2
C406
R405
C I
C402
L405 R430
.(R432
A
C212
9 C211
C209
PW600 Horizontal Oscillator Assembly Layout
PIV400 Video, 1st Sync and AGC Assembly Layout
The assemblies represented above are viewed from the component side of the boards and are oriented as they will usually be viewed on the chassis.
The printed wiring, on the reverse side of the boards, is presented in -phantom" views superimposed on the component layouts.
CENTERING LEVER
YOKE CLAMP ( LOOSEN TO POSITION YOKE)
KINESCOPE
PW200 Sound I -F and Audio Assembly Layout
Mal 11
KINESCOPE SOCKET
CENTERING LEVER
YOKE ASSEMBLY
POSITION YOKE
AS FAR FORWARD AGAINST BELL AS POSSIBLE
130
PW500 Vertical and Sync Output Assembly Layout
VOLUME TV -14, MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1958 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
REMOvE 4 W.. CUPS Nt1 LIFT OUT WIND.
R.O. 2W AT
ENO OF ORADEA.
0
TI'"O''Dr$5:;
OwADE1
1.0. NEAR NAIL
REMOVE SP.. AND METAL RUA.
0
:217.1.2.1.111TV"
TIM SLIDE DAIMIT
AN0
NINE Na.
Z.7:117Z1-0.:1),=.14,1"-"
Chassis Removal and Safely Glass Cleaning
RCAVICTOR
- TELEVISION RECEIVERS MODELS
17- D- 8185(U) 17 -D -8186(U), 17 -D -8187(U)
17- PD- 8093(U), 17- PD - 8094(U)
17- PD- 8096(U), 17 -PD -8099(U) 17- PT- 8071(U), 17- PT- 8072(U)
Chassis Nos. KCS109A, KCS10911, KCS109C and KCS1091:1
(Material on pages 131 through 139)
CHASSIS REAR VIEW
SPEAKER-.. EROS
IMF CRNNEL SELECTOR
TIM.F
.15
FUSE RE,ISTOR
(6rr1
TUT. K 4444 XR.. I10510.1/ KRK 431B OWS10.1
KR. TA OICS10901
SAFRA
KIK 114E U. TUNER
WES COB RCS .0 Cel.
4.4 R -F AMP
(K..* 6 KR.5.1) 50. R -F ARP I.K .11 K. PTV
KINESCOPE SOCKET
/0O2eA
TI
NOM
O 41T.
11102 VERT14L OUTPUT TRANS
W DELMER Ron. OWN PIN LOCAT. ow IOWA,. Wdes
PW 200
Kc TO9 *7-Kct-srr--
EVT'LL.-.11E
MOLD
R259 VERTCAL LINEAMTV
R255 NEK.T
R2 ST 11/116MTMESS
L211 WAVE COIL
L20PIX
I
I
4111.
D
(2;:
\TA; 0PA
Parr.
(1ASTUE) OUTPUT
Mae OAT
1V1:111--)
1-1/ PLATE
COIL
'01: PO -710
F CAW
COIL
V205
(11CLI
MK 1-F SYNC OJT
(2;
TJA.
TRAM
KIFA
50000* IL.L_RUIIST
TIL11,AS
r12V
RA IN7.\51 SOU110 of
11:c0
arnt
AP
1 elstlI,
4.A0.0 KM. OPEN MN LOC.. Fat .NMnfnom)
Chassis Rear View
131
L.
MOM FRECI CONTROL
L202
1rF RIO COIL
T.. A. O6UfTlPit,)
2W P
..21 WO lc
7n.7-e
F
1-F TRANS
SIAM OCT I AU00
ht7
SOUNDf
NOTES a.1MT (OWN PIN LaCAT
VOLUME TV -14, MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1958 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
RCA VICTOR
ALIGNMENT PROCEDURE
17-D-8185 to 17 -PT -8072 Incl. 17-D -8185U to 17-PT -8072U Incl.
PICTURE I -F TRANSFORMER AND TRAP ADJUSTMENTS
TEST EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS:
BIAS SUPPLY SIGNAL GENERATOR VACUUM TUBE VOLTMETER
Apply -4 volts to I -F AGC bus at terminal "P" of PW200. Positive lead to chassis. Connect in series with 1500 mmf. to mixer grid at SIB as shown below. Connect to 2nd Detector output at terminal "TP". Use DC probe.
STEP
SIGNAL GENERATOR
ADJUST
REMARKS
KCSIO9A & KCS109B CHASSIS - (2 I -F)
Peak 2nd pix. I -F 1
2
Peak 2nd pix. I -F grid coil
3
Peak 1st pix. I -F plate coil
44.5transformer mc.
44.5 mc. 44.5 mc.
T205
Peak T205, L215 and L214 on
frequency 44.5 mc. for maxi -
L215
mum on meter. Set generator
output for 3 volts on meter
when finally peaked.
L214
KCS109C & KCS109D CHASSIS - (3 I -F)
Peak 3rd pix. I -F
1
2
Peak 2nd pix. I -F transformer
3
Peak 1st pix, I -F transformer
44.5transformer mc.
45.5 mc. 43.0 mc.
T205
Peak on specified frequencies
for maximum indication on
T204
meter. Set generator output for
3 volts on meter when finally
peaked.
T203
4
Adjust 47.25 mc. trap
ALL CHASSIS
47 25 mc.
L203
Adjust for minimum voltage on meter
' - E IF 111 V
I V203
. L203
.,
Clk
zoa
-
7 aleCinallidial. Ao
.0
T2C8
e
V202
e T202
. .
Nee
..
t V201
."
." ., T ^f01
.----k)
GM
VI,,,,*'
%10, '
-
7204 (3 I- . 7203 (3 I -P)
L214 (2
v205
1.215 (2 1-0,
v2es
+
0
..
7205
II-F)
o
o
III -4 VOLTS 1- F BIAS
.t.i.f
DIREC PROBET
VTVM
\ 11
GROUND
TO CHASSIS
SIGNAL GENERATOR
I NRFo
F - O UT
7-
to
I
e c,., e
...-
.."
..
0
c
.
. e
0
... .
0
EI
.
V208
A
,
cx
.
e c at
e.
*
Le
0
47.25 MC 43.0 MC (T203) 45.5MC (T204) 44.5 MC
(BOTH
44.5 MC (L214) 44.5MC (L215) (BOTH
CHASSIS)
CHASSIS)
41
Picture 1-F Transformer and Trap Adjustments
TO OMAN. 7-12 STRAP ON SIB
MIXER GRID
I
D
,,.. 1500 MMF
132
VOLUME TV -14, MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1958 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
RCA VICTOR
ALIGNMENT PROCEDURE
17-D-8185 to 17 -PT -8072 Incl. 17 -D -8185U to 17 -PT -8072U Incl.
SOUND I -F AND SOUND DETECTOR ALIGNMENT
TEST EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS:
BIAS SUPPLY OSCILLOSCOPE SIGNAL GENERATOR
VACUUM TUBE VOLTMETER. MISCELLANEOUS
Apply -10 volts to the I -F AGC bus at terminal -13- on PW200. Connect across speaker voice coil. Connect to terminal TP on PW200. Connect to output of diode detector shown below. Set meter for negative voltage readings. Connect test diode detector as shown below.
STEP
SIGNAL GENERATOR
ADJUST
REMARKS
Set contrast control maximum clockwise.
Adjust Driver
1
Transformer Primary and Secondary
4.5 mc.
Adjust T202 top & bottom for maximum neqa-
bottomat T202 (top &
tive DC on meter. Set generator for 1.0 to 1.5 volts on meter when finally peaked. Peak cores
open end of coils (maximum core separa-
tion).
Adjust Sound Take -Off Trans.
4.5 mc.
Adjust T201 for maximum negative DC on
T201
meter. Set generator for 1.0 to 1.5 volts on
meter when finally peaked.
3
Disconnect the diode test detector. Turn off signal generator and tune in strongest signal in area adjusting volume control for normal volume (approx. 1/4 turn from c.c.w.). Turn core of T206 flush with top of coil form.
4
Adjust Sound Detector Trans.
Observing oscilloscope and listening to audio output adjust T206 clockwise to a peck. Continue clockwise to a second louder peak and adjust T206 for maximum on this second peak.
Alternate Method Using Generators With F -M Modulation Provided
1
Same as step 1 above. Modulate 4.5 mc. signal with F -M 400 cycle signal with 7'h kc. deviation.
2
Same as step 2 above. Modulate 4.5 mc. signal with F -M 400 cycle signal with 7'/z kc. deviation.
3
Adjust Sound Detector Trans.
Retouch Driver and
4
Sound Take -Off Trans.
for breakout
4.5 mc. 400 cycle F -M Mod. 71/2 kc. Dev.
4.5 mc. 400 cycle
F -M Mod. 71/2 kc. Dev.
T206
T201 & T202
Adjust T206 for max. 400 cycle output on scope using max. amplitude peak. Adjust volume control for .70 v. p -p on scope when peaked. See response below. Decrease input signal to minimum usable s. gnal and retouch T201 & T202 for symmetrical breakout. Response below.
0 0
0 (TCOOPREfis )BOT.
e
X
E AF
w i
V
s(
c, 1
)
'-r- .M1 ...I P i.
= V203
'
-,
V T206
el
1
.7-.1,,- 1-
DIODE DETECTOR
- (CBMWT ) - l_l
V202
3
ilk ...,1
'
CONNECT ACROSS SPEAKER VOICE COIL
DC PROBE (SET METER FOR
NEG. VOLTAGE READINGS)
AD
"
0, T202
v201
'1'4 .
.n P .
c',
0, T201
NS H '" '
-
,,,,...
-
-
-----
:2 St
0
.
0
os c
o
.
s
cc 3
'
D .11-
.11I
0. V207 ,
c
.,,^,;
0
-,
,,
Allini.ow
..... GND.
10 V.
I -F AGC BIAS
.44,,,
GND.
DETECTOR RESPONSE
(I--D
OSC I LL.0SCOPE
VTVM
SIGNAL GENERATOR
R -F 01/T
B.
AT
TERM "U
001 560K
XTAL 1Ox
560K
001
TOVTVM
TERM "E"
OF
1206
_
1
DIODE DETECTOR CIRCUIT
Sound 1-F and Sound Detector Alignment
133
Figure 26-KCSIO9A & KCS109B Printed Wiring Assembly
CAUTION.- LEAD Oen& OF SSTIERCONN ECTINGWIRES IS CRITICAL- LEAD* MOULD Si DRESSED AS SHOWN
e czo
AD
0 C2PoRi 0
L 21 3 11E7 7
0
C202
C 228
0
04
V207
GREEN BROWN
0
C 2 49
0
C 229 YELLOW
0
254
G pisss REO
4.w 44
0
COGS
0
nn
SEIF.3
rrcr.-r0rsr rrrrrr ...... 0 22222 22222222222222222222222222222222w2.2229222222 a 9 a 222 0
22-0. 0 <0 CO V 0, 0. GI
- 0 CO4O3 DCVa C4A1 4U1.
Ca
1,1
4-40CC4 ON.1C.O4
.14.4
1,1 N
01
A Ct.J.1 K11,1CO
-4 Cn A CO
O
AOo
°NNCI NO 1 0 to to to to .1 ,2
gotgolt4
D:0
CO JOU, A 41
t.4
O 01 01 01 40 CO -4 Cn
tati
tYl 43
N
tal. tao 4to.
22
O tO CO J
PJ umw6AA6lichiano,AiAitrioeloiabbilNb
co tWo to too 4.0 Co
A. A A I, J 4.1 .11. CO -4 01 Cr.
t .1 I .1
41
CJ
ND
C.4 1.4
01 Ln
7:1 2:1
r.4 1,4
1.4
.; .2 6"
73
tl
z 0
og5
MJ
BJ
BROWN
II
E AF
AJ BJ
CAUTION'- LEAD DRESS OF INTERCONNECTING WIRES IS CRITICAL- LEADS SHOULD BE DRESSED AS SHOWN.
BROWN
AD
A
CPR O 201
0137409
O C230 O
2ND
6211
C212
1206
NJ ROWN
BROWN 1212 C256
MJ
02200)
11215
R217
R 2
R2I3 T203
BROWN
O
0
06
V205
020a
3 O BROWN
4 BROWN
14.1
V206
C205
WHIT DJ
CO
0204
GND
40 EJ
O
0226
O
TP LIJ RJ C
PC202
J
232 0228
R231
C229 LLOW
GND
O
OND
O
C249
AL_ H
R260
BROWN UJ
5
NJ 4
0236
8259
LJ
BLUE
0 C239
0 C246 0
ORANGE G
11253
GREEN
YELLOW
0 C2AA 0
0M0 o 63 63 nA N
.0 "0
0 0 N n NJ NJ
1 0 C.0
-0 0 1 0
4 ,N3 1
CO CO J
0
8. u C0
r
t..1 NJ
n oon000noo00000n-oon000non-oonn00002 2 2 2 2 2 2 0 0 0 0 a 41 0 to NJ 0 10 0 NJ NJ 0 NI NJ 0 NJ LI
1- 0 00 J 0 10 CO J CI 1- 0 10 CO
cn
01
10.
NJ NJ C0 10
NJ N] NJ NJ
0,
do do .0. 43
t0 N0J. 10
10 10 C0 NJ NJ
do
C.3 41
10 CO
01
DJ NJ L0
(.11
10 4.1
to 1to0
10 NJ 10 NJ NJ NJ
10 N.0
NJ
C., .11.. 4.1 NJ
CO J
0 0 0 0 N no tO
to to (to-) to
a co no o ext tr.
O6, 0 m m n
m
I:1
to 0 no m m Ho M
Ca 10 10 .1%. da.
4.1 NJ
L.J
zucCrio 0a3. 0a to 0
- m 03Co ) to6
"1 "1 "1 nz
n,
m
01 01 0 0 0 0 'Hs
La EJ
110 NJ NJ NJ 0
)o.
001
0 o no 0
NJ NJ
"9 9"' 9 9", "
... - ............-. o o o 030NJJ30011030to3030:/MJ 10tt01Oo:1n0CWo/Ot00JO/30nCW1oI 0tOCo.I,ONc.W4n0I. 0t0o130N01J30N0-13Jo0t0oJ1CWOtO
to
CO
0:1W
NN J
CN0AJ1
NJ
NEn
to
C.,
030:1X030303..0%3M0303 NCJ., Nto Ln
CO
1.0
CO J 01 1a. .0. .11.0
10 to
In.' 34"
NJ 777tO:17to:176:317Ea:17no:17no:17NJi
43" N CO
C.,
-0
crLa, N A co
4to.1
to
Oa Of
0:1030,01.030:110011003030tO00to30to30to30to30t3o0:10,
,10
,o10
EJ
NJ 10 CO J 0/ N 41. W N- 0 -0
Cn
to
O
111 d0030131
A4.1 W C.1./9W9 0O. 0. - t--ri
Y 7 do
co
do
9
F.
ni m
"/
"1
"1
CI
rci
m
^1 0 "1 0 oro m 0 0 -1 01 0 la cco .0. (di C.J CO JD. C.4
J.. 41
-1
.0.
10 -NH J - m
11.0
m
0
NJ
0 0 01 0 NJ 10 NJ
1C0 O0
003 0CO1,C1O
S3
)13
CO 0 0/ 2
KRK44A VHF TUNER CIRCUIT SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
TUNER UNIT I
I-NTHF SECTION-KRK45-A
WIUt
F ANT.
CI TI -ANT.
.21011,1 j1
TGY RloR
uvI m
MATCHING.I CFR 1021 500K
TRANS
1
L C4.17002
(For KCSIO9A Chassis - VHF Models)
Clot
L5
F - 44
L4
CPR r 470 I
6661-1
OLT TRAP TRAP C2 TRAP 5
R ioi I
L Soo 1<_1
p TAoNT.
31-0
FRONT
VI
4C B6 8-F AMPL.
ce
TUNER UNIT
KRK44-A
I
T1
C18 ANTENNA
MATCHING I
TRANS.
CPR ri 500K
102
L cioz J
470
CIO 4 1 1000
SI-C FRONT
11.1 11. 10.
1L30
1L31
L32
L33
51- B
51-C REAR
129 L7S
127
126
L25 L24
.5.4 Cl2
330^
LOB
0.5-3
7
1010500
C9 1000
R2
47
R103
270
613c II
L.7
LB C13
82
R5 1000
HI- BAND
CAOUDPJLING
C 2G 1000 R12 100
C104
I -01
VI
V2
C24
3-4 L58
159 1000
arflr-11"
C3I
C1227
1100
.1.260
31-D FRONT a 1a 14
80.7
SI-C FRONT
it 13 e °
51-D REAR
o 3
51-C REAR
1.29 13 fµ
330
C8 45-3
C9 1000
R5 1000
VI
4CB6
R -F AMPL.
RI
I 4, 22K 'C10500
R -P
R4 39K
I I C7 14R72
A.G.C. R103
..1 3 270 4260V.
C10 1000T
C 104
.0I
FRONT L 38 136
137 136 025 LS5 0. 82 ,54
M141*.
C28
1.tiV 13 REAR
2 TP1 3
54
144
il R7
15K
°
R6 ".
150K 3°
e,
C20
10
1
31L60 RB
L9
L40 $ 2200
4!
1.42 1.43
157 t
6CGS
fou 8 MIXER
U1.1.1FP
F C 10
1.2
T R -F
C 30 1000
156
MIXER PLATE COIL
J1
Is.
9.
807 R7 TPI 15K
RG
150K
L39
31
132 133
HI -BAND COUPLING
ADJ.
5-I- VI
V2.
5 44
2.
C25 C24
118 1000
TO VI01-1
1000
LIOt
_ 811
135
47K L54/
1531
1521
1.51.13. C21
47
C18 FINE
TaUmNING
KOZT
1145 11.46
/L47
L48
1.49
FRONT AND REAR SECTIONS OF 51-4.15-C.D VIEWED FROM FRONT WITH CONTROL SHAFT IN I -F POSITION.
5i -A REAR
Rs 56K 1
R13
8.2L.11 -Hz 33K
2 C15
C17 -
0.5- 3
100
37
.5 C16
0
000
R14 100
-
C29
1- 1000
100
C14
VHF UHF
*4
T3
STINATGERE.
T,,R.P1 86022
$I -E PART of
c21 -;T 470
H
..J
UHF SECTION- KRK 64-E
C 803 1/c801
_ L38 -117
L36 1.35 L3
o
3
r
2.2
I C26 0.82 MMF.
L55 L54 L53,
1_52
LSI 4,
SI- A FRONT
L45 L46 L47 -.0148
C 19
TUB 51-A FINE
I2
t3 °
*
11
o
8°
CI71
42
.3
7
T
I
.4
vz 6C0.13 05C.
MIXER
C18 100
R10 2200
L 56 MIXER PLATE
1C_OI.L1 47C023 .21 000 C22 22
-C 8124
PZ)
0 6
63 *74
0,
c Ic
13/'
al: F-1-1
C813. MMF e.
L1110G
CR 801
K3D OR 9482.
MIXER
C50 4)
j4e3I
.r) (r80 2
C 21
47
t149
FRONT AND REAR SECTIONS OF FUNCT ON SW. 51 VIEWED FROM FRONT WITH CONTROL SHAFT IN CHANNEL NO.2 POSITION.
0
Figure 23 -Tuner Circuit Schematic Diagram
C
).r
C8 I0
5 801
0.5- 3.5 1 3AF4A
2807-1.5 2 0 SC
7
6800 [R802
cell 1000
8200 R126 12K
2806 1000
C8o5 22
COWS
1000
P801
1801
H,
1
I
EE 139 207 W804
CPR 103
1-22
-II- I 470 I
I
I
1 4-AAA4 1
R127
,_50011_
500K
I
I
R-VVV1-
1 C126 .1
I 470
CPR 104
TO 1 UHF
for KCSIO9A Chassis
The schematic is shown in the latest condition at the time of printing.
All resistance value in ohms. IC = 1000.
All capacitance values less than 1 in MF and above 1 in MMF unless otherwise
noted.
Direction of arrows at controls indi-
cates clockwise rotation.
NOTE: - The KCS10 9A chassis listed above is identical to that shown in the
large schematic in Figure 27. except for the tuner shown in Figure 23 above.
.6
Ip
n
ritirt V lk.;.1 Ott CIRCO"' ISLAILIKA 1 II. VIALTHAM ILL.blUVB toee riguria ion aswauars. A 14/101
vlol
17C D P4
VZ01 V202 V203 v204 4Au 6 41216 64454 6C u8
3 43 44 35
AD
C256
4700 I
V206 V207
6 C U 8 SAW/11.4
V2129 SCG7
,7208 64654
212 3 4 4 5 5 4 3 4 1
0255
AEI
T4700
PW 200
V201
4AU6 c106
SOUND, LI-F _167_1
7 202 SOUND
DRIVER TR.
4Dv2T026
SOUND DEC
4 Ism0 AuDio
T206
SOUNDTRASN OFT
0204
-I(
T201 SOUND
TAKE -OFF
TRANS.
7- la
S
iirC,F C200,7 Cir_L IE.
8 7
ik _
g..1
'ton' WWI;
r-c-ift-
1
II
1._ _ A_ _1
`n-`391111_9JC2os
_1.01 T
i R. 220 2
. c:02:00: 5:
KIL
R204
10 I<
R207
.01 T., 560
C212
R210 470 K
0202 R2011
.0471
567 47K120
4 ;Ws
C 208
.01 I
+260V.
RUEu
4260V.
C213
.01 1 yEL
V C214 .0015
R206 390K AF
vio2 Vio4
170064 17.0(467
2 ;Lirg
-C116 / .01
4760v
su6
f 14 30
1.103 CifoKE
T.
C125.4
SR 101 RECT
C115
'7SCO1f_M14_E_.(6_H5-.~6ifs,--4.)
5 ICI 0 -OFF
5102 INTER -
4
STI
t"
--o-L3OC.K1
I
ISY
6o",
SR 102
c 128 - 1->
SUPPLY
5203
1100 MF 1150 MF
RECT.
.047 1
6AOSA
AUDIO OUTPUT
T iof AUDIO OUTPUT
GRN
TRANS
6RN
W101
R125 1 MEG.
VOL.
CfaOmNTmR..
R628101
RED ELK
C125-6 T 20 1AFJ.
2
C125 -C
R121
2200
120 MF
To KW MASK AND METAL CABINET
CONTR. 1312KT. R122
470 K
I C119 .01
4260v.
LS
L202
1ST. Pot. I -F GRID
COIL
W103
0
40103
,s_ 145
i
L427.28531K.
TRAP
f
4,
4
C ,2517
Pi
1
oz-F
R I 0 S I
6800 AA
A.a.o. +2605.. ..."- 10
F
t VC-113
V204.4
6CU8
1ST. PIX 1-F AMPL
2 3
R22";2
L214 ST PIX. I -F PLATE
COIL
1.215 200. PIX. I -F GRID
COIL
4
C257
PRINTED
PI
gf
I2275 10 K
10218
1470
R 214 820
V204-4
6CUS
2ND. PIX. I -F AMPL
720S
1.3FRTRAO.PNixs
L205
C223 T470
C222
.001 I
R128020 1R(2m2o1o
CR201
V207-4
AB
R223 C226 7EISLE2'Mu70E18 AC 84° 1000 .047
8AW8A VIDEO AM PL
AC
9
224 (225
7
R224 6800
7
8
L208 390 IRK ORN- Sul
RIOT
R226 680K
R232
TP200
U
+2605.
R225 560 K
0230 R234 .033 33K
L709
120 MU 14 GEE WET
BLK R236
N
041:
1510
C228 C279
9
0.1
L210 300 0444 URN -WET
RED
1" 4 112237
R238
200 X 220K
BRIGHT
42005
R233
33o
B
R104 47 K
+260V.
7221'7
1.001
I °0' 13293
R235 5100
hY
1_213 30014U -N
R277 2200
u
R120
30 00
CONTRST.
co RIR
R134 3300
P101
cQt.
To
+260V
v207-8
8AW8A
V206- B
6C U8
V 204- B
6CU8
v208
&AGM
4260V. +102 vERT
rPC 202 .3 0323303 C323304_, I
SYNC. SEP.
C 235 .01
3
r-6v-8r-a°-9K<4.
R243
1 MEG
SYNC OUTPUT
9 8
2,---.."--11-9-11 R246 C238
22K .0056
V0E5R0T..
C.20317 I
.-1 C
.0047
R246 C239 C244 R257
A" 8200 .01 .027 221(
C245 .02,
R182K55
VERT. OUTPUT
5 6
IC247
I 102'
0
9,..OrUTPUTYETLR ,
If
1
c i113
' F
1
7714
.022
0 .... I
I
I 2240
w I 2.2
12 MEG.
Li -
R278 560K
-3444
R267 56K
T
I2 1
R241
MEG.i j
R244 C248
18 K IA7
R222
1116 8
22 K 27K C 258
R250
_
C.023492 H.ztst co.r It
o--4(
ALA/
1,
I
7
12117 IS 6 IGO
0
47 I J
U
4 260 V.
I I C250
68
C 236 82
11-4
R247 5600
R266 330K
I, - v209
'Iffe r 8CG7
C254 .001
II
0
root 1. 101 1 MEG HOP. HOLD
c2521122681 CONTR.
H
MEG.
R273 270K +250V.
5274
1.5 MEG VERT. HOLD
CO NT R
C427302
v102
I7DG6A HOR1 OUTPUT
T 103 N.V. TRAMS.
" L2I1
36407°010 C753 f SINE
.01 f WAVE
0.S
R41706 5
4
IC243 R 256 T.012 3900
5103 1NVX R2E11T,.
2
R25I 1.5 MEG
8259 R260 1.5 MEG.680 K7
VERT. LIN CONTR.
12113
4 7
leEi
C109 -c ill
2 1.105
120
BLU- RED
R253 5 MEG. HEIGHT CONTR.
1.104
...rm.
R118 22 K
11 C. 014177
17C D P4
KINESCOPE +760V.
3
R76
RMS 02491
R269 47 X_. 0--1
1.2
B2 14 .022 T
-4-
R264
C251
R265 330 3900
100 K
I ° 'C 107
a
R109 11110
15
8200
4.2
S
..I
24.,
I
-ii'liTH COIL
11111
68K
Ictic,'
0.,
5
°13ftI 360 I
N.K.RED
I GRN - R1231
DAMPERi241 to4
17AX4GT
I I
8:0-A 5 iso
a
fv>
150 I yEL
10C .124
F101 0.5 A. 260 V.
C108 O.1
II
CI20 0.1
P02 270 K
4.4.4 #131
i 0131
100K 1.068
r- LS L4 TRAP TRAP
° °
F. IF
TRAP Mq_
CPR 10IE 470 1
191Re(-1I 1 TO
ILSRO101OKI Ji
VH
ANT.
KRK46B VHF TUNER CIRCUIT SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM (For KCSIO9C Chassis - VHF Models)
TUNER UNIT
VHF SECTION-KRK47-B
51-D FRONT
SI-D REAR
LI
113
Ile
1.16
1.12
104
9.
L17
LII
1.18
LI
L le
tC130000
L7
51-C
L16 13
FRONT L25
L24
L2
It 18 0C-3628 470 MMF
1.2
LZI
r/W-1
C
5I -C
$,
REAR 10...
, -CII 270
cIs
C31
220 0.5 3
CI TI- ANr
18 MATCHING , TRANS.
1
v1
5B(17A
R -F AMPL
CPR 102'
I
l02 1 500K
I
I
I
L i;002 J
4-
R3
10
R4 I MEG
Cl F-85-2
2C280
RS MEG
9 R2
"RI
10 K
AA.
1C120300
47 I22o
C21 1000
6103 270
R6 1000 L27
1.28 1.29
1.3
'C8T
52 6C08
VI
58074
RT
100
5n4
S4
LS
L54
C22
I-.1.1000
1C003041
C104 01 +2805
TUNER UNIT-KRK 46- B
51-D FRONT
51-0 REAR
LS F -M TRAP
L4 1-F TRAP
_CR C101
LI
C2::_l_rinrr_j_<PCs
3 1.2
I
8
71 -ANT
MTARTCAHNISN.G!
Ciorl
:ToK J-11
1 SOOT%
.55v17A R -F AMPL.
1
L C102 _I 470
141
,ATNOT
Li
10.
1.19 L7
IS LIG L17
Lle
C9
1
C8220
o.C57-2;4;
RS I MEG
.A.N
RI
10K 1C102030 R -F A.G.C.
CG
220
mCo2o11
R2 03
0. +260V.
C
TP1 R10 100K
IOOK
C33 22
RIS SI-S 1000 REAR
20,1000
IR21
51-S IT FRONT n.
C27
1.37 1.38
39
L40
L58 1.93 L35
1.34 L33 R11 L520 3900 1.31
14
ez
.:*
41
J_C12
I t.°
L50
100
R17 15
C26
AA"
1000T
t LE/ V2
603.8
05C. 6 MISER UHF I -F ANIPL,
T2 CONv. TRANS. 1E- 1
1000
F1 L9 C31°9 1'4C'41814
51-A
R22
H
2, I
1 7 la
wwwww,
REAR
3
R19
82K
C IT
0,82 MMF
C28
L4 7,
1.46,
L451 L441
L43 1.42
C24 47
51-A FRONT
11.48 L49 LSO
'L5I
L52
IS IA
eo
17.
.7
CIS -
7
21C14 L4-
3*-- 0.5-3
7
10e
I *5 CIE, ,1 100 VHF UHF
RI6 R8 100 1000
AAF
c29
100 0
T3 I -F INTER STAGE TR. J2
1470
P802
A.G.C.
.11
51-C
1.26
FRONT 1.25
L24
L23
4
L22
818 470
321
rA7-03-61,i MAW TR1
RIO R,
I ¶D°K 100K
SI-B t I :4 1 FRONTu.
lo
9.
51-C IN m REAR 11.
_cii
X270
10.
R6 1000 ,L27
3
L28 L29
L3o . C to 82
V2 9C0.8
S4
R3233
100
VI 500.74
to4
TT, .01
S4
1.1C02020 -37c03010 -..To VIC"
IC 20
1000
1012 *2 r ?oci'
, 94
RI4
6800
C17
L
L54
t.5 MU -H
V2
6C0.8
052.9 MIXER
T2 Co NV. TRANS-
- -1 FRONT AND REAR SECTIONS
OF SI-A-B.C.D VIEWED FROM FRONT WITH CONTROL SHAFT IN I. F POSITION -
in 4 I
PART OF SI-Ak77-1
C19
1.9
51-A
10
FRONT
51-4 REAR
C18 FINE
-...,
TeUmNmINieGf
UHF SECTION- KRK 64-E
/ C309 '/---- 7.P'r,
I
/ _ ,,, A
CR 801
K3D OR
I--I-g IeCC:8r-8-'C3I378/120a4/.
_
o
-1
,,-
iN82.
1.806 MIXER
3I
.;,-3
--,
C/310 ."
V801
0.5- 3.5 3AF4A
C807-1.5
OSC
C803
C801 I
I
(4_ (74_28012
L801
CPR 103
1-C T277 I 470 I
I NW. I
L47 1.46
1.43f L44
L43 IL
L1.2'
24
47
14
..
.11L48 1.49
1.50 LSI
,III IN
tl.
.91
/ 4
8.7f /4's
CIS 7
0-1
R13 5600
452
CHANNEL SELECTOR SW. SI
FRONT AND REAR SECTORS VIEWED
FROM FRONT AND SHOWN IN CHANNEL No. Z POSITION.
C14 0.5_
3
Re 1000
CI3
/470
0-136 26G
Figure 24 -Tuner Circuit Schematic Diagram for KCSIO9C Chassis
The schematic is shown in the latest
(
L617g-)
R801 8200
13174 3--
C1000
R126 12K
2805 22
O
CC
3 H IC8i4
0.9 00 06
1000
P80
III
00 139 206
W804
I_
500
K._
J
-W-
I
TO UHF
I .-V";V01"''1I1S114N-r
C126 I 470
CPR 104
condition at the time of printing. All resistance value in ohms. K = 1000.
All capacitance values less than 1 in MF and above 1 in MMF unless otherwise
noted.
Direction of arrows at controls indicates clockwise rotation.
NOTE: - The KCS1 0 9C chassis listed above is identical to that shown in the large schematic in Figure -28, except for the tuner shown in Figure 24 above.
CIRCUIT SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM KCSI 09D (bee rigitte 102 11%,01U0%. 11.1111:11/
, 1)L13 5 4._dinrs_rnnWLZE2 Viol
ric OPA
1
V201 0202 44U4 4016
V203 0204
v206 V207 V209 V205 V208 6CU8 8.4w84 5C67 4C86 646254
5 44 SS 44 33 4
v102 3104 170464 124X4GT
2
AD
6412.54c 26;1_8
4700 I
/.'721
A E
...,,Lc 2.,,,,e)5
1 01
G c'
5116 18
AAI
L103 CHHOoKE
512,01 RECT.
C114 150 NF
RIIS 5.6
0715-eFF INTER -
Sw
LOCK
PW 200
V 201
4AU6 0106
SOUND 1-F 680 AMPL.
T 202 SOUND
DRIVER TR
0202
4DT 6
SOUND DET 4 1ST. AUDIO
T20G SOUND DET
TRANS.
SUPPLY
4 -
01254
X 5RR 102
6AGSA ' V 3
I100 ME VI/IMSF
EC T
AUDIO
T tot
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
c. 012487 I °---4.L--, SUPPLY
C204 3
1201
SOUND
TAKE - OFF
2
TRANS, +
6-
C20t1 39 I
2__1C203
.01 I
R2011 47K 1 CPR
f , :cJ C207 .01
CZ1026.-_
i1".
IF271_-
I
'-'`
7
Cln
Rt820°K9ET
2
.0O2003531
R82202
1R203 1000
R.204 10 K
C210 i R207
.01
560
C212 .047
5210 470 K
Ii
5705 IS w
u
u
+260V.
I C208.01
R 125 I MEG. VOL
C2OmNmTRi.
AUDIOTRA.5
yl
RED
C2102m5-F8./5.
Z
C 125-C
120 2.4F
.260V.
0
To KIM MASK AND METAL CABINET
CONTR
BRKT
v204- A
V205
0206-4
CR 20i
L207
V207-4
L209
120 mu- K
5237 200K
R238 220K
L202
1ST. P1X. I -F GRID
COIL
6CU8
1ST. PIX I -F AMPL
T 203 IST FIX i-F TRANS
4C 86 T204 6CU8
2ND. PIX 2ND. FIX. 3RD. PIX. I -F AMPL - I -F TRANS. 1-F AMPL.
2" 7205
3RD. RIX I -F TRANS.
SECOND DET
AD
AC
36 MU -A
7,1'72,-
5225
1000
C226 .047
1.-
8AW8A VIDEO AMPL 9
GRN. WHO BLK R230
on(
1510e
C228 C229
BRIGHT
CONTR 31
T
.20ov
R233
0216
W103 -
?
, 103'1
R 470 0I L203
15,146 2.- 47.75 515
C223
1.001
C224 7
S 0225 I
L208 300 MU -H
R224 3900
7
1,m, 8 f 5226
R.232 18K
9 0.1
1.210 300 mu -N Gft ,Orr
330
10227
I .00t
B ic.w4R172,103K41.. +2600.
10.39
TRAP
KED
R -F
C217
15
r a
O
-Nor e3
R1020702
.0020311
C427108 -i-
R26. -C219 R218 15OK T-ool 150K
C2221 .00471
.260V.
R221 13:00
tU 426ov.
TP 200*
R225
4 i -PC 2011
522
23500
680 K 5227 2204 R229 5230
15
1.2 MEG
+81
82K 820 K +0+1A+ 6 AN
,
2
3 __"11' 0230 R234
.033 33K
C
0Zo 1 .32 u - H
R277
2U600
4120 3000
CO2421257. CONTR
2200
O
A 0_1
R134 3300
2
R6181K9
R129 P
6CU8 1 MEG
v207-13
8AW8A
V2O6-B
U8
v2194-6
V208
6AGSA
T102 VERT
+ 260 V.
SYNC SEP
C 235 .01
, II-,----.-...---,w-i I . 4-1(4 I- F - 73 cIN C33:7
I
1
2
R68204K21
f
8243
1oMVEvG°
SYNC OUTPUT
9 6
R246 C238 2214 .0056
VERT. CSC.
C20317 1I
i C241 9 .0047
52491( --
R248
13200
C239 .01
C.204247R2225K7OUVTEPRUT.T
II A,..,
0245 5255
5
.022 , 18 K
IC2.40701
OUTPUT TR
5Lu r__YEL 11 I0 1 0118
5 117 15 0_
12221158
.AK.A
C 117 , .047
V 101
R22.1.0
47 I 26- IIII6f MEG.
1
68 - L r- ,-.-..] R278
AG
O
A56V0K
R267
56K
".V 4- 260 V
R241
R24,q -1-C248
/R224K5 V23/2K2
27OKi . 1
18%147
YU
12600
C 236 82
0256-1-
R250
M.8EG.C423720 I
0250 I
Ur< 0254 .00 i
1--1 5247 5600
R273 270K T
+250V.
5274
1.5 MEG VERT. HoLD
CONTR.
v209
8C 67
H0o55c1.2
6
? I(
0
V 102
-I-0252 T. co , +
1RM2E6G8I
1''
,. to,
HOR. HOLD CONTR
17D06A H05.12 OUTPUT
H
L211
0(
106
.-ri: \IVE .3
47
Tio3
H.V. TRANS
W92
.52225..V K4
00.15
1
1C243 T.012
R256 3900
-4-
4258
4.70 5
I
'1103
1X 2 B
N.V. RECT
TV'
2
KW
5251 R259 52001
LS MEG.1.5 MEG 6801(-
VERT LIN
CONTR
6 150 0
R253
5 MEG
HEIGHT
CON
1
I- NOR.
R 113
4.7
R,0 I 2 L.105
L1047 DEFL
-771.-T-74171001CIT71I2)0Clirr360 I'COKE
17C DP4
KINESCOPE .12600 72
: 4I° ' 3
e
47K
r RL.I.2.,2.6..1
t '
5263 C2491 T - I1-11 1.5269
82K 0221
C251
0
K
* 3" tt
12 2 6 4
3%201
I
r01,0,7. 010 11M0E.4Gt0.
C107
R109 5110
5
8200
e2
3
of
00o JC4OVI4?L?,4
RIII 68 K
IC 110
5.,;:i.1_,3,6,20 IPLO-RED -UK-RED
V 104
1
17,101,GT
I
DAMPER
I GRN
R13I
150 1
"R 24
6 ISO YEL
fi ts206 *12(
i00 K
10.1
C 124
10.47
105
10.47
F101 0.3 A +260V.
C 105 0.1
II
C120 0.1
5112 270K
51131 10131 100K 1.068
VOLUME TV -14, MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1958 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
"Tbe GLADWIN"
Models 14-PD-8053(U)-Gortset I4-PD-8054(U)-Ivory 14-PD-8055(U)-Cbarrool/Gold
14PD-8057(0)-GoldlIvory
RCAVICTOR
14 -PD -8053(U), 14 -PD -8054(U)
14 -PD -8055(U), 14 -PD -8057(U)
"Tbe NASSAU" Models
14-PT-8021(11)-Gray 14PT-8022(U)-Black
14 -PT -8021(U), 14 -PT -8022(U)
Chassis Nos. KCS111A, KCS11111, KCS11C and KCS11ID
14 -VT -8155 & U, 14 -VT -8157 & U
Chassis Nos. KCS111F or KCS11114 and KRS23A
This group of sets is very similar to the group covered on pages 131 through 139. Chassis KCS-111A corresponds closely to KCS-109A of the prior group; KCS-111B to KCS-109B; KCS-111C and KCS-111F correspond to KCS-109C; and KCS-111D and KCS-111H to KCS-109D. The alignment for both groups is practically the same, while other material is very similar. Important service material on some of these additional chassis is included below and on pages 141 and 142.
ROTA VERTICAL HOLD
ROSS VERTICAL LINEARITY
Rasa
5237 /
SIMON EEEEE
PW 200 PRINTED WIRING ASSEMBLY - 2 PE (ICCSIII a KCS111111)
L202
----0 IST. PIX
PF GRID
,0
V205
COIL
L203
AUGA05/1DIO
47.2511C_OU.T.P......UT
V2134 TRAP
-
1111
.. 1ST. PIX 1-F VER..T.....O..,SC.
L214
(§)
T2011
SOUND DET.
1ST. PIX____
1-F PLATE COIL
(c272S\
4011
SOUND DOT.
L5E5IS0. riK---(§)
I -F GRID
COIL rficoG
P 1ST. AUDIO
1202
..-- .
SOUND
DRIVER TRANS.
scut
402No. P12 I -F
&SYNC OUT.
L2 1 SINE WAVE COIL
V2011 11110
VERT.5A
OUTPUT
T201
T205
51113 P1X
TSOAUXNDE.01717F
TRANS.
BF TRANS
V207
SAWBA VIDEO 1ST. SYNC.
SCHOTS! KEYWAY I OPEN PH) LoCTIoN FOS IFINIATURE Tuass I
R274 VERTICAL HOLD
R259 VERTICAL LINEARITY
.1253-
.T
pW 200 PRINTED WRING ASSEMBLY - 3 PE 1 XCSIIIC S SCSI1101
LOO2
/0 IIS-FT.SPAIXID----"19
COIL
LOOS
v203
11.935A
UDIO
0 .1.21...1 T
-1
(c/974...ViNt
GCUG
.4,15T. PIE I.F
,-_, S VERT. OSC.
T:4).5..--@
I -F TRANS
i t
-...T 206
SOUND DOT. TRANS.
ITIS
SOUND DET. 8
FIST...A--U,DIO
T204
T202
21111. PF
0204
SOUND
DRIVER TRANS.
UCUG .351). FIX PF
&SYNC OUT.
L21 SINE
V208
SAOSA VERT,
WAVE OUTPUT
CO L
T205 3RD. P IX
1.11 TRANS.
7201
SOUND TAKE OFF TRANS.
0207 GAWS VIDEO 13T. 4111C. JI
nuP:1179.'1.0'Gnos FOR NINITuRE TUBES,
Chassis Rear View
r-
1
I
I
I
0
PS 200
0
PRINTED WIRING II
ASSEMBLY
0
( SEE BELOW
FOR DETAIL)
ill' ---
TIO1 AUDIO OUTPUT TRANS.
t'SVCOS) OSC./MIXER VI
R -F AMP.
gIFE
I
TUNING
EL./
V102 17 DIM
1101112 OUTPUT
FUSE RESISTOR
J 0'1
51107A
.....INIFCARMIPI.IITO
=
THi-:
V103,.
- N.V. 2
-
H.E.
- -
-1-
;
1
C114
L101 HORIZONTAL FREOIENCY
).) 0115
\-/ I Sv AsoluA
UHF 00C.
I
I'111
r --
RECTIFIER
VHF CHANNEL
SELECTOR
00 0 o
O 0 0
TUNER
CONTRAST
Ass, \
I
_RIESIS101
VOLUME CONTROL
OH/OSI SWITCH
UHF TUNING
UHF TUNER
140
O O
2 ,r;
ID
2, oCT
0 tffi
rt
ID p
ID II7C
V 101 1447 P4
I
a
To tuner Y
V201 v202 V203 v204 4AU6 ADTE, 6.165A 6C 08
V206 V207 V209 6C U8 84w8A 8CG7
V208 64654 I
3 ,1)122.).__(.,,a5 .. 1-71z 5 4 4 5 5 4 3 4 1
AD
C256-
C255
"el
4700 I
14700
:.
V 104 v 102
730v, 174846T 170664
8
72
R116
0116
1 .01
L 103 CHOKE
SR lot RECT
+57XLvY..-;;111-6-71-
150
1.i_._<IF
6 u5 5.6
SIOI 5102
", - ON -OFF INTERLOCK 0--->
V 201
4AU6 clos
1202
SOuND
4DV2T026
T 206
3
6vA2Co ISA
I CI25.4 C 115 ME IT 5"F
CF(11,40z
c 128
R E CT. <-**A.M-4. 04>7
=
= 411-I'70
PW 200
1201
SOUND
C 704 TAKE -OFF
3
TRANS.
-1I ____.._ 7
DRIVER TR.
5011Nm,DLI-F _Girl
-
-r 13
el
5
SOUND DET
D E T
4 IST. AUDIO5,0 TRANS.
2
C700,7 C206 = riA: ..F22(:".:79
4.
Le- - - - -1
czOs
7 C213 .01 ( .::>
0z0its
, GRN
2 R125
AUDIO
-71, OUTPUT
1I7;--- c2151 1 00331 1
6
y I
1101 OUTPUT
OATUUR
8,_
4RED. CPR 105
TO IONE MTG. AND METAL CABINET
Lf-Ii_-i -i9c-g_.g.-_,-11i .1
C52062
62011 C2003-I 47 K 1CPR
1._. _ _ _1201
.0.3q
8R22021t00 07(203
IR8 1
2K05
f R120 0K4
560 C217
.047 I
-..
C208 -
.01 I
467200KNOOK AF
0I
.
Z IA
i1-72
RI30 CONTR. BRKT.
6R82.11
0S .`ICYL-oIS-2zE.-.5:.O.:--F:KC-.:VW52L12-20_,-0_+_751060K0v.
R122 470K
sete7y^
0
rq
c
cl
SUPPLY)
lJ
IP
cn 4
ri CD
PD
In
1-3
CrIZ
CD
8 ff.
+260 V.
+260V.
R 132 330 K
O
0
co
n.
L2o2
1ST. P1X. I -F GRID
V204- A
6CU8
1ST. PI X
1-F AMPL.
L2I4
1ST pIX
PLATE
COIL
L2I5
2ND. PiX. I -F GRID
COIL
V206-4
6C U8
2ND. PIX.
I -F AMPL.
CR 201
v207-4
I -F TRANS ABVIDEO 1205
3RD.PX
SECoND PET AC
R223 le.1..62Htiy.E071. BLU 1000
C226
.04f7 -
8AW8A
AMPL
1209
120 MU -H GRN.wur
BLK R23E, 000r 1501(
3
R237 2006
R238 220K
r BRIGHT
CONTR.
*200V
.4hr
CAD
02
LJ
0z
R -F
4.G.0
W103
2
=15C-1140531 _
R0
i 47E220s H3c.
TRAP 4
I , C2I-7
p.,
IS
COIL A -w
7
2270 15 K
R276 220
RIOS
260V
6800
..W
1IA0A
11000
C231 .001
2 3
RB2
C257
t 2 PRINTED IC 218 147°
CgOl.
.4 ,275
:i$ 10 K
1
C222 .001
C223 470 R221
7 I 224 C225
L208 390 MRH
ORN 13L0 wHT
R231 68 K
C229
En
C225
9
C2271
.001
0233 330
R104
56K
26 o v
CD
C 10C.31293
C%1
LJ
C,
8200
U
+260V.
TP 200 R225 560 K
.7-2., 1210
R232-
300 Mu -4
18K r. RED GRN- wHT
50 +
R0120 1
CONTR ST CONTR
2
t,
r).
0
C230 R234 R235
A ()_,1
WE
.033 33K 430o
"7 / C 1211
IC?'
+260V.
V 207-B
8 AW8A
V206- B
6CU8
V204- B
6CU8
v208
6A0.5A
U
1102
VERT
(t.
SYNC. SET,
C235 .01
SYNC OUTPUT
R246 C238 22K .0033
VERT. 05C.
R248 0239 C244 R2S7 VERT. 22K .015 .027 186 OUTPUT
OUTPUT TR
E 51u
YE ,
RI18 22 K
cn
1
Plot
- PC 202 C233 0234
330 330 7
3 R242& 6243 6"K) 1 MEG
.041 .0047
9 ?(
0 10027 .0O211.25
C247 .001
'1t
cliff
.022
1
R117 VS _0_
0117 7.7
.047
v
I 6240 2.2
1
12 MEG L-i AAP
6239 R241 270K I
MEG.
_j
C 236 82
UtOi
6273 270K +260 V.
6274. 1.5 MEG
....... VERT. HOLD CONTR.
V 103
R251
R 259 R2G0
1.5 MEG 1.5 MEG 1.5 MEG
ISO G O
R 253 5 MEG
.... HEIGHT 1
14 ATP4
KINESCOPE
260 V.
IA
2 6
JILO
C254
.001
0L
(
.C002152
R2681 L 101 K."' NOR. HOLD
coNTR.
H
V 102
r7130 -6A HORI OUTPUT
T103 HY TRANS
I X 216
N. V. RE 0'. 2
R113
3.9
VERT. LIN
JONITCR _
.C.O..N.T.R..
DEFL YOKE
1 406. COILS L105 L
IA
cri
1
R106
1
.111:11.52:137
RED t 1000 T 56
C 107
YA.
C251 33U
B
5109 27
0.1
6110 2214
Rut 48K
C 12 2 120 g.
I C110
L 102
WIDTH COIL
3
039
I.
BLK- RED
v104
17AX4.GT
DAMPER
fe
GRN
R123 150
5124 150 I yEL
F 10 1
0.3 A
C 108 0.1
C124
R112
6
70,47
270 K
+260 V..
C i20 0.1
V101
V201 5202 V203 5204
5206 V207 V209 V205 5208
v104 v102.
14AT P4
4AU6 4DT6 6405A 6CU8
6(08 84w8.4 B267 4CI36 64Q5A, 17,40461" pDGELA
R116
To tuner
12
3 4 3 4 4 3 5 4 L212
44 55 4A 33 4 8
AD
C 256
C 255
AE
4700
14700
C116 .o1
18
426ov
L 103 CHOKE
SR101 2II4
RECT ISO HP
Rns
5.6
5101 ste,
ON -OFF
5w
INTER LOCK
PW 200
V 201
4AU6
SOUND HF AMPL.
0106 680
T 202 SOUND DRIVER TR.
4DV2T026
SOUND DET 4 157.411010
7206
SOUND DET TRANS.
T201 SOUND C204 TAKE -OFF
, 3 TRANS.
5 2
C207 .01
C12026_-
4I.: 1:117417212.79-
22054- - - - -
17.-4-1 - 9--J : -LC2011
7
39
.00331 -
1
- __JC203 R8220 :1f 0R02003
R704 } to K
C210 .o
/' I PR2011
5
C211 10
R209:11 180 Kw
2207 56,0
Cc21.3
R210 470 K
T
y C213 .01
7-I V
15020'I5t
1
R 206
100K AP
GRN
101
R125 1 MEG. VOL CONTR.
SUPPLY
V203
6A0.5A AUDIO OUTPUT
5
C125-4 C115 1100 MF 1150 MF
512102 RECT.
Tiot
AUDIO OUTPUT TRANS
- C 128 1-> SUPPLY
. 047 I
8628101
7 C175-8 T CPR 105
20 1.1F
ZA
C125 -C
c I20 MF
C129
470
R130 5008
L__
TO KiNE MT6 AND METAL CABINET
CONTR. BRKT.
R122 470K
C119
I.01
cci?
CD
bz
crq
--478 !CPR J201
4260V.
'U
4260V.
2.008' I-
8133 560K
1',121
2200
260 V.
R 132 330 K
c.0
co tz3
L202 1ST. PIX. I -F GRID
V204- A
6CU8
1ST. PI)C I -F AMPL.
T203
151. Po( I -F TRANS.
V205
V206-4
4C B6 T204 6CU8
250. PIK. 2ND. FIX. 3RD. PIK
F AMPL. I -F TRANS. I -F AMPL
CR 201
0205
5 EDCE0 rt.( D
1-62800 H
3RD. Pix I -F TRANS. AB
YEL-vEL 5223 AC 15" 1000
0225 .047
v207-4
8AW8A VIDEO AMPL
L209
120 mu- H
GRNWHT BLK R236 0000 ¶50
3
218
2008
BRIGHT. CONTR
R238 22.0K T
+2GOV.
0
Hi 1-3
R. F
wiO3
2 =150-1,4053g
C216
470 01
L203 4715 KC TRAP
/ Z1-7
COIL R270 158
R276 220
R272
C231
S 1000 1.001
O
3
R2 I2
'"' 47
.,..,, s 100 K
..AA.,
,0218 -
470 I
5
P1i1,Z$ 2214
680
Iv7 C221 2 .001
11-
22 17 1511
C220 I.00 1
22I9 680
IA.44
C722
.0047I
RZIG -C2I9 R218
1508 1.001 1508 -4 26110 v.
L205
C223
6
1.001
.2220 ISO
g,1J
f u 4260V.
'5 I C224 C225-
R224 3900
7
L208 300 MU -H
1P 200.
6
680K
]R226
pTzTo-1
R225 6808
R227 R2222084,,, R229 R230
1 5 1.2 MEG. 4.4.44
82 K 820 K -,AA.4-p,AA/
R23I C229 68 K 0.1
C2928
0.020 2I 711
R233 330
---; L 2 10
R232 f W 300 Mu -I4 18K ig GRN- wpir R-.- RED
A. G C. C 121
0.47 I
P101
.V1v- 0
R129 P
MEG,
V207-13
V206- B
8AW8A
6CU8
SYNC SEP C235
SYNC
01
-I
OUTPUT
_3 322330(-3-C132(3304
3 R242S R245
680K?1.,MsEvG
9
1 I
R240 R239 R24I 11 2
I 2.2 560K 270K
R244 0248 18K 147
228
MEG. I
PC 202
4 260V.
C 236 82
R246 228
2 3 4,I C230 R234 R235
A
.035 338 4300
0238 .0033
v204. B
6CU8 VERT. 05C.
v208 I
6AQSA
R248 C239 C244 R257 VERT. 22K .015 .027 18K OUTPUT
I
-I-0 27.1.;------rscr47-1 .0047 18022 5024425
( .044.
R255 18 K
5
I C247
I .001
u
TI 02
VERT
- OUTPUT TR.
BLu
L
1 : 1 5022
F 1 1.1
-'I.033 R249g
R250
C242 R254 15 K 5.056
72
6.8
MEG.
C"i32
470 I
0243 R27I R256 330K 10K
1.022
R 17 150
G
O
IS _D_J
R
C254
.001
L
5704.07
R273 270K
= 4260V.
R274 1.5 MEG
SEPT. HOLD CONTR.
V103
1X28
H.V.RECT
25
R251 1.5 MEG
.4444.
R259 R260.L 1.5 MEG 1.51466'.
VERT. LIN CONTR.
2M5GI3EEGT CONTR.
R104
56 K .4260v 10C.31923
3
2120 3000
R134 3300
CONTRst
00
cONTR. 2
R119
68 K
+ 260 V. 2118 22 K
.7-11-.
0117 'T.
.047
V la,
14ATP4
KINESCOPE
4260V
2 6
10
C!D-1 0
P
-
0 ti)
c .n C7) co
clp
(
V102
T103
.001
52681 L101 ME. I HOR. HOLD
coNTR
H
17D0.6A NoRi OUTPUT
H TRANS 5
DEFL. YOKE
113
3.9
r HOR. L105 L104
R41706
4
RED Ri00i0taT 5c6",
W1
R107 10 MEG.
8 108 10 MEG.
a R109 27
C 107 0.1
R110 27 l<
2 I1c2t°ize.110k00, ,
R111 6811
CII0 .039
BLK- RED
V 104
17AX4GT
DAMPER
,
GRN
O
R123
150
iliv1 8 R124 150 TEL
C 105
-20.47
F10 I 0.3 A
C 108
0.1
+260 V.
2112 270K C120 0.1
VOLUME TV -14, MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1958 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
CHANNEL SELECTOR
ON/OFF SW ITCH
-----5"TOMTTIEUME
MOTE ON/OFF SWITCH 5 CHANNEL SELECTOR
VHF FINE TUNING
VHF CHANNEL SELECTOR . INDICATOR
HORIZONTAL NOLO
BRIGHTNESS
VERTICAL HOLD
Figure I-Receiver Operating Controls (Remote Control Models)
CHECK OF HORIZONTAL OSCILLATOR ADJUSTMENT
Turn the horizontal hold control to the extreme clockwise position. The picture should be out of sync, with approximately eight bars slanting downward to the left. Turn the control counter -clockwise slowly. The number of diagonal black bars will be gradually reduced and when only 11/2 to 3 bars sloping downward to the left are obtained, the picture will pull into sync upon slight additional counter -clockwise rotation of the control. The picture should remain in sync for approximately one -quarter of a full turn of additional counter -clockwise rotation of the control. Continue counter -clockwise rotation until the picture falls out of sync. Rotation beyond fallout position should produce between 2 and 5 bars before interrupted oscillation (motorboat occurs). Interrupted oscillation (motorboat) should be reached before full counter -clockwise rotation.
ADJUSTMENT OF HORIZONTAL OSCILLATOR
If in the above check the receiver failed to hold sync over approximately one -quarter of a full turn of counter -clockwise rotation of the control from the pull -in point, it will be necessary to make the following adjustments.
The width and drive adjustments should be properly set, as explained in paragraph below, before adjusting the sine wave coil.
Set the sine wave coil L601 fully counter -clockwise.
Adjustment of the horizontal frequency control in the counterclockwise direction will show a multiple numbers of bars before -motorboat" occurs. Adjust the sine wave coil L601 until 3 or 4 bars are present before "motorboat" occurs, when the horizontal frequency control is rotated counter -clockwise from the fall out point.
CENTERING ADJUSTMENT
Centering is accomplished by means of two levers on the back of the yoke. By alternately rotating one magnet with respect to the other, then rotating both simultaneously around the neck of the tube, proper centering of the picture can be obtained.
HEIGHT AND VERTICAL LINEARITY ADJUSTMENTS Adjust the height control (R107 on chassis rear) until the picture overscans approximately Ye" at both top and bottom. Adjust vertical linearity (R112 on chassis rear), until the test pattern is symmetrical from top to bottom.
RCAVICTOR
MODELS 21-RT-8202, 21-RT-8425
21-T-8202-5-7 & U, 214-8265-7 & U
21-T-8375-6-7 & U, 214-8395-7 & U
21-T-8405-7 & U, 21-T-8425-6-7-8 & U
21-T-8445-7-8 & U, 214-8465-6-7-8 & U
214-8485-6-7 & U
Chassis Nos. NC5113A, B, E, F, H, K, P, R
The material on this page and the next nine pages is exact for the sets listed above. The 24" picture tube sets listed below are practically identical to these sets and this material is applicable.
TELEVISION RECEIVERS -MODELS
24-T-8325, 24 -T -8325U 24-1-8327, 24 -T -8327U 24-1-8335, 24 -T -8335U 24-T-8337, 24 -T -8337U
Chassis Nos. - KCS113M or KCS113I
WIDTH AND DRIVE ADJUSTMENTS
Set the horizontal control at the "pull -in" point. Set the width coil maximum counter -clockwise and adjust horizontal drive trimmer counter -clockwise until a bright vertical line appears in the middle of the picture then clockwise until the bright line just disappears. If no line appears set the drive trimmer at maximum counter -clockwise position.
At normal brightness adjust the width control L102 to obtain 3/4" overscan at each side with normal line voltage.
Readjust the drive -trimmer C109 as was done previously.
FM TRAP ADJUSTMENT In some instances interference may be encountered from a strong FM station signal. A trap is provided to eliminate this type of interference. To adjust the trap tune in the station on
which the interference is observed and adjust the F24 trap for minimum interference in the picture. The trap is LS and is located on the rear of the antenna matching unit.
CAUTION.-In some receivers, the FM trap L5 wall tune down into channel 6 or even into channel 5. If channels 5 or 6 are to be received, check L5 to make sure that adjustment does not affect sensitivity on these two channels.
143
VOLUME TV -14, MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1958 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
RCA VICTOR
21-RT-8202, 21-RT-8425
M sr=h cz*..' F 6 Tzzo TRAP
TUNER UNIT-KRK62-C/H
(KRK 4G -F
33 27 ot%4
M
NI
TRANS
Fit
L--+ TO r
51.0 FRONT
16
L19
51-D REAR
660.7A
R.F ANPL
RI IC23 RIOSI
10K 1I 000 161E6
12C260 1, 0.47
51.0
L
FROuT a
L24
RIE 470
1.2 122
1.2
0.64 ONE. TR t
RIO 09
lo100)5
SI-13 REAR
6C66
--8C2IA
00
C21 1000
T
v I
65074
61.11
FRONT, vt
L35
L37
1.4
L38
L33
1.33 Lao
'Ku L32 MO
L4,
CI7
CO
1.91
10
6 6. a
OSC NIXER
1.8
I
72 C067,11
TrR-AN-S
C25
51
Is
L47 , L46
145 1.44
L43
LAE'
L 46 149 LSO L51
C; *-1
5600
4
/82 C6449EL SELECTOR Svc St FROT MID REAR 5)40115viEwtO
FROM fIC11. AND 51000 11 <xAOXfL
NO. 2 POSLTIOn
1000 14C7I30
RI050 270
50
c10OI
,260v
1 P104
PW 200
C 101 I 3
OFFTTRAAKNES..
4.5 MC
2I:311 C203 39 .01
L_
D
R201
C202 56
V201
6SAOUU6ND --
1.PAAIPI.
082132
C204 3 0017_
0204 loot)
0205
16 11
C
E
.260 V.
r--PW 300 GRID 1-F
C127.
GRIO COIL
10
47001 A
'2,110°2i
R301 47 K
160
MC
L306
C301
IS I C302
10047
V 301
6C F6 PI% WL t i-FT. A 1.0C030437
T 301 157 PDX I -F TRANS 43.0 SIC
V302
6CB6 2,W11
2N0. FIX I -F TRANI I-FAMPt 45.5 MC
C308
"1Tfzro
-0306 OD ON 1.0C034077
R -F A- C
2603.
_ csoz
220
O 3%5.02
4W
1R503
6v
eA7
SYNC. OUTPuT
491v 050 82K
560) SR504
PW 500
*Measured with 1 megohm V2 watt resistor in series with meter probe.
The schematic is shown in the latest condition at the time of printing.
All resistance value in ohms. K = 1000.
All capacitance values less than 1 in MF and above 1 in MMF unless otherwise noted.
Direction of arrows at controls indi-
cates clockwise rotation.
Figure 27-Chassis Circuit Schematic
Diagram KCS113H or K
150 V.
426010--"R82IN01
PW600
OR -C601
0602 330K C602 66
7fg,
A605' 821
0110
6CG7
NOR. SwECP
OSCEICENTR
L101 NOR. 05C
COIL
C0.1407511.11C417308
RtII
10 ME
0104 VMO
sll
0607 3900
L 60 SINE NAVE
C6070 4 0609
4 68K C607
.01
330 E
0115
R612
9
DR
Con .1
2607
3 R IA6 5 MEG NOR. 1101.0 CONTR
.26C
SYMBOL NO.
C101 C106 C107 C114 C117, C118 C127 C138 F101 RIOIA, B RIO1A,B
STOCK NO.
102415 102416 77293 76579 104179 73473 77293 104295 104092 104294
REPLACEMENT PARTS (Partial Listing)
DESCRIPTION
CHASSIS ASSEMBLIES KCSII3A. B. E. F. H. K. P & R
Capacitor-Fixed, ceramic, 3 mmf., ±-1
mmf. 1000 v. N-750 Capacitor-Fixed, mica, 1000 mmf., ±-10%,
300 v. Capacitor-Fixed, ceramic, 470 mmf., +100
-0%, 500 v. Capacitor-Fixed, mica, 270 mmf., -..!..-20%,
1000 V.
Capacitor-Fixed, ceramic, 470 mmf.,
±10%, 2000 v.
Capacitor-Fixed, ceramic, 4700 moil., +100 -0%, 500 v.
Same as C107 Resistor-Fuse type Control-"On-Off" volume, picture con-
trol. Includes 5101. For KCSII3A, B Control-"On-Olf" volume, contrast con-
trol. Includes SI01. For KCS113E, F, P. R
SYMBOL NO.
RIOIA, B
RIOIA, B
R102
R102
R106 8107 8110 R112 RI16
R120
R126
RI46 T103
STOCK NO.
104922
104923
104834
104926
104088 100290 104089 102908 104188
104181
104187
104090 109236
DESCRIPTION
Control-Volume and picture control. For
KCSII3K
Control-Volume and picture control. For
KCS1I3H
Resistor-Fixed, wire wound, 1800 ohms, ±10%, 4 w. For KCSII3A, B, E, F, P, R
Resistor-Fixed, wire wound, 1500 ohms, 4 w. For KCSII3H, K
Control-Brightness Control-Height Control-Vertical hold Control-Vertical linearity Resistor-Fixed, wire wound, 100 ohms,
±10%, 7 w. Resistor-Fixed, wire wound, 0.39 ohms,
-±10%, ./1 w. Resistor-Fixed, wire wound, 4700 ohms,
±-10%, 7 w. Control-Horizontal hold Transformer-High voltage
144
VOLUME TV -14, MOST-OFTEN-NEEDED 1958 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
CHASSIS CIRCUIT SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM KCSI I3H or KCS113K
RCA VICTOR
T 202 ORivER 575';.2.
3202
6DT 6
SOUND DE7 AUDIO 40414.
C214.16
.171T2417
12
7
6 R207t 1C210
Ti OT
180
10
R 203 1000
C208
471
R206
R208 1C211 4700,. -Y.047
3R920009
203
-C2.09
4
B
R
0'
ISO V
C213
680
* C212 .001
RI01-13 MEG VOL.
con, R.
L R103 47I< C122 01
V203
6DS5
AUDIO OUTPUT
5
7
T 101 AUDIO OUTPUT TR. V
6R44
RED 91_11-<
R211
270
C 21-D
120 ME 7a02
C113 MP
+ 260 V.
110 KCS 113- H RIOS IS OMITTED
CCC122212124ISISISO.M00I00T23T23ED
Rat INSERT DUMMY FLOG P151,1 IN PLACE OF P1001-0 TO OPERATE CHASSIS WHEN KRK 05-6 REMOTE CONTROL IS DiScoNIAEcreD.
0303
iC B6
3RD Put I -F 4.00.
T 3o3
30.0. Pi X I -F TRANS. 44.5 MC.
c0301 2ND DET
C311 C312
.0.1 T.
R 311 180
ED
0047 473011
4150V.
L305
654u 19 1T04E. L
6149-15LU
YEL
C3I3
PW 400
v401-4
V401.B
6AW8A
VIDEO
4LT4R.50A24,, .
31*-4°..-*, *
01401.CRN
6AW8A
1ST SYNC
AM PL.
C
- 2711 ORR
0409 4-406 R41B
.027 10 MEG.
R402
C401 R409.0
:220K
3
0.11 IIRES
403 c402 L01
80H .01 30o Mu
R417
001 ORM RED
MOK $ 270
1.2
MAEAG,A
-
18422 0424 0423i
I 82K 820K 68K
6 R426
330
'Stop C404 Raoa L 4,004
27 6800
RAI
C405 0.22 R407 56K
oeu TEL
R410 1800
6405 54004,.. 0400
5
Oan-oRa 330
Gam
51;
AAA RAIN 0414 390K 2.24406
AN. 0415 27010
M L _ _ P__ _FA .I
0
FO RAH 150K
KO 1.-
260tv
171.014t"-;:gt
3000
SOV 4.2603
COW:
54 12105
R4.O4S1T8 r, 3300
R106 .4.1500 200 K BcRoIGNHTTRNESS
0504 .0056
v501- B
6CG7 VERT. OSC.
R608 0507 4-512 8200 .01 .027
V502
6C15
VERT. SWP OUTPUT N
TiOZ VERTICAL OUTPUT TRANS,
R128 CIIS 3300 .047
v555
2IC EP4
KINESCOPE
** 12
P151-0 PIN VIEW
** KRK 65-B
REMOTE RELAY CHASSIS
6,z5 AUDIO 5 REPEATER
7
1
3900
SWITCH
RI001 820K
S 21.0T
,1006T w,o,
J151 -F REAR VIEW
P1001-14 PIN VIE
so ,
T1001 RELAY
TRANS.
01001
Si. FE REL.
150- I 123
=s
R1005 K
VOL.
..=4 C01470
II OFF 1151001
51, SLLIC
sELECT!
12506 180 CSOG .0047
cso5
99,2
9
%IT T'G°56
1,-11
YE
3212211.C11G 221( 10047
42507( 0509 6.8 R 1.2
508 1c909 R510 05I1 4700
039 1.012
10.15
V50
72
1*--111 a
Is -K- RED
MEG.
MEG
4 1.1
OJ
A
0513 3900 OK 4 5
CI20-13
0132
.,FT" 34
P152-0 PIN VIEW
110.
9 2 m-
1
RII2
20 kW T 220
C141
.068
1.5 MEG VERT HOLD CON TR
C112
R 07 S MEG HEIGHT C0/47 R.
4R7100K8
LS AIEG
VERT 1_114 CONTR
6Vg<
4-260V.
R151 +269 V. 820 K
84.0 CUAISIS
J152 -F
2
0.1
GOAD
REAR
4260V
11
VIEW
R 117 -C
15,000
I -
V 101
600.6A
220194 00 N
1-o -AAA- 7103
0121 1000
1.104-
NOR SWEEP OUTPUT
C 108
94
C139
.0681
TRANS
R120 0.39
V104
SU4GB
9L0 -RED
1
4
V. RECT.
6
RED
:101.150 R
4
t 0118
6104 ¶51-
C II
R119
4700
48 60057
i t;.4 L10 wiDT2H CO,
V103
DEFLECTION YOKE ED
1
C110 0.27
12116 100
C 113 -
C130
0.1
L 107 -T.039
1.5 MU -11
6AU46TA;.:
DAMPER ,4:4'
0117 0718 470 470
RI73 0
YEL
l20400
-
4.150V
4100
49
en
INTUNCK
TO VHF TUNER SHAFT
L 5153
SEK- RED
5156
SRN btX
Fi01 0.30P
- P71:
144
I
0
1-
3 102 REAR VIEW
01120-4 Cr21-4, C121 -C100 ME. 10014F_ 2014E
I41C7007
--
Its:pt?"'
0260
SYMBOL NO.
C202 C203 C204 C205 C208, 1 C209 C210 C213 C215
C301 C302, 1 C303 ( C304 C305, 1 C306 I
STOCK NO.
102207 73960
104131 73960 73960
104132 104135 102231
103619 73473 78622 77252
DESCRIPTION
PW200-Printed Wiring Sound Assembly Capacitor-Fixed, ceramic, 56 ramf.,
±-10%, 500 v.
Capacitor-Fixed, ceramic, 10,000 mmf.,
--1 100 -0%, 500 v.
Capacitor-Fixed, ceramic, 2700 rnmf.,
±-10%, 500 v. Same as C203 Same as C203
Capacitor-Fixed, ceramic, 10 mmf.,
-±10%, 500 v. N220
Capacitor-Fixed, ceramic, 680 mmf., ±10%, 500 v.
Capacitor-Fixed, ceramic, 680 mini.,
-±-20%, 500 v.
PW300-Printed Wiring Picture I -F Assembly
Capacitor-Fixed, ceramic, 15 mmf., ±5%, 500 v. NPO
Capacitor-Fixed, ceramic, .0047 mf., +100 -0%, 500 v.
Capacitor-Fixed, ceramic, 470 rarn1., Ca±p-2a0c%ito, r5-0F0ixv.ed, ceramic, .001 mf., +100
-0%, 500 v.
C307 .C308
C309, 1 C310 C311
C312 C3I3
CR301
C402
C404
C407, 1 C408 (
C502 C513
C119 C131, 1 C132 (
73473 78623
73473 104177 78623 104178 79985 73960 100352 102656
104144 73849
103535 103536 104078
Same as C302 Capacitor-Fixed, ceramic, .001 mf.,
±-20%, 500 v.
Same as C302 Capacitor-Fixed, ceramic, 7 mmf., -±-0.5
mmf., 500 v. NPO Same as C308 Capacitor-Fixed, ceramic, 5 mml., 717.0.5
mmf., 500 v. NPO CPrWys4t0a0l --P2rnidntdedetWectiorirng Video Assembly Capacitor-Fixed., ceramic, 0.01 ml., +100
-0%, 500 v. Capacitor-Fixed, ceramic, 27 mml., ±5°I+,
500 v. NPO Capacitor-Fixed, mica, 330 mmf., ±-10%, PW505000v.-Printed Wiring Vertical Assembly Capacitor-Fixed, mica, 220 mml., ±-10%, Ca5p0a0cvi.tor-Fixed, paper, .001 mf., ±20%,
1600 v.
YOKE 6 MAGNET ASSEMBLY
Capacitor-Fixed, ceramic, 91 mmf., ±10%, 2500 v. DC
Capacitor-Fixed, ceramic, 120 mmf., ±10%, 2500 v. DC
Yoke-Deflection yoke assembly. Includes: C119, C131, C132, L103 to L106 Incl., PI02, R124, RI25
145
VOLUME TV -14, MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1958 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
SYMBOL NO.
C601 C602 C606 C608
LL
>z
STOCK NO.
DESCRIPTION
76474 76475 109147 76476
PW600-Printed Wiring Horizontal Assembly
Capacitor -Fixed, mica, 82 mmf., -±5%,
1000 v.
Capacitor -Fixed, mica, 68 mmf., -±5%,
1000 v.
Capacitor -Fixed, mica, 470 mmf.,
1000 v. Capacitor -Fixed, mica, 330 mmf., ±-10%,
1000 v.
102581 104400 104386
104395
109396 10062013 101138B
1006216
10114013' 109076 104522 104074
109520
MISCELLANEOUS
Knob -Brightness, vertical hold and tone Kncoonbtr-oCl o-mnatrraosotncontrol - maroon - for
ebony Models 21818202 & 21T8202 & U Knob -Contrast control - wine - for ma-
hogany grain Models 21818425, 21T8205 & U, 2118265 & U, 21T8375 & U, 2118395 & U, 21T8405 & U, 2118425 & U, 2118445 & U, 2118465 & U, 21T8485 & U Knob -Contrast control -taupe -for walnut grain, oak grain Models 2118207 & U, 2118267 & U, 2118376 & U, 2118377 & U, 2118397 & U, 2118407 & U, 2118426 & U, 2118427 & U, 2118447 & U, 21T8466 & U, 2118467 & U, 2118486 & U, 2118487 Knob -Contrast control -mocha -for birch grain Models 2118428 & U, 2118448 & U, 2118468 & U Knob -"On -Off- volume - maroon - for ebony Models 21RT8202 & 2118202 d U Knob -"On -Off- volume -wine -for mahogany grain Models 2IRT8425, 2118205 & U, 2118265 & U, 2118375 & U, 21T8395 & U, 2118405 & U, 2118425 & U, 2118445 & U, 2118465 & U, 2118485 & U Knob -"On -011" volume -taupe -for walnut grain, oak grain Models 2118207 & U, 2118267 & U, 21T8376 & U, 2118377 & U, 2118397 & U, 2118407 & U, 2118426 & U, 2118427 & U, 2118447 & U, 2118466 &
KnUo, 2b1-1"8O46n7-O& tUf-, 2v1o18lu48m6e&-Um, 2o1c1h84a8-7 f&oUr
birch grain Models 2118428 & U, 2118498
K&noUb, 2-1U18H46F8 d&iaUl knob - maroon - for
ebony Model 21T8202U for Tuner KRK64A
Knob --UHF dial knob - maroon - for
ebony Model 21T8202U for Tuner KRK-
64A-M1
Knob -UHF dial knob -wine -for mahogany grain Models 21T8205U, 21T8265U,
21T8375U, 21T8395U, 2118405U, 21T8425U, 21T8445U, 21T8465U, 21T8485U for Tuner KRK64A
Knob -UHF dial knob -wine -for mahogany grain Models 21T8205U, 21T8265U,
21T8375U, 21T8395U, 2118405U, 21T8425U, 21T8445U, 21184650, 2118485U for Tuner KRK64A-Ml
ut.
109075
104521
104073 104071 104072
104405 104069 104304 109303
104597 104070 104305 104306
109596 104401 109397
Knob -UHF dial knob -gray -for walnut grain, oak grain, birch grain Models
21T8207U, 2118267U, 2118376U, 2118377U,
21T8397U, 21T8407U, 2118926U, 2118927U,
21T8428U, 21T8447U, 21T8448U, 21T8466U,
2118467U, 21T8468U, 21T8486U, 21T8487U
for Tuner KRK64A
Knob -UHF dial knob -gray -for walnut grain, oak grain, birch grain Models
21T8207U, 21T8267U, 21T8376U, 21T8377U,
21T8397U, 21T8407U, 2IT8426U, 21T8427U,
21T8428U, 2IT8447U, 2IT8448U, 21T8466U,
21T8467U, 21T8468U, 2IT8486U, 21T8487U for Tuner KRK64A-M1
Knob -UHF tuning - maroon - for ebony
Model 21T8202U
Knob -UHF tuning -wine -for mahogany grain Models 21T8205U, 21T8265U, 21T -
8375U, 21T8395U, 21T8405U, 21T8425U, 21T8445U, 21T8465U, 21T8485U
Knob -UHF tuning - taupe - for walnut grain, oak grain Models 2IT8207U, 21T -
8267U, 21T8376U, 2IT8377U, 21T8397U, 21T8407U, 2IT8426U, 21T8427U;21T8447U,
21T8466U, 21T8467U, 2IT8486U, 21T8487U
Knob -UHF tuning - mocha - for birch
graM Models 21T8428U, 21T8448U, 21T -
8468U
Knob -VHF channel selector - maroon for ebony Models 218T8202, 21T8202
Knob -VHF channel selector -wine -for mahogany grain Models 211118425, 21T-
8205, 21T8265, 21T8375, 21T8395, 21T8405, 2118425, 21T0445, 21T8465, 21T8485
Knob -VHF channel selector -taupe - for walnut grain, oak grain Models 21T8207,
2118267, 2118376, 2118377, 21T8397, 21T8407, 2118426, 21T8427, 2118447, 21T8466,
21T8467, 2118486, 21T8487
Knob -VHF channel selector -mocha -for birch grain Models 21T8428, 21T8448,
21T8468
Knob -VHF 'UHF channel selector - maroon -for ebony Model 2118202U
Knob-VHF/UHF channel selector - wine -for mahogany grain Models 21T8205U,
21T8265U, 2118375U, 21T8395U, 21T8405U, 2118425U, 2118445U, 2118465U, 21T8485U
Knob -VHF UHF channel selector -taupe -for walnut grain, oak grain Models
21T8207U, 21T8267U, 21T8376U, 2118377U,
21T8397U, 21T8407U, 2118926U, 2118427U,
21T8447U, 21T8466U, 21T8467U, 21T8486U,
21T8487U
Knob -VHF UHF Channel selector -mocha -for birch grain Models 21T8428U, 21T -
8448U, 2118468U Knob -VHF and UHF fine tuning -maroon
-for ebony Models 21RT8202, 21T8202 &
U
Knob -VHF and UHF
fine
tuning -
wine -for mahogany grain Models
2IRT8425, 2118205 & U, 21T8265 & U, 21T8375 & U, 21T8395 & U, 2118405 & U,
21T8425 & U, 2118495 & U, 2118465 & U, 2118485 & U
146
Figure 28 -Circuit
1-0-41CMCUIT SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM KCSII3B, RCS 113F, RCS 113R CHASSIS
Schematic Diagram tiCS113B,F or R
(See Figure 27 for ERK46C used in KCSII3A, E & P Chassis)
V201
T 202
The schematic is shown in the latest V
PW 200
---r.201
6AUG
SOUND F AMPL.
DRIVERs 4.5 MC
condition at the time of printing.
All resistance value in ohms. K = 1000. 'Measured with 1 megohm, 1/2 watt resistor in series with probe.
SOUND TAKE -
OFF TRANS.
-I(clot A 4.5 MC 0
1
I
-)
,,.:-. 4,0201 k2.°0)3
j I LI 1 123_9
8202 82
C205 C20614: :11C207
t C204l1C2I5 3 *...71ti 680
R204 yy 1000
R11.2020013
'1?2 10'28
.01 T*
V202
6DT 6
SOUND DET. AUDIO AmPL
5
R207 180
I C21S 1412
1680 ^ .001
R427008K 10C42711
R209 390 K
All capacitance values less than 1 in MF and above 1 in MMF unless otherwise
1 #201
17E2
IW(5
C of
B
0203
4113
C209
1.01
oD
V203
1101
25.3
6DS5
AUDIO
AUDIO OUTPUT TR.
25.3
OUTPUT
5
0
120T C121 -D R102 1800
cB 10 MR
aD IN IN KCS 113- A /8 .1%.
R103 IS OMITTED 03 C02121221I5SO.M00IT2T2ED v..2 C214 IS 0033
noted.
Direction of arrows at controls indi-
Y +260V
+ 150V.
+260 V.
cotes clockwise rotation. PWn- 300
V301
6C F6 1ST. Pix
1-F AmPL.
wto3
0I271 47001 A
ISTLXV. i-F GRID CoiL
, 17302 A,,
10-160 f^ 1000 YCI02.111213(1
47M.25C1sco
bI C 301 18
C302 v 100,17
IC207,
R.F A. G.0
I -F A.G C
T 301 1ST. x I -F TRANS
43.0 MC
I"' R306 C305
R307 151(
R312 1501(
V302
6C B6
2ND. Pi% I -F AMPL.
T302
2ND. Pt% I -F TRANS 45.5 MC.
0303
6C B6
3RD. Im% I -F AMPL .
7303
30.0. PIX I -F TRANS. 44.5 MC.
CR301 2ND. DET.
L305
18 MU -14
GRN151.0
YEL
C311
-0307
1.0047
8309 3 660
C3I2 .001
1104180 R310
N PRINTED
ICOW3140i 7R3011
C309 ..,..-
.00471
r 260
y
+I50 V.
TC3513
LIID
r- 18 MU. H
GRN-BLU YEL
PW 400
V401-4
6AW8A
VIDEO AMPL.
L402 L403
4T+.5,AOMPRC.N3-O0OR0RRMN"
v401 -B
6AW8A
IST. SYNC. R409 C406 9418 271( 027 10 MEG.
A
R2204
R401 3900
C4°1 0.1
R404
MEG.
L401
fuga C. .4;3 2 3008E0
fir- _ _ __, -T 7= F-4 =331( F/.4 7
RE
12406
6 R426
330
R407 561( A4/
woimg,Trgr=
L405 5101A1 -H C408 ORN-ORN 330
GRN
As.
I
I R422 12424 R4231
821( 8201( 681(
1
COW
8416 R414 R415 3901( 2.2 MEG. 270 1%
Lm
1I 148-AAAI-P4-Wi.ool-AN13-
I
j
14
AAA
G F DO -AAA -0E R 411
.r.-1.C106
+2600 3R010010 .4
000 +1500
Si CRoANSTT- _- o 3R3I0O0S
omoom N
150 K 4.260V.
I R106 +150V 200 K
BRIGHTNESS
3 CONTR.
,
4 LO
C504 .0056
v501-13
6CG7 VERT. 05C.
C506
-.0047
R512 18K
9
8 C513
.001
V '05
21C E P4
KINESCOPE
PW 600
_B C601 82
R602 330K
vGoi
6CG7
10R. SWEEP OSC.f coNTR
12601
2206 R604
100 K
PW SOO
32
1
R 07 5 MEG. HEIGHT CONTR.
T 103
0.1
C 139
.068
1
TRANSN
5
R118 681(
+ 260V.
C110
0.27 I
R146
5 MEG.
HOR. HOLD
Ft01
CONTR. +2600. +26000..43-A"P4P-4
15,000 V.
DEFLECTION YOKE
PR6
RED VIEW
LItlV3 RT CtIP451"-"D
644 441
V 104
5U4G B
L.V. RECT.
4C71107 4C71018
RED 6101 YEL
81
8173 700
J i02 REAR VIEW
i_ +260* +150V 5102
LOB vgti
LOCK
a
C120.4 C121-4 - C121.0 - C107
100 MFI 100 MFI 20 M-F-II470 115V.604,
SUPPLY
VOLUME TV -14, MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1958 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
RCA VICTOR
CHASSIS REAR VIEW
21-RT-8202, 21-RT-8425 21 -T -8202(U) to 21 -T -8487(U) Incl.
TUNER DRIVE MOTOR (REMOTE CONTROL MODELS ONLY)
9101/R1010 ON/Cf F SWITCH B VOLUME CONTROL
8886888
liBing
B 9 10 II 12 3
5131 REMOTE CONTROL SELECTOR SWITCH
f'ZE ( T UNING
CSN'AVIIEL SELECTOR
-r--1
-L L
HORRI6OLO CONTROL
R1OB BRIGHTNESS
CONTROL
F- ISL"PIX
1-F GRID COIL
L
L302 17.51AC
TRAP
7.1300 P1CRIZ ED`A'rSE1:BLT
SC RS
Ze:
5D2 PI% IF -
3,41f...." nos s....tr,/ nos I
2110 PIA
3RD PIT
PANS.
I -F TRANS
I -F TRANS.
6CGT R. OSC El CONTROL
V/600 PRINTED WIRING
HORIT 03C. ASSEMBLY
C109 DRIVE
PW'®
ASSEMBLY
L
L
HOLD CONTROL
ivai
TIOS TRANSFORMER /
1,11,rae
PRINrtE?9,671RING VERT a SYNC. OUTPUT
ASSEMBLY
TRNSFORMER
J172 SOCKET
PIl2 PLUG
O
0
VI001 SAGS
0
2131 SOCKET
D
0
RENMOUKCITTROL
UIT ASSEMBLY
KI002
IVE"LING
B1001 ON/OFF RELAY
T1001 RELAY TRANS.
REMOTE CONTROL HE A
S154 CHANNEL SELECTOR
SISS ON/OPF SWITCH REMOTE
MODE
(Th
INUMMIIM A,C>
k
S1001
SwE rg'a °CI'A°11FNeE L SELECTOR
R1005
uYC CONTROL
Figure 6-Chassis Rear View (Tube Side)
148
VOLUME TV -14, MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1958 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
RCA VICTOR
KINESCOPE AND SAFETY GLASS CLEANING
The front safety glass may be removed to allow for cleaning of the kinescope faceplate and the safety glass if required.
Table models have a -U- shaped channel under the front top edge of the cabinet, in front of the top of the safety glass. Take out the screws holding the channels and remove the channel and safety glass.
Console models have a -U- shaped channel in front of :he top edge of the safety glass and also at the bottom edge. Pry off the top and bottom channels starting at the extreme ends.
Insert the blade of a small screwdriver in one of the vertical slots in the middle of a retainer at the top of the safety glass. Slide the bar to the right to release the retainer. Refer to Figure 5.
The bottom retainers are removed in a similar manner
except the slide bar is moved to the left.
CHASSIS REMOVAL
To remove the chassis from the cabinet for repair or installation of a new kinescope, remove the control knobs, the cabinet back, unplug the speaker cable, the kinescope socket, the antenna cable, the yoke and high voltage cable. Take out the screws and nuts holding the chassis. Withdraw the chassis from the back of the cabinet.
21-RT-8202, 21-RT-8425 21 -T -8202(U) to 21 -T -8487(U) Incl.
REMOTE CONTROL MODELS
In addition to the above, it is necessary to unplug the remote control unit and the cable for the local "on-off"'/channel selector switch. Remove the preselector slide switch assembly and the corner brace for the remote control unit.
-
- e 1
.
_......
0 PRY TOP CHANNEL DOWNWARD OFF RETAINERS
® LIFT CHANNEL OFF BOTTOM RETAINERS
0 SLIDE BAR TO THE RIGHT AND REMOVE TOP RETAINERS
0 REMOVE BOTTOM RETAINERS AND SAFETY GLASS
_...-.-...---
Figure 5-Safely Glass Removal
REMOTE CONTROL FUNCTION
SELECTOR SWITCH OPERATION
Models with remote control will automatically select channels when the channel selector switch is pressed. The channels selected are determined by the setting of the slide switches on the back of the receiver. Refer to Figure 19. To provide automatic selection of the channels in a particular location, slide the switches to uncover the numbers of the channels to be received. The numbers on all other switch positions should be covered.
The channel selector switch on top of the receiver or on the remote control unit should be pressed just long enough to start the channel selector motor. After the motor has been started it will continue to run until the next preselected channel is reached.
O
SLIDE KEYS TO COVER NUMBERS OF UNWANTED CHANNELS
0
plug on the remote chassis is prepared with two jumpers as shown in Figure 27. When the plug is connected to receptacle J151 normal operation of the receiver is obtained.
-0N-OFF- Function.-When the -on-off- switch (local or remote) is pressed, the -on-off- relay is energized and closes the switch that applies AC to the primary of the power transformer in the main chassis. The "on -off" relay is of the mechanical latching type and the switch remains in the closed position although the relay is no longer energized. When tie -on-off- button is again pressed the relay is energized aga n, the switch opens, and the receiver is turned off.
CHANNEL SELECTOR FUNCTION.-The function of the channel selector switch on the remote switch assembly or on top of the receiver is to apply 115 volts AC to the drive motor for the VHF tuner. The remote switch accomplishes this by momentarily closing the contacts of the channel selector relay. However, the contacts of the -on-off" relay must also be closed to complete the circuit for operation of the motor. Therefore, the receiver must be "on" before selection of channels can De made. It should also be noted that although the receiver may be "off" the selector relay can be made to -click- by closing the channel selector switch.
The tuner drive motor will continue to run after the contacts of the selector relay have opened due to the action of switch S153. The contacts of this switch will close when the motor is started and 115 volts AC will be applied to the motor through S153 instead of the contacts of the relays.
The motor will drive the shaft of the tuner and turn switch S152 until an open circuit on 5151 is contacted. The motor then stops on the preselected channel.
12
13
Figure 19-S151 Channel Preseleclor Switch Assembly
KRK65B REMOTE CONTROL CHASSIS KRK65B is the designation assigned to the remote control
chassis and includes the five -conductor cable and remote switch assembly. When KRK65B is plugged into the receptacle on the back of the receiver 115 volts AC is applied to tie 12 -volt transformer even with the receiver "turned off.- Refer to Figure 27. This makes it possible to energize the 12 -volt relays with the "on -off" or channel selector switch.
If necessary, the receiver may be operated with the remote unit unplugged. To do this, another plug (P151) similar to the
AUDIO REPEATER CIRCUIT
The function of the 6AQ5 tube in the KRK65B remote control
chassis is to provide a means for utilizing a conventional volume control at a remote location without hum pick-up.
The remote volume control is a part of a low impedance circuit that takes audio from the plate of the audio repeater tube and applies it to the grid of the audio output tube. The low impedance of this circuit prevents stray pick-up from the long cable of the remote unit.
The local volume control is located in the grid circuit of the audio repeater tube in a conventional circuit.
It is important to note that the full range of audio cannot be obtained from a volume control unless the unused control is first set to the maximum volume position.
A muting switch is provided on the channel selector relay to
silence the speaker when the channel selector button is
pressed.
149
VOLUME TV -14, MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1958 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
RCA VICTOR
ALIGNMENT PROCEDURE
21-RT-8202. 21-RT-8425 21 -T -8202(U) to 21 -T -8487(U) Incl.
PICTURE I -F TRANSFORMER AND TRAP ADJUSTMENTS
TEST EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS:
BIAS SUPPLY SIGNAL GENERATOR VACUUM TUBE VOLTMETER.
Apply -4 volts to I -F AGC bus at terminal -I- of PW300. Ground positive lead to chassis.
Connect to mixer grid at strap on SIB, in series with 1500 mmf. capacitor (see below).
Connect to 2nd Detector output at terminal -A- of PW400 using direct probe. Ground lead connected to chassis.
STEP
SIGNAL GENERATOR
ADJUST
REMARKS
1
Peak 3rd pix. I -F transformer
2 Peak 2nd pix. I -F transformer
3
Peak 1st pix. I -F transformer
44.5 mc. 45.5 mc. 43.0 mc.
T303
Peak T303, T302 & T301 on frequency for maxi -
T302
mum output on meter. Adjust generator output
for 3 volts on meter when finally peaked.
T301
4
Adjust 47.25 mc. traps
47.25 mc.
L302 & T2
(top core)
Minimum output indication on meter.
K
C 301 C311 ° C3I3
R 311
7 C3 ..IR 309 1.
6512
T303
6 5
4
L305
G
C 10
0
R3I° T302
3
0
L304
H I
C 0
6*
5 V302
43
.112307 ) 4I ill
Lra .03305 I.
R302
q. ----3,C4
- 4 V. I -F AGC BIAS
\ Q96 iri
T301
_
)
L303
Ck31j46
6 : ok 04 -
43
L33
L306
.1R301 ). 4. A
PW300 PICTURE
../LI -F ASSEMBLY
F7
C301
R3r."; L302 12_
Li
44.5MC
0 45.5MC
0 43.OMC
an
®R0440615
%
C407
A
.
.; . i
R401
a,. 0401
1
to0i
R426 R40
UR4o4 1 1
y CCM
IL 1
Ic
111
RCS
L403 R408
C403
H I I- c4o6
11- G
0L405 R407 Ir FI
R4I3 E.
R410
E1
Law
C405
DIRECT PROBE
VTVM
i.,
GND.
i
PW400 VIDEO ASSEMBLY
SIGNAL GENERATOR
I -F
GND.
Nit
0 47.25MC
T2 (TOP CORE)
00
c
a
T2
-
TO CHAN. 7-13 STRAP ON SIB
el
1500
41
MMF
Figure II-Picture I -F Transformer and Trap Adjustments
150
VOLUME TV -14, MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1958 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
RCA VICTOR
ALIGNMENT PROCEDURE
21-RT-8202, 21-RT-8425 21 -T -8202(U) to 21 -T -8487(U) Incl.
SOUND I -F, SOUND DETECTOR AND 4.5 MC TRAP ALIGNMENT
TEST EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS:
BIAS SUPPLY OSCILLOSCOPE SIGNAL GENERATOR VACUUM TUBE VOLTMETER .. MISCELLANEOUS
Apply -10 volts to the I -F AGC bus at terminal -I- on PW300. Connect across speaker voice coil. Connect to terminal -A- on PW400. Connect to output of diode detector shown below. Set meter for negative voltage readings. Connect test diode detector as shown below.
STEP
SIGNAL GENERATOR
PADJUST
REMARKS
Set contrast control maximum clockwise.
Adjust Driver Transformer Primary
and Secondary
4.5 mc.
T202 (top & bottom)
Adjust T202 top & bottom for maximum negalive DC on meter. Set generator for 1.0 to 1.5 volts on meter when finally peaked. Peak cores
at open end of coils ( maximum core separation).
2
Adjust Sound Take -Off Trans.
4.5 mc.
T201
Adjust T201 for maximum negative DC on
meter. Set generator for 1.0 to 1.5 volts on meter.
3
Disconnect the diode test detector. Turn elf signal generator and tune in strongest signal in area adjusting volume control for normal volume (approx. 1/4 turn from c.c.w.). Turn core of T203 flush with top of coil form.
4
Adjust Sound Detector Trans.
Observing oscilloscope and listening to audio output adjust T203 clockwise to a peak. Continue clockwise to a second louder peak and adjust T203 for maximum on this second peak.
5
Adjust 4.5 mc. trap
4.5 mc., A -M Mod., 400 Cycles
L402
Adjust for minimum 400 cycle indication on oscilloscope.
Alternate Method Using Generators With F -M Modulation Provided.
1
Same as step 1 above. Modulate 4.5 mc. signal with F -M 400 cyc e signal with 7'/2 kc. deviation.
2
Same as step 2 above. Modulate 4.5 mc. signal with F -M 400 cyc e signal with 7'/2 kc. deviation.
Adjust T203 for max. 400 cycle output on scope
3
Adjust Sound Detector Trans.
4.5 mc., 400 cycle F -M Mod., 71/2 kc. Dev.
T203
using max. amplitude peak. Adjust volumecontrol for .70 v. p -p on scope when peaked. See
response below.
4
Retouch Driver and.
Sound Take -Off. Trans. for breakout
4.5 mc., 400 cycle F -M Mod., 71/2 kc. Dev.
T201 & T202
Decrease input signal to minimum usable sig-
nal and retouch T201 & T202 for symmetrical breakout. Response below.
Move the oscilloscope to terminal "D" on PW400. Use the diode probe. Set the contrast control to maximum clockwise position.
5
Adjust 4.5 mc. trap
Same as step 5 above. Adjust for minimum 400 cycle indication on oscilloscope.
rOVUND
-'
BOARD
0ASSEMB Y _, -,::).
/4
. .
'
SIGNAL GENERATOR
. .
CO
4:111 T202 (TOP 0 BOTTOM CORES)
0
-:II' `11-../. I7 E .1
W , 20:
\(i''DicEE,Y,OR
e("w' VTVM
111 x.
'-ti T2'01
V GROUND
B. TERM'
XTAL
I
560
TO
VTVO5606
R207 AT PINT
. OF V202 ..E DETECTOR CCIRI CUIT
L402 5 MC TRAP
',:,r,,: CD
* umw 4
4D-_. :T
PVI 300 PICTURE I -F BOARD ASSEMBLY
4MD.
- i0 V. I -F
/AGC BIAS
- ,s, 4FWDC-....... J- .
-0. ;.
GROUND
P W 400
...
.
VIDEO BOARD
ASSEMBLY
V
DETECTOR RESPONSE
CS
I 1
-1 ." Ir...
GROUND
-0- 4.: II PROBE 4 /_* 2-7,
OsScCope
0
MaT
tgleSS CONNECT SCOPE VOICEAT
Figure 17-Sound I -F, Sound Detector and 4.5 mc. Trap Alignment
151
VOLUME TV -14, MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1958 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
RCA VICTOR
21-RT-8202, 21-RT-8425 PRINTED WIRING ASSEMBLIES 21 -T -8202(U) to 21 -T -8487(U) Incl.
Figure 22-PW300 Picture 1-F Assembly Layout
Figure 23-PIV600 Horizontal Oscillator Assembly Layout
The assemblies represented above are viewed from the component side of the boards and are oriented as they will usually be viewed on the chassis.
The printed wiring, on the reverse side of the boards, is presented in "phantom" views superimposed on the component layouts. This will enable circuit tracing without removing the assemblies from the chassis to see the printed wiring on the reverse side.
C405
R411
N.D
Figure 24-PW400 Video & Sync Assembly Layout
Figure 25-PW200 Sound -F & Audio Assembly Layout
Figure 26-PW500 Vertical & Sync Assembly Layout
152
VOLUME TV -14, MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1958 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
CHASSIS DESIGNATIONS
CHASSIS
TUNER ASSEMBLY
TUNER Sub-
assemblies
KCS116A
--->
KRK46K
MODELS
21-D-8281 21-D-8282 21-D-8305 21-D-8306 21-D-8307
KCS116B
--->
KRK47K KRK64A
21 -D -8281U 21 -D -8282U 21 -D -8305U 21 -D -8306U 21 -D -8307U
KCS116C
KRK67A
KRK46M
21-D-8628
KCS116D
KRK67B
KRK47M KRK64C
21 -D -8628U
CONNECT SEPARATE VHF ANTENNA HERE
VHF Qf
RCA VICTOR
MODELS
21 -D -8281(U), 21 -D -8282(U), 2I -D -8305(U), 21 -D -8306(U),
2I -D -8307(U), 21 -D -8628(U)
Chassis Nos. KCS116A, KCS116B, KCS116C or KCS116D
(Pages 153 through 160)
CONNECT SEPARATE UHF ANTENNA HERE
(.0
FOR COMBINATION UHF/VHF ANTENNA CONNECT JUMPERS 121)::13.- AS SHOWN -CONNECT LEAD Of COMBINATION ANTENNA TO CENTER SET OF TER/NNW-5
(1)
I
UHF
Figure 4-Crossover Network Antenna Connections
CENTERING LEVER
YOKE CLAMP (LOOSEN TO POSITION YOKE)
KINESCOPE
CHECK OF HORIZONTAL OSCILLATOR ADJUSTMENT
Turn the horizontal hold control to the extreme clockwise position. The picture should be out of sync, with a minimum of eight bars slanting downward to the left. Turn the control counter -clockwise slowly. The number of diagonal black bars will be gradually reduced and when only 11/2 to 3 bars sloping downward to the left are obtained, the picture will pull into sync upon slight additional counterclockwise rotation of the control. The picture should remain in sync for approximately one quarter of a full turn of additional counter -clockwise rotation of the control. Continue counter -clockwise rotation until the picture falls oat of sync. Rotation beyond fall out position should produce a minimum of 2 bars before end of rotation or a minimum of 7 bars before interrupted oscillation "motorboat" occurs.
When the receiver passes the above checks and the picture is normal and stable, the horizontal oscillator is properly aligned. Skip "Adjustment of Horizontal Oscillator" and proceed with "Centering Adjustment."
ADJUSTMENT OF HORIZONTAL OSCILLATOR
If in the above check the receiver failed to hold sync for one -quarter of a turn of counter -clockwise rotation of the control from the pull -in point, it will be necessary to make the following adjustments.
The width and drive adjustments should be properly set, as explained in the paragraph below, before adjusting the sine wave coil.
Connect a short jumper across the terminals of the sine wave coil L601 through the opening in the chassis. Also short the grid of the sync output tube, pin 2 of V501, to ground with a small screwdriver or jumper.
Adjust the horizontal hold to obtain a picture with the sides vertical (picture may drift slowly sideways). Remove the jumper on the sine wave coil L601 and adjust L601 to again obtain a picture with the sides straight. When the sine wave coil is properly adjusted, alternate shorting and no short should not cause a change in frequency, only a
slight sideways shift should occur.
Remove the short on the grid of the sync output. The horizontal hold should now perform as outlined above under
"CHECK OF HORIZONTAL OSCILLATOR ADJUSTMENT."
153
KINESCOPE SOCKET
POSITION YOKE AS FAR FORWARD
AGAINST BELL AS POSSIB-E
CENTERING LEVER
YOKE ASSEMBLY
Figure 5-Yoke and Magnet Adjustments
CENTERING ADJUSTMENT
The electrostatic focus kinescope is provided with special centering magnets. These magnets are in the form of two discs mounted on the back of the deflection yoke. When the magnets are rotated so that the levers are together, maximum centering effect is produced. To shift the picture, rotate one of the magnets with respect to the other. To shift the picture in the desired direction rotate both magnets simultaneously in the same direction on the neck of the kinescope. By alternately rotating one magnet with respect to the other, then rotating both simultaneously around the neck of the tube, proper centering of the picture can be obtained.
WIDTH AND DRIVE ADJUSTMENTS
Set the horizontal control at the "pull -in" point. Adjustment of the horizontal drive control affects the high voltage applied to the kinescope. In order to obtain the highest possible voltage hence the brightest and best focused picture, set the width coil maximum counter -clockwise and adjust horizontal drive trimmer counter -clockwise until a bright vertical line appears in the middle of the picture, then clockwise until the bright line just disappears. If no line appears set the drive trimmer at maximum counterclockwise position.
At normal brightness adjust the width coil L102 to obtain 1/4" overscan at each side with normal line voltage.
Readjust the drive trimmer C109 as was done previously.
VOLUME TV -14, MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1958- TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
RCA VICTOR
HEIGHT AND VERTICAL LINEARITY ADJUSTMENTS
Adjust the height control (R510 on chassis rear) until the picture overscans approximately Ve- at both top and bottom with normal line voltage 117V. AC. Adjust vertical linearity (R516 on chassis rear) until the test pattern is symmetrical from top to bottom. Adjustment of either control will require a readjustment of the other. Adjust centering to align the picture with the mask.
FOCUS An electrostatic focus type kinescope is employed in these
receivers. The receivers operate with fixed focus, having a fixed voltage applied to the focusing electrode.
AGC AND NOISE LIMITER CONTROLS The AGC and Noise Limiter controls should be checked
for proper adjustment at the time of installation of the
receiver.
To check the adjustment of these controls, tune in a
strong signal and sync the picture. Momentarily remove the signal by switching off channel and then back. If the picture reappears immediately, the receiver is not overloading due to improper adjustment. If the picture bends at all, readjustment should be made.
Turn the Noise Limiter control R140 fully clockwise. Adjust the AGC control slowly clockwise for a slight bend in the picture, then turn the control counter -clockwise approximately 1/4 turn (90°) from this point. Adjust the fine tuning control until the 4.5 mc. beat is just perceptible in the picture. Readjust the AGC control for start of picture bend, then counter -clockwise 45° from this point. Set the horizontal hold control as far counter -clockwise as possible (toward motorboat condition) without sync becoming unstable. Turn the Noise Limiter control counter -clockwise until a horizontal bend or shift in position is visible in the picture, then clockwise about 30° past the point where the bend just disappears. In noisy locations set 15° from point of bend. Return the horizontal hold control to the center of its holding range.
2I -D -8281(U), 21 -D -8282(U), 21 -D -8305(U) 2I -D -8306(U), 21 -D -8307(U), 21 -D -8628(U)
DEFLECTION YOKE ADJUSTMENT
If the lines of the raster are not horizontal or squared with the picture mask, rotate the deflection yoke until this condition is obtained. The yoke clamp must be loosened to allow the yoke to be rotated, see Figure 5. Make sure the yoke assembly is pushed forward against the kinescope
bell.
VHF R -F OSCILLATOR ADJUSTMENTS
Tune in all available stations to insure the receiver r -f oscillator is properly adjusted on all channels. Correct adjustment will be indicated by the ability to tune the fine tuning control on each channel from a condition where sound bars appear at or near one extreme, through proper picture and sound to the other extreme where the picture will appear smeared with poor definition.
Adjustments for channels 2 through 12 are available through the holes on the front of the tuner and are accessible on portable and table models when the channel selector and fine tuning knobs are removed. Channel 13 adjustment is on top of the tuner.
CHANNEL SELECTOR
KNOB
FINE TUNING KNOB
O
Gail
TO REMOVE KNOBS PULL OUTWARD OFF SHAFT
-OSCILLATOR ADJUSTMENT CHANNEL NUMBER
Figure 6-VHF Oscillator Adjustments
VHF CHANNEL SELECTOR
VHF FINE TUNING
UHF TUNING
Lmmmi-
6E08 0 SC / miXER
L._
VHF TUNER (ALL MODELS)
N.
6BU/A R -F AM
r- 137,7 - -
C102
LINK TRIMMER
1st i-F
ist Pi% 14 26 RIX
3ra Pl% I -f
GRID COIL
TRANS
TRANS
0303 TRANS
n
r02.\ 6CB6 5. PI% I.
r-- 60E6
AI
i-F
DE6 P1X IF
1.302 47 25 MC
LTRAP
181
PW 300 PRINTED WIRING PICTURE i-f ASSEMBLY
+r,
1, 061
41P1,11(,
veol
(
6AFAIA 44
UNF/OSC
UHF TUNER (UOHNEd)VHF MODELS
J103
0 0 \ TUNER POWER PLUG \0 0.1....,.111ACS 116 C SD ONLY)
F101
ALLFUSE
\ I
11
RI35 AGC
(17;12A1.\ 61.1 BA
AGC a
1ST SYNC
('1.;;;;)
6AW BA NOISE CANCEL
B V DA.S.2. AMP
1
(12.016ND)
-F SOUND Ff
ml
0201 SOUND TAKE.OFf TRANS
T202 SOUND DRIVER TRANS.
Pw 600 PRINTED WIRING NOR OSC ASSEMBLY
LEW SINE WAVE COIL
(1/711.) 6 C G / HORIZ. OSC.
I
L
111W 200
PRINTED WIRING SOUND El VIDEO ASSEMBLY
L206 4.5 MC
TRAP
6006 SOUND HET Et L_f AUDIO
M' T203 SOUND
TRANS.
0204056
6 VIDEO OU PUT
AUDIO23UT
y V103 (DEAAUMAPI GETRA
6
WIDTHI
1-103
-
TRAINS
PW 500 PRINTED WIRING VERTICAL a SYNC OUTPUT SSE MBLY
1
R 510
i
a 0....HEIGHT
'
I
V104 51.14GB
L V
E.a.....1FIEll
,(;;.) VERT
w, wv
LINEARITY
'
VERT OSE a
/..-V10-2'L
SYNC. OUT
I
I
t,G3GT,IR3G11 ENV RECT
VERT CUTPUT
\A.m."
/IL I
t DENOTES KEYWAY (OPEN PIN LOCATIONS FOR MINIATURE TUBES)
Figure 9-Chassis Rear View
154
VOLUME TV -14, MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1958 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
RCA VICTOR
® PERRNE IsISPRMG CUPS MID LIFT OUT SAFETY WINDOW
21 -D -8281(U), 21 -D -8282(U), 21 -D -8305(U)
21 -D -8306(U), 21 -D -8307(U), 21 -D -8628(U)
r
,
__...
---
® PRY TOP CHANNEL DOWNWARD OFF RETAINERS.
CONITIOL
TO REINNE KINESCOPE
REMOVE
SCREWS
BOLT/IMO MASA ASSEMBLY
s, REMOVE BOTTOM 121 CHASSIS DOLTS SLIDE CHASMS OUT FROM REAR
"AWS 121 Z C'v1F t'FTF".4 E TECL"
CHASSIS AND SAFETY WINDOW REMOVAL (Table Models)
® REMOVE CHANNEL FROM BOTTOM RETAINERS
® SLIDE BAR TO THE RIGHT AND REMOVE TOP RETAINERS
® REMOVE BOTTOM RETAINERS AND SAFETY GLASS
--=.
--"i AA
_,..--_---
....
SAFETY GLASS REMOVAL (Corner Console Models)
E20.3
C204
Ir.
5
0200 C203
PRINTED WIRING ASSEMBLIES
COMM
C2. =1
2.232
17
r RRIf
IIR2I8 R227
a it Ti'
5
4
?R.' C229
V?
7
I 0208
7203 I
A
U
Cal
Rt21 mimme
HS 7
ti Coq 9
I" C230
C213
lc
R2311
LriR238
C221 N,
I
EEO ( eta? , )
8237
ems 1203 =
C225
op
.23. 0228
I 1. 211 0215
-1-1R2 2
ce
ellX21)io _ 1'
DMZ H. 14
111"
0242
3
:227
L
10
7
4.1..R2 45 iIOR
PW200-SOUND. VIDEO, AGC & 1ST SYNC UNIT LAYOUT
PW500-VERTICAL OSC. & SYNC OUTPUT UNIT LAYOUT
PW500A-SUBASSEMBLY FOR PW500
P%V300-PICTURE I -F UNIT LAYOUT
The assemblies represented above are viewed from the component side of the boards and are oriented as they will usually be viewed on the chassis.
The printed wiring, on the reverse side of the boards, is presented in "phantom" views superimposed on the component layouts. This will enable circuit tracing without removing the assemblies from the chassis to see the printed wiring on the reverse side.
155
PW600-HORIZONTAL OSCILLATOR UNIT LAYOUT
VOLUME TV -14, MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1958 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
RCA VICTOR
ALIGNMENT PROCEDURE
21 -D -8281(U), 21 -D -8282(U), 21 -D -8305(U) 21 -D -8306(U), 21 -D -8307(U), 21 -D -8628(U)
PICTURE I -F TRANSFORMER AND TRAP ADJUSTMENTS
TEST EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS:
BIAS SUPPLY SIGNAL GENERATOR VACUUM TUBE VOLTMETER
MISCELLANEOUS
Apply -6 volts to I -F AGC bus at terminal "11- of PW200. Ground positive lead to chassis.
Connect to mixer grid at strap on SIB, in series with 1500 mmf. capacitor (see below).
Connect to 2nd Detector output at terminal "X" of PW200 using direct probe. Ground lead connected to chassis.
Disable horizontal circuits
(Horizontal Interference.)
STEP
SIGNAL GENERATOR
ADJUST
REMARKS
1
Peak 3rd pix. I -F transformer
44.5 mc.
T303
2 Peak 2nd pix. I -F transformer
3
Peak 1st pix. I -F transformer
45.5 mc. 43.0 mc.
Peak T303, T302 & T301 on frequency for maxi -
T302
mum output on meter. Adjust generator output
for 3 volts on meter when finally peaked.
T301
4
Adjust 47.25 mc. trap
47.25 mc.
L302 & T2
(top core)
Minimum output indication on meter.
6-.L. I-R33I206 -483,, F- i
C3I CR301
C2
Is
j..---
\s.
L
4 R.30, i_ 3046, 0302
R305 I-
SS'
L301
813011
0308
C 313
T303
L
2
i3
L305 0309
R0
-
13082
$
r3o2
*
8314 C305
.
T 30 I
-4 cA C37
0 47.25MC,
.*Ci°4 6
I0304 0 1
so ,--.,
L
-1-,,03'g..','-
\
7 C303 'I- - - 1.
PW 300
(T2 TOP CORE)
PICTURE
F,Yrj 13-Z
I-F ASSEMBLY
0 44.5MC.
45.5 MC.
43.0 MC.
r-)0 c)
I
T20
C202
C204
PIT
R223 I
3.
C2I5 Itto 11" 1
8204 C205
42. 3
122 3
5
C2 9 0246
lk 1
T202
r -A)
tl
j " 208__ I 1 __202
R205
03
(CJ i
I
R231RI
a C1ifil'
0230 6
4o.
L20
0,
.29
. Rf-F.J.
9221
11216
1
V
rt,
R2I8
I PC 201 C22I
e 7
/
5 6
1218 0215
I p I C209
c_1,
Li]
T203
(J
C.
1211
R2I
11
7* I
,
I'C214
Tri al 8237 I.
iJI2C1 8234 I
E
C228 11
.4 R236 ..I2, 1
I 1203 'III
0 1
12
R217 H7 21
1
ml R 213 f.,
,
.4 R241 im IR S.
16 1212
L 4.
1226
I PI
1---.,-, 1 ...1 R244 i.
4oi ,R242
2
"
C227
IRMO
.1 R243 I.,
K
R245
L2o5 I
NW' GROUND
-VT V1
'-,,,...
i
- -------i
PW200 SOUND a VIDEO ASSEMBLY
-6 V I -F AGC BIAS
SIGNAL
GENERATOR
ii-i iN
R. UT
GROUND
1111
0 0
[\Ili
PA
TO CHAN. 7-13 STRAP ON SIB 1500 MMF
Figure 14-Picture I -F Transformer and Trap Adjustments
156
VOLUME TV -14, MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1958 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
RCA VICTOR
ALIGNMENT PROCEDURE
21 -D -8281(U), 21 -D -8282(U), 21 -D -8305(U) 2I -D -8306(U), 21 -D -8307(U), 2I -D -8628(U)
SOUND I -F, SOUND DETECTOR AND 4.5 MC TRAP ALIGNMENT
TEST EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS:
BIAS SUPPLY OSCILLOSCOPE SIGNAL GENERATOR VACUUM TUBE VOLTMETER . MISCELLANEOUS
Apply -10 volts to the I -F AGC bus at terminal "R" on PW200. Connect across speaker voice coil. Connect to terminal ''X" on PW200. Connect to output of diode detector shown below. Set meter for negative readings. Connect test diode detector, as shown below, to pin 7 of V202 (see below).
STEP
SIGNAL GENERATOR
ADJUST
REMARKS
Set contrast control maximum clockwise.
Adjust Driver
1
Transformer Primary and Secondary
4.5 mc.
T202 (top 6, bottom)
Adjust T202 top & bottom for maximum negative DC on meter. Set generator for 1.0 to 1.5 volts on meter when finally peaked. Peak cores
at open end of coils (maximum core separation).
Adjust Sound Take -Off Trans.
4.5 mc.
Adjust T201 for maximum negative DC on
T201
meter. Set generator for 1.0 to 1.5 volts on
meter.
3
Disconnect the diode test detector. Turn off signal generator and tune in strongest signal in area adjusting volume control for normal volume (approx. 1/4 turn from c.c.w.). Turn core of T203 flush with top of coil form.
4
Adjust Sound Detector Trans.
Observing oscilloscope and listening to audio output adjust T203 clockwise to a peak. Continue clockwise to a second louder peak and adjust T203 for maximum on this second peak.
Move the oscilloscope to terminal "Q" on PW200. Use the diode probe. Set the contrast control to maximum clockwise position.
5
Adjust 4.5 mc. trap
4.5 mc., A -M Mod., 400 Cycles
Adjust for minimum 400 cycle indication, gen-
L206
erator output set to produce .2 to .5 volts on
scope.
Alternate Method Using Generators With F -M Modulation Provided.
1
Same as step 1 above. Modulate 4.5 mc. signal with F -M 400 cycle signal with 71/2 kc. deviation.
2
Same as step 2 above. Modulate 4.5 mc. signal with F -M 400 cycle signal with 71/2 kc. deviation.
Adjust T203 for max. 400 cycle output on scope
3
Adjust Sound Detector Trans.
4.5 mc., 400 cycle F -M Mod., 71/2 kc. Den.
using max. amplitude peak. Adjust volume con -
T203
trol for .70 v. p -p on scope when peaked. See
response below.
for breakoutbreakout. Retouch Driver and
4.5 mc., 400 cycle F -M Mod., 71/2 kc. Dew.
T201 & T202
Decrease input signal to minimum usable signal and retouch T201 & T202 for symmetrical
Response below.
Move the oscilloscope to terminal "Q" on PW200. Use the diode probe. Set the contrast control to maximum clockwise position
5
Adjust 4.5 mc. trap
Same as step 5 above. Adjust for minimum 400 cycle indication on oscilloscope.
00.
xr.,.
560
BA AT TERM 'o'
560
I
ro
VTVA1 001
ATiMERTM OOEf VA2T02
'-
DIODE DETETOR CIRCUIT
DETECT RESPONSE
0
TOP a
BOTTOM CORES
DIODE DETECT
VTVM
0
0
ID
V
GROUND
0
2.,.
PW200 SOUND B
VIDEO BOARD
" rjr,
T201
'A_El
J IX,
71
-11
a
C224- j
.2250 a6
X..
n
IA ------Fil,l,rlri,
ab..- GROUND
SIGNAL
*.`0'" "' GENERATOR
R204 C205
..-. CM
203
".1' i
C216
riL ri,Rve
.56 ,, LTILL,
C2 3
MEV
1
MIL aillikTh
"re A/111:323Mi
j . , Lil Liw ' 1;141_1 I
...Pc Y -
I -'
221
' /
, rk,-
0
OSC I LLOSCOPE
re
3 .4 2
1m
-------CD(VOICE x 3.
:ill cul
IP H i-riy cue
mf 323 t,i , 1203 Jill
_i..-------.
R2Il
-IR, .'?
4.5 MC TRAP
CONNECT ACROSS COIL
\._
;171 k Tun :l
.4 '') I;t I -I0V. I -F
C 211
' 1.!;
0212 Cm
IN
zil. i 1:13:2oll I .1151
I. R242
AGC BIAS
I * . '--''
UM
' 04., 41,
C227
_,,,,,,f_
I $
iFird 7
.4 R243 l
CONNECT
\1
OSCILLOSCOPE
Q.\ HERE FOR STEP 5
'',.._____
Figure 20 -Sound I -F, Sound Detector and 4.5 mc. Trap Alignment
157
TUNER UNIT -VHF SECTION
KRK 47-K
LS
LA
TRAP
I -F TRAP
hF .pROR..n
TRAP arth
5
CI TI -ANT 8 MATCHING TRANS.
10-P To VHF >--1=, ANT.
51-1) FRONT
10 T. 110 i
10 C.
SI-D REAR
C5
220
.'..0.-/C3341 -3
1
6B0 -7A
...235 V. R -F AMPL.
OV.
RI
C23
L19
IC 30 1000
L7 t
SI-C L26 FRONT 125
124
C32 1-2,
R18 0.68 470 MMF,
121
2C2e,0
R5 1 MEG
-w
RG 1000
127
L28
L29
gc,2c1,
.W
I" TPI RIO 100K 100K
I
SI-B
°1014
Ito
FRONT 10
9°
e7°
Il
C33 22
1000 REAR
L3G
LS3 L."
L3
09
La
04
911 La2
5
I- --3300 131
L41
-ACG12 WHOM.
LsGil
C27
1000
RIZ4 19
cm /C18 10 r7=18
Si -A REAR
R19
82K
C 17
0.82 MMF
147 E44/
L451 L44I
L43"1 42,
SI-A
FRONT
1_4498 7,50
'L51
12to e 4.123To1289
01
11.
02 C]l5
o
003411
RIG R8 * 100
08 16 CIG
100
1000
C28 031 MMF
C4274
t 152
VHF UHF
-11
41 4
FRoN2 ,11.10 REAR SECTIONS
-I OF 5IA-8C.D VIEWED FROM
FRONT WITH CONTROL SHAFT IN I -F POSITION.
o
SI:E 0
I-LPART of 51-A
T3
I -F INTER-
STAGE TR
C20 1000
-C13 1470 jz pe02
UHF SECTION- KRK 64-A
C809
Ceo8)14".. 808 /
4214-; FAL.
C813
Co0-.5) MIA-W44
C1312-1
G
1800
0"
C8 0.5 13.5
2,
v8oi
6AF4A oSC
z
CR8OI
K3D 0R
IN8Z
MIXER
C803
/C'18445477/
f C804i_) r - _-11
802
7
Z.
R134 820 CI33 C145
.03911'39
R -F AGC
.IC104 I 0.47
.T1
TO UHF
KRIC46K VHF TUNER CIRCUIT SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
(Used in KCS116A Chassis)
TUNER UNIT KRK 46-K
I-3
L4
F.M
1- F
TRAP TRAP C2
5
9911,--1 TRAP
CETa2--
CI TI -ANT
15 MATCHING TRANS.
PI
-11=I TO ANT.
2061
5I -D FRONT
t
t2
10
119
15 116
Li7 118
51-C FRONT 12
L24
123
L22
518
.470
3C"17)32
0.08 Mr4F.
TRI
i" RIO
100K
100K
F5R1-OB NTt,2 =v9 N
51-0 REAR
L13 112 LII L10
8
11--4
C5 1c 31
220 1034-3
6B0.7A
+235v. R -F AMPL
RS
L
a
T.14ME,Gz. oV..
RI lo K
IC 23
104-
10.100.47,
To 894200 -S
°34C-37C
220
117.4EG
128 L29 130
-8C2IO
512 100
C 21
1000
R1 52034.
+268 V.
8;/ I,C_01:95
y
C 20
1000
a°
L9 L47,
146 / L45 I 144
L43o. LA2 C 24 47
134
T2
1.5
v2 NTRArN- S.
C17
6C0.8
05C.8 MISER
CZE
4122+ le,
UII
13 00480'
O
I
51-A FRONT
..
3148 149
LSO 151
SI-A REAR
:
FINRETINu G r
.123,0 1280.
9
C15\
7
41-1
R13 5800
7
R8 1000
I
LA
C1a
isz
CHANNEL SELECTOR SW. SI
FRONT AND REAR SECTIONS VIEWED
FROM FRONT AND SHOWN 0 CHANNEL
N0.2 POSITION.
x-) iOT
1470
Figure 22-Tuner Circuit Schematic Diagram for KCSI16A Chassis for VHF Table Models
J1
@
NOTE: The chassis listed above is identical to chassis shown in the large schematic, except for the tuner which is a KRK46K shown in smaller schematic above.
The schematic is shown in the latest condition at the time of printing.
All resistance value in ohms. K = 1000.
Direction of arrows at controls indi-
cates clockwise rotation.
R8o 2 6800
9801 8200
C87)
1000 R148 12K
0806 1000
P801
All capacitance values less than 1 in MF and above 1 in MMF unless otherwise noted.
All voltages measured with -VoltOhmyst" and with no signal input. Voltages should hold within ±20% with 117 v. a -c supply.
**
.1103-F REAR VIEW
PW 200-A
C216
-II3
7 201 SOUND TAKE -OFF
TRANS.*OV.
1-7__i
r I L ---:"vDntiJc1013- _
- _J P1
I 56 L 4R72K011201
V201
V202
6A U6 - - - - I -SFOA11,14pDL
T202
SOUND DRIVER
TRANS.
6D T6
7203
SOUND DOT.
1ST AUDIO
ASMOPULND-TDERTA. NS-.C020112
-1
Y
5 "2" 2
C20
«Item tz
1504 C207 03. t.-54:1 12
41+215 v. 7 * -5 V.
I
1
ii't -- --± czos
.01
z .-
T
02I3 LI R145
I 680
, 2.2 MEG TONE CONTR.
W10 R103
14
**w104 82 K
1
R203 0208
1000 .01 I
L1_10
C230
2200
C215 1-C204
IC209
C2I11 R208 .0471 470 K R205
R209 j 390 K
680 11.0027
1.01
151(
6DS5
7101
AUDIO
AUDIO
_0,1 4 _ GRN r- V5203.187 ov.
C 214 1
ourpuT4.004.7
17
.197V. A'.
OUTPUT TR.
I3LU o o GRN RED C BLK
C.
R101-13
+8.2V. o I c,12M0F-.5T1.
1 1.4EG I
F1+1"FI AA R2Il
270
-1-2C0120-g
5R 300
CONTRI
I 1. mr+2,68,
E I
.Fl Iv .2
1?
LSIOI
- C414434 5
8 MF. N.P
**
LS102
.**
L5103
**
IN KCS 116 A/13,
VHF DIAL AND CONTROL
BOX LAMPS, .1103-F.
W104, L5102 L5103 AND
C135 ARE OMITTED.
IN KCS 116 C/D
C 314 IS OMITTED.
C 301 R301
ISIS1S27. KAN. D
C 102 10-160
V4IO2
268v ro PW-
200 B -S
+268V.
1R0014K7
C.081359 i
-w
yy
258V.
+ 122 V.
V301
6DE6 1ST. FIX
7301 1ST. PIK.
20 MF.I6DE6 7302 GC% 820 C121 -CA 1 V302 2ND PIX. 260.P1X.
V303 R144
3RD. FIX.
R126
7303 4200
3RD.PIX cR 301 I -F TRANS 2ND.DET.
L305
18 1111.11 0101-13LU
Lit0
18 1.1U -K I
G101-61.11
5 ISO5820L MU -H
I R-14
6AW6A,2R220303 V205-A.
6 v,2,00AW8:0A
C 329z
EC 22 6
8*
C314 4700
1301 1ST. I -F GRID COIL
I-FAM4P.1L 04+
R304
,471(
I -F TRANS.
0+230+.+ 125v. I -F AMPL I -F TR. I-FAMPL
E
128V.
5
*OV. 5
7
7
L302 47.25
OVl
471< - 4
Tv/
R305 820
47041
R306 10305 150 K 1.001 RN4
2 1-37 -C312
3
.001
MC. olv IR308t R303 R302 R307?C306-
IC *3:1
150 56
100K 15
2,7c .001
18
L303
II C308 .001
R309 820 N D L304
8310 C310 180 T.001
ov
TEL
KL
0311
I50313
YEL
CANCELLATION
AM
R226 3 IAS 27K 2
L201
9
2R50IzTAR__:
C222 .01 al
I
R 228 -°C.1:6224826
6229; 2200
2ZOK
10001
AA 6230 180
0.1
C302
T0047
C30 1 .00473
0307 -
.0047
OH
C309 .0047
PW 300
I w0 3R32K25$C0.22223
I
R239 82K
L203
300 MU -H
0101.131.X8LK
-F AGC
,Af
+4.44.
R142 1000
100.04c7 6R.81M4E9G.
+268V. X
3 .71.
R140
2 MEG.
T _
0.01146
NOISE LIM. -4-
L205
V206
120 MU it
6A GSA VIDEO
8RN- RE O
13 1-K C227
OUTPUT
0.1
0
5 +166v R242 R243
3600 6800 .2515
L R244
470 IS
R241 6800
L204 _
120 MU-li 812N -RED
R245
BLK
330
TO
HEATERS
14
3
R101-4 1500 CONTRAST
R6I8o0S
C120 -C
130 kW.
O
V204 -A R212
6U8A 3908
R2I7 5.6
MEG
AGC R2I5 R2I4
RECT 47K
2201(
G .3"6219 C218 R2I3
33 K
100K
ro39
V 204-B
6U8A
6221 IST. SYNC 1 MEG. AmPL.
r ',N....192 -.3 CUD 12222-.1 330 1 MEG I .3
8216 220K AAfr
4
5
C. 02117i
+251,7
AA
IRV2Y20 +122V.
-R218
39/4
55K
ov PW 200- B
3`- 2
70 00
R223
270K
1
1
R224 C2I9 I 1.2 330 1
MEG.
PC ZOI_I
R135
RI36
8143
500 K
AGC CONTR.
270 K
+268V.
270
=1C3102M1-F13.
PW 600
B
-CGol
[0 33
C602 100
-9 3V.
V 601
6CG7
140812.0SC.
71"1111602
°3 CM
3300611 5601( IE0 . , 8606
270 K
C605
10.33
8611
1111 56K
6610
68K
Figure 30 -Circuit +26" Schematic Diagram
KCSI1613 Chassis
R146 40 K NOR. HOLD 3 CONTR.
V501- A
C502 6CG7-
PW 500-A
V501- 8
6C G7
FT D
R5°02270_0,220
SYNC. OUTPUT
cs<so rzsos C. .0047 8200 .01
I
VERT.
0 SC
I
R51 22
r_Tc055051f Mkt f1110,,4
R105°K3
2 0. V
1585 Rz520x5
..,
9
1 ....c.,!.73
co5A
;22 K
0 ,.148 V.
:-115;3499
- -
$ T
[T5050155 -0o500369
.1,,,,,.RC. 1 R515 J
,.
Hc.052:73
2
CSIII0 :R515 .022 (4701(
6510 5 MEG HEIGHT
C512 0.1
V502 4
PW 500
MEGVERT. UN. 59°°12-50/ 6.8
R509 R516 125I7 1.2 MEG. 1.5 MEG 6801(
A
6vc51076
E H0
VERT.
OUTPLIT-t,
9 +2474505015p
3
+270V L
C05.11
-,-_ .0054176
T
12520 3300
tic
R25221.
G 0.1
2
R
8R 50
OUTPUT
T
BLu
R114
I
Iso
I
I
L RED
0136 0.1
Ett
.40V
4 ' 0168
0
11)8
L3
0
*4
46.14
23
VHLAFMDPAL® - LCAOMNTRP. BOX
V102
RIIO
8109
1.5 MEG VERT. HOLD
820 K +268V
1636T/1636T
VIOI
6DG6A NOR17 OUTPUT
7103 H.V.TRANS
RECT
1000
+ 16.200V.
+268V.
R141 2201( 10G
2200K +268V. 8RIGHTm
CoMT R. r
4268V.
V105
210EP4
KINESCOPE
FO
V 104
R13
R:20
C608 470
I
560K9 F0
RIIS 47 -73y
160V.
4
-4 4
12612 0109
I MEG
7
(
-0
0
C56°609
70-160
- .12v
T C110 -L 0.27 T"
7
li-* .-'51 Mr: 7
:7_
RUG 100
C--,.'.,";
f
6R8I1090
o.4 L102 .....? 8
V103
6DAA.UP4E6RTA
I
4-
-111
T
0.F31A0M1 P.
C 113 10-110.1
+261;0:744
DEFLECTION YOKE
.01 11 270
+B BOOST
P102-14 PIN VIEW
0137 C117 220 470
I R123 J102F
4700 REAR
VIEW .4
C130
.033
+281V
RECT. TEL 6RNASL RED
C120 A 100 14F
L108
RED,YEL
RED-GRN 102 F103
IF -4t C121-4
C417108
100 MF. +248V.
FI04 x
7 104
RED -BUS
811
5101 OH -OFF SW
E127 820K
5102 INTLK.
115V. 60. SUPPLY
KRK67B (KRK47M/64C) UHF/VHF TUNER (Used in KCSI I6D Chassis)
TUNER UNIT KRK 67-B
14
Li
TRAP =h. m
I- F
I
T1_11..P TRAP C2
...17014-n
5
VHF SECTION- KRK 47-M
TI- ANT
1
>)-1=, TO V N F >-CD ANT.
KRK67A (KRK46M) VHF TUNER CIRCUIT SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
(Used with KCS1I6C Chassis)
SI-D
FRONT
2 l0 1.;.,
100 9°
1.19
LIG L18
51-D REAR
MATCHING TRANS.
CV. RI 10 K SA.
I C25 1000 AGC
GR.N C 104
10.47
PI03.N PIN
TUNER UNIT-KRK 67-A ( KRK 46-M)
5I -D FRONT
SI- D REAR
LS
F
TRAP TRAP C2 5
LI _p
TRAP 0.}
1
TI -ANT ri
B MATCHING
TRANS.
(-A
CS
220
7-.''0C.3314-3
vi 6BC1.7A
+235v R -F AMPL
PI TO
CANT.
IC 30 1000
SI-C L26
FRONT 125
124
T
125
C32 L224
R18 0.GO 470 MMF.
121
"vv--) I
C7
0.34-3
L27 L28 L29 L30
VIEW
RIA4 820
C155
CI45
.039 T T.39
15 LIG Lt7 118
.LI4
113
L12
111
L10
C9
0.34-3
1200
L6
00
2
C 2 3
P103-14 PIN VIEW
R 134
820
TPI RIOC OK
R9 100K
2233
F2 .5 1000
51REAR
C20 1000
SI-C FRONT L25
124
L23
51-C it is
REAR ue 28
VI 680.7A
C133I 0145
.03911.039
;4". T
T2
RIB 470
122 L2I
L29 L30
C27
1000
114 L9 t
I
L
R19
82K
L4G/
L451
--I0C.8F2I MMF
L441 L43R'
C28 0.91 MMF
C24 47
FRONT AND REAR SECTIONS OF 51A -B -C -D VIEWED FROM FRONT WITH CONTROL SHAFT IN I -F POSITION.
41 156}
V2
6C0.8
osc
1L8 -1570
L CONV. TRANS.
C25 51
UHF I -F AMPL 4122V.
51-4
2489.
2K7 !0 AEI
.21
REAR
Ile
1+123 To 1289
- CIS
.3
E4
8 09too
CI4 R25 4701.-. C6:6
,
9°
.4
.2 RIG + 100
C29 11000
:5 CIG 100 I
-C13
VHF UHF
4.11Y.7,:!..
T3
1470
ro- - 4. 4
51.TFAIGNETETF2R-
.T2 P802 i c4=1s,
C 35 1000
PART OF ,/-J
UHF SECTION- KRKG4-C
C809
C:08
0C.5 gM'l6AaW3.04/IyT/
L8O6
9-Cc81)2H-1-i.
?-141r-SZT, 9801
6AF4A C.58-13. 5
osc.
C807 2
1.5
CR801
K3009 I IN82
MIXER
C803 /C801 / -VI 1
ceoll ti qao2
15150 3L. O111AF
LAMP
TO UHF ANT.
C
TRI0.6.8WMMF
RIO
SI- B
100K -t01090K
SI-B
. Tts 1,1
17.
REAR L3
FRONT,
}LB
T2
)N V.
12
- 7 TRANS.
lv
()SC{ MIXER 4122
C 25 51
L9
SI-4
FRONT
L47, ,3N
L4G
L451
CIg R7
B
I
a 2.7H I
+1229.
JI
43.N.
I
C14 RZ 0--334 470 1 H6.-8
C 35 1000
L441 1431
L42'
C 24 47
L49 150 151
5
RI3
5600
1152
CHANNEL SELECTOR SW. Si FRONT ANO REAR SECTIONS 91EVIED FROM FRONT AND SHOWN IN CHANNEL 50.2 POSITION.
4R7Z06
CI3
T470
Figure 23 -Tuner Circuit Schematic Diagram for KCSII6C Chassis for VHF Corner Console Models
NOTE: The chassis listed above is identical to chassis shown in thelarge schematic, except for the tuner which is
66001< C817)
tc'Pg
4,(13
c806 1000
NOTE: The chassis listed above is identical to that shown in large schematic, except for the tuner which is a KRK67B (KRK47M/64C), shown in schematic above.
a KRK67A (KRK46M) shown in smaller schematic above.
IV IA3
I
I
tA3 CO
C0
tAS ts.7
PD
V NI C0JCCO...1
CC
-ND NS
CG
OoNaDsf
0
to
0C
1P:0./we
Ire -C tin
VOLUME TV -14, MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1958 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
Westinghouse
CHASSIS ASSEMBLIES V-2371 and V-2381
Chassis assembly V-2371, is equipped with a VHF tuner. This chassis may be used in manual tuning and power tuning models. Chassis assembly V-2381 is the same as V-2371 except that it has both VHF and UHF tuners.
MODELS
H21T201B H21T202B H21K204B H21K205B
1I21T201 1121T202 H21K204 H21K205
H21K212 H21K213 H21K214 1I21K215 1121K216
H21KU212 1121KU213 H21KU214 1121KU215 H21KU216
H21TU201 H21TU202 H21KU204 H21KU205
H21KU2I2A H21KU213A H21KU214A H21KU215A H21KU216A
CHASSIS V-2371-22 V-2371-24
TUNER USED
VHF: 470V030H01 12 pos. 4BX8 RF amp 5AT8 Mix-Osc
VHF: 470V029H01 13 pos. 2CY5 RF amp 5CL8 Mix-Osc
V-2371-29
VHF: 470V042H03 13 pos. 2BN4 RF amp 5CG8 Mix-Osc
V-2381-202 V-2381-203 V-2381-204
VHF: 470V021H03 13 pos. 2CY5 RF amp 5AT8 Mix-Osc UHF: 472V024H01 2AF4A Osc.
VHF: 470V024H01 13 pos. 2CY5 RF amp 5AT8 Mix-Osc UHF: 472V024H01 2AF4A Osc
VHF: 470V020H03 13 pos. 2CY5 RF amp 5CL8 Mix-Osc UHF: 472V020H01 2AF4A Osc.
ADJUSTMENTS
DEFLECTION YOKE ADJUSTMENT
The deflection yoke adjustments are made by loosening the i/4" self -tapping screw on the deflection yoke cover clamp and rotating the yoke either clockwise or counterclockwise until the raster is level or square with respect to the mask, then fasten in place. When fastening the cover clamp in place, make sure that the yoke is well up against the CRT flare, or neck shadows will result.
CENTERING
Centering is accomplished by rotating the centering magnet tabs clockwise or counterclockwise as required. The two adjusting rings are located on the back of the deflection yoke as shown. A tab projection on each of the rings serves to facilitate adjustment.
If difficulty is experienced in centering the picture or eliminating "neck shadows", make certain the yoke is tight against the flare of the CRT, and re -adjust the ion trap.
ION TRAP MAGNET
It is extremely important that the ion trap magnet be correctly adjusted immediately after the se is first turned on during installation. This is true even though the set appears to be operating satisfactorily. When the magnet is not correctly oriented, the electron beam strikes the edge of the aperture gun structure instead of moving cleanly through the hole. The resultant heat may release gas which
has a harmful effect on the tube. An excessively high setting of the brightness control will aggravate this condition. From this it is apparent that the brightness control should never be turned up to compensate for an incorrectly adjusted ion trap magnet. The tube can be ruined in a very short time under this condition.
To adjust the ion Trap magnet, position the magnet near base of tube, then orient the magnet for the brightest raster.
If the brightness peaks at two positions of the magnet, the position nearer the base of the tube is the correct one. Never move the ion trap magnet to remove a shadow from the raster if the brightness is decreased by so doing. Shadows should be removed by adjusting the position of the deflection yoke. The ion trap magnet must always be adjusted for maximum picture brightness.
HEIGHT AND VERTICAL LINEARITY
The height adjustment on the back of the chassis controls the overall height of the picture, and the vertical linearity adjustment controls the relationship between the vertical dimensions of the upper and lower sections of the picture. A balance between the two controls is necessary to make the picture symmetrical and fill the mask vertically.
HORIZONTAL RINGING COIL
The horizontal ringing coil (L400) should be adjusted as follows: 1. Short out the ringing coil with a short jumper wire.
This can be done on top of the chassis. 2. Set the horizontal hold control to the middle of its
range, and leave it in this position during the steps that follow. 3. Connect a VTVM to test point F (Figure 13) or to pin #7 of the horizontal multivibrator socket to measure the DC voltage between this point and B minus. 4. With the receiver tuned to a TV station, adjust C421 for zero,volrage on the meter. If zero voltage can be approached but not quite reached at one extreme of the C421 adjustment, it may be necessary to set the horizontal hold control slightly to one side of mid position to obtain zero voltage. Remove the jumper from across the ringing coil. 6. Adjust the ringing coil L400 for zero voltage on the meter, and check the adjustment by switching to another channel and then back again. The receiver should pull into horizontal synchronization on all channels.
SPEAKER LOAD RESISTOR
When the chassis is removed from its cabinet for test or repair, and the speaker is disconnected, a load resistor (3.2 ohms, 2 watts) must be connected across the audio output transformer. Failure to do so may result in damage to the 12C5 audio output tube.
(Material continued on pages 162 through 170)
161
VOLUME TV -14, MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1958 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
WESTINGHOUSE Chassis V-2371 and V-2381 Service Material, Continued
ESCUTCHEON
IDLER SPROCKET WHEEL SCREW ADJUSTMENT
CHANNEL SELECTOR
THUMB WHEELS
IMPORTANT
Screws at points 1 and 2
CONTRAST
RETAINING LOCATION
accessible from inside cabinet.
FINE TUNING
Figure 1 - Manual Tuning Receiver, Escutcheon Removed
ON -OFF VOLUME CONTROL
CHASSIS REMOVAL
1. Remove back cover. 2. See Figure I. FROM INSIDE THE. CABINET (behind
the escutcheon) remove screws located at points 1 and 2.
These screws secure the escutcheon to the cabinet.
3. Remove speaker leads. 4. Remove control knobs. (The thumbwheels cannot be
removed at this time.) If the receiver is a UHF model, remove the tuning knobs at the right side of the cabinet. 5. (Figure 1.) Remove screws 3, 4, and 5. Remove escut-
cheon. G. Remove thumbwheels.
7. Remove chassis bolts, accessible from the bottom of cabinet.
8. Remove chassis from the cabinet.
VHF TUNER REMOVAL, MANUAL TUNING CHASSIS
(V.2371-22)
1. See Figure 1. Remove retaining ring from channel selector shaft.
2. See Figure 2. Loosen idler sprocket wheel nut. 3. (Figure 2). Lift idler sprocket wheel to slip bead chain
off the other two sprocket wheels. 4. Disconnect all wires at the tuner. 5. Remove the tuner mounting screws, at the rear of the
tuner. 6. Remove tuner. 7. (Figure 2). Remove the fine tuning shaft sprocket wheel.
FINE TUNING
SPROCKET
FINE TUNING SHAFT
IDLER SPROCKET WHEEL
WHEEL
2
a
SPROCKET WHEEL
IDLER SPROCKET WHEEL
BEAD CHAIN
NUT
ON -OFF VOLUME CONTROL
FINE TUNING
SHAFT
Figure 2 - Control Bracket, Manual Tuning Chassis, Rear View
CONTRAST
162
`O
...1
<I
2
.rC
Zo 1I-:
-J
.4%
I--
zLo
cc 14 .-.. Z g44
.
I- r..,, ro
ztA. 0.4
>. ,.._.
0 ,
73-,' 0
-ccd _0c
3f-.4
t... L a,
0 .14 8'. :;-
v,
u v a., 6:
m S F: .-_, -
,-,1 ,,
u
a
r.,
8 u
- -t,C C
'_:., a. a;
o o. I..) L,
v ,.- 4.,
_-_.
....-.
O
roV
V 0
u
V
.0 .
e i-
0> j ,,-4 oE .E*4 ,4V., 8v
=
-7a4
,i) -8 -E,',-
o
-5-
:,
...,,
-a' ,ucsi
2 c c uS
td r,
Cl
u
gt'cl.2.,.: g'7.,
u
Z
6' c 5 ..'-'4
,
(2,
a.
.04 U
2
a)
" o
0)
-76
,.., 0.
-a,11--240., a0o.
l0'
5
cug L,,',,".T.vvc"-''0a-',''.
0c
'Li; v, .z LL. 15 v) a < :P. L.',
N
,f; 4 ,,', ..6 r--:
VOLUME TV -14, MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1958 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
TEST EQUIPMENT
Use an isolation transformer during all servicing and alignment operations. 1. RF sweep generator capable of producing a 10 mc sweep
at center freq uencies ranging from 10 to 90 mc and 170 to 216 mc. 2. A cathode ray oscilloscope and a low -capacitance input probe. The oscilloscope should have good low frequency response characteristics. 3. Marker generator capable of producing an accurate signal at all intermediate freq uencies between 4.5
and 50 mc and all picture and sound RF frequencies.
Keep the output of the signal generator adjusted to
provide a constant 1 volt output on the VTVM during all alignment adjustments.
4. A vacuum tube voltmeter.
5. A special tool to adjust the slugs in the IF transformers
T300, T301, T302, T303, & L300. This tool must
fit ly
into the 3/32 hex type hole designed toll will cause
in the slug. An incorrectchipping of the slug. A
suitable tool is shown in Figure 7.
6. A negative 3 volt bias connected to test poirt A. (See
Figure 13).
VIDEO ALIGNMENT PROCEDURE CHART - Test points shown in Figure 13
Step
Test Equipment
1. Sweep Generator: connected to pin #1, 3rd I.F. Grid, (3DK6 or 3CB6). Set to sweep 40-50mc. Terminate output lead In generator output Impedance (see Figure 9)
Marker Generator - loosely couple to sweep generator output cable. Set to 43.9 mc.
Oscilloscope - connect vertical input to test point B
using isolation network shown in Figure 10. Calibrate scope for 2 volts peak -to -peak.
2. Marker Generator - Connected to test point D. Use termination shown in Figure 9.
VTVM - connected to test point B. Use isolation network, shown in Figure 10.
Adjust
T303
Indicator Output
Adjust bottom slug to peak at 43.4'mc and top slug to rock the curve about 43.9 me when top slug is turned back and Forth.
T302
Maximum at 43.1 mc.
Generator output adjusted so VTVM reads -1.5V at max.
3.
Same as step 2 above.
4.
Same as step 2 above.
L300 1301
Minimum at 47.25 mc. Maximum at 45.2 mc. VTVM as Step 2
5. Sweep Generator - connected to test point D. Set to sweep 40 to 50 mc. Output lend should be terminated in generator output impedance. (Figure 9)
Marker Generator - loosely couple to sweep generator output cable.
Oscilloscope - some as in Step 1.
T300 8 T301 if necessary
Adjust for response curve as shown in Figure 11: Amplitude of response curve
should be 2 volts peak -to -peak.
6. Marker Generator - connected to tuner test point (use termination shown in Figure 9). Set generator to 41.25
mc.
VTVM - Same as in step 2 above.
T300
Minimum at 41.25 mc.
top slug (sound trap)
7. Marker Generator - set to 215.75 mc and connect to antenna terminals. Use termination shown in Figure 8. Channel Selector - Set to channel 13.
VTVM - same as in step 2 above.
Fine tuning control Minimum at 215.75 mc.
8. Sweep Generator - connect to antenna terminals with impedance matching network shown in Figure 8. Set to sweep channel 13.
Marker Generator - some as in step 1 above. Set to 213
mc.
Channel Selector - Set to channel 13.
Oscilloscope - same as in step 1 above.
L103
Maximum amplitude of response curve.
9. Same as in step 8 above.
T300 (bottom slug)
Adjust L103 to the position which will rock the overall response about the center frequency of 213 mc. when bottom slug of T300 is turned back and forth. Set bottom slug of T300 for symme,rica/
response.
10. Signal Generator - connect to test point B. Set to 4.5 mc (crystal controlled if possible and strong enough to produce a proper null.)
VTVM - connect to test point C (low side to B-)
L303 (4.5 mc trap) Minimum at 4.5 mc.
- 099
-\C
ALL_ , i_J
099 --,
1
211. 64
Figure 7 - Alignment Tool
-, 10
I
_ 1"
SO /1
56 A
ri
12
52 .r,
Pt
Ito A
$10 a.
163
I
0 T-
Pt
/ T PI
/
150,
20 IPPEOANCE Or SWEEP GABLE
f V PECtirtn__
.i
1
300^ MINT
0
,------
Figure 8 - Impedance Matching Network
VOLUME TV -14, MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1958 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
WESTINGHOUSE Chassis V-2371 and V-2381 Service Material, Continued
AA
e 00R~2I0-
T,
-----0-03-01-1
308
J2c§ r 3
1.30i
R 311
4 1
fC30i
C307
Alf °MzI1.430
NM 1.
*
f mos `4111-1,6 0 41" i_351
C504
R205
C)T.P.
MR,
Encircled letters designate test points discussed
Other reference points are listed below.
A - tuner IF output cable B - heater to tuner C - AGC to tuner D - CRT control grid, pin 2 E - CRT focus, pin 6,B+ to tuner F - arm of brightness' control G - CRT cathode, pin 11 H - vertical output transformer
vertical deflection yoke J - vertical deflection yoke ground K - CRT screen grid, pin 10 L - shielded wire - from vertical hold control
M - wire to vertical output transformer N - tap of vertical output transformer
0 - shielded wire to vertical hold control
P - to pin 2 of 12DQ6
Q - shielded wire to horizontal hold control
R - pin 5 of 12DQ6
S - low B + R503
T - terminal 3, horizontal output transformer
U - junction of R503 and L500
V - arm of contrast control
W - top of contrast control
X - shielded wire to top of volume control
R_202
Y - connection to bottom of audio output
transformer feed- back secondary
Z - shielded wire to arm of volume control
R4 p
AA - top of audio output transformer primary
BB - bottom of audio output transformer primary
GM
and terminal of R504
sts_A
VERT. LIN. CONTROL
J
R4I1
®GANG POWER TUNING DIAL LAMP GANG 90. PT. ONLY
T.P.
O TO
CD TO PIN CI CRT Figure 13 - Bottom View of Printed Board Showing Top Components as Schematic Symbols'
ICISCII LOSCOPE
CLIP
CI
SHIELDED GENERATOR LEAD
CAPACI ION
TOc.t5w:P
ON 5515 GROUND
RESISTOR 4
Figure 10 - Oscilloscope Connections
,NDEO Its?
POINT
4222 MC 42.2S NC O NC
41 NC
43.71 SIC
CI = .001 MFD
RI
RI = DEPENDS UPON GEN. OUTPUT IMPEDANCE 521.72 etc.
Figure 9 - RF Generator Coupling
2 VOLTS P.
3.2..S.S 14C Rood Widtk
APre.. IM A
IF RESPONSE CURVE
Figure 11 - IF Response Curve
OS or SO%
164
RESPONSE CORI...EL 13
Figure 12 - Overall Response Curve
VOLUME TV -14, MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1958 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
WESTINGHOUSE Chassis V-2371 and V-2381 Service Material, Continued
SOUND ALIGNMENT PROCEDURE
The sound section may be aligned using signal generators (FM and AM) or by using a signal received off -the -air. Alignment procedure for both methods follows: (Test points are shown in Figure 13, on the opposite page).
ALIGNMENT USING A LOCALLY GENERATED SIGNAL.
1. Connect a high impedance AC voltmeter or oscilloscope
across the volume control for use as an indicator.
2. Set quieting control, R202, to mid -range.
3. Apply a 4.5 mc FM signal (deviation approximately 7.5 kc) to video test point B.
4. Using a strong signal, adjust L203 for maximum output. 5. Reduce the signal to the lowest level that will produce
an indication. Adjust L201 and L200 again for maximum output.
6. Apply a 4.5 mc AM signal (modulated approximately 30 percent) to video test point B. Adjust the generator for strong signal level.
7. Adjust quieting control for minimum AM response or
output.
ALIGNMENT USING AN AIR SIGNAL
1. Tune the receiver to a television station and connect an attenuator between the receiver and the antenna so that the strength of the signal can be varied from weak to strong.
2. Set the quieting control (R202) to its mid range. (The control is located on the back of the chassis.)
3. Apply a strong signal to the receiver and adjust the quadrature coil L203 for maximum program sound. If peaks occur at two different positions that are widely separated, use the one that occurs with the slug farthest counterclockwise. If two peaks occur within a narrow range of adjustment, sufficient signa: is not being applied to the receiver or the quieting control is not set at the desired position.
4. Apply a very weak signal that allows noise to be heard and adjust the 4.5 mc. IF slugs (L201 and L200) for maximum program sound. If peaks occur at two different positions of the slug, use the peak that occurs
when the slug is farthest counterclockwise.
5. Apply a strong signal and readjust quieting control
for minimum hum.
This control determines the AM rejection characteristics of the sound system and its correct setting is normally about mid -position. Do not leave the quieting control set at its maximum counterclockwise position.
4720021801
47000248,31
47000291.101
470302' 21.401
47000304101
Lir
SPEAKER LEADS
1. 3C
1201
GOD* ODTPUT
CRYSTAL 'HMO
DETECTOR
T 303
3006 OR C136 SRL a iI
T 302 40
i) L 300
T300
0400
4 L 303
3BN6
Pik DETECTOR
L 203
NY6 3056
sr,4S1c.
°
3
PILOT LAMP ON 3')
POWER TUNING
L201
CHASS4
L200
6AN8
OH POWER TUNING CHASSIS
L 400
OW TING NEKRT VERT. Litt
1
R
1
_
FR.. ORCIPPINS
RESISTOR
I B3GT
1400
1
LS00
)
CAUTION
Do NOT OPERATE THIS CHASSIS
WITHCLI I
113, 1HE SPIT
OR AN EQUIVALENT LOAD
(Su002E59vS0041s)TLEODAD) 4 TONERS
FusIBLE REsisToR
I RS02
SW 500 Orr - OM
Figure 14 - Tube Location, Filament String and Adjustments, Top View
165
VOLUME TV -14, MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1958 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION WESTINGHOUSE Manual Tuning Chassis V-2371 and V-2381 Schematic Diagram
04111. Z-100 7100
30/AVHFANT
Z I Oi
20Y5
5cLe
woo -11000
T1000 NTIX T1000 -4."
RF 120V.
36
tj_
2.2K 1000
(
L103
110 120
1211
.047 LIOO 1000
nnTe
ALL CAPACITANCE VALUES IN out. ALL RESISTORS 112 WATT RATING UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED.
SECTION I TUNER 470V029MOI
OFF ON SW 500
RS 2
FUSIBLE RESISTOR
-X500
j592
Ct15+A 2+. 20".
20014F I
II5V
6504 +105050
5604w
3"F 120V
R Sl0e3o-
W
C560 MF05C
A
+ -C 5059 1. - r 200 OW
140V,
AUDIO B +
LOB +
HI B -I-
1204
120064
12W6GT
DAMPER HORIZ.OUT. VERT.WT.
500
3CS6
5AN8 3BN6
SYNC. SEP. LIMITER F.M. CWT. vERT.DISCN.
::°?w
v2391 CHASSIS ON0
6 CG7 NORI2.
215TP4 Z_F44
C.R.T. LINF OSC
7 13
72
1 1TF AMP OSC MIKET11
mu
72
%353°1
36Z6
I ST IF
3916
299.1F
s J 0 0
4
1-1
L
/1
4 3
TUNER J T 0503 34
34
;G0e5o06
690
C656002
INDICATES CI.ASS;S HAILS.
NOTES
I. DC VOLTAGES MEASURED FROM -.NO APPLIED SIGNAL ,USINO A VTVM.
2. ALL D.C.VOLT.V.E. T.:FEN WITH NO SIGNAL AND ALL PEAK TO PEAK WAVEFORMS AND VOLTAGES TAKLN WITH ALL CONTROLS ADJUSTED FOR NORMAL PICTURE.
3. ALL CAPACITANCE VALUES LESS THAN I ARE IN GED AND VALUES GREATER THAN 1 ARE IN 4.11-D, WHILE ALL RESISTORS ARE 1/2 WATT UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED.
43
3096
OR
3CB6
3641F
45
1105 AUDIO
34
34
;;::?14
4
68H8 VIDEO
5
IV F.M. LIMITER
8202
4.5Mc
8
Cg?3
.0 j30V.
R200 470K
.80;
-4.-72100CC 4lLM°
8201 566
3.17.1 le IF AMP
1105. 5
.7v 2
3
8303
R302 4
3.961
R301 100K
RrF4C723F
.C232C"
6305
3.911
110v.
R304 470
SEE.DIODES NOR1Z. AFC
C410 100
Can
SECTION 5 POWER a HEATERS
20 V.P.P. 157500J
Caution
When servicing or adjusting the receiver, connect the receiver AC power plug through an isolation transformer, to the AC outlet. This is necessary because one side of the receiver AC input is connected to the receiver chassis.
Do not confuse isolation transformers with autotransformers, Variacs, etc. Such transformers offer no isolation.
Side -rails, customer controls, and metal cabinet are insulated to protect the user. After receiver repair, check for any possible short between the electrically hot chassis and normally insulated chassis and metallic parts.
166
VOLUME TV -14, MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1958 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
WESTINGHOUSE
Manual Tuning Chassis, V-2371 & V-2381, Schematic Diagram
SECTION 2 SOUND IF AND AUDIO
C205 4.5Mc .4.7
L201
3956
F.M. CET.
R203 470
7 4 -310V
L203
6
II
2
729'2°8
1
10
3L25002
0 2v
50047
C. 0200:7
- 4 51.1c
R620002
QUIETING
6204 8.26
CONT,
W
R 206
12
C210 .022
I CO2j19
R207 500K
VOLUME
CONT.
1205_ AUDIO OUTPUT
7200
OUTPUT BLUE TRANS.
C21113°":
022
11301 45.2141
R306 8.28
V5_
C305 680
3p z
F611111,
SECTION 3 VIDEO
3086 OR 3086 114751141_
7302 3" IF AMP I IN295
43.1 Mc
43.9Mc
I
7303
L301 I 14uh
R309 3.9K
110V
L302 350uh
6T1
2
4314
-4,-
4.3K
C307 470 2 KV
I.3V 4310
1508311
470
-4111171;
C309 !z,1,7
8312 470K
751
hY
in 6956
114 r.Jllllllll4u71 55 9P P 6011
VIDEO AMP,
L503
45 V. P. P 6012
C33,16
58v.
8317 22K
8321 2214
C31E\Q
I
.22
30-110v
(
ta 6138 8
VIDEO AMP.
R318 IRK I W
8319 2.214 IW
39
L306
0314 679. 100un
T I
3
I
0
8324
5.66
C317 .047
1-4,
R329 10081
gIBTP4
151W 220K
0310
1.0047
8313 47K
5 V P 6 0 '1.1
0316
.0047
IM
1.48
R400 1.5M
1400 .0
1401 270
R402 27K
u u
11
25V.PR 6007-
3876T 3436 6403
SYNC. SEP.
5611
4,01044027
R404 22K
56 V. R405
t 39K
1/2 54 8
VERT, DISCHARGE
rirl
o....--
I2W6GT
VERT. OUTPUT
3
i ' 2.40-0- -, C000404
22K 8 2 8 2K 2
.002a
I -213-849.
190 V.P.P. 600)
itC405
033
14409 10K
TO4, 02C408 .033
s )1
H
13711.1 I
"4" 549
.005
R411 150
I I RED
1403 .47
_ _J
3
1406
5
.0047
F211140
R406 6.8K 2W
14441
R440 5.6K
8408
1.5M
VERT.. HOLD:
64125
44
6072
8414
157500.)
18011
vith
'1)5
R4134
R415
50 04,VERTLIM 2.721
#413.
#416
5M
2.214 I4EIGNT CONT,
600 v.1) R 1°'_c40'9
60 '
;..0R43N39E
86509N.P.#
2 401
8442
EL
8411,0-8-".4111.' 560
euc w GRN
O
R443 150K
60 V. P.P. 157500,
C 413
390
6423 47K
I
L400
RINGING COIL
R426
8424
12K
0417
1414 S 470
0 59116
.0047
R421 220K
8422 470K
CA15
R425
478
8
CanOi
04
T
C419 .001
4,;!,411
R429 5601(
6007
HORIZ. MULTI.
100 9
8432 330K
IW
C422
01
12 0 6 A HORTZ. OUTPUT
93 2.2 V. 8427
-22 V.
1420 56 II -16V
0421
7.-50-240
R 43
10
6430
a,
22014
414
470K
6435 4 270
39V
R 431
60 SOK
RORIZ. HOLD.
\ ./-1
C v P 15750
12 V.P.P. 57500,
,SECTION 4
P
aao 17i
3 L40,
14u4
140V, 1423
.04-
11
1424 42 -11
18307 IrgTh-Et
L 1..364
L
L
R4313
2.2
K
R439
'UK
01 4
#2423;
T IISCMF 5811
I
R54113 6
H
390v
167
VOLUME TV -14, MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1958 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION WESTINGHOUSE Power Tuning Chassis V-2371 and V-2381 Schematic Diagram
ZIO VHF. ANT, 2101 1330Louf
330
L..
Dori--o
C1021 10645-10 .0-4.5
L101
C r01 120
03
12
C109 47
R102 IK
5120V. 29)44,
TC102 30
0104
-.5v. 7
R.F. AMP
R101 4.7K
2BN4
3n4
102040*- iiCfC7T
5CGB 5
;i1OT
)0 IV0001 f021:70
0-Jeogs-o
TO MOTE PIN 7
C116 130
Cii0
C12!
cu.,
1.0-4.5 .51
2
C
8100 5.111:
IN 7
8109
2511
RII0 100
9105
11109 220K
3.9K
C111
30
3
3 101061(
1.103 C114.
Afitc1000.
41-6
TEST POINT
0121 IF 1000 (OUT)
8107 1K
VI!
6ANB
F.M.LIMITER
A5M C42702
0201
L200 R200 470K.
C200 4.7
7 C203--
47 SOW.
C204 .0047
1101 529°:
AOC
NOTE I. ALL CAPACITANCE VALUES IN vu1. ALL RESISTORS '2 WATT RATING UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED.
coNNEcilf TO RIGHT HAND TERMINAL OF 11110 AS VIEWED FROM SHAFT END.
SECTION 1 TUNER 4 70 V042M03
SW500 OFF ON
*502
7,5
O
0500
.15
FUSIBLE RESISTOR
x500
01
C 505A 2001.1F
545v? 30 MF
L500
R503 180 4W
ifiTs
I- + AA C5058- +
-
200MF
C505C;
6OMF
e- INDICATES
4500 33-15W
17.92_1 DAMPER
R500 29- 15W(v2381 CHASSIS
ONLY)
12DO6A HORiLOUT,
_?,24101' vERT.Ou T.
-,C501 4,035
0
L MOTOR ASS,
E SW501 REMOTE SOCKET PIN 5
I POWER TUNING
_1
BAR
115v. AUDIO 120v. LO
140Y
111.5
3C56 LIMITER " M6
SYNC. SEP. VERT.DISCH. F M "Y
43
45
_ w 1847
PILOTL AMP
43
GEV 2IBTP4
HOW. Al V. CRT.
2AF4A
UHF. 05C I 1v2381 CHASSIS I
01KrALIY)
2BN4
RF AMP
5CG8 I
OSC.M1XERI
4
r2500 -1
2
103_I
1PiclicATES CHASSIS RAILS
I
4
IT R .F. TUNER j
- --r-C306
TM,
3826 III IF
34
C503
3926
2441F
3
W
NOTES' I. DC VOLTAGES MEASURED FROM 13-. NO APPLIED SIGNAL,USING A VTVM. Z. ALL O.C. VOLTAGES TAKEN WITH NO SIGNAL AND ALL PEAK TO PEAK WAVEFORMS AND VOLTAGES TAKEN WITH ALL CONTROLS ADJUSTED FOR NORMAL PICTURE. 3. ALL CAPACITANCE VALUES LESS THAN I ARE IN NCO AND VALUES GREATER THAN I ARE IN Nur°, WHILE ALL RESISTORS ARE If 2 WATT UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED.
SECTION 5 POWER I HEATER*,
3"TDKV6
3ge91 314 IF
12C5 AUDIO
4 T 34 C504 680
6it93
VIDEO
4
SEL. DUDES HORiZ AFC
11120 IM
20 V.P.P. 15750,1
168
VOLUME TV -14, MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1958 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
WESTINGHOUSE
Power Tuning Chassis, V-2371 el V.2381, Schematic Diagram
SECTION 2 SOUND IF AND AUDIO
C 240 4 SFlc
1201
1202 350
3856
F M DET
8203 470
7 7 14 3109. 'vs"' 1-1203
2
2V,
0 3 2V
C08
10
/1.541c
..i)20 0477
8202 600
QUIETING
CONY
'St047
9204 8.28
I W
R206 C124 ,!,21°,
'0209 001
8205 5604
207 85004 VOLUME
CONT
,Lat AUDIO OUT.
1200
OUTPUT
BLUE TRANS,
954.
C2III 2
022 -Soow:
75.
6
107V, 8210 660
I :35w *V
5 BROWN
W
REMOTE SOCKET
T301 45.2 Mc
1-20.3203
C304
1300
472541c
3826 2,d IF AMP
SECTION 3 VIDEO
1303
3DK6 OR 3CB6 IFirSTAL-
1302 3,1 IF AMP
295 v
1403
43.1 Mt
43 9Mc
I
1103 6
9309 3.94
6 1109
51
ISV
6 1139.
.1-
GREEN DOT
1.502 1350a4 3314 4.34
R306 8.24
0305 680
7V 2 8307 4793
470
1 0306 see
110437007
24V
1.3 v 83I0 150
: 311 70
no
II
0309 1.0015
5 V. P. P.
6001
-
3312
47013
1C 510 0047
O ,------'\
II BTP4
1332I
13316 1,134
W
8319 2.24
IOU
iSKY 1/2 613H8
C315
VIDEO AMP
39
L306 CSI?
I000 047
C3I4 67V 00P -11 -1E -F4
8327 $2206
R324
5.641 R329
7_ '7- = = ..7
1004 0 .4,/,
SW I I
8v
,..-.
502C
8302094
I
R323 100
BRIGHTNESS CONT.
I
R32538 3
0047 1.483
- <R326
11E
R400
1.5M
8401 4708
C400
.01
270
4402 274
IIIIILI
25V.P,P 600./
NV 3BY6oR3C56._
SYNC. SEP
C402 0047
9404
22K 6V
2400 1224 6.24 8.2
1/2 6AN 8 VERT. DISCHARGE
I'
190 V P P, 600./
12w661 Fr -
VERT. OUTPUT
C405 .033
-C407
R416
R4 513614
2 2M HEIGHT CONT
8442
6405 394
005T 11111-509
5 4V.
C03
1 1L'001.00i.
_I
.47
3
8-849
R40K09
2
R
.1.82
47
C4'06
.0O41
8406
11406
56R4480
I 5M
6.118 2W
6441 1804
VERT .11 HOLD II
C408 .031
13410 391
5
271C 150
8
1370 I RED/
3" YELLOW
4
II
R412
R414
IP 50 V.PP. 684
,A1,600./
600 V.RR 600.1
734308 16105 V0. P/. P.
IN
ORANGE
.1 7401
2401
L 1
VERT.OUT TRANS
r-
-
DEFL. YOKE
p4 15n
,
I
T.PAR.,
560 560
1
SAN
SOV.P.P.i5750/1/
84134 5004VE81.1I6
R4I5 2.2M
J_ 81111W
VERT HOR12.
-rtnnof lir 3
R141041,3
34 28
_-rL.0CC0,,/ 2206
11330 H 9 RECT.
'
L.
+36231-am
8
8
w
L
140 RINGING COIL
60 VP. P 1575 0 0.)
C413 390
II
13423
474
0NVN
8424
1211 052.5.
R426 684
I W
C417
C414 'M 470
599
.0047
4421 2206
4422 4706
8425 '474
C 415
1.01
C 416
.01
I.1041
R429 5608
HOR12.7iULT1. 1009.
8432 3104
120064
C422 HOR1Z.OUTPu
.01
If!
12. 34_ DAMPER
2.2 V. 4427
C420''
56 160
-22 V. 7-50-240 R433
150
11430 2204
R434 4708
I -4.
9455
210 -4
1402
46
1399
1140=31409.
0-11-rtr- 1423 .047
1400
60n:
sI 173
3
4438
2.2
R 439 2 1004
7.7
IC
4
8437 2.24
11p 3I
_J I_I.
C 421
100 \IMF 589
w 380V.
4431 608
0424
436:
HORII. OWL
.22
I5750O.1
1114
2.2 M
P P 157500/
SECTION 4 SWEEP
C426 .22
169
VOLUME TV -14, MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1958 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
WESTINGHOUSE Chassis V-2371 Power Tuning Operation (Continued)
POWER TUNING OPERATION (V-2371.29 CHASSIS)
When the power tuning switch, SW501 (on the front panel of the receiver) is depressed momentarily, AC is momentarily applied to the motor. This causes the following: 1) An armature is pulled up to engage a clutch. (Clutch action is required for the transfer of mechanical energy). 2) Turning energy is transferred to a cam, through a gear
train. The cam also has a double function. 1) As the cam turns,
it closes SW502. SW502A of this switch is in parallel with the front panel power tuning switch, SW501. When SW502A is closed by the cam, it provides an alternate AC circuit through the motor. Therefore, the motor continues to turn when the front panel switch is released. 2) A roller on the cam turns the programming wheel, in step fashion. The amount of turn is sufficient to advance the programming wheel from one channel to the next. The tuner decent snaps the channel selector into place.
The programming wheel has 13 nylo sliders. Whe a slider is pushed into the A position, (outermost position) it holds SW502A closed after the cam has completed its cycle. If several adjacent sliders are in the A position, each slider successively actuates SW502, and the motor keeps turning until a stop position is reached. The stop position, on the programming wheel, is one where a slider is in the C
position. When a stop position is reached, SW502A is no longer held closed. Therefore, the AC line to the motor is opened; the tuner is at the desired channel.
When SW502 is actuated, other sections of the switch function as follows: SW502B shorts the secondary of the audio output transformer, to mute the sound during the change of channels. SW502C provides CRT blanking by feeding positive (cut-off) bias to the CRT cathode during the change of channels.
TEST POINTS
Test point A - AGC line During video IF alignment, an external bias voltage is
applied to this point. Also, an external bias voltage may be applied to this point when a substitute voltage is needed for test purposes. Test point B - Video detector output
The scope input is connected to this point. With normal operation, (an air signal being received), a egative going composite video signal (approx. 5 volts P -P) is seen. The scope input is kept at this point during IF alignment. When the VTVM leads are placed between test point B and ground, a small negative voltage will be indicated.
Test point C - Cathode of CRT Video waveform and bias voltage check point.
Test point D - Grid of first IF amplifier The output of sweep and marker generators are fed to
this point during IF alignment. Test point F - Grid of controlled section of the horizontal multivibrator.
Under normal operating conditions, voltage is zero at this point. The VTVM is connected to this point when the horizontal multivibrator and ringing coil are adjusted.
ELECTRICAL. FINE TUNING
Electrical fine tuning, used in power tuning receivers, enables the user to make fine tuning adjustments using the H-985 Chairside Remote Control Unit or the variable resistor on the front panel of the receiver. Fine tuning is accomplished by adjusting a variable resistor which determines how much effective capacity is placed across an oscillator coil. (The more capacity across the coil the lower the freq uency, and vice versa.)
The circuit, which acts as a variable capacitor, consists (in part) of a capacitor in series with a crystal diode. This series circuit is connected across the oscillator coil. Connected across the crystal diode (in shunt with the diode) is a variable resistor. This resistor functions as a variable diode load. When the resistance is lowered, the diode is more heavily loaded. More current flows through the diode which acts as a lower resistance. Therefore, the capacitor has a greater effect on the oscillator circuit; the oscillator frequency is lowered. When the load resistance is increased, less of a load exists across the diode. Therefore, the effective resistance of the diode is increased and the capacitor has less effect on the oscillator circuit. Consequently, the oscillator freq uency is raised. An RF choke isolates the RF circuit from the variable resistor. It should be noted that the variable resistor on the remote control unit is in parallel with the one on the receiver. For this reason, there is inter-actio between both variable resistors. Both should be set, initially, to approximately mid -range
for Proper fine tuning control. The variable resistor used for electrical fine tuning has
a counter -clockwise 10% log taper. Whe a replacement variable resistor is required, the correct replacement part must be used and wired correctly.
13
14
PROGRAMMING WHEEL
SW 502
NYLON COUPLING
15
BRACKET B
LOCATING NIPPLE
SLIDER TO SET CHANNELS
Tuner and Motor Assembly, Exploded View
BRACKET C
170
MOTOR
VOLUME TV -14, MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1958 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
Westinghouse
MODELS
H21T218 H21T219 H21T220
H21T221 H21T222
H21K223 H21K224
H21K225 H21K226 H21K227 H21K228 H21K229
H21K232 H21K233
CHASSIS V-2372-27
MODELS
H21TU218A H21TU219A H21TU220A H21TU221A H21TU222A H21KU223A H21KU224A
H21KU225A H21KU226A H21KU227A 1121KU228A H21KU229A 14211;1'232A 11211 1. ?33A
CHASSIS V-2382-204
H21T218A H21T219A H21T220A
H21TU218 H21TU219 H21TU220 H21TU221 H21TU222 H21KU223 H21KU224
H21T221A H21T222A
H21KU225 H21KU226 H21KU227 H21KU228 H21KU229 H21KU232 H21KU233
V-2372-67 V-2382-202
H21TU218B H21TU219B 1121TU220B
H21TU221B H21TU222B
V-2382-602
H21TU218C
H21TU219C H21TU220C
H21TU221C F121TU222C
V-2382-604
ALIGNMENT
1. OSCILLOSCOPE with appropriate decoupling network.
(See to
figure 1). Calibrate oscilloscope for peak. Connect oscillos.cope vertical
2 volts peak input to test
point B. (Marked 'T.P.B." on schematic diagram, in
output circuit of video detector.)
2. VTVM with appropriate decoupling network. (See figure 1). Set VTVM to read -1 V to -11/2 V. Connect VTVM to T.P.B.
3. MARKER OR CW SIGNAL GENERATOR with adjustable output and accurately calibrated frequencies between 40 and 220 Inc. Use proper output cable termination, as shown in figure 2.
LoscoPE
4. SWEEP GENERATOR with adjustable output covering frequencies from 40 to 220 mc, with or without built in marker generator. Terminate sweep generator output in proper impedance, as shown in figure 2.
5.
BIAS SUPPLY. (Source of Voltages required: -12 volts to
suostitute bias voltage). tuner and -4 volts to IF
stages during IF alignment. For RF alignment, use -1
volt bias to tuner and -4 volts to IF stages. Battery
bias supply shown in 6gure 5.
6. Gimmick coupling, shown in figure 6, to mixer grid.
21
CAPAC1 TO
RESISTOR Cht
7-C
COE ::r(cP4
C.ASSIS OitOUNO
v,DEO VEST
.0,N,
FIGURE 1; Oscilloscope Coupling Network
TO TUNER
I
I
HOLE TO FIT TUBE PIN SNUGLY WITH SCOTCH TAPE
r" 0N0y2sTHK. PHOSPHOR BRONZE SHIM STOCK
* (216V. BATT.
RCA
VS068VS009
BURGFE4SPIS 4
EQUIVALENT
BI AS SUPPLY
FIGURE 5; Bias Supply
TO I.F. TO TUNER
171
FIGURE 6; Gimmick Coupling Device
VOLUME TV -14, MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1958 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
WESTINGHOUSE Chassis V-2372 and V-2382 Schematic Diagram
0 SEE NOTE 2
EAU8(8), AFT 0100E
0091 36
0101 120
10103
!2
;10)2 g04
LIO2
2864 3n4
Ix; Coo-
5058
Sn
4-c008;
C108 1.0-4-5
C105
)41
5
CI..
R,I.? 2
47
540
2 R101 4,71.
2BN4
W.F. AMP 6
CiOt
BOO
C112 SOO
Cg .104
j 0707CTI t -2T-; cue soo
ICI,1516
CII0
C125
1.0-4-5 0.51
C;
0
L105
C120 12
- CId390
R104 10K
#106 220K
R105 3.9K
L103
000
C114
C
5GG8 1000
mi%.0sc.
3 2.7K
_
E 1.6
TEST POINT
ON+ . 9107
1K
AGC
NOTE
I, ALL CAPACITANCE VALUES IN 141, ALL RESISTORS I/2 wAr 7 RATING uN,ESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED.
2.VOLTAGE SHOWN 19(10091 ETC. IN AFT POSITION.
SECTION I TUNER
B
470V0191-103
12D4 12006A 5C25 DAMPER HOPI OUT. vERT OUT
100 OR 59T8
BVB H. AFC -Alga
SYNC.SEP. KEYED AGO
T
6AU8
AFT
7a
72
5
C502
T.033
N.V.CRT 6E67
210EP4
1,jF 4
OSC
F4771
8114 5CO8 I R F. AMP MICOSC.
3826
2 AA IF
3
34
45
43
4
0507
3066
. 0047T
3C08866
tal &Au"
3r4IF
AUDIO
VIDEO
3 (\._1\14L4 4
54
4:75016T 2 KV
1 V.HH.F..VF.. TUNER
TET4747700 2 KV
73,7i/ 628K09=
08
_xoiso+1
C504
690;' 68°. ;4C85005
C 506 680
+1447
LOW B+ 11309.1
Sw 500
11
501
.4009
e-
I1.30. Izsoo
7001
o "0' A
15 18 1I4
C
B
AifliR
x502
2709.
r i+C 509 160
L500
20.11
To
r- -1:40,60-alr.7607:1
CGA0A5 N CKT1-15---1-1-1Wpo
602
170cVot,), IT. I
1,,s
IL; I
it LI INriloliqrstesAvisol4
EMOTE SOCKET
11503 1558 20W
8504 820
4W
RSOS 270
1 2W
AUDIO B+ 12359.1
+1c5103 --;30saF
44C5i2B
MI 9+126591
15:MVERT.13+C2559.L
+-Z-13-cOSiusBr
,F9TEB .2. VOLTAGES SHOWN IN AFT POSITION,
2-4(10011.1
125V,
R2014. 100A USED
Lif
WITH 0.1 TUNER
47090211403 VHFiuNF,
GREEN
C200301 i0
C2041000
C200 - 5014,
111202
25K
R201 R20IA 470 OR 100
9203
MANUAL
FINE TUNING
IF.,TEu4y2, Siicv59°.3'LFCAL
- BLUE
Rit011
-12°19%1 100
TO
LAW 9+
\
I I
_T_300 21-4: 3826 e 04-1 I IF 1209
1121
4110
=7_ I
7
40.81 D:25
120V.
2
1#;;2
L
2
_L C63.? Z
vTsCs3o22 2KV
8s3,j051w. /R303
1,514 s%
11304 56011.5%
3016 BOO
1,C302
T.022 8306 470
80v PP 60-1_
C5i0a T 609AF
900V PP
9401 68K 5./
15750'9
\WEI
KEYED ADC
7 2659
R405A SM
SYNC CONT.
1659 R402 330K
401
9 190y
R403 22K
11%
R404 59% I w 5%
1/2 5878
BORIC. AFC B. By.
821
390 #426
IN
427 2208
39.
T6C8403E414T .0,
V PP 15750'1"
SECTION 5 POWER E HEATERS
CLIP
CI
SHIELDED GENERATOR LEAD
RI
CI .001 WO
RI DEPENDS UPON GEN. OUTPUT
FIGURE 2; RF Generator Coupling
099
0 F3
ItjL64
-1F
FIGURE 3; Alignment tool
0,9
=0
172
i VOLUME TV -14, MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1958 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION WESTINGHOUSE Chassis V-2372 and V-2382 Schematic Diagram
.0002.1 362
SECTION 2 SOUND I- F AND AUDIO
/26AU518) 9
25-2652.,
4.5 2222006 SOUND IF e AFT Mc
.055,
10
leyLtv,
,9
rI
220
3886
FM DE7
R214
'7a
6
4 5m6 L205 1
C20511
4.7 C223
680 2KV
I ti97
,8205 100
6
1202 W6R208 .32
68
CiO8
2CAA
coo's? 0210 0047
1 E._
, 1 :,4.SPAc
L
L203
I 0i02O1T3 -- L204 I1°
C0201547=
8215 24
I
\ 8207 10M
R222 5006 8210 AFT ,9F
5W2018 R2I1
R212
10k1.a
.00C24174
0-4.22. 2W
R213
600
8216
IM
880
1;016'52
CONY
SW 201 SHOWN IN AFT POSITION\
R209 100K
AUDIO225 pZ 17
02181211 2
6AQ5-k
OUT
AA..
r 58024
VOL.CONT.
II
T 6,0047
2 2V
PIN 4 8221 f C2I9*
1 2211 50MF_
R219 330
....1-C217
1100 SEE NOTE
wimp T200 5018
GRN, DOT
TONE NT
ke;207 URN DOT
2 OR 3 SPEAKERS ON CONSOLES ONLY. SEE PARTS LIST. R218,C222,8 R221
TO PIN 3 REMOTE SOCKET
TO AUDIO 8+
B 610 V.
7301 45.214c
O
3
C3 4 2.
,4C7305
L300 47.25
Mc
R308 8.26
1680
InlilT6C830 C308 .22
3BZ6
2nd IF
1202.
8312
6 82
--343,113._C 6_
T310u21
3 CB6 3rd IF
- - SECTION 3 VIDEO
II 438md7gPS7
I' 1,
140,
a
6
i1,20 8ALI B(A)
04ENO. OUT
L301 R3i 100/A 514
L303
L304, L305 14324
."'° 5°.0.02.748,2.7.4,...00,
C 319 22
600V.
-If0A* C315
#521 i0K
13.32K2 13.; 11
2W 2W
SWSOIC 100 V. PP 60'V
7
6
1202
122v 5 _.
e-42
7
T P
1222.
C3I4 033
30V.IMO ?C271
*Relit: CONT
R3"!6
.92.2
112,10
9-7 C310
I " 2 8313 470
1R3ii 470
rC 309 + 680
21(2
R33;4
.00151
;.00031I25
C0034I37
002 j 3306
500 vn1.4 #317
2
.4V 6 Rae
2704
22
8318 3.3K
6V.PP 60'2
15K CONTRAST
CONT,
22
R331 18K
;wan
8 K
IC
0,4 26
1302*
#326
5012
4-7/
C3I$_
C.CU47 8329 1.482 MI
520V. R330
0327 22m
11-
'TOM B+
R409 100K
R406 8/AK?.
3BY6 or 3CS6 R4I0 SYNC. SEP. 886
-c402 c .01
I t220K
5 349182
AV( ,
552.
R40 7
270K
11.4103
422,PP 60
r
79 v.PP 15750N
R413 10N 2W
228
2401 8.212 8.28
C404 .01
tT 30-542. C4C51
R4I8 1008
1C,1213
I/5 6AU8p144
8422
2M
AAA
2502
AAII
5C25
.005_, I
100.51
'1 +4c:Fo3AA
2
414 2M
VER' HOLD CONT
4415 5004 VERT, LIN. CONT.
828
C407
00.17
IC %
8417
8419 2.28
1,2
'0% 9 R420
I
/50
3-6
8421 1.22
7
V.
VERT.OUT,
2552
8447
15011
462.PP 60'1./ TO VERT 8+
880 V. PP, 60111
R4058
5m
0161647NT. CO
TEL
BLK
361
D 7400 I
IR 432 EPT
11
C415
10018AF
L400
RINGING
11
R44
1382PP 15750O.1
8428 R4
8.212
8.2
00
C417. Zsv, .00.7
#429 4708 - .-
R43I
N4V74.
C48 _Lc4
I( w0R12.84UL71.
-IC4S 1T14o21.4, 9433 92K 1802.
T5 20(2PP 15750 TU 120064
c422
.01
140Ra. Our.
2
-262
./C424 C 423 719-160 8438
150 5
8436 IltOK 5%
8437
8459' a I4708
- 362
606
+OR12. HOLD
8440
128 7W
8448 560
.0044275
30 V PP 157557.,
CONT.
0426 6.20202
12 24 DAMPER
T401 8441
r
12IIMA 5 o
1
6401 4 ut.
L402
14ull
IB3GT
H. V. RECT.
R440. 680K
8442 100K IA
r
9443 4.78,1W 0428 V 01
1-.:043239
C410
= .33
V PP 601.,
2402
3g F 2LCINE
34 n
ORG.
8423 R424 580 560
5
VERT
110812,
000) -Kr
L_w3 7
J
9
L
L
154 8
8416102
R2 RI
150 fl
SECTION 4 SWEEP
TV RECEIVER
O 300.11 INPUT 0
ZO
50472"-
RI
56"82"-
R2
1204110"-
FIGURE 4; Impedance Matching Network
ZO. IMPEDANCE OF SWEEP CABLE
173
VOLUME TV -14, MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1958 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION WESTINGHOUSE Chassis V-2372 and V-2382 Alignment Information (Continued)
STEP GENERATOR FREQ.
1
Sweep
43.9
CONNECTION Grid 3rd I.E.
CHAN. SELECTOR
INDICATOR Scope 2V. P -P
at T.P.B
ADJUSTMENT
T303 Bottom slug for max. Top slug to rock Response at 43.9 MC.
2
3
CA
T.P. D
43.1
1st I.F. Grid
4 Cu'47.25 ii
5
CA'
45.2
ii
6
Sweep
7
8
Cu'
9
Cu'
10
( A'
44
ii
Chan. No. 13 set to fringe position
Mixer grid pin No.9
50.0
with gimmick (see
ii
Fig. 6)
44.1
ii
43.0
ii
ii
VTVM
keep below -1.5V
II
ii
Scope 2V. P -P
VTVM keep below -1.5V
ii
ii
Detune (counter -clockwise) L106 & T300
Max. T302
Min. L300 Max. T301
Touch up T301 & T302 to resemble response curve shown in Figure 7 Set to manual fine tuning
Min.
Z300 (see note 1)
Max. L 106
Max.
Bottom slug T300
11
12
CW
UHF set to local position
Mixer grid pin No.9
40.8
with gimmick (see
ii
Fig. 6)
VTVM keep below -1.5V
Set to manual fine tuning
Min
Top adjustment T300 (see note 2)
13
14
Sweep
Chan. No. 12 set to local
position
44
Mixer grid pin No.9
with gimmick (see
ii
Fig. 6)
Scope 2V. P.P.
Set to manual fine tuning
Retouch L106 if necessary so that picture car vier lies 50% or 6DB from peak and response curve resembles Fig. 8
NOTE I: If an indication of resonance cannot be obtained on the VTVM, proceed as follows: Increase the 50 me signal level and/or remove the (substitute) IF bias. If adjacent channel sound interferance exists, tune 2300 to 47.25 inc.
NOTE 2:
If an indication of resonance cannot be obtained on the VTVM, proceed as follows: Increase the 40.8 and/or remove the (substitute) IF bias.
me signal level
42.25MC
45.75MC
41.25MC
43MC 44MC 45MC
47.25MC
41.25 MC
\\\ I
45.75 MC
I
I
\III
2 VOLTS PEAK TO PEAK
11
2 VOLTS
PEAK TO PEAK
I
1
1.5 DB MAX.
I 6DB
FIGURE 7; I.F. Response-list IF Grid to Video Detector
\\
1
6DB
\
, ____i
FIGURE 8; IF Overall Response -Mixer Grid to Video DETECTOR; Local -Fringe Switch Set to "Local".
174
VOLUME TV -14, MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1958 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
Westinghouse
CHASSIS ASSEMBLY V-2373 & V-2383 (Service material on pages 175 through 180)
MODEL AND CHASSIS CHART
MODELS
CHASSIS
TUNER
TUNER TUBES
17T241 17T242 17T243 17T244 I7T245
17TU241 17TU242 17TU243 17TU244 17TU245
V-2373-1 V-2383-1
VHF: 470V040H01 code 305, channels 2-13
VHF: 470V041H01, code 305, channels 2-13 plus a UHF position
UHF: 472V0321101
RF amp: 3BN4 Mix-osc: 6CG8A
RF amp: 3BN4 Mix-osc: 6CG8A
UHF osc: 3AF4A Crystal mixer: IN82A
CENTERING
To center the picture, turn the centering magnet tabs clockwise or counterclockwise, as required. The tabs are located on the back of the deflection yoke. If difficulty is experienced in making adjustments, or if neck shadows are troublesome, make sure the yoke is pushed forward, tight up against the flare of the CRT.
HORIZONTAL RINGING COIL
The horizontal ringing coil (L400) is adjusted as follows:
1. Short out the ringing coil (accessible from the top of the
2.
chassis) with a short jumper wire. Set the horizontal hold control (HORIZ.) its range, and leave it in this position
tdourtihnegmthidedslteeposf
3.
that follow. Connect a VTVM to test point F (figure
13) or to pin 7 of
the horizontal multivibrator socket to measure DC volt -age
between this point and B minus.
4.
With the receiver tuned to a TV station, adjust C4I9 for
zero voltage on the meter. If zero voltage can proached but not quite reached at one extreme
be apof the
C416 adjustment, set the horizontal hold control slightly
to one side of mid -position to obtain zero voltage.
5.
6.
RAmcehmdeajtuonesvnrte.eCtlth;hhetehejecurnkimnbtpghaeienrcgkfardoacjmgouaislitthn(meL. Te4rin0hnte0gi)rnbefgyocersciwzoveieiltr.rcohshvinoogultladtgoepauonlnol tihnthetoer
horizontal synchronization on all channels.
Two trimount studs which hold antenna terminal board to cabinet. Four screws accessible from the bottom of the receiver. Two screws. One is located to the left of filter capacitor C503A-0504A; the other located to the right.
6. Slide chassis from cabinet. (When installing chassis, reverse above procedure.)
CRT REMOVAL
Note: To remove CRT, it is advisable to first remove chassis.
I. Remove screws 1 through 8. (Figure 2). Screws 5 and 6 are accessible from the bottom of the cabinet.
2. Rei,ove CRT support scrap as follows: A. Remove two hex head screws. One screw is at the upper left of the CRT support strap; the outer at the upper right. B. Remove two CRT support strap -holding nuts, accessible from the bottom of the cabinet.
Important: When installing CRT, insert rubber (bumper) pads at areas in direct contact with CRT glass.
1
2
CHASSIS REMOVAL
Note: The CRT is NOT removed with the chassis.
1. Remove back cover. (Figure 1.)
2.
Remove antenna -holding screw. This screw is located between the telescoping antenna rods, at the top of the
cabinet. Loosen antenna terminal screws to remove
antenna lead.
3. Remove telescoping antenna.
4. Remove speaker as follows: Disconnect speaker leads. Remove two speaker -mounting hex nuts. Use a stubby (short) hex wrench.
5. Remove the following: CRT socket Yoke clamp and deflection yoke
HV anode lead from CRT
Figure 2 - Mask and Safety Shield Assembly
175
1104
C4211
(42? 1431
R440 1502
VOLUME TV -14, MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1958 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION WESTINGHOUSE Chassis V-2373 and V-2383 Schematic Diagram
1501
14'1 C426 L402
R503
n-ZiO0
VHF. AN T.
I
I
1ml
II
JL
TIO0
F.571FTNPUT
.8 TO VHF
Lil
-J _ Z101 .1 I LIO
44mC Ci0 - 1000
4701 L _-_ _ _i_
J C_'-
0-'111F-0
CHANNEL DI i 311, POSITION BOTTOM COVER ASSEMBLY I (470V041H01 ONLY)
VHF OSC AD./ I FINE, TUNING
LICO
C100 120
-C102
15
0-/ 1 5
C241,I,
R101
Tcle AIRA+,
4-81:
10103
15
I L101
SON
SCGVA
1,13105
R104 Z.106 2208
LIO2 1000
°TEST POINT
&CM
.Ann R106
C109
.v) BOO
7100116
11.104
IF
(
OUT
CII7 Tc 1000 tt 05
,;e00: -EA
C409
0501
NOTE: I ALL CAPACITANCE VALUES IN vu.I.,ALL RESISTORS in WATT UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED.
Figure 3 - Chassis Removed from Cabinet, Front
C502B C505B
C417B C403B
C503 C504 A
SW 500 ON -OFF
SECTION I TUNER 470V040H01-VHF (CODE 305) 470 V041 HO -VH F WITH C H.1,1311 RM. (CODE 305)
8500
-.7sX- C501 160 6 )F+ FUSIBLE RESISTOR
X500
C5I3 1500
X5C(:11
14'
0514 1500
-
16 V. P -P SOrL,
,on. R502
VHF ONLY.2K,I5W
47'5 V.
UHF ONLYY1.13%.15W NvIv
8503
8501
'5°
ISO
4 W
IOW
4313134 I
1-1-0503/1
I
05028 I6Da.
; 150 MFD
LO B+
130
+1- C5044
- . 1001002\
AU010
eo,n 15 V. P -P
C505E1 30MFD
45 v P -P 60'1
\\(y),
VP -P 601.)
HOLE FOR OSC ALIGNMENT
,17D4
DAMPER
MATES B -
Mat
66,1154 17006A
DAMPER AUDIO OUT HORiZ,OUT.
n
7rll4(*)._22
R504
_ C506
VHF ONLY = Z13 A. ,i0W
.033
UHF ONLY .22.,10W
4CS6
SYNC. SEP
31,'
8c S7
41)1_6_1 vERT.OISCH FM DET. VERT. OUT
4 113115 4
VOLUME CONTROI
PICTURE CONTROL
T201
501
T C 01
AXv
8067 I7C DP4
HOR Z MV C.R T
45
1
8
p 330xsi's.i
13I 3TC$A I I
4i
LaFyi
VINDICATES CHASSIS RAILS
"rG ElA 0 C. R.F, AMP.
5
3
ROBB ^C°58°09 3.1IF
L.500 34
-VHF TUNER
coNZ C512
U008
4 St,
NOTES. I. D.C. VOLTAGES MEASURED FROM 8- WITH NO APPLIED SIGNAL USING A VTVM,
2,PE AK TO PEAR WAVEFORMS WERE TAKEN WITH PICTURE CONTROL YET FOR 450 VOLT PEAR TO PEAR SIGNAL AT THE C.R,T CATHODE, ALL OTHER CONTROLS SET FOR NORMAL PICTURE.
S. ALL CAPACITANCE VALUES LESS TH6M-1 ARE WI) AND GREATER TRANS ARE M M F., WHILE ALL RESISTANCE VALUES IN OHMS AND In WATT UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED
4BZ6 4BZ6
EOB
!pair
ist IF
VIDEO OuT SND LIM
.3,1 3 4
- 0510
1,680
5114
S;48C5o1 I
1HASSIS RAIL
91,
X500 X501
T4OC:
111-
Figure 4 - Chassis Removed from Cabinet, Near View
DEFLECTION YOKE
To correct for picture tilt, loosen the hex -head screw on the deflection yoke cover. Turn the yoke, clockwise or counterclockwise, until the raster is level with respect to the mask. Tighten the hex -head screw. Important: Make sure the yoke is pushed up against the CRT flare, as far forward as it will go. If this is not done, neck shadows result.
SECTION 5 POWER a HEATERS
HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT AND VERTICAL LINEARITY
ADJUSTMENT
Both controls are at the back of the chassis. The HEIGHT adjustment controls the height of the picture. The vertical linearity adjustment (V. L IN) controls the relationship between vertical dimensions of the upper and lower parts of the picture. A balance between the two controls is necessary to make the picture symmetrical and fill the mask vertically.
176
VOLUME TV -14, MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1958 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
WESTINGHOUSE
V-2373 d V-2383 Chassis, Schematic Diagram
R200 100K
00
C.20031 I
R201 47K
48N6 4707' 6203 F M DEC 2K5V' 470
0704V
C205"
.0047q_
C211
680 uKF ONLY
#2024 600
QUIETING CON 7
SECT ION souniQ IF Alga 1,1
L202
4 51416
I
1
1'41
207T I
0
_J 4
8204
R206 C,.,09 12K _O1
6605A
AUDIO OUT
'--7.I 5
I r--4.
1-7
, R207
500K VOLUME CON7,
0206
;.00F5
i2111
3306205
210v
7201 OUTPUT TRANS.
C2101 500421 MiErN4
.0047
TO AUDIO 6+
220 V.
CD240V.
1309.
7300 4 MC
M.
5%
46Z 6
125V
T301 45,216c
IC304 2.2
E 3M -
L
-Li0r
R307 470K
C3608301
spzl -SECTION 3 VIDES_
2.4 IF AMP 1259
7302
4 C_PA 1
41, I Cr--I I 1I 43.1X/c
3rd IF AVM ,i'
l
3309
3.916
3 4.2
125V.
T303
04293 _ CRYSTAL
DOT
K
471616 16.6
83I3
61
L302 w 156
MOO
1709
I/2 134U8
L304 4.5816 002'-
C314 54
Are
5
I
6 1259
4 1259.
VIDEO OUT
L301
5000
.0C43I72
41P
2
R301 47
.6V. 11310
470
C308 470
1.310 R312
470
,030901}
0311 130
C310 .0015
R314 3.66
R319
AV 27K
R313 2708
#326 -2.5V21
t19 8320
C3.10311 2.711
R317 156
15
318 156
T.
COICN%
8321 4.76
VHF ONLY
V34 680 2 KV
UHF ONLY
UHF ONLY
C3141500 1.41(1,
1 g 47
1,11113IIIIIII111111.111
3.5 V.P-P 600)
BRIGHTNESS COST
R32233 IM
HP 1110111H 1111
90 V.P-P 6 ,U
3709.
j_0,.. R
KV 3
031635 To 13°V.
I4
112326 300
011
- C317 .047
13KV
130 9
00 5.15.4.40N
R401
228
R24.570m096C401
R404 51-7V !E P. Z 4716
511
I
.01
C402
409.
647
116100R402
1270
470K 36
6
R408 R405 104 60K 2w
8407 666
2400
-J
1/2 8CS7
12001. P -P 60,1,
R408 680K
vERT.DISCH.
C404 .0047
110 V.
/111409
15K
0405 5% .047
C4071 C408
An. 6416 47018
.0I15 KVI "Vilprse,
V
-87V. #11101°K .0033
11416 150
R4196
o -1C410
5111 11210117
T.33
COPT YELLOW.
01141402
M.66
24.01
400 I WO AV 8
-0.35V. R403
27K
.4 -
HP WHIM 1111
50V P -P 60 rl/
V.
-;61C140,3013A
50 V.P-P 60,1)
R415
110
82K
28
IV/
VERT.
225 v. p -p 600) MOLD COST
5,4J3
RTOOK ir R414 146
VERT
1,, 50F
LIN. CANT,
-r
u5wP-P 60,1)
9 73 V. R417
00
5409
C409
!get
14
5 2-
VERT
vow
-rfn001112 1555
I
JO6_
I
igrLL 7
J
R420
11
L
H
28 V.P-P 15750,0
-
51 2402 rC422
62141AF
1
I
C423 63
19.7V 81
1R435
-
11.1
C424
i X400 I
IR 434
1, ONLY
34(i7
A$01400/1,
1742i
Frol),12.8it
K
1K RINGING
COIL
2409.
1826
70V P -P 15750
R442NL40044,6
. 82K
T
.44,367 $1:4626
.t8432 5470K
0425 390
I
R437 10K
R438 6 8
8436 2206
G-
12
I448
Ov.
BG G7 ;6112(6 KORiZ.MULTi
II5V
6
1155v
C4e68
2
4,
170066
Ho C.1420
140612.0U1, 0403 14 66,455
, 0419 #431
19-160 150
1551 6.8K 4, 4W
11423 470K
_i C8:2 1±
C
24 V
9
3
5424
47K
.4V
8425
1000
R43606
-
KOMI
HOLD
± 1 1-1_
#429
18011
-2111V
C421
105 V. P -P 14750A/
1704 DAMPER
'150; L401 14vh
7401 8439 4,7
8306
/ 0;1
226 5 I
IBA I
CAUTION DO NOT
el
S
MEASURE 14 61
I
CI4SO26 OK V
250V. L402 401
-C428
'1.006E1 -1- C427
-.033
8440 1006
I W
5441 4.7K
i 2.2 5 P 15750,1" SECTION 4 SW C.r..?
QUIETING CONTROL.
The quieting control is located on the back of the chassiT. This control, which determines the AM rejection characteristics of the sound system, is normally adjusted during sound alignment and will not ordinarily require further adjustment. In weak signal areas, however, a reduction in noise or hiss on the sound may be obtained by slightly re -adjusting the control.
SPEAKER LOAD RESISTOR
When the chassis is removed from its cabinet, with speaker disconnected, substitute a load resistor (3.2 ohms, 2 watts) for the speaker. Connect the resistor to the audio output transformer secondary. Failure to do so may result in damage to the audio output tube.
177
VOLUME TV -14, MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1958 TELEVISION 'SERVICING INFORMATION WESTINGHOUSE Chassis V-2373 and V-2383 Alignment Information (Continued)
VIDEO ALIGNMENT
-- 099
-..\ 0 if ---_------<---,
,099-.',
..i
,4 --i
1
1
I
-"1:14'..
Figure 5 - Alignment Tool
0
RE
r.
ISO rt
Z0 IMPEDANCE OF SWEEP CABLE
TV RECEIVER
0 300n-
INPUT O
ZO
50rk. 72 ft
RI
I56-n-
824
R2 120.1111011.
471<
POINT 'El
RECEIVER CHASSIS GROUND
470 -)-
MMF
TO VTVM OR JOS:ILLOSCOPE
Figure 6 - Decoupling Network, Oscilloscope or VTVM Input
SHIELDED
P:1_ IP
CI
trGENERATOR LEAD
Figure 8 - Impedance Matching Network
41.25
43
42.25
44
45 45.75
47.25 MC
2 VOLTS PEAK TO PEAK
RI _i_
, .".. I = .001 11F D RI = DEPEND:, UPON GEN. OUTPUT
IM PE 04'.NCE 52 n-, 72 -fl- etc. Figure 7 - Coupling Network, RF Generator
6DB OR 50%
Figure 9 - Response Curve, First IF Grid to Test Pont B
VIDEO ALIGNMENT PROCEDURE CHART
Step
1.
Generator
Freq. (mc)
Connection
Indicator
Adjustment
Connect -3V bias to test point A. Detune L104 by turning slug CCW, all the way out.
2.
IF sweep
43.9
Grid of 3rd IF
amplifier (Pin 1)
thru terminated
cable.
(Figure 7)
Scope, calibrated 2V P -P. Connect to test point B through decoupling network (Figure 6)
T303. Bottom slug for max. output - top slug to rock
response at 43.9 mc
3.
CW
43.1
Test point 0,
thru tetminated
cable.
(Figure 7)
VTVM. Connect to test point 3 through decoupling network. (Figure 6)
Set VTVM below - 1.5V.
T302, max. output
4.
CW
47.25
L.300. Min. output
5.
CW
45.2
T301. Max. output
6.
IF sweep
44
PI
Scope. Calibrated 2V P -P. Connect to test point 3 thru decoupling
network (Figure 6)
Touch up T301, T302 and T303 so that curve resembles that shown in figure 9. Note. If excessive tilt is observed, adjust T303 to 44.5 mc.
7.
CW
41.25
Tuner test point through terminated cable. (Figure 7)
VTVM. Connect to test point 3 thru decoupling network. (Figure 6)
Set VTVM below - 1.5V.
T300. Top slug for min.
8.
CW
59.75
Antenna terminals thru impedence matching network (Figure 8)
Set fine tuning control for min. output.
9.
OF sweep
CH 2
Antenna terminals
Scope, calibrated 2V
Tune L104 (on tuner) to max.
54-60
thru impedance
P -P. Connect to test
output and T300 (bottom slug)
matching network.
point 3 through decoupling
to rock response at center of
(Figure 81
network.
pass bond. (57 mc)
(Figure 6;
(Figure 11) Use alignment
too/ .080'. or flats.
178
a
VOLUME TV -14, MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1958 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
WESTINGHOUSE Chassis V-2373 and V-2383 Alignment Information (Continued)
IDEALIZED RF RESPONSE
CURVE
608 DOWN FROM HIGHEST CARRIER
4. Using a strong signal, adjust the quadrature coil, L202,
for maximum output.
5. Reduce the signal to the lowest level that will produce an indication. Adjust L200 and T200 again for maximum
output. 6. Apply a 4.5 mc AM signal (modulated approximately 30
percent) to video test point B. Adjust the generator output for strong signal level. 7. Adjust the quieting control for minimum AM response or output.
PICTURE
SOUND
NOTE ,
CARRIER
CARRIER
A -208 TILT FROM THE HIGHEST CARRIER IS ACCEPTABLE ON EITHER SIDE.
Figure 10 - Response Curve, RF
SOUND ALIGNMENT PROCEDURE
ALIGNMENT USING A LOCALLY GENERATED SIGNAL
1. Connect a high impedance AC voltmeter or oscilloscope across the volume control for use as an indicator.
2. Set quieting control, R202A, to mid -range. 3. Apply a 4.5 mc FM signal (deviation approximately 7.5
kc) to video test point B. (Figure 13.)
470V041H01
CODE 305
470V040H01
CODE 305
6C08A
1
5
omsc.Ix.
ALIGNMENT USING AN AIR SIGNAL
1. Tune the receiver to a television station. Connect an attenuator between the antenna lead-in and receiver so
that signal strength may be varied from weak to strong. 2. Set the quieting control, R202A, to mid -range. 3. Apply a strong signal to the receiver. Adjust the quadra-
ture coil, L202, for maximum program sound. If peaks occur at two widely separated positions, use the one that occurs with the slug farthest counterclockwise. If two peaks occur within a narrow range of adjustment, sufficient signal is not being applied to the receiver or the quieting control is not set at the correct position. 4. Apply a very weak signal that allows noise to be heard. Adjust the 4.5 mc IF slugs (L200 and T200) for maximum program sound. If peaks occur at two different positions of the slug, use the peak that occurs when the slug is farthest counterclockwise. 5. Apply a strong signal and readjust the quieting control for minimum hum. This control determines the AM rejection characteristics of the sound system. Its correct setting is normally about mid -position.
1704
DAM PER
R. F.
AMP 3
3BN4
SW 500 OFF -ON
SWITCH
R 504
13
7j
472V032H01
470V041 H01
FUSIBLE RESISTOR IS LOCATED ON VERTICAL MEZZANINE.
T 300
17CDP4
r-
-J
C402
II
-71
8CS7
v&EF075TCUSCe
4CS6
SYNC. SER
17 DO6A
HORIZ.
Or U-TPUT
6A05A
AUDIO OUTPUT
T301
L300
L3
4BZ6
2nd. I.F. AMP
("4
®T302
4C86
3rd. I.F. AMP
303
2400
F BAU8 VIDEO &
SOUND AMP
14
T200
5
3
(DL 200
(9L 304
4
[X 400)
2 402
L202
8CG7 HORIZ. MULTI.
-u- u- ,-
VERT. I17 PERT. LIN. VAC HOLD
HEIGHT
QUIETING BRIGHTNESS
Figure 12 - Tube Location, Heater String and Adjustments
HORIZ. HOLD
179
VOLUME TV -14, MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1958 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
WESTINGHOUSE Chassis V-2373 and V-2383 Service Material, Continued
VERT. LIN. R4I28
O
VERT. NOLO R4I15
HEIGHT R411/5
QUIETING CONTROL R202 A
BRIGHTNESS CONTROL R322 A
CO
HOLD
CONTROL
R430A
C2I0
443
C)
Figure 13 - Bottom View of Printed Board Showing Top Components as Schematic Symbols
KEY
1 - IF input from tuner 2 - Brown heater lead to tuner 3 - White AGC lead to tuner 4 - Grey & white lead to R500 5 - Grey & white lead to X500 & X501 6 - Green lead to CRT pin 2 & SW300 7 - Blue lead to T400 8 - Yellow lead to T400 9 - Red lead to CRT pin 3 10 - White & black lead to T401, term. 3 11 - Red lead to T400 12 - Shielded lead to R207 13 - Blue lead to T201 14 - Orange lead to R502 & C504A (lo 134)
15 - Brown lead to 17D4, pin 8
16 - Red & white lead to R501 & C503A (250V hi B4) 17 - Orange & white lead to C40313
18 - Shielded lead to R207 19 - Black lead to CRT heater pin 1 20 - Red & black lead to C417B 21 - Brown lead to CRT heater pin 7 22 - Green lead to R318 23 - Blue lead to R318 A - AGC test point & external bias connection B - Video load test point C - CRT video drive test point D - Video alignment signal injection test point F - HMV correction voltage test point
T - Tuner AGC test point & external bias connection
180
VOLUME TV -14, MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1958 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
CHASSIS 15A25 - 17A20 17A20Q 17A21Q- 19A20- 19A20Q
(Service material on pages 181 through 190)
MODEL
A1510L A1511G A1512J A1515W
A22211 & Y A2223E,H,R,Y A2245E & R A2250M & R A2251E & R A2282E & R A23297 A2330E,H,R A2358E & R A2359E,H,R A2362M & R A2673E & R A3000E & R A3001E,H,R A3004, E,R A3006E,H,R A3008E & R A3010E,H,R A3011, E,Y A3012H & R A3013H
A3014H & R A4007E & R
TYPE
Table Table Table Table (Base) Table Table
Console Console Console Console Table Table
Console Console Console Console Table Table Console Console Console Console Console Console Console Console Console
CHASSIS
15A25 15A25 15A25 15A25 17A20 17A20 17A20 17A20 17A20 17A20 19A20 19A20 19A20 19A20 19A20 17A20 17A21Q 17A20Q 17A21Q 17A20Q 17A20Q 19A20Q 19A20Q 19A20Q 19A20Q 19A20Q 19A20Q
TUNER
Bandswitch Bandswitch Bandswitch Bandswitch Bandswitch
Target Turret Target Turret Target Turret Target Turret Target Turret Bulls Eye Turret Bulls Eye Turret Bulls Eye Turret Bulls Eye Turret Bulls Eye Turret Target Turret Target Turret Target Turret Target Turret Target Turret Target Turret Bulls Eye Turret Bulls Eye Turret Bulls Eye Turret Bulls Eye Turret Bulls Eye Turret Bulls Eye Turret
PICTURE TUBE
14XP4A 14XP4A 14XP4A 14XP4A
21CXP4 21CXP4 21CXP4 21CXP4 21CXP4 21CXP4 21CXP4 21CXP4 21CXP4 21CXP4 21CXP4 24AJP4 21CXP4 21CXP4 21CXP4 21CXP4 21CXP4 21CXP4 21CXP4 21CXP4 21 CXP4 21CXP4 24AJP4
Suffix "Q" following the chassis number identifies a receiver equipped with the Zenith Space Command remote control. Suffix "U" is added to the chassis and model number when the receiver is factory equipped with the Zenith UHF continuous tuner.
BULL'S EYE TUNER ADJUSTMENTS
To adjust the receiver for bull's eye tuning, set the fine tuning control to its approximate center position. Without further adjustment of the control insert an 68-31 alignment wrench through the hole provided at the rear of the tuner and adjust each operating channel to resonance. It will be noted that tuning to one side
of resonance results in a faded, washed-out picture with the spacings between the wedge lines fogged and tuning in the opposite direction causes the spaces between the lines to clear up. However, going beyond this point causes the picture to take on a "wormy" appearance from sound getting into the picture. Correct adjustment is obtained by tuning to the "wormy"
picture and then backing the adjustment screw slightly until the picture clears up.
181
VOLUME TV -14, MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1958 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
ZENITH Chassis 15A25, 17A20, - Q,
A G C ADJUSTMENT
To adjust the AGC, slowly turn the delay control until a point is reached where the picture distorts and buzz
is heard in the sound. The control should then be backed down from this position and set at a point comfortably below the level of inter -carrier buzz, picture distortion and improper sync. This setting will correspond to approximately 3 V. peak to peak output from the video detector.
FRINGE LOCK ADJUSTMENT 17A AND 19A CHASSIS
The fringe lock adjustment is made to obtain best possible synchronization under weak and noisy signal conditions. To make the adjustment, first check the AGC adjustment and proceed as follows.
1. Turn the fringe lock control fully clockwise and then back it off approximately 1/4 turn. Adjust the vertical and horizontal hold controls and check operation of the receiver to see that it syncs normally when the turret is switched from channel to channel.
2. If the picture jitters or shows evidence of delay, tearing, split phase, etc., back down the fringe lock control further, a few degrees at a time, each time re -adjusting the hold controls and switching from channel to channel until normal sync action is obtained. It will be found that under normal signal conditions, the correct adjustment will be near the counterclockwise position of the control.
3. In fringe and noisy areas, the best adjustment will be found at or near the.maximum clockwise position of the control; however, do not automatically turn the fringe lock fully clockwise in fringe areas. Follow the procedure outlined. In areas where both local and
fringe signals are received, a compromise setting should be made for best overall performance.
17A21Q, 19A20, -Q, Continued
CORRECTOR MAGNET ADJUSTMENT 19A20 CHASSIS
Two corrector magnets are used to obtain straight, sharply focused sweep lines across the face of the picture tube. The magnets are mounted on the deflection coil mounting brackets and can be moved in and out or up and down by bending the flexible arms which support them. Adjustment has been made at the factory
and should not require re -adjustment unless accidentally bent out of position. If this occurs, proceed as follows:
1. With the vertical and horizontal size controls, reduce the size of the picture to a point where the four corners and sides of the picture are visible. (In some receivers it may not be possible to reduce the picture size sufficiently to see all the sides and in this case it may be necessary to shift the picture with the centering control to view one side at a time).
2. Bend the corrector magnet arms until the corners become right angles and the top of the raster is parallel with the bottom and the left side is parallel with the right side. After adjustment, the picture should be restored to normal size.
ALIGNMENT
A suitable VHF and UHF sweep generator in conjunction with an accurate marker must be used for alignment work. It is extremely important to terminate the sweep generator output cable properly and to check whether or not the attenuator is reactive. If the attenuator is reactive or if the output cable is improperly terminated, correct alignment cannot be made since the degree of attenuation then may change the shape as well as the amplitude of the response curve. The position of the attenuator should only vary the amplitude and not the shape of the response curve.
AFC ADJUSTMENT 15A25, 15Z30 AND 15Z31 CHASSIS
The horizontal oscillator ringing coil is adjusted
as follows:
1. Connect a jumper from the grid end of diode X2 (see Fig.31) to chassis. Connect a short jumper across the terminals of the oscillator coil. Set the horizontal fine control to the center of its range. 2. Tune in a TV station and adjust the horizontal coarse control until the picture is as nearly synchronized as possible.
3. Remove the jumper from the oscillator coil and adjust the core until the picture is again as nearly synchronized as possible.
4. Remove the jumper from the AFC diode and check operation. A slight readjustment of the coarse control may be necessary to insure positive synchronization with the fine control approximately in the center of its range.
CENTERING ADJUSTMENT
The centering assembly is built into the yoke housing. This assembly is made of two magnetic rings which can be rotated by means of tabs.
TO RECEIVER ANTENNA TERMINALS
MATCHING TRANSFORMER
50 OHMS UNBALANCED TO 300 OHMS BALANCED
SWEEP GENERATOR OUTPUT CABLE
HOOKED END FOR CONNECTING TO VARIOUS GRIDS
470 MMFD. CERAMIC
CAPACITOR
5612
CARBON RESISTOR
GROUND DIRECTLY TO CHASSIS. DO NOT USE LEADS.
Fig. 5 IF-RF Alignment Fixtures.
182
VOLUME TV -14, MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1958 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
ZENITH Alignment, Continued
SOUND ALIGNMENT
Proper alignment of the 4.5 Mc intercarrier sound channel can only be made if the signal to the receiver antenna terminals is reduced to a level below the limiting point of the 6BN6 Gated Beam Detector. This level can be easily identified by the "hiss" which then accompanies the sound. Various methods may be used to reduce the signal level; however, a step attenuator is recommended for most satisfactory results.
1. Connect the step attenuator between the antenna and the receiver antenna terminals.
2. Tune in a tone modulated TV signal. Adjust the step attenuator until the signal is reduced to a level where a "hiss" is heard with the sound.
3. Adjust the sound take -off coil (top and bottom cores), intercarrier transformer, quadrature coil and buzz control for the best quality sound and minimum buzz. It must be remembered that any of these adjustments may cause the "hiss" to disappear and further reduction of the signal will be necessary to prevent the "hiss" from disappearing during alignment.
6. Adjust the top and bottom cores of the fourth IF transformer to obtain a response similar to Fig.6 . The 41.25 and 45.75 Mc markers should be adjusted for symmetry and should fall as close to the response
curve humps as possible. If the correct response curve
cannot be obtained, check the position of the two cores to see that they are not butted but are entering their respective windings from the opposite ends of the coils.
7. Connect the sweep generator to test point "A" (Fig. 1 or 2 depending on tuner used) and adjust attenuator to obtain 3 volts peak to peak output at
the detector. 8. Adjust the first IF bottom core (44.Mc), second IF (42.75 Mc), third IF (45 Mc), and converter plate coil to obtain a response similar to Fig. 7.
9. Switch the oscilloscope to 10X gain used in the above steps to blow up the trap slots. Adjust the 47.25 Mc trap for maximum attenuation of 47.25 Mc marker. The 41.25 Mc marker should be in the approximate position shown in Fig.8 . On some receivers more oscilloscope gain, more signal input, or lower bias may be necessary to adjust the 47.25 Mc trap. (If the 41.25 Mc marker does not fall at the approximate position shown or nearer the base line, it may be necessary to make a slight re -adjustment of the 2nd IF. If this is done, check the overall response after adjustment).
VIDEO IF ALIGNMENT 15A AND 17Z
SERIES RECEIVERS The video IF amplifier is stagger tuned, using one double tuned and four single tuned circuits. The converter plate coil tunes to 45.4 Mc, the first IF to 43.6 Mc, the second IF to 42.75 Mc, the third IF to 45 Mc, and the fourth IF (both cores) to 43.6 Mc. Two 47.25 Mc traps are used in the 15Z30 and 31 chassis (one in the 15A25). One is a part of the 1st IF transformer assembly and the other is wound on the same form as the 40.50 second IF cathode trap. Attenuation of the 41.25 Mc associated sound carrier is controlled by adjusting the band width. With the exception of the traps, a slight deviation from the above mentioned frequencies is permissible to obtain proper band pass; however, the order must be maintained. To align the IF, proceed as follows:
1. To prevent an erroneous IF response, disable the local oscillator by wrapping a short bare wire around the oscillator grid and grounding same. In "U" models it is only necessary to switch to the UHF position. Connect terminal "F" (Fig.31 ) to chassis.
2. In the 15A20 and 15Z30 chassis connect the negative lead of 6 V bias to "E" and the positive lead to chassis. In the 15Z31 chassis use 5 V bias, however, connect the positive lead to the junction of the 56 and 1500 ohm resistors in the cathode circuit of the 1st IF and the negative lead to "E".
3. Connect a calibrated oscilloscope through a 10K isolation resistor to terminal "C".
4. Connect the sweep generator through a terminating
network (Fig. 5) to the grid (pin 1) of the third IF. 5. Adjust the sweep generator to obtain a pattern similar to Fig. 6 with a detector output of 3 volts
peak to peak. Do not exceed this output during alignment.
Fig. 6 4th IF Response.
Fig. 7 Overall IF Response.
Fig. 8 Expanded View of Traps. 10. Switch oscilloscope to position used in Step 8. Remove the bias battery and ground the AGC. On the 15Z31 chassis connect a jumper between "E" and the junction of the 56 and 1500 ohm resistors). Adjust signal generator to obtain a 3 volt peak to peak response similar to Fig. 9 . Adjust the 2nd IF cathode trap for maximum displacement of the 40.50 Mc marker but not to exceed the displacement of the 41.25 Mc marker.
183
VOLUME TV -14, MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1958 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
ZENITH Chassis 15A25, 17A20, -Q, 17A21Q, 19A20, -Q, Alignment, Continued
marker can fall within + 0.5 Mc of the specified
frequency. If the correct response cannot be obtained, check the position of the cores to see that they are not butted but are entering their respective windings from the opposite ends of the coils.
5. Connect the sweep generator to terminal "A" (Mixer grid, see Fig. 2 ). Connect terminal "F" to
chassis and connect a jumper between terminal "E" and the junction of the 56 and 1500 ohm resistors in the
cathode of the 1st IF. Adjust sweep to obtain a response similar to Fig.13 .
Fig. 9 Overall Response with Zero Bias for adjusting the 40.5 Mc Trap.
VIDEO IF ALIGNMENT 17A AND 19A
CHASSIS 1. Slowly turn the channel selector until the turret is made to rest between two channels. This will prevent an erroneous response.
2. Connect an oscilloscope through a 10,000 ohm isolation resistor to terminal "C" (detector). Connect the ground lead to chassis. 3. Feed the sweep generator through the special termination network shown in Fig. 5 to point "G" (Pin 1 of 6BZ6, 3rd IF). Adjust generator to obtain a response similar to Fig.10 with a detector output of 3 volts peak to peak. Do not exceed this level during any of the adjustments.
Fig. 12 Further Expansion of Fig. 11 for detail view of the 39.75 and 47.25 Mc Traps.
6. Refer to Fig.11 and adjust the 39.75 Mc, 41.25 Mc,
and the two 47.25 Mc traps for minimum marker amplitude as in Fig.11 . It can be seen that high
4. Set the marker generator to 45.75 Mc and alternately adjust the top and bottom cores of the 4th IF for maximum gain and symmetry with the 45.75 Mc marker positioned as shown in Fig.m. The 39.75 Mc
Fig. 10 4th IF Response.
Fig. 13 Overall IF Response.
oscilloscope gain must be used to "run" the response off the screen in order to view a "blow up" of the traps.
7. Disconnect the jumper between "E" and the 56 and
1500 ohm cathode resistors. Connect this jumper between "E" and chassis. Adjust sweep generator for 3 volts peak to peak output. Alternately adjust the 2nd, 3rd, 1st IF and the converter plate coil until an overall response similar to Fig.13 is obtained. It will
be found that the 2nd IF affects the low side (42.75 Mc)
and the 3rd IF the high side of the response. After alignment remove all jumpers and check operation.
Fig. 11 Expanded View of Traps.
Fig. 14 Channel 4 RF Response. This is representative of other channels.
184
VOLUME TV -14, MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1958 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
ZENITH Chassis 15A25 Tube and Trimmer Layout, Continued
VHF BAND SWITCH TUNER S-40282
AS SHOWN BELOW NOTE 'Li -MODEL INCORPORATE A UHF CONTINUOUS TUNER S-40504 AND A SV83 VHF TUNER. REFER TO 17Z30U TUBE AND TRIMMER LAYOUT DRAWING (123-1598) FOR
ADJUSTMENTS.
OSC. ADJUSTING SCREWS (12 SCREWS)
CHANNEL SELECTOR SHAFT (SHOWN IN CHANNEL 6 POSITION)
FINE TUNING STOP
I. F. CHANNEL
(OCCURS BETWEEN CHANNEL 2 $ 13 'LI' MODELS ONLY)
FINE TUNER
6
Ti
ti
TOP VIEW
-VERTICAL HOLD CONTROL
/
WIDTH CONTROL I METAL SLEEVE]
TUNABLE CONVERTER PLATE COIL
IMPORTANT RETAINING SPRING
TO PREVENT TUBE SHIELDS FROM CONNECTING THE CHASSIS TO THE
METAL CABINET
DO NOT REMOVE
CONVERTER SCREEN GRID/
(SCOPE OBSERVATION FOR R.F. BAND PASSES)
HEATER CONNECTION TO UHF CONTINUOUS TUNER 3AF4 TUBE
(V MODELS ONLY)
"It MODELS I.F. INPUT JACK
/ "U"MODELS 1ST If TUNABLE COILTEST POINT "A" CONVERTER GRID INPUT
2ND IT TRANSFORMER -7 BRIGHTNESS CONTROL--/ TEST POINT "E" I.F. BIAS -
1ST. I. F TRANSFORMER AND 47.25MC. TRAP (TOP CORE)
CATHODE TRAP 3RD I.F. TRANSFORMER ANTENNATERMINALS
OO.
4,0 0
TO B+UHF CONT. TUNER n -
("U" MODELS ONLY) Li -
B+ FROM MAIN CHASSIS
---BEAM BENDER
HORIZONTAL HOLD CONTROL forrQE. HORIZONTAL RANGE CONTROL ON BOTTOM
A.G.G.
A G C.
/ANTENNA
TEST POINT "N" 12.6V HEATER
FROM MAIN CHASSIS
VERTICAL LINEARITY -7
z -TEST ININT "
DETECTOR OUTPUT
TEST POINT V--
TEST POINT "F"
3RD. I.F. ALIGNMENT TO BE GROUNDED FOR
LE ALIGNMENT
-
--- 4 TH. I.F. TRANSFORMER -HEIGHT CONTROL -TEST POINT "H" SOUND LIMITER PLATE SOUND TAKE OFF COIL
--CONTRAST CONTROL
_BUZZ CONTROL
--TEST POINT "D" VIDEO OUTPUT
AUADRATURE COIL
TEST POINT "G" SOUND DISCRIMINATOR OUTPUT
INTERCARRIER COIL
--,
3.141
VOLUME CONTROL -TEST POINT "K" FILAMENT
YOKE ADJUSTMENT SCREW AND MOUNTING BRACKET
PIX CENTERING ADJUSTMENT
SELENIUM DIODE
(HORIZONTAL A.F.C.)
SHIELDED A.C.CABLE
Tube and Trimmer Layout, 15A25 Chassis.
HORIZONTAL RINGING COIL A.C.INTERLOCK
TEST POINT "L" FILAMENT (ON FUSIBLE RESISTOR)
185
FRINGE LOCK-
WIDTH CONTROL (METAL SLEEVE)
TEST POINT "H" SOUND 6BN6 GRID QUADRAT URE COIL TEST POINT "J" SOUND OUTPUT -TO VOLUME CONTROL SPEAKER CONNECTIONS --DEFLECTION YOKE -------
- 300 MA. FUSE-
VOLUME CONTROL
-
V13)
6D06
VI5
6AX4GT 6AX4GTA
rBUZZ CONTROL
PIX CENTERING ADJUSTMENT
COIL FINTERCARRIER
rDEFLECTION YOKE ADJUSTMENT
TEST POINT "F" TO BE GROUNDED FOR I.F. ALIGNMENT
I-TEST POINT"C" DETECTOR OUTPUT
4TH. I. F. TRANSFORMER ASSEMBLY AND CRYSTAL DETECTOR
A. C. INTERLOCK
TEST POINT "G" 3RD I.F. GRID
2ND. I. F TRANSFORMER TOP SLUG AND 47.25 MC. ADJACENT SOUND TRAP COIL BOTTOM SLUG
I. F OUTPUT FROM TUNER
,
-ADJACENT CHANNEL SOUND TRAP
47.25MG. BOTTOM SLUG
N\ -ADJACENT CHANNEL PIX TRAP
04\ 39.75MC. TOP SLUG
"-1ST. I.F. TRANSFORMER TOP SLUG
'MA
41.25 MC. TRAP BOTTOM SLUG, ASSOCIATED SOUNC
I'D
TEST POINT "E" I. F. A.G.C.
3RD. I.F. TRANSFORMER
SOUND TAKE OFF COIL
TEST POINT "0" VIDEO OUTPUT
PIX V17
2ICX P4
5U4 0 1-.),34
--r-
TONE CONTROL
FOCUS--
HORIZONTAL HOLD A.G.G. DELAY CONTROL
r
lZ
-----CONTRAST CONTROL --- VERTICAL LINEARITY
- BRIGHTNESS CONTROL VERTICAL HEIGHT CONTROL VERTICAL HOLD
Tube and Trimmer Layout, 17A20 Chassis.
CI
"0',`,1'41r
03 Ca :10%
to NO Mr ON NNE. 4
TO AEC ON TUNER
"v11,2,'r
3Rp If v6 (AVM
00E0 WI SOUK, Lis
V3
6826
1ST I F A VS
"3
V4
68Z6
2ND IF
Sr.
so,
5
6BZ6
r 3RD IF
AIL
V6A
2 6AW8A
VIDEO AMP.
1.4 I
IRV"
tar
TO Rr
V17
2ICXP4-24AJP 4
PIE
TEST POINTS
C, DETECTOR OUTPUT 1)- VIDEO OUTPUT
0- IF ACC
TO BE GROUNDED FOR ALIGNMENT G. 3RD I F GRID H. SOUND ONG GRID
SOUND OUTPUT
+265V.
710 I00 Atm 0%
C5IS30 -
Nur
tM%
2508
3 NC6
34,5% 2/75e%
BMGHTNEST 10cm
R3
CORM.
CONTROL
031A%
trot
4- 265V
Cr IN ;y1 na.6T,7;
per
029
PS a.
POP 10%
ni
is. 1,I;
i me
OTA
i W.M -`' 6405-645AK SOUND OUTPUT 135
A 0012
r BROKEN FOR '0' MODEL ONLY
AOr
V9
6BU8
SYNC.CUPPER B A.G.C.
11
VIOA 1/2 6CY7
e VERT. OS
0033 = ann,n
IR, 0'
M.0.0( 0.
COO !10%
Z.7.1
VOB 1/2I 6CY7
CAI ;)0k
033 ye%
55- 06
TS TENT
NFL COILS
re
MOS OUTPUT
DISCRWMA
rt
slue
Sv CLIP
V16
51:1134
5U4GB
MO
RECT.
Til
VITA
1/2 6C 7
A.F.C.
VIIB 1/2 6CN7
HORIZ. CONTROL
VI2A
1/2 6CG7
moRiZ.OSC.
055
CSA
530 NW :KT%
NCO Nuf Ye%
227
3
VI2B
I/2 6CG7
HORIZ DISCH
.350V
15151
+265 V
VI3
Tit
6D06A
H RIZ.OUTPUT
+450V.
V14
1J3 IB3GT
N.V. RECT.
TEN? SIC ART Out
1121
C5S moo
:10%
OTC
02
ACC/
KA OK
CA StsSGE
vi3 OVA, +01111 OUI
6.3rAC 9 NAPS
,..
-a&ooss
Not OLD AAA
O3 Rvac 025 AMPS
07,
maul ION
1.11121 istoo,
'G. MIL
CULT
THIS TAP ON V MODELS (EXCEPT ITA206)
r POI SOCKET ON 5.41940 REMOTE TONE WAYI CONTROL CHASSIS
-I-
CAN
0tn047-
CONTRE
Rti
NY*
PK 27
-CS2
T.
13.75 NC
+265V
SOCKET AND WIRING FOR 1102001100900. 1
R00 NA STA -Ito FuSE ROTES
ALL VOLTASES MEASURED FROM GRASSIS TO POINTS INDICATED
IN
OUT
47
42 K
I-UD 1-680MMFD
1- MMFD
EQUIVALENT CEICUIT FON 77.3 INTZGRATCM
ITALIC' ONLY
II''a
1,6 .11 116 561.
6111071 [0101.0. 046516
Schematic Diagram, 17A20, 17A20Q and 17A21Q
ALL
ARE DC UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED
ALL
VOLTAGES TO NE MEASURED MIN A VACUUM TUBE
VOLTMETER RAVING II MEGITmli INPUT RESISTANCE
ALL VOLTAGE MEASUREMENTS TO BE MADE 01111 NO SIGNAL PRESENT NORMAL SETTING OF CONTROLS AND CHANNEL SELECTOR SET TO 2 UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED
ALL CONDENSER VALUES IN MiCROFARADS UNLESS OTHERWISE
SPECIFIED
ALL
CAPACITY TOLERANCE 220% UNLESS
OTHERWISE SPECIFIED
A-v7/2y5-0, is NV 11
226
VI5
6AX4GT1.1
6AX4GTAT
DAMPER
ALL RESISTORS ARE 7201 TOLERANCE, CARBON, 1/2 waT T UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED
RESISTANCE MEASUREMENTS 50001 WITH COILS DISCONNECTED FROM CIRCUIT
COIL RESISTANCES NOT GIVEN ARE UNDER ONE Omm
CANDO( HAY TUBE 250 ANODE VOLTAGE TORE MEASURED wan ELECTROSTATIC OR 201 ivy 0101 PER VOLT N1011 VOLTAGE
ARROWS ORPOTENTOMETERS INDICATE CLOCKWISE ROTATOR
(ati POINTS
i,NmE DE NJ(
iNDICATE ALIGNMENT AND TEST POINTS
ezK 10%
R26 56o
2
':,11,;`,t1rk,
Ts NORit COILS
CHASSIS I 4.
TEST POINT "K* SOUND OUTPUT
TONE CONTROL CABLE SOCKET
BUZZ CONTROL
WIDTH CONTROL( METAL SLEEVE
TEST POINT "H" LIM I TER PLATE
INTERCARRIER COIL QUADRATURE COIL
g 0
SPEAKER CONNECTIONS
TO VOLUME CONTROL-' Milir0011
DEFLECTION YOKE 300 MA. FUSE CORRECTOR MAGNETS
VOLUME CONTROL
A=-4 , V16
6p&gAl
VI8. I
L L 6AU4GT
V7 6AU6A
r,
;
VIO
6aY6- 4
VI7
O%B-3. ,
V19
PIX TUBE
21CXP4 -TO
PIX CENTERING ADJUSTMENT
SOUND TAKE -OFF COIL DEFLECTION YOKE ADJUSTMENT
TEST POINT "F. TO BE GROUNDED FOR I.F. ALIGNMENT -TEST POINT "C" DETECTOR OUTPUT
4TH. I.F. TRANSFORMER ASSEMBLY AND CRYSTAL DETECTOR
A. C. INTERLOCK
TEST POINT "e 3RD I.F. GRID
2ND. I.F. TRANSFORMER TOP SLUG AND
o
47.25 MC. ADJACENT SOUND TRAP COIL BOTTOM SLUG
I.F.OUTPUT FROM TUNER
-ADJACENT CHANNEL SOUND TRAP 47.25 MC. BOTTOM SLUG
-ADJACENT CHANNEL PIX TRAP 39.75MC. TOP SLUG
1ST. I.F. TRANSFORMER TOP SLUG 41.25MC.TRAP BOTTOM SLUG,ASSOCIATED SOUND
TEST POINT "e I.F. A.G.C.
0 sVIi2t;
6BX7GT
3RD. I.F. TRANSFORMER TEST POINT *D" VIDEO OUTPUT
, V16
kAU4
TO TONE CONTROL SOCKET ON BACK OF CHASSIS
SEE DRAWING
T
123-1684 FOR U.H.F. CONTINUOUS TUNER
FRINGE LOCK FOCUS HORIZONTAL HOLD A.G.C. DELAY CONTROL VERTICAL HOLD VERTICAL HEIGHT CONTROL
Aefil ICL .-TONE CONTROL ASSEMBLY MOUNTED ON ESCUTCHEON (BOTTOM)
-CONTRAST CONTROL VERTICAL LINEARITY
BASS TONE CONTROL TREBLE TONE CONTROL
BRIGHTNESS CONTROL
Tube and Trimmer Layout, 19.00 Chassis.
O0
tat, O 0
LI
O0
O0
0 4C1411I O .11/06 LIG O 0 1111CCLI W16Y O 0
O 0 Ir16
MOW
gel
164014404 O
0
So. O o
vs 11310
O0
O 0
0 wnLOb O o VII
NOWA O
O0
At, 07141
V3 6BZ6 1ST I. E.,
6BZ6
2ND
C16
V? 6AU6A SOUND Ull
E.Frr t" "11
VD
68N6
SOUND DISC.
47.
160
C. Fa (SI
470 41
IOW =TOOL CON
013
5AU4 LI RECT.
USED WITH 5-41941 PEYOTE CONTROL 11113010
VS
6626
r SRO LE
1
1in.11M. I
LS
Ino L _
J
LI
IL
rT
GA
we,
1/2V 6CX8
VIDEO AND
04r
r
TS
-47
t 7 f*
110.4
116 ,7949.
1%41
A5,1
J.
6.160 610
Ow CE0
+4506
vo
9 2 10C1 X P 4 24 RJ P4
piX
trr
Sis
+265V
mos
V6B
Act 1/2 6CX8 C/0
RIO
6BY6
SYNC. CLIP.
1.4,f
VII 6CG7
VERT. OSC.
cv
lY
V
68X7
VENT OUT.
COI
YIP
500015 4007 IV
+265
C4S
40C
ur0
l.M40w7orZs
[PT.
%CO
MS
LLT
,
OV
04 !I 9wa
.74
al 1,411L
-4, rre...4,qrOSTwte_.4,19.06
0144 1/2 6CN7
AF. C.
NOn 11111.56 51146115 1.1151 BE P019010511
5 1/2 6CN7 RORIE. CO/Mt01.
46
VISA
1/2 6CG7 60511.0SC.
V1SB 1/2 6CG7 NORIL DI OCR.
+450V
VI6 6806A 110511. OUT.
w. NIA
71C4 041[Sr
0!tN0
+265v
MD nr
1117
16367
N RECT.
O 0
LI
Cb
W11/110 PLASTIC
Vg"
004
wTz
IAJ
IS LS
ILO40-. NU
VI6
6AU4GT
6AU4GTA
DAMPER
AU
Schematic Diagram, 19A20 and 19A20Q Chassis.
NOTES ALL VOLTAGES MEASURED FROM CHASSIS TO POINTS INDICATED
ALL VOLTAGES ARE DC. UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED. ALL DC. VOLTAGES TO BE MEASURED WITH A VACUUM TUBE
VOLTMETER HAVING II MEGOHIA INPUT RESISTANCE.
ALL VOLTAGE MEASUREMENTS TO BE MADE WITH NO SIGNAL PRESENT NORMAL SETTING OF CONTROLS AID CHANNEL SELECTOR SET TO 2 UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED.
ALL CONDENSER VALUES IN MICROFARADS UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED
ALL CONDENSER CAPACITY TOLERANCE -±205 UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED
ALL RESISTORS ARE ± 20% TOLERANCE, CARBON, I/2 WATT UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED.
RESISTANCE MEASUREMENTS SHOWN WITH COILS DISCONNECTED FROM CIRCUIT
COIL RESISTANCES NOT GIVEN ARE UNDER ONE OHM. CATHODE RAY TUBE 2ND ANODE VOLTAGE TO SE MEASURED WITH
ELECTROSTATIC OR 20K MIN OHM PER VOLT HIGH VOLTAGE METER. ARROWS ON POTENTIOMETERS INDICATE CLOCKWISE ROTATION.
Al IGNMENT POINTS CIRCLED LETTERS INDICATE ALIGNMENT AND TEST POINTS
+ CHASSIS 4-
TEST POINTS C- DETECTOR OUTPUT D- run OUTPUT E -IF AGC F- GROUND DURING IF ALIGNMENT G- 3RD I F GRID H- SOUND LIMITER PLATE
J-
K- SOUND OUTPUT
ZENITH Schematic Diagram of Chassis 15A25
TO TUNER OUTPUT. R. 2450 AOC 60001 440.t.urm ARE
O 0
V3 4CB6 1ST I.F.
AO
4.4
101
OIL
V4 4CB6 2ND LE
III
Ti
0
10:
0%
L
V5 4CB6 3RD
5
Cq 0%
0 0 448 0 mw
1
L
65
mEATER
°'coo T
Rle05 10% 1030
700
076
Tr, MT%
ro
_IN
4-245V
11 S.1O.0.41 CCO0IL1.41055.9
0
1/2 BAU 8 SOUND LIIL
0
O 0 :.
0.1
1ST,
(25
(151
I
261
e
11
VT
4946
SOUND DISC.
'''
i'O'----.1
Ok
0
761
ye
i 6A0 5A
SOUND OUT
I,.
5
e
O0
L
_J
'
755
0
ORD
aO 1.5
O
0
6 ROA
111000
SOU* UM
O
0
01V116
SO. DISC
C24
21 WE
-
-I-er 016
)221
..z2
'1
CONTIOL
2 A 001
10%
ME 6
c000401.111,4,
Re 410
r215757.
512
V6A
VI/1 D2E0MAUM8P "
14c,
Loy,
1. I OTI.
rL6
la
-0_11.9_14.57,._.: p55.11.
5E4
TO 9.o
GRID
Iff
71 CONTRAST
C ONT. C.
10
V.eel 11,1
15 211 22544
25 10%
474
4700
01
10%
OVA
645 001
a 1.70 30311
0
4.194 .05 0%
10214 0%
4-245/
1056
070
Im
014
4705 imm v9
49U8
SYNC. CLIP
,
C27
T r - - 270
OA
00)23
419
NIG
V I5 143 P4 14 X PO
P 1 X
401E5 vOGTAGES MEASuRED 51100 Cm.S. 10 .015 .0.113 2011(415 IR( DC LIKE. 0101111r6E 58507110
4., DC vOLTASES TO DI *0 5U110 Air A rACuum TUNE Fa,
mETER .2154 11 .40112 Ix UT ALL 0011141 YEASURINERTS 6 BE 11401 115 p 514216 0015(01.
500121 SETT. OA CONTOOLS AND COlONEL SELECTOR SET TO 2 UNLESS 0151.151 5KCIFIE0 AIL CONDENSER rALUES 110/0401405 UNLESS 01201.50 SPECRIED ALL CONDENSER CA1.117 TOLERANCE 72011051155 015E24I5E 571(171.
A., R0E1S..T.O5R0S 0SE.7C20.%,.TOLERARCE.C6460m IR .11 ucESS
NOVAK( 11EASONEIITS 50050 mi. (.L5 ImSCONNEC'ED111011 CACult
COIL 1151510.55 MT .0E5 ARE u5010 ORE OW
ANSOTDAT ICU rORT U5.0 2501 4500P EvRO LOTOAG E014 VONLEAS.UR 5D0 1REaRm ELECTRO-
AA.. Om 4010511011ETERS WK.( 0100111151ROTAT.
OAL.... MATS.. oI( LH .7 mt. 1153.11 ALIGN.. Amp TEST Po.,
C60
III FEED .011
COMOLOISER
CmASSISc
2505 CAI KT 0.o 5515
VIOA 1/2 BCMT VERT. OSC
fe
C3,13
C. 52
01 0%
VIOB I/2 BCMT
uo VERT. OUT.
10%
0%
-
20
TEST Kn. C- 1 f DETECTOR OUTPUT I- MOO OUTPUT
t- If AGC
f 6110.10 064154 1 1 417071.1 0- SOUS DISC 01010 OUTPUT
50.0 LIMITER PLATE A- iL.E5T .
L fil.4.57 1.41. ITUIIERI
A. 40.500
5E0
CO L COILS
100A 031
(34
RD
%
27216
IPA
504
AT cc
I.2 MEG
2205
51.rot
VERTICAL SIZE
121
OZ
1000 531
5500
V4110ERTICAL
012
225
032
Not
412
rrrr 2
LIN
""x15
.6 C
:g Ltj%2r°
l
5155
O
O
0
56 64054
50.0 00
09
O SOK CLIP
O0 O0
O 0
510
151 00 11 r 150 050
511 SCAT 0002 OSC 5025(5
he
17.40
V12
15004
O
0
NOW OUT
011
gleta
111 (45 540 5 40 SI O. TACT,. Sof.. 01.
00W.
CONTROL AT
0
+2454
15
51'1
NA to
I
3011 0%
A 51 NM
t74101
MO 300I0MO
00 M.
MO
+245 V
SELENIUM DIODE
A67
1 CS2
4.5
VIIA
°V,.3 --7
1/2 BCM7
4;;;.. VIIB '''' 1/2 13CM7
47
15
HORIZ.OSC.
HORIZ. DISCH.
Ile ew
Ot
1004 10%
Si1InI0%
..._ 6
001
2W
10%
56 MU 0%
C49
NY
047
5001 T
101
C50 OwT
IIDt
330 112(
411
06501 --
0q%t
2
104
ICOVISE1
Rne
2511
t
1
I
C54
NO MIK 10%
600 MO
510 TC5051
125 101
2455
Fig. 31 Schematic Diagram, 15A25 Chassis.
VI2
17006
HORIZ.OUT.
SO7
NES
00
0047 519 10%
450 V
710
I
9.1
4 c, 160 ai 4550 610v (SI
T'
VI3 IB3GT N.V RECT.
CIAO 15000150
15ETAL 51110( RIM 0051104.1
V14 1TAX46Y DAMPER
Rla
TO
1.110 OEFL COILS
1'C59H
0
VOLUME TV -14, MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1958 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
Index
Under each manufacturer's name are listed that make chassis and models in numerical order, at left. The corresponding page number at right of each listing refers to the first page of each section dealing with such material.
Admiral Corp.
432A
14
8H1A
12
16AG1
5
16AL1
5
16G1
5
16L1
5
17AK1
16
17AL1
12
17J1
8
17K1
16
17K1B
16
17L1
12
17L1B
12
C21E2
5
C21E3
5
C21E6
5
C21E7
CA21E2
5
CA21E3
5
CA21E6
5
CA21E7
5
HF21F22
16
HF21F22B 16
HF21F23
16
HF21F23B 16
HF21F32
14
HF21F32B 14
HF21F33
14
HF21F33B 14
HF2IF34 14
HF21F34B 14 HFA21F22 16
HFA21F23 16 HFA21F32 14
HFA21F33 14
HFA21F34 14
LHR21F32 8
LHR21F33 8
LHR21F34
8
T21E1
5
T21E2
5
T21E3
5
TA21E1
5
TA21E2
5
TA21E3
5
Emerson Radio
1276
29
1277
29
1282
23
1283,1284 23
1285
23
1286
23
1287
23
1288
29
1289
29
1290
29
1291
29
1420
19
1421
19
1424
19
1425
19
1426
19
1428
19
120369C 19
120370G 19
120377C
19
120380H 23
120381M 23
120382H,HC 29
120383M,MC 29
120386H,HC 29
120387M,MC 29
120388H
23
120389M
23
120390H,HC 29
120391M,MC 29
General Elect.
Q Line
33
U Line
45
U2 Line
41
14T016
33
14T017
33
14T018
33
14T020
33
210137
45
21C138
45
210143
45
210159
45
21C160
45
210161
45
GE, Continued
210162
45
210172
45
21C1548 41
2101549
41
2101550 41
2101551 41
2101552
41
2101553
41
2101554 41
2101555 41
2101556 41
21T050
45
21T054
45
21T055
45
21T056
45
21T057
45
21T060
45
21T061
45
21T1540 41
21T1541
41
21T1542
41
21T1543 41
21T1544
41
240182
45
240183
45
2401661 41
24C1670 41
24C1671
41
Hotpoint Co.
Q Line
33
U Line
45
143201
33
143202
33
143203
33
143204
33
213401
45
213402
45
213403
45
213451
45
213452
45
213501
45
213502
45
213552
45
213553
45
Hotpoint,Cont
213554
45
243801
45
243802
45
Montgomery Ward & Co.
WG-4042A 83 WG-4052A 83 WG-5042A 83 WG-5047A 83 WG-5052A 83
Motorola
14P3-1,-2 53
14P4-1
53
14P5-1,-2 53
14P5-3
53
14P6-1
53
14P7-1,-2 53
14P8-1,-2 53
14P10-1,2 60
14P11-1,2 60
Yl4P3-1,2 53
Yl4P4-1
53
Yl4P5-1,2 53
Yl4P5-3
53
Yl4P6-1
53
Yl4P7-1,2 53
Y1 4P8-1,2 53
Y14 P10-1 60
Yl4P10-2 60
Yl4P11-1 60
Y14P11-2 60
17P1-1,-2 67
17P2-1
67
17T3OCH
67
17T31GP
67
Yl7P1-1A 67
Y17P1-2A 67
Yl7P2-1A 67
Y17T3OCHA 67
Y17T31GPA 67
21K70B,-M 77
21T37B,-M 77
Y21K70B,M 77
Motorola,Cont.
Y21T37B,M 77
TS -423,-Y 53
TTS-423,Y 53 WTS-423,Y 53 TS -425,-Y 60 WTS-425,Y 60
TS -426,-Y 67 TS -428,-Y 67 TS -542,-Y 77
Packard -Bell
21DC5
91
21DC6
91
21DC7
91
21SC6
87
21307
87
21308
87
21SK3
87
21ST3
87
21VT2
87
24DC4
91
24SC2
87
24VT1
87
8833
87
98D3
91
Philco Corp.
8E11
95
8E11U
95
8E13
95
8H25
111
8H25U
111
8L41, -U 101
8L42, -U 101
8L43, -U 101
8L71,-11 105
8L72, -U 105
8L73, -U 105
8P51, -A 101
8P51U
101
F3042F
111
F3042G
11.1
UF3042F 111
UF3042G 111
F3044A
111
(Index continued on page 192, over)
191
VOLUME TV -14, MOST -OFTEN -NEEDED 1958 TELEVISION SERVICING INFORMATION
INDEX, Continue
Philco, Cont.
UF3044A 111 F3202C 111 UF3202C 111
F3204B,-L 111 UF3204B Ill UF3204L 111 F4210, -E 101
F4210L 101 UF4210,-E 101
UF4210L 101
F4212, -L 101
UF4212,-L 101
F4214STM 101
F4214STN 101
UF4214STM 101
UF4214STN 101
F4216, -L 105
UF4216,-L 105
F4620SL 101 F4620SM 101 UF4620SL 101 UF4620SM 101
F4622, -L 101
UF4622,-L 101
F4624
101
UF4624 101
F4626, -L 105
UF4626,-L 105
F4632
101
U144632
101
F6206SL 101 F6206SM 101
UF6206SL 101
UF6206SM 101 F6620SL 101 F6620SM 101
UF6620SL 101 UF6620SM 101 F6624T 105 F6624TL 105
UF6624T 105
UF6624TL 105
RCA Victor 14PD8053,U
through 14PD8055 140 14PD8057 140 14PD8057U 140 14PT8021 140 14PT8021U 140 14PT8022 140 14PT8022U 140
RCA, Continued
14VT8155 140 14VT8155U 140 14VT8157 140 14VT8157U 140 17D8185,U 131 17D8186,U 131 17D8187,U 131 17PD8093 131 17PD8093U 131 17PD8094 131 17PD8094U 131 17PD8096 131 17PD8096U 131 17PT8071 131 17PT8071U 131 17PT8072 131 17PT8072U 131 21D8281,U 153 21D8282,U 153 21D8305,U 153 21D8306,U 153 21D8307,U 153 21D8525,U 125 21D8526,U 125 21D8527,U 125 21D8528,U 125
21D8545,U 125 21D8546,U 125 21D8547,U 125 21D8565,U 125 21D8566,U 125 21D8567,U 125 21D8588,U 125 21D8605,U 125 21D8607,U 125 21D8608,U 125 21D8628,U 153 21PD8115 117 21RT8202 143 21RT8425 143 21T8202,U 143 21T8205,U 143 21T8207,U 143 21T8221,U 117 21T8222,U 117 21T8225,U 117 21T8226,U 117 21T8227,U 117 21T8245,U 117 21T8246,U 117 21T8247,U 117 21T8265,U 143 21T8267,U 143
RCA, Continued
21T8375,U 143 21T8376,U 143 21T8377,U 143 21T8395,U 143 21T8397,U 143 21T8405,U 143 21T8407,U 143 21T8425,U 143 21T8426,U 143 21T8427,U 143 21T8428,U 143 21T8445,U 143 21T8447,U 143 21T8448,U 143 21T8465,U 143 21T8466,U 143 21T8467,U 143 21T8468,U 143 21T8475,U 117 21T8477,U 117 21T8478,U 117 21T8485,U 143 21T8486,U 143 21T8487,U 143 24D8655,U 125 24D8657,U 125 24D8676,U 125 24D8678,U 125 24T8325,U 143 24T8327,U 143 24T8335,U 143 24T8337,U 143
KCS-107A 117 KCS-107B 117 KCS-107C 117 KCS-107D 117 KCS-108C 125 KCS-108D 125 KCS -108F 125 KCS-109A 131 KCS-109B 131 KCS-109C 131 KCS-109D 131 KCS-111A 140 KCS-111B 140 KCS-111C 140 KCS-111D 140 KCS-111F 140 KCS-111H 140 KCS-113A 143 KCS-113B 143 KCS-113E 143 KCS-113H 143
RCA, Continued
KCS-113K 143 KCS-113M 143 KCS-113N 143 KCS-113P 143 KCS-113R 143 KCS-116A 153 KCS-116B 153 KCS-116C 153 KCS-116D 153
Westinghouse
17T241 175
17TU241 175
17T242
175
17TU242 175
17T243 175
17TU243 175
17T244 175
17TU244 175
17T245 175
17TU245 175
H21K204,B 161
H21KU204 161
H21K205,B 161
H21KU205 161
H21K212 161
H21KU212 161
H21K213 161
H21KU213 161
H21K214 161
H21KU214 161
H21K215 161
H21KU215 161
H21K216 161
H21KU216 161
H21K223 171
H21KU223 171
H21K224 171
H21KU224 171
H21K225 171
H21KU225 171
H21K226 171
H21KU226 171
H21K227 171
H21KU227 171
H21K228 171
H21KU228 171
H21K229 171
H21KU229 171
H21K232 171
H21KU232 171
H21K233 171
H21KU233 171
Westinghouse+
H21T201,B 161
H21TU201 161
H21T202,B 161
H21TU202 161
H21T218,A 171
H21TU218+ 171
H21T219,A 171
H21TU219+ 171
H21T220,A 171
H21TU220+ 171
H21T221,A 171
H21TU221+ 171
H21T222,A 171
H21TU222+ 171
V-2371
161
V-2372 171
V-2373 175
V-2381 161
V-2382
171
V-2383 175
Zenith Radio
15A25
181
17A20, -C4 181
17A21Q 181
19A20, -Q 181
A1510L 181
A1511G 181
A1512J 181
A1515W 181
A2221J,Y 181
A2223+ 181
A2245E,R 181
A2250M,R 181
A2251E,R 181
A2282E,R 181
A2329J 181
A2330+ 181
A2358E,R 181
A2359+ 181
A2362M,R 181
A2673E,R 181
A3000E,R 181
A3001+ 181
A3004,E,R 181
A3006+ 181
A3008E,R 181
A3010E,+ 181
A3011,E,Y 181
A3012H,R 181
A3013H 181
A3014H,R 181
A4007E,R 181
192
Another Supreme Publications
Service Manual
Supreme Publications are Available at All Leading Parts Jobbers
PdfCompressor 6.5.985 CVISION Technologies